21M LGM30G 2 19 - Thru - C11

For Use in Red-lining
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
THIS MANUAL CONTAINS UNVERIFIED PROCEDURES. REFER TO

THE VERIFICATION STATUS PAGE(S) PRIOR TO PERFORMING
ANY OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
TECHNICAL MANUAL
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
LAUNCH FACILITY PERSONNEL ACCESS SYSTEMS

(AFTER ICBM SECURITY MODERNIZATION PROGRAM)
WINGS 0, I, III AND V

USAF SERIES LGM30G
Basic and all changes have been merged to make this a complete publication.
Boeing
F42610-98-C-0001
DISCLOSURE NOTICE: This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific
authority of the Department of the Air Force of the United States; it will be used for military purposes only; individual or corporate rights originating
in the information, whether patented or not, will be respected; the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected
compromise; and the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security afforded it by the Department of Defense of the
United States. Also, regardless of any other markings on the document, it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the
originating United States agency.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C: Distribution authorized to US Government Agencies and their contractors for administrative and operational
use as of 2 February 2007. Other requests for this document shall be referred to 526 ICBMSG ⁄ ENV, Hill AFB, UT 84056-5816.
WARNING: This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C., Sec 2751, et
seq.) or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended, Title 50, U.S.C. App. 2401, et seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to
severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with the provisions of AFI 61-204.
HANDLING AND DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Comply with distribution statement and destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of the
contents or reconstruction of the document.
Published under authority of the Secretary of the Air Force
2 FEBRUARY 2007 CHANGE 11 19 NOVEMBER 2008

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES NOTE The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a vertical line in
the outer margin of the page. Changes to illustrations are indicated by shaded
or screened areas, or by miniature pointing hands.
Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:
Original . . . . . . . . .0. . . . . .2 February 2007 Change . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . 23 April 2008

Change . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . 25 June 2007 Change . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . 16 May 2008
Change . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . 24 August 2007 Change . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . 20 June 2008
Change . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . 24 October 2007 Change . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . 20 August 2008
Change . . . . . . . . .4. . . . 14 December 2007 Change . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . 16 September 2008
Change . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . 3 March 2008 Change . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . 19 November 2008
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 602 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page *Change Page *Change Page *Change

No. No. No. No. No. No.
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-138 - 4-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

A - B.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3-1 - 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-158 - 4-161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
VS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3-3 - 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
VS-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-1 - 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-163 - 4-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
i - ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
iii - iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4-6 - 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-171 - 4-183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
iv.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-184 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
iv.2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4-10 - 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
v - vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
vii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4-20 - 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-3 - 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
viii - ix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-22 - 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
x ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4-25 - 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
xi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
xii - xiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
xiv.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-28.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
xiv.2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-28.2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
xv - xvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-12 - 5-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
xvii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-30 - 4-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
xviii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-17 - 5-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
xix - xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-39 - 4-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
xxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4-44 - 4-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-31 - 5-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
xxii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-46.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-32.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
xxiii - xxv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-46.2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-32.2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
xxvi Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-47 - 4-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-33 - 5-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-1 - 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4-97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-99 - 4-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-53 - 5-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-7 - 1-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-54.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-12 - 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-54.2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-109 - 4-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-56 - 5-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-58 - 5-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2-1 - 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-127 - 4-128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-3 - 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-129 - 4-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-130.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-62 - 5-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 4-130.2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-131 - 4-134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 4-135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-68 - 5-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-10 - 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-70.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4-137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-70.2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
* Zero in this column indicates an original page.
A Change 11 USAF
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Page *Change Page *Change Page *Change
No. No. No. No. No. No.
5-71 - 5-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-167 - 5-168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-20 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

5-73 - 5-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 5-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FP-21 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-22 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-77 - 5-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FP-23 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-172 - 5-173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-24 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-25 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-81 - 5-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-175 - 5-176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-26 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FP-27 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-85 - 5-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-178 - 5-184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-28 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 6-1 - 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-29 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 6-8 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-30 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7-1 - 7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FP-31 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-90 - 5-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 7-2.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FP-32 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7-2.2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FP-33 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7-3 - 7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-34 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-94.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7-4.1 - 7-4.2 Added . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-35 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-94.2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7-5 - 7-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-36 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FP-37 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7-8.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FP-38 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-97 - 5-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 7-8.2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FP-39 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7-9 - 7-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-40 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-100 - 5-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 7-14 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-41 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8-1 - 8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-42 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-104 - 5-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FP-43 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 8-4 - 8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-44 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-108 - 5-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9-1 - 9-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-45 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 9-4 - 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-46 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-111 - 5-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 9-8 - 9-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 FP-47 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 9-28 - 9-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-48 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-115 - 5-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 9-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-49 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-116.1 Added. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 9-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-50 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-116.2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 9-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-51 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-117 - 5-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 9-34 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-52 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 10-1 - 10-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-53 ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0
5-120 - 5-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-54 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 FP-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-126.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 FP-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-126.2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 FP-4 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-127 - 5-139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FP-6 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-142 - 5-144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-8 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-145 - 5-146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-147 - 5-148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-10 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-12 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-152 - 5-155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-14 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-156 - 5-157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-158 - 5-160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-16 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-161 - 5-162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5-163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FP-18 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-164 - 5-166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 FP-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
* Zero in this column indicates an original page.
USAF Change 11 B/(C blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
This manual contains unverified procedures. Unverified procedures shall only be performed
during verification, in accordance with TOs 00-5-1 and 00-5-3. Performance of unverified
procedures can result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
VERIFICATION STATUS
LIST OF DATA TO BE VERIFIED
Requirements Unverified for Requirements Unverified for

Use at Wing(s) Use at Wing(s)
Indicated or with Indicated or with
Equipment Equipment
Para. Fig. Table Para. Fig. Table
Configuration Configuration
Noted Noted
FO-1
ALL OTHER APPROVED VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN

ACCOMPLISHED
Change 5 VS - 1/(VS - 2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter Page
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
1 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 Access System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.1 Security Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.2 Vault Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.3 Security Pit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.3.1 Security Pit Control Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.4 Primary Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.5 Hand-Driven Linear Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.6 Secondary Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.7 Secondary Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.7.1 Secondary Door Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.7.2 Secondary Door Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.8 Wiring and Control Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.8.1 Site Activation Remote Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.8.2 Secondary Door Electrical Surge Arrestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.8.3 Secondary Door Control Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.8.4 Secondary Door Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.8.5 EMA Activation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.8.6 EMA Jog Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.9 Electromechanical Actuator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.9.1 Energy Storage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.9.2 Motor Drive Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.9.3 Electromechanical Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.10 Secondary Door Command and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.10.1 Site Penetration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.10.2 Raise Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.10.3 Lower Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.10.4 Off Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.10.5 Jog Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.10.6 Site Penetration Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.10.7 Security Pin Retract Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.10.8 System NO-GO Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.10.9 System FAULT Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.11 Telescoping Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.12 Secondary Door Alternate Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.13 Secondary Door Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.14 Alarm Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.15 Combination Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
i
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Chapter Page
2 TOOLS AND MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 TOOLS AND MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.1 Combination Change Key Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Telescoping Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 Primary Door Hand-Driven Linear Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.3 SDCA Delay Timer Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.4 Secondary Door Security Pin Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
4 CHECKOUT AND TROUBLE ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Secondary Access System Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 Secondary Access System Timer Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.3 Secondary Door Security Pin Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.4 Secondary Door Electromechanical Assembly Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 TROUBLE ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.1 Security Pit Vault Door Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.2 Primary Access Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.3 Miscellaneous Secondary Access System Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.4 Secondary Door Control Assembly Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.4.1 SDCA Front Panel Indicator Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.4.2 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Test Point Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.4.3 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Trouble Analysis Using Keypad Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.4.4 SDCA Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.4.5 Trouble Analysis of SDCA Fault or NO-GO Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5 Motor Drive Cabinet Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5.1 MDC Local Control Panel Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.6 Energy Storage System Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
5 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Secondary Access System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Secondary Access System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.3 Power Isolation of the Electromechanical Actuator . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.4 Electromechanical Actuator Power Restoration . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.5 Maintenance on Personnel Access Shaft Lights . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.6 Minor Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 SECURITY PIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.1 Lock bolt, Threaded Shaft, and Thrust Nut . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.2 Security Pit Vault Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.2.1 Security Pit Vault Door Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.2.2 Security Pit Vault Door Combination Lock Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.2.3 Lock Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.2.4 Lock Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.2.5 Lock Stand/Sensitive Switch Replacement . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
ii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Chapter Page
5.2.2.6 Spindle Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

5.2.2.7 Lock Disassembly and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.2.3 Weather Cover Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.3 CONTROL STATION COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.3.1 Site Activation Remote Controller J-Box (URD 11401) Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.3.2 Secondary Door Generator J-Box (URD 11400) Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.4 ALARM SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.4.1 Security Pit Junction Box Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.4.2 Security Pit Vault Cable Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.4.3 Security Pit Vault Door Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.4.4 Personnel Access Hatch Magnetic Switch and Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.5 PRIMARY ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.5.1 Primary Door Preformed Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.5.2 Hand-Driven Linear Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.6 LADDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.6.1 Folding Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.6.2 Egress Ladder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.6.3 Telescoping Ladder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.6.3.1 Telescoping Ladder Assembly Repair and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.7 SECONDARY ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.7.1 Secondary Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.7.1.1 Secondary Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.7.1.2 Secondary Door Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.7.1.3 Secondary Door Combination Lock Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.7.1.4 Lock Assembly ⁄ Lock Stand Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.7.1.5 Lock Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.7.1.6 Lock Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.7.1.7 Lock Assembly ⁄ Lock Stand ⁄ Sensitive Switch ⁄ Scrambler Tumbler ⁄ Spindle Replacement. . . . . . 5-56
5.7.1.8 Secondary Door Lock Checkout ⁄ Securing After Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.7.1.9 Lock Spindle Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.7.1.10 Unlocking Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.7.1.11 Felt Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.7.1.12 Lock Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.7.1.13 Lock Bolt Sensitive Switch LS1 and LS2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.7.1.14 Secondary Door Cable and Cable Track Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.7.1.15 Linear Actuator Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.7.1.16 Actuator Locking Bar Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL ACTUATOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5.8.1 EMA Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5.8.1.1 EMA Motor Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
5.8.1.2 EMA Brake Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
5.8.1.3 EMA Gearbox Safety Pin Photoelectric Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.8.1.4 EMA Absolute/Incremental Encoder Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
5.8.1.5 EMA Gearbox Safety Pin Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.8.2 Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.8.2.1 Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Lock Bolt Drive M2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.8.2.2 Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94.1
5.8.3 Motor Drive Cabinet (URD 10496) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.8.3.1 Motor Drive Cabinet Preparation For Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Change 6 iii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Chapter Page
5.8.3.2 Motor Drive Cabinet Post-Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

5.8.3.3 Motor Disconnect Switch (DISC1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5.8.3.4 MDC Dual Diode D3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.8.3.5 MDC Relay K1, K2, or Diode D1, D2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.8.3.6 MDC Relay K3, K6 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.8.3.7 MDC Relay K4/K5 Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
5.8.3.8 MDC CB1 Through CB8 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
5.8.3.9 MDC Motor Drive (M1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
5.8.3.10 MDC Power Supply PS1, PS2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
5.8.3.11 MDC Power Supply PS3 Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5.8.3.12 MDC Current Limit Control CL1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
5.8.3.13 MDC Current Transformer CT1, CT2, CT3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
5.8.3.14 MDC Transformer T1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
5.8.3.15 MDC Regen Resistor R1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5.8.3.16 MDC High Current Filters FL1, FL2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
5.8.3.17 MDC EMI Filter FN1, FN2, FN3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
5.8.3.18 MDC Local Control Panel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
5.8.4 Energy Storage System (URD 10497) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5.8.4.1 ESS Preparation For Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5.8.4.2 ESS Post-Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
5.8.4.3 Energy Storage System Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
5.8.4.4 ESS Control Panel Display Installation or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
5.9 WIRING AND CONTROL SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
5.9.1 Secondary Door Control Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
5.9.1.1 SDCA Preparation for Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
5.9.1.2 SDCA Post-Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
5.9.1.3 SDCA Front Panel Assembly (A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
5.9.1.4 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Assembly (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
5.9.1.5 SDCA Back Panel Assembly (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
5.9.1.6 Secondary Door Electrical Surge Arrestor Assembly (URD 10493) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
5.9.1.7 Filter J-Box Assembly (URD 10498) Power Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
5.9.1.8 Electromechanical Actuator Wall Alarm (URD 10491) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
5.9.1.9 EMA Activation Switch(es) (URD 11402, 11403, and 11404) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.9.1.10 EMA Jog Switch (URD 10495) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.10 GUIDE RAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-182
5.10.1 Guide Rail Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-182
6 SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 Lubricating Primary Door Lock Bolt and Threaded Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 Clean and Lubricate Secondary Door Emergency Shaft Hole and Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.3 Clean and Lubricate EMA Ballscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.4 Clean and Lubricate Secondary Door Guide Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
7 ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Secondary Door Lock Bolt Sensitive Switch LS1, LS2 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.2 Secondary Door Homing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2.1 Secondary Door Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
iv Change 6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Chapter Page
7.1.3 EMA Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Change 6 iv.1/(iv.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Chapter Page
7.1.4 Actuator Locking Bar Switch Adjustment (PN BA22888A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

7.1.4.1 Engaged Switch (SW1) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.4.2 Retracted Switch (SW2) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4.1
8 CHANGING LOCK COMBINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 CHANGING LOCK COMBINATIONS . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Changing Security Pit Vault Door Lock Combination .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.2 Changing Secondary Door Lock Combination . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
9 DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
10 FORCED-ENTRY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 FORCED-ENTRY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.2 Use of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.3 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 NONDESTRUCTIVE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2.1 Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2.1.1 Secondary Door and A-Vault Combination Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3 BREAK-IN PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3.1 Security Pit Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3.1.1 Sheared Dial Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3.1.2 Inoperative Combination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.3.1.3 Inoperative Bolt Operating Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.3.1.4 Torching Vault Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Change 4 v
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Number Title Page
1-1 LF Personnel Access System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-2

1-2 Security Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-3 Secondary Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-4 Site Activation Remote Controller (SARC) Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-5 Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-6 Electromechanical Actuator (EMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
2-1 Combination Change Key Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-2
2-2 Spindle Shaft Nut and Camshaft Nut Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-3 Lock Bolt Sling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-4 Guide Rail Shim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-5 Go ⁄ No-Go Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-6 Secondary Door Test Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-7 EMA Orientation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-8 MDC Lifting Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
3-1 SDCA (URD 10494) Delay Timer Relay Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-3
3-2 Telescoping Ladder Order of Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-5
4-1 SDCA Front Panel Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-2 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Switches and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-3 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Keypad and Keypad Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-4 MDC Local Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-5 ESS Control Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-6 SARC Control Box Switches and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
5-1 Primary Door Lock Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-2 Security Pit Vault Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-3 Security Pit Vault Door Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-4 Disassembly of Combination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-5 SARC J-Box Assembly (URD 11401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-6 Secondary Door Backup Generator J-Box (URD 11400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-6A Alternate Secondary Door Backup Generator J-Box (URD 11400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32.1
5-7 [1] Security Pit Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-8 [3][5] Security Pit Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5-9 Security Pit Vault Door Connector P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5-10 Primary Door Magnetic Switch and Actuating Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5-11 Primary Door Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-12 Hand-Driven Linear Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-13 Folding Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5-14 Telescoping Ladder Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5-15 Telescoping Ladder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5-16 Secondary Door Removal Shoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5-17 Replacement of Secondary Door Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5-18 Secondary Door Cables and Cable Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5-19 Secondary Door Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5-20 EMA Gearbox Safety Pin Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
5-21 Secondary Door Electromechanical Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5-22 Electromechanical Actuator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
5-23 Absolute and Incremental Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
5-24 Secondary Door Junction Box (URD 10499) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
5-25 Motor Drive Cabinet (MDC) (URD 10496) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
5-26 MDC Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
vi Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued
Number Title Page
5-27 MDC and ESS Belly Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126

5-28 MDC Motor Disconnect Switch (DISC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
5-29 MDC Motor Drive (M1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5-30 MDC Lifting Fixture Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
5-31 MDC Enclosure Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5-32 MDC High Current Filters FL1 and FL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
5-33 MDC EMI Filter FN1, FN2, FN3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
5-34 MDC Local Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
5-35 Energy Storage System (URD 10497) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
5-36 Hinged Platform Shoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
5-37 Secondary Door Locking Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
5-38 ESS Control Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
5-39 Secondary Door Control Assembly (URD 10494) Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
5-40 SDCA Front Panel (URD 10494A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
5-41 SDCA Front Panel Component Location (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
5-42 SDCA Swing-Out Panel (URD 10494A2) Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
5-43 SDCA Back Panel (URD 10494A3) Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169
5-44 SDCA Back Panel Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
5-45 SDCA EMI Filters EF1 through EF5 (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
5-46 SDCA EMI Filter EF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
5-47 Secondary Door ESA Assembly (URD 10493) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173
5-48 Filter J-Box Assembly (URD 10498) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174
5-49 Secondary Door Wall Alarm (URD 10491) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
5-50 EMA Activation Switch(es) (URD 11402, 11403, 11404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
5-51 EMA Jog Switch (URD 10495) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-178
5-52 Secondary Door Guide Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-184
6-1 Lubrication Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
7-1 Actuator Locking Bar Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4.2
8-1 A-Vault and Secondary Door - Inserting Combination Change Key in Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
9-1 [1][3][5] Secondary Access System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-2 SDCA Back Panel (URD 10494A3) Terminal Board Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-3 SDCA (URD 10494) Cables W1 through W35 Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-4 Secondary Door IZ Loop Cable W3005 (BA22899A) Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9-5 SDEA Cable W1 (BA22929A) Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9-6 Secondary Door IZ Switchloop Wiring (BA22924) Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9-7 SDEA Wiring Harness (BA22830) Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9-8 Actuator Locking Bar (BA22888A) Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
10-1 Temporary Dial Shaft Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10-2 Drill Template Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-3 Lock Bolt Retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10-4 Template Pattern for Torching Vault Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
FO-1 [1] Secondary Access System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-1
FO-2 [3] Secondary Access System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-13
FO-3 [5] Secondary Access System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-25
FO-4 SDCA (URD 10494) Interconnectivity Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-37
FO-5 SDCA Front Panel (URD 10494A1) Controls and Indicators Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-39
FO-6 MDC (URD 10496) Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-41
FO-7 Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-49
FO-8 Drill Template (25-43129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-53
Change 7 vii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
LIST OF TABLES
Number Title Page
1-1 Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2-1 Maintenance Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 List of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3-1 Telescoping Ladder Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2 Telescoping Ladder Hardware Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4-1 Secondary Access System Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Secondary Access System Timer Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-3 Secondary Door Security Pin Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-4 Secondary Door Electromechancial Assembly Functional Checkout . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-5 Security Pit Vault Door Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-6 Primary Access Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-7 Miscellaneous Secondary Access System Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-8 Secondary Door Control Assembly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-9 Typical Firmware Message Log Entries During SARC Site Penetration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4-10 Typical Firmware Message Log Entries During SARC Raise Sequence ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4-11 SDCA Firmware Message Log START Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-12 SDCA Firmware Message Log INPUT Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4-13 SDCA Firmware Message Log GENERAL DIAGNOSTIC Messages . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-14 SDCA Firmware Message Log FAULT Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4-15 SDCA Firmware Message Log NO-GO Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4-16 SDCA FAULT Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4-17 SDCA NO-GO Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
4-18 MDC LCP Alarm and Error Trouble Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4-19 Operation of MDC LCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
4-20 Energy Storage System Control Panel Display Trouble Analysis . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
5-1 Secondary Access System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2 Secondary Access System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3 Power Isolation of Electromechanical Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-4 Electromechanical Actuator Power Restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-5 MDC Circuit Breaker Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
5-6 MDC Relay and Diode Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
5-7 SDCA Delay Timer Relay Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179
5-8 SDCA Back Panel Diode Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180
5-9 SDCA EMI Filter Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
6-1 Cleaning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-2 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
7-1 Secondary Door Homing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
10-1 Tools Required for Vault Door Forced Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
viii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FOREWORD
SCOPE.
This technical manual contains maintenance instructions and security pit forced-entry procedures for Launch Facility (LF)
personnel access systems. This manual also contains description, tools and material, inspection, trouble analysis, repairs,
replacement, servicing, lock combination changing, and electrical diagrams for the LF personnel access system. Break-in
procedures are also provided in the event of a lockout.
NOTE
Vandenberg facilities have only partial systems installed. The configuration of these facilities is
defined in the applicable chapter.
Chapter 1 contains a general description of the LF personnel access system and equipment.
Chapter 2 lists maintenance tools, special tools, test equipment, and materials required to support the operations described
in the manual.
Chapter 3 provides LF personnel access system inspection procedures.
Chapter 4 provides LF personnel access system checkout and trouble analysis procedures.
Chapter 5 provides LF personnel access system repair and replacement procedures.
Chapter 6 provides LF personnel access system servicing procedures.
Chapter 7 provides LF personnel access system adjustment procedures.
Chapter 8 provides procedures for changing lock combinations on security pit vault door and secondary door.
Chapter 9 provides diagrams of LF personnel access system.
Chapter 10 provides LF personnel access system forced-entry procedures in the event of a secondary door lockout.
ix
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
BASE CODING.
Code symbols are used to distinguish information related to one base or group of bases from others. When code symbols
appear adjacent to a paragraph or illustration, the information applies only to bases represented by the code symbols. Where
no coding appears, the information is applicable to all bases. The following code symbols are used:
[0] - Vandenberg Air Force Base

[04] - Minuteman LF at Vandenberg Air Force Base
[1] - Malmstrom Air Force Base (Squadrons 1, 2, and 3 only)
[3] - Minot Air Force Base
[5] - F.E. Warren Air Force Base
[T9] - Launch Facility Trainer (LFT) T-9, Malmstrom Air Force Base
> - THRU or AND ON
< - End of coded information, unless otherwise obvious
EXAMPLE: Information Coded [3] applies to all facilities at Minot AFB.
HARDNESS PRESERVATION.
The effectivity of the Intercontinental Ballistic Missile (ICBM) weapon system depends on a second-strike capability. This
means that the system must be able to perform its critical functions even after exposure to a hostile nuclear environment.
Weapon system hardness is a measure of the ability of the ICBM weapon system to withstand exposure to the various effects
of a nuclear attack: shock, vibration, air blast, acoustics, electromagnetic pulse, radiation, thermal, and debris. The capability
to with stand these effects can be achieved only if the system retains its designed-in hardness. Maintaining the designed-in
hardness of the weapon system requires that all maintenance personnel be thoroughly familiar with the cause-and-effect
relationship associated with maintenance activities. Being aware of the importance of normal maintenance activities and their
potential effect on weapon system vulnerability is a primary step in preserving hardness. What appears to be a routine task
may require many extra precautions. Some of the hardness-critical maintenance considerations applicable to the maintenance
functions performed in this Technical Order (T.O.) are summarized in the following paragraphs.
Maintenance personnel should be thoroughly familiar with Weapon System Hardness Preservation and Installation Hardware
Maintenance, T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-31. This T.O. provides hardness awareness and preservation information for the weapon
system and appropriate courses of action for resolving hardness critical maintenance/repair situations that are outside the scope
of maintenance of other T.O.s.
x Change 3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NUCLEAR SURETY PROCEDURES.

A nuclear weapon system must be certified prior to its initial operational capability. Individual critical components must be
operationally certified through the use of OPCERT procedures. These procedures are used to determine if the critical
components continue to meet the nuclear safety design certification criteria, identified when the weapon system or
modification was design certified. On some occasions, it may be necessary to decertify an operationally certified critical
component. This could require conducting approved DECERT procedures. Weapon systems must be controlled and operated
in accordance with Weapon System Safety Rules and the underlying safety and/or security analyses. Critical operating and
handling procedures are written to meet these requirements.
The nuclear safety features of the weapon system can be degraded or rendered ineffective if the approved OPCERT ⁄ DECERT
procedures are not followed. To help ensure the nuclear safety features are not compromised, procedures involving nuclear
safety processes are labeled as either a Nuclear Surety Limitation, Nuclear Surety Procedure, or Nuclear Surety Restriction,
as identified below.
[NSL] - Nuclear Surety Limitation as identified by HQ AFSC ⁄ SEW

[NSP] - Nuclear Surety Procedures
[NSR] - Nuclear Surety Restriction as identified by HQ AFSC ⁄ SEW
NUCLEAR SURETY CODING.

Nuclear surety procedures are identified in Air Force T.O.s with the symbol **NSP** as follows:
a. When all steps or subparagraphs within a paragraph are nuclear surety related, the symbol is placed immediately
preceding the paragraph title.
b. If only some of the steps within the paragraph or subparagraph are nuclear surety related, only those steps that
apply to nuclear surety are marked with a symbol placed immediately preceding the step text.
TECHNICAL ORDER CHANGES.

Changing the procedures in this T.O. that are flagged with **NSP** symbols requires a specific process. The normal process
for changing T.O. procedures in accordance with T.O. 00-5-1 will be followed. The following will be accomplished prior to
publication of **NSP** flagged changes:
AFSC ⁄ SEW will approve the final (validated and verified) procedures for any new development of, or significant
changes to OPCERT ⁄ DECERT or other nuclear surety procedures. A major change adds new procedures, capa-
bilities, or functions to the OPCERT or DECERT process. A minor change would only clarify or improve existing
procedures and could be approved by the Nuclear Weapons Product Support Center (AAC ⁄ NWW).
FASTENER INSTALLATION.
In all installation procedures, it is the responsibility of the maintenance technician performing the task to tighten all fasteners
correctly. Other hardness critical considerations are:
a. Replacing fasteners that have stripped threads, corrosion, or other damage.
b. Replacing each fastener with an exact duplicate or authorized equivalent.
c. Making sure that all fasteners in a group are installed.
d. Making sure that all required attaching parts such as washers, spacers, and locking devices are installed with each
fastener.
e. When a range of torque is specified, the requirements are fulfilled when any torque value within the specified
range is obtained, provided the torque wrench is calibrated to within industry standards (i.e. ±4 percent in clock-
wise direction and ±6 percent in the counterclockwise direction).
xi
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
RFI GASKET INSPECTION.

Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) gaskets that are installed under some equipment access covers and J-box covers also
provide Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) protection. When gaskets are exposed during any maintenance procedure, they shall be
inspected per T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT.
If the primary electrically powered tool, test equipment, or item is not available, an approved alternate may be used. Alternate
Air Force standard test equipment and tools may be used as follows:
a. Except when specifically designed test equipment is called for or when nuclear certified test equipment is required
per the Master Nuclear Certification List (MNCL) and alternate items are not listed therein, or when the table for
support equipment does not authorize the use of an alternate or equivalent item ⁄ substitute.
NOTE
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) may have
adverse effects on weapons system equipment or ordnance items. When applicable, weapon
system specifications and MIL-STD-461 requirements must be complied with during the
selection process for identifying alternate electrically powered tools, items, and test
equipment.
b. Any substitute identified by the Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE) branch, Technical Engi-
neering (TE) or items identified by the USAF Interchangeability and Substitution (I & S) group stock list shall be
forwarded to 20AF ⁄ A4MO for approval.
c. The same authority may be exercised by TE for all other equipment and special tools. Extreme care shall be used
in selection and use of substitute (alternate) equipment to ensure weapon system or equipment degradation does
not result from the use of the substitute. Extreme care shall also be used in selecting an alternate or substituting
electrically powered items involved in explosive operations or used in explosive areas.
EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS.
Aerospace Ground Equipment (AGE) modification is accomplished by a Time Compliance Technical Order (TCTO).
Modifications of Real Property Installed Equipment (RPIE) is accomplished by a Facility Engineering Change Proposal
(FECP).
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR MATING.

Refer to general maintenance procedure for electrical connector mating, T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
ACCESS SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.

T.O. 35M1-9-2-2 may be used in conjunction with this T.O. when repairing, troubleshooting, cleaning, or servicing access
system components.
PRIMARY DOOR SAFETY BARRIER.

Safety barrier shall be installed before primary door is opened. Safety harness shall be worn with lanyards attached to an
approved lifeline attachment point when working inside the primary access hatch safety barrier with the secondary door
(B-plug) lowered.
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY.

Electrical continuity in this manual is defined as 1 ohms or less unless otherwise noted in the procedures.
xii Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
BONDING AND GROUNDING.

Maintaining electrical conductivity of equipment ground paths is important to the retention of system hardness. Upon
completion of maintenance, verify that all special ground connections are restored. When installing equipment, examine the
ground path contact surfaces for any defects, dirt, corrosion, or nonconductive coatings that can impede conductivity. Repair
or clean contact surfaces, as necessary, in accordance with T.O. procedures, to ensure good metal-to-metal contact. Ensure
mounting fasteners are properly installed and tightened. All access panels (i.e., distribution box access panels) shall be
inspected to ensure proper grounding paths.
Abbreviations ⁄ Acronyms
Abbreviation ⁄
Acronym Definition
A Amperage
ac Alternating Current
AGE Aerospace Ground Equipment
AFOSH Air Force Occupational Safety and Health
AFSPCI Air Force Space Command Instruction
ALB Actuator Locking Bar
BEE Bioenvironmental Engineering
B-Plug Secondary Door
CB Circuit Breaker
CCA Circuit Card Assemblies
CPD Control Panel Display (ESS)
dc Direct Current
DIN Deutsche Institute von Normen (German Institute of Standards) worldwide industry
standard
DIN RAIL Metal rail used to mount various electrical components (for example, terminal
blocks, motor starters, relays, circuit breakers, contactors, remote I ⁄ O, power
supplies, etc.) in a control cabinet
ECS Environmental Control System
EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMA Electromechanical Actuator
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EMP Electromagnetic Pulse
EMT Electromechanical Team
ESA Electrical Surge Arrestor
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
Change 4 xiii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Abbreviations ⁄ Acronyms - Continued
Abbreviation ⁄
Acronym Definition
ESS Energy Storage System (see FPS, VSS-120)

FECP Facility Engineering Change Proposal
FL Filter
FPS Flywheel Power System (see ESS, VSS-120)
FSC Flight Security Controller
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Air
IAW In Accordance With
ICBM Intercontinental Ballistic Missile
I⁄O Input ⁄ Output
I&S Interchangeability & Substitution
IGBT Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor
IZ Inner Zone
J-Box Junction Box
LCC Launch Control Center
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCP Local Control Panel (MDC)
LDB Launcher Distribution B (Panel)
LEB Launcher Equipment Building
LED Light Emitting Diode
LER Launcher Equipment Room
LF Launch Facility
LSB Launcher Support Building
MAF Missile Alert Facility
MCCC Missile Combat Crew Commander
MDC Motor Drive Cabinet
MEEDS Missile Electronic Encryption Devices
MGE Maintenance Ground Equipment
MMOC Missile Maintenance Operations Center
MOV Metal Oxide Varistor
MSB Maintenance Support Building
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
xiv Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Abbreviation ⁄
Acronym Definition
NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

MSB Missile Support Base
NSN National Stock Number
Change 4 xiv.1/(xiv.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Abbreviation ⁄
Acronym Definition
NSP Nuclear Surety Procedures

OGE Operational Ground Equipment
OSE Operational Support Equipment
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OTL Operational Test Launch
PAH Personnel Access Hatch (Primary Door)
PAS Personnel Access Shaft
P⁄N Part Number
PPE Personnel Protective Equipment
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RPIE Real Property Installed Equipment
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
SARC Site Activation Remote Controller
SAS Secondary Access System
SCS Safety Control Switch
SDCA Secondary Door Control Assembly
SDEA Secondary Door Electromechanical Assemblies
S⁄N Serial Number
SOC State of Charge
SWBD-3 Switchboard #3
TCTO Time Compliance Technical Order
TE Technical Engineering
TLV Threshold Limit Valve
TMDE Test Measurement Diagnostic Equipment
T.O. Technical Order
TP Test Point
URD Unit Reference Designation
VAFB Vandenberg Air Force Base
Vac Volts, Alternating Current
Vdc Volts, Direct Current
VSS-120 Voltage Storage System (see ESS, FPS)
Change 3 xv
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Abbreviation ⁄
Acronym Definition
< Less than

≤ Less than or equal to
> Greater than
≥ Greater than or equal to
LIST OF RELATED PUBLICATIONS.

Following is a list of publications referenced in this manual.
List of Related Publications
Number Title
00-5-1 AF Technical Order System

00-110N-16 USAF Nuclear-Certified Equipment and Software
00-25-234 General Shop Practice Requirements for the Repair, Maintenance, and Test of Electrical
Equipment
00-25-235 Safety Procedures and Equipment for Confined Space Entry
21M-LGM30F-12 Special Maintenance - Modification Safety and Electromagnetic Interference Provisions
21M-LGM30F-12-1 Minuteman Nuclear Surety Procedures WS-133A-M ⁄ B Weapon Systems
21M-LGM30F-112 Organizational Maintenance Instructions General Inspection and Repair Procedures
21M-LGM30G-2-4 LF Security System
21M-LGM30G-2-10 LF, MAF, and Support Building Procedures [0][1][3][5]
21M-LGM30G-2-11 Power Subsystems Wings I, III, V
35M1-9-2-2 LF Personnel Access Systems
35M37-4-12 Forced-Entry Procedures for Secondary-Door Lockout
xvi Change 3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
LIST OF TIME COMPLIANCE TECHNICAL ORDERS.

Following is a list of time compliant Technical Orders, if applicable.
List of Time Compliance Technical Orders
TCTO Date
TCTO Number TCTO Title
21M-LGM30G-940 Modification of the Secondary Door after ICBM Security Modernization 01 Nov 05
Program (IMSP) at Wings 1, 1X, 3, 4, LF Trainers T9, T10, T12, T13,
Hill AFB SMIC-AM and SMIC-B
21M-LGM30G-941 Modification of the Launch Facility (LF) Personnel Access System (PAS) 01 Nov 05
after ICBM Security Modernization Program (ISMP) at Wing 1,
Squadrons 1, 2, and 3
after ICBM Security Modernization Program (ISMP) at Wings 3 and 5
after ICBM Security Modernization Program (ISMP) at Hill AFB
SMIC-AM
21M-LGM30G-994 Modification to Telescoping Ladder, P ⁄ N 25-93767-4, to Incorporate 02 Jul 07
Replacement Cover Plates on the Center Section of the Ladder and
Reidentify the Telescoping Ladder as P ⁄ N 25-93767-7 Per Engineering
Change Proposal 07-IPIC-017
21M-LGM30G-995 Modification to the Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA), Part 09 Sep 07
Number (P ⁄ N) 25-93700-1 to Upgrade SDCA Firmware and Incorporate
W35 Ground Wire; and to the Site Activation Remote Controller (SARC)
Cable, P ⁄ N 25-93699-1, to Correct Insufficient Thread Engagement, Per
Engineering Change Proposal 07-IPIC-017
43D2-3-55-514 Modification of the Launch Facility (LF) Personnel Access System (PAS) 01 Jan 06
after ICBM Security Modernization Program (ISMP) at Wing 1, Launch
Facility Trainer T41 (AM System)
Facility Trainer T10 and Wing 5, Launch Facility Trainer T13, (AM
Systems)
after ICBM Security Modernization Program (ISMP) at Vandenberg AFB,
Launch Facility Trainer T12 (LF-08)
Facility Trainer T9 (B System)
Change 4 xvii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
SAFETY SUMMARY
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

This manual describes physical and chemical processes that could cause injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment
if not properly followed. This safety summary includes general safety precautions and instructions that must be understood
and applied during operation and maintenance to ensure personnel safety and protection of equipment. Prior to performing any
task, the WARNINGs, CAUTIONs, and NOTEs included in that task shall be reviewed and understood.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES.

WARNINGs and CAUTIONs are used in the manual to highlight operating or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions,
or statements, which are considered essential to protection of personnel (WARNING) or equipment (CAUTION). WARNINGs
and CAUTIONs precede the step or procedure to which they apply. WARNINGs and CAUTIONs consist of four parts:
heading, (WARNING and CAUTION), a statement of the hazard, minimum precautions, and possible result if disregarded.
Notes are used in this manual to highlight operating or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements that are
not essential to protection of personnel or equipment. NOTEs may precede or follow the step or procedure, depending upon
the information to be highlighted. The headings used and their definitions are as follows:
Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition, statement,

etc, which, if not strictly observed, could result in injury to, or death of, personnel or long
term health hazards.
Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition, statement,

etc, which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment
or loss of mission effectiveness.
NOTE
Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or statement.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNINGS.

In accordance with AFI 90-821, Hazard Communication, installation Bioenvironmental Engineering Office assists in Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) reviews, including interpreting information, understanding health effects, and identifying any
necessary protective measures. Hazardous Material descriptions and WARNINGs in this manual identify the dangers
associated with the hazardous materials listed. Consult the MSDS for additional information on hazards, effects, and protective
equipment for the listed items. Contact the Base Bioenvironmental Engineering Office or reference your bioenvironmental
shop survey for minimum PPE recommendations if there are questions concerning protective equipment types and
requirements. If there are problems relating to MSDS information that can not be resolved locally, notify 20AF⁄A4M.
Hazardous Materials Description.

The following hazardous materials are used in this manual:
Antiseize compound is flammable. Do not braze or weld in direct contact with this material. Use in a well-ventilated area and
avoid repeated contact. Good hygiene practices should be followed after use. No PPE required for normal use.
xviii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Cadmium metal is highly toxic and hazardous. The metal itself is a skin irritant. Dust producing operations create airborne
particles known to cause cancer and are skin, eye, and inhalation irritants. Do not perform dust producing operations without
base bioenvironmental approval. Heated metal could also produce toxic fumes and dust particles are a fire ⁄ explosive hazard.
Perform any dust producing operations in a controlled environment and avoid excessive heat or ignition sources. When contact
with dust is possible, do not wear contact lenses, wear eye and hand protection, approved respirator, and clothing adequate
to prevent repeated or prolonged skin contact. When handling metal, wear hand protection and clothing adequate to prevent
repeated or prolonged skin contact.
Compressed acetylene is an extremely flammable, hazardous asphyxiant. Acetylene is generally nonirritating to the skin and
eyes, unless mixed with solvent. Overexposure to high concentrations of gas could cause drowsiness, dizziness, or general
weakness. High concentrations of gas could also cause an oxygen deficient and explosive atmosphere. Avoid breathing gas
and use in a well-ventilated area following all approved cylinder handling and welding ⁄ brazing requirements, appropriate to
task being performed. Wear eye and hand protection appropriate to task being performed. Wear protective clothing appropriate
to task.
Compressed oxygen is nonflammable but vigorously accelerates combustion. Some materials which are noncombustible in air
will burn in the presence of an oxygen enriched environment (greater than 23 percent). An oxygen enriched environment could
also form explosive compounds when exposed to combustible materials, oil, grease, and other hydrocarbons. Use in a
well-ventilated area following all approved cylinder handling and welding ⁄ brazing requirements, appropriate to task being
performed. Wear eye and hand protection when handling, connecting or disconnecting cylinders. Wear protective clothing
appropriate to task. Clothing exposed to high concentrations of gas could retain oxygen for 30 minutes or longer, becoming
a potential fire hazard.
Conductive compound is classed as non-hazardous, but combustible when exposed to high heat or open flame. Compound is
a mild eye, skin, and respiratory irritant. Use in a well-ventilated area and avoid excessive heat and ignition sources. Avoid
inhalation of vapors and repeated skin contact. Wear hand protection.
Corrosion-preventive compound (MIL-PRF-16173) is flammable, toxic, and hazardous. Could cause burning or irritation of
eyes and skin defatting. Vapors are a respiratory irritant and overexposure could cause drowsiness and dizziness. Avoid use
around open flames, extreme heat, sparks, or ignition sources. Wear eye and hand protection.
Corrosion-preventive compound (MIL-PRF-81309) is toxic and extremely flammable. Contact with skin and eyes could cause
burning, tearing, redness, drying, cracking, breathing difficulties, drowsiness, dizziness, and fatigue. Wear eye and hand
protection when handling. Wear NIOSH-approved respiratory protection if used in a confined space. Keep away from sparks,
flames, welding, brazing, cutting, and grinding.
Cutting oil is a flammable, toxic, and a hazardous skin, eye, and respiratory irritant. Use in a well-ventilated area and avoid
breathing mist. Excess misting could cause slippery conditions. Keep away from excessive heat and open flames. Wear eye
and hand protection. If splashing could occur, wear rubber apron and clothing appropriate to task.
Gear oil is a skin and eye irritant. Wear eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Keep away from excessive
heat, sparks, and open flames.
General purpose grease (MIL-PRF-23827) is a skin and eye irritant. Wear eye and hand protection. Use in a well-ventilated
area. Chronic exposure could cause skin irritation. Keep away from open flames.
Isopropyl alcohol is flammable and hazardous to eyes and skin. Wear eye and hand protection. Use in a well-ventilated area.
Keep away from excessive heat, ignition sources, sparks, and open flames.
Loctite 222 and 242 threadlocker are combustible and contain chemicals that are hazardous to skin and eyes. Do not use near
ignition sources and use in a well-ventilated area. Avoid skin contact and wear hand protection whenever there is a possibility
of skin contact. If eye contact is possible, wear eye protection.
MIL-PRF-680, Type III is combustible and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear eye and hand protection and
use in a well-ventilated area. Solvent is a skin and eye irritant and could cause eye irritation, tearing, and blurred vision or
skin irritation. Prolonged inhalation of vapors could cause dizziness, drowsiness, fatigue, nausea, headache, and loss of
reflexes.
Molybdenum disulfide lubricant (MIL-G-21164) is a skin and eye irritant. Wear eye and hand protection. Use in a
well-ventilated area. Chronic exposure could cause skin irritation. Keep away from excessive heat, sparks, and open flames.
Change 4 xix
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Nonskid paint and primer is flammable and toxic. Liquid could cause eye burns, and prolonged skin contact could cause
irritation. Vapors could cause eye, nose, and throat irritation. Avoid contact with skin and eyes and do not inhale mists or
vapors. Vapors could form explosive mixtures with air. Keep away from heat, sparks, and open flames and use in a
well-ventilated area. Use NIOSH-approved organic-vapor respirator if airborne levels exceed TLV. Wear eye and hand
protection. Remove paint from skin contact after exposure.
Paratherm heat transfer fluid is combustible and nontoxic, but is hazardous if fluid is hot or if high heat creates excessive mists
or vapors. Avoid ignition sources and use in a well-ventilated area. Eye, skin, and respiratory protection is not required under
normal handling conditions. If fluid is handled where splashing or mists could be encountered, wear eye and hand protection.
For prolonged or repeated exposure, wear impervious clothing, boots, gloves, and ⁄ or aprons over areas of body exposed. If
fluid is hot, wear insulated impervious clothing and gloves. If vapors or mists are generated, or fluid is heated, wear NIOSH
approved organic vapor respirator with dust and mist filter.
Rosin core solder is hazardous and toxic. Wear eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Fumes emitted during
soldering could contain formaldehyde, carbon monoxide, and rosin.
Sealing compound (MIL-S-8784B, Class B-1 ⁄ 2) is a two-part, flammable, and toxic compound that could cause respiratory,
skin, and eye irritation. Compound is toxic by skin absorption and could cause severe eye damage. Excessive inhalation of
vapors could result in headache, dizziness, nausea, and weakness. Do not use near heat, sparks, or open flames and use in a
well-ventilated area. NIOSH-approved respirator required if TLV is exceeded. Wear approved protective clothing, and eye and
hand protection.
Silicone dioxide desiccant is classified as a nuisance dust and could cause health hazards if inhaled, ingested, or comes in
contact with eyes ⁄ skin. Use in a well-ventilated area. Wear hand protection.
Silicone grease (A-A-59173) is toxic and hazardous. Decomposition products could be toxic and cause acute skin and eye
discomfort. Wear eye and hand protection when handling.
Silicone rubber sealant (RTV-3145) is flammable, toxic, and hazardous. Use only in a well-ventilated area. Wear eye and hand
protection. Keep away from heat, sparks, flame, or any source of ignition. Could cause severe skin irritation if prolonged
contact is encountered. Inhalation could cause in-coordination and unconsciousness.
Silicone spray lubricant (VV-D-1078) is combustible and toxic. Use in a well-ventilated area. Keep away from high heat,
sparks, and open flames. Acute and chronic exposure could cause eye, skin, and respiratory irritation. Avoid breathing vapors
or mists. Respiratory protection not required where adequate ventilation exists. Wear protective clothing appropriate to the
task, and wear eye and hand protection.
Solder flux is hazardous and toxic. Wear eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Contact with eyes could
cause permanent corneal damage.
Solid film lubricant (MIL-L-23398) is toxic, flammable, and a skin, eye, and respiratory tract irritant. Avoid contact with skin
and eyes, and avoid breathing vapors. Keep away from acids, alkalis, and open flame. Wear chemical-resistant gloves and
safety glasses or goggles to prevent hand or eye contact. Use in a well-ventilated area. Wear NIOSH-approved organic
respirator if TLV limits are exceeded. Wear eye and hand protection.
Solvent borne neoprene adhesive (MMM-A-1617) is flammable and toxic. Flammable vapors could ignite explosively.
Respiratory protection not required unless TLV is exceeded. Use in a well-ventilated area and avoid fire, sparks, and static
electricity. Adhesive is an eye, skin, and respiratory irritant. Barrier cream shall be worn for sensitive skin. Wear eye and hand
protection.
Hazardous Materials General Precautions.

To reduce the ill effects to personnel caused by inadvertent contact with hazardous materials used in this manual, the following
precautions should be taken:
If contact with skin occurs, wash affected area with soap and water.
If contact with eyes, do not rub. Flush eyes with water for at least 15 minutes while holding upper and lower eyelids open
to ensure complete cleansing.
Remove contaminated clothing and launder before reuse.
If substance is inhaled, remove personnel to fresh air immediately.
xx Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Contact medical dispensary ⁄ facility if inadvertent contact occurs or is suspected.

Keep substances away from excessive heat and electrical equipment.
Wash hands after handling, and before eating, drinking, smoking, or using lavatory facilities.
When not using, keep containers closed in a dry, cool, well-ventilated area.
Have Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) available.
Small Quantity Use.

Hazardous materials description for chemicals (specific solvents, adhesives, etc.) used in this manual are listed in the
Hazardous Materials section of the Safety Summary. If any of these chemicals are used in small quantities or applied by
disposable materials (brush, Q-tips, disposable wipes, dispensers) a WARNING prior to use may not appear in the text.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
The following safety precautions shall be observed while performing procedures in this manual:
Do not attempt to stop free-spinning door crank.
Ensure secondary door is in raised position with lock bolts extended prior to performing maintenance on telescoping ladder
extension.
Personnel egress through PAS shall not be impeded.
Whenever an audible alarm is heard, stand clear of the secondary door, telescoping ladder, and the bottom of the secondary
door.
Ensure personnel access shaft is clear of personnel, tools, and equipment prior to initiating door movement.
Use extreme care when performing SDCA back panel electrical trouble analysis with power applied.
Secondary door shall not be raised, with people in the LER, until it is verified that an emergency breathing apparatus for each
person and flashlights are located in the LER, except in emergency.
At least one person outside LER shall be in communication with personnel in the LER while secondary door is raised.
If secondary door has been positioned to facilitate maintenance, ensure EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged to prevent door
free-fall.
Motor Disconnect Switch shall be locked out and tagged prior to performing maintenance in the vicinity of EMA motor or
gears.
EMA assembly shall be maintained in the upright, level position at all times.
Ensure EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged to prevent secondary door free-fall.
MDC and ESS Cabinets contain capacitors that must be discharged prior to performing maintenance.
Power filters, high current filters, and ESA modules could hold high charge and shall be discharged before performing
maintenance.
ESS weighs approximately 2500 pounds and could become unstable during hoisting or when rolled across LER floor.
Remove caster assemblies from ESS prior to securing ESS to vehicle for transportation.
Do not perform secondary door RAISE or LOWER command(s) until homing procedure is complete.
Secondary Door and Telescoping Ladder Hazards.

An intermittent audible alarm will sound in the LERs starting 3 seconds before the secondary door starts to move. A steady
tone will sound while the secondary door is in motion. Personnel shall stand clear of the secondary door and telescoping ladder
upon hearing any audible alarm. Do not wait to interpret the type of alarm or its source.
Change 7 xxi
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Some faulted conditions can cause fast secondary door movement without any audible alarm. Personnel shall stand clear of
the secondary door and telescoping ladder immediately upon detecting movement of the secondary door.
Immediately clear the telescoping ladder when secondary door motion is imminent or in progress. Relative motion of ladder
sections can cause serious injury to personnel.
While the secondary door is in the raised position and personnel are in either LER, at least one person located above ground
shall be in constant communication with personnel in the LERs, and personnel within the LERs shall have the tools required
to manually lower the secondary door available in an accessible location below grade. If communication is interrupted for
more than 3 minutes for any reason, the secondary door shall be lowered immediately.
Personnel will be unable to exit LERs in the event of an emergency when telescoping ladder is removed. Ensure temporary
egress ladder is readily available before removing telescoping ladder.
The number of personnel occupying the LERs shall be limited to task essential personnel prior to starting any operation that
could render the secondary door or telescoping ladder unavailable for emergency egress.
While performing maintenance within the PAS with the secondary door in the lowered position, secondary access system shall
be placed in MAINTENANCE mode.
The EMA gearbox safety pin shall be engaged prior to the start of any maintenance activities under the secondary door. This
is intended to protect personnel against an unexpected descent of the secondary door.
If secondary access system is to be cycled between MAINTENANCE and OPERATION mode, ensure all onsite personnel are
briefed on anticipated secondary access system status and notified when system is returned to OPERATION mode.
If site penetration is being performed with a NO-GO condition reporting on the SARC, personnel shall monitor secondary door
movement to ensure secondary door stops when top of door is level with LER-1 floor. If secondary door fails to stop,
immediately set SARC OFF ⁄ LOWER switch to OFF and notify MMOC of a possible secondary door homing fault.
If secondary door lock bolts fail to extend electrically during a secondary door raise sequence, do not manually extend lock
bolts unless otherwise directed. Notify MMOC that secondary door actuator locking bar requires troubleshooting and proceed
as directed. Manual extension of lock bolts with a faulty actuator locking bar could result in launch facility lock out.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Requirements.

Electrostatic discharge (**ESD**) coding is used prior to the major paragraphs ⁄ sections to caution personnel that one or
more of the following step(s) expose equipment to ESD hazards. T.O. 00-25-234 requirements must be complied with.
**ESD** coding is also used in lieu of a CAUTION. A CAUTION and **ESD** coding both warn personnel of the potential
for equipment damage.
Electrical Safety Requirements.

Rubber goods designed for protection of the technician (electrical rubber gloves with leather protective shells and rubber mats)
shall be used when working on energized electrical circuits of 50 volts or more. Electrical rubber gloves with leather protective
shells, rubber mats, and rubber blankets shall be used while testing energized electrical circuits of 600 volts or more. When
working adjacent to electrically energized circuits in excess of 600 volts, electrical rubber blankets shall be used to cover
energized equipment. Testing of energized electrical circuits shall only be done while standing on and in contact with dry
surfaces. Normal troubleshooting activity involving the operation of switches, the insertion and ⁄ or removal of fuses, or
testing of exposed conductors on circuits below 600 volts do not require rubber protective goods. When working adjacent to
energized electrical circuits, the technician shall wear applicable safety equipment or use a rubber blanket when deemed
necessary. Detailed information on rubber matting, gloves, and blankets can be found in AFOSH standard 91-501.
Two people (buddy ⁄ buddy) within easy access of each other are required during testing, troubleshooting, or performing
maintenance on energized equipment.
Lockout or tagout devices shall be attached when circuit breakers or switches are opened to perform maintenance.
After removing power from a component, verify no voltage is present prior to performing maintenance.
Actual fuse amperage ratings shall be verified prior to installation ⁄ reinstallation.
xxii Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Tool Belts Requirements (MAFs and LFs).

Use of tool belts is acceptable for carrying common handtools. Tools carried in a belt while ascending or descending a ladder
must not impede the safe progress of the individual on the ladder. Tools must be carried as to prevent items from falling from
the tool belt. If working in or around an open launch tube, lanyards shall be attached to all tools carried in a tool belt.
Manual Lift Requirements.

Maintenance equipment, tools, and replacement components could be awkward and heavy to handle. Consider team lifting
when items are known to weigh more than 25 pounds. All pertinent lifting factors should be considered when determining
lifting requirements (i.e. individual’s strength, distance item is carried, and size and weight of the object). Any object too
difficult to be lifted ⁄ carried by one person should be lifted ⁄ carried by two or more personnel or use a mechanical lift. A
NOTE shall be placed in the procedure just prior to lifting heavy (approximately 60 pounds or more) and ⁄ or awkward items
identifying the weight of the item to be lifted.
Asbestos Precautions.
Asbestos dust and fibers are hazardous and toxic. Excessive long-term exposure to high concentrations of airborne fibers could
cause pulmonary disease and ⁄ or cancer. Fibers could be imbedded in the skin when handling. Do not smoke while handling,
and ensure hands are thoroughly washed before using tobacco products. Use in a well-ventilated area and control dust TLV.
Check specific MSDS for component containing asbestos for appropriate handling requirements. Wear respirators for
protection against pneumoconiosis-producing dusts and clothing adequate to protect skin, as required by OSHA standard for
exposure to asbestos dust. Wear eye and hand protection. Ensure proper procedures are followed for bagging, tagging, and
disposal of asbestos waste materials. Ensure total compliance with base asbestos plan and ⁄ or base BEE requirements.
Welding ⁄ Torch Cutting Operations.

Welders are exposed to many types of injuries. Light rays, splashing metal, poisonous formation, fumes, gases, and electrical
shock could cause painful or serious injury. The proximity of flammable substances or hazardous locations provides additional
danger. Because of the danger to personnel and property damage, it is essential that safe welding practices be observed at all
times. All welding personnel, before starting a welding operation, shall protect themselves with approved helmets, goggles,
shields, aprons, gloves, gauntlets, and other protective clothing as required. Eye protection lens in helmets, etc., shall be of
appropriate shades for the welding operation. When natural ventilation is insufficient to prevent accumulation of dangerous
gases and fumes, forced ventilation shall be used. Local exhaust ventilation shall be used in confined spaces and if fumes
cannot be kept to safe limits, appropriate breathing devices shall be worn. Any welded item will require sufficient time to cool
before handling without appropriate protection. Additional personnel in the area will be warned about hazards.
Paratherm Cleanup.
Paratherm heat transfer fluid is used as coolant in the Energy Storage System (ESS) Flywheel Power System (FPS). Any
leakage of fluid from the ESS cabinet indicates an ESS coolant fault. Notify MMOC and clean up spill immediately, but do
not open ESS cabinet without authorization. Avoid placing absorbent materials that could promote spontaneous combustion
under, or near ESS FPS. Fluid is a slipping hazard and approved hand protection shall be worn during cleanup of spills. Ensure
all cleanup materials are removed from LERs and properly disposed of IAW Base Bioenvironmental Engineering (BEE).
Secondary Access System Electromagnetic Interference Hazards.

Operation of the secondary access system Motor Drive Cabinet (MDC) and ⁄ or the Energy Storage System (ESS) with cabinet
door(s) open could emit sufficient Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) to initiate nearby ordnance and ⁄ or interfere with
missile safety and control circuits. The Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) circuitry could also be adversely affected
by EMI from an open ⁄ unshielded MDC or ESS cabinet. MDC or ESS cabinet doors shall be closed with all EMI ⁄ RFI gaskets
properly installed whenever secondary access system is energized, unless all the following conditions are met:
(ESS and ⁄ or MDC) All EMI shields on LER equipment racks and cables shall be in place (electronic equipment cabinet doors
closed).
(ESS and ⁄ or MDC) Missile Safe-and-Arm and Arm ⁄ Disarm devices shall be pinned in Safe position.
(ESS and ⁄ or MDC) Missile Umbilical cable shall be disconnected IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30F-12.
xxiii
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
(ESS and ⁄ or MDC) Any ordnance device installed within 10 feet of the ESS or MDC shall be removed and a shielding cap
shall be installed.
(ESS and ⁄ or MDC) The ESA vault door shall be closed during all secondary door ⁄ secondary access system operation and
during maintenance with the system energized.
(ESS) AVE and OGE ⁄ OSE shall be shut down IAW T.O.s 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ) and 21M-LGM30G-2-11-( ).
Electrical Surge Filters.

LF Capacitors hold high charge and shall be discharged before checkout or troubleshooting. Discharge capacitor by placing
shorting lead from ground surface to capacitor terminal.
USAF Safety Manuals.

In situations not specifically described in this manual, refer to the following manuals:
General Shop Practice Requirements for the Repair, Mainte-

T.O. 00-25-234
nance, and Test of Electrical Equipment
T.O. 00-25-235 Safety Procedures and Equipment for Confined Space Entry
AFI 91-101 The Air Force Nuclear Weapons Surety Program
AFI 91-114 Safety Rules for the Intercontinental Ballistic Missile
Systems
AFI 91-202 The USAF Mishap Prevention Program
AFI 91-204 Investigating and Reporting
AFI 91-301 Air Force Occupational Safety and Health Program
AFOSH 48-137 Respiratory Protection
AFOSH 48-8 Controlling Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals
AFOSH 91-501 AF Consolidated Occupational Safety and Health Standards
AFSPCI 31-1101 Intercontinental Ballistic Missile (ICBM) Systems Security
Standard
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS.
Faceshields will only be used as secondary protection around chemical splash hazards. Safety goggles will be used for primary
protection.
Wear hardhat and safety shoes whenever directly involved in hoisting ⁄ lowering of items (hardhat required whenever the load
is above the head). Do not stand or allow any part of the body under the suspended load.
Wear leather gloves whenever handling wire rope ⁄ cable.
Grinding and sanding operations could cause airborne particles. Wear approved eye protection when performing these
operations.
The use of a wire brush creates airborne particles and debris hazards. Safety glasses and gloves shall be worn at all times while
using wire brushes.
Soldering iron is hot and solder could pop ⁄ splash. Avoid contact with tip and wear approved eye protection.
Suspended loads are hazardous and could be dropped during forklift ⁄ crane operations. When lifting or moving loads, ensure
a clear zone is established throughout operation.
xxiv
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Personnel safety could be compromised. Whenever primary door or secondary door is closed with personnel below grade,
ensure appropriate tools are available to manually lower the secondary door.
Dust or other foreign material could damage connector. Protective caps shall be installed on all electrical connectors during
equipment storage or transit.
Electrical hazard could be present. Electrical power shall be turned off prior to removing any connector or electrical
component. Power shutoff is not required when handling components of IZ security loop or secondary door cables.
Falling hazard is present. Safety barrier shall be installed before primary door is opened. Safety harness shall be worn with
lanyards attached to an approved lifeline attach point when working inside the primary access hatch safety barrier.
Damage to hand-driven linear actuator could result in personnel injury, death, or equipment damage due to the failure of
hand-driven linear actuator. Care shall be exercised when maneuvering any vehicle around primary door.
Under certain conditions, danger could exist even when power is removed from equipment due to charges retained by filter
capacitors. To avoid injuries when working on or adjacent to filter capacitors or circuits with filter capacitors in line, always
remove power and verify the absence of power. Then, using the dc scale of multimeter, check for voltage from the terminals
to ground. If voltage is present, discharge either through a multimeter or by using a 10k ohm ⁄ 5-watt resistor jumper wire until
meter indicates less than 1 Vdc.
Probing procedures for isolation of electronic equipment malfunctions at the LF are prohibited. Fault isolation shall be
performed by using approved testing equipment, approved testing techniques, and according to the proper maintenance level.
The security pit vault door contains an asbestos insulator. Clean up and dispose of all debris resulting from drilling operations
IAW direction from local BEE.
While performing torching of vault door, personnel working directly on the door will don respirator with High Efficiency
Particulate Air (HEPA) filters before torching.
Hazardous operations (i.e. those involving flame, sparks, toxic materials, and solvents) shall not be conducted at the same time
as activities which may block egress through the PAS.
When secondary door is in the raised position and a falling hazard from LER-1 exists, ensure LER-1 barrier chain is installed.
Remove rings, watches, and other metallic objects that could cause shock, burns, or get caught in any moving parts. Snagged
finger rings have caused many serious injuries. Unless specifically allowed by shop safety procedures, remove finger rings
during all operation activities.
Do not attempt internal service or adjustments of equipment unless another person capable of rendering aid and resuscitation
is present.
xxv/(xxvi blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 1
DESCRIPTION
1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.

1.1.1 Introduction. This chapter contains organizational-level maintenance information for Launch Facility (LF)
personnel access systems located at Wings I, III, and V, and for primary door systems installed at VAFB.
NOTE
[0] Only primary door systems are installed at Vandenberg LFs, and leading particulars are
listed in Table 1-1. Equipment installed at Vandenberg LFs shall be maintained using the
equivalent weapon system procedures unless coded with [0] symbol.
1.1.2 Access System. The LF personnel access system (Figure 1-1) provides a time deterrent to entering the LF, and
in the event of a security threat, allows the secondary door to be immediately raised deterring unauthorized access to the
Launcher Equipment Room (LER). In normal operation, the system delays LER access to unauthorized personnel and
maintains weapons system integrity while permitting controlled access to authorized personnel. The access system consists of:
a security pit, a primary door, and associated equipment forming the primary access; a secondary door, an electromechanical
actuator and associated equipment; a wiring and control set, and associated equipment forming the secondary access system;
and an alarm set that interconnects various personnel access detectors with the LF security system. Leading particulars for the
system are presented in Table 1-1.
1-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-1. LF Personnel Access System (Sheet 1 of 2)
1-2
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-1. LF Personnel Access System (Sheet 2)
1-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 1-1. Leading Particulars
Type Designator or [04]

Manufacturer’s [3] [09]
Component P⁄N [5] [1] [10]
SYSTEM A/F37P-1 NA
A/F37P-4 * *
VAULT DOOR CVK-71A ⁄ * * Heavy closure for security pit;
F42P-1A * weighs 166 pounds.
CVK-53B/F42P-1
PRIMARY CVK-96/F37P-1
ACCESS CVK-126/F37P-4 * * *
Primary Door 25-61854-3 * * * Heavy closure for access
shaft; weighs 2,700 pounds.
Hand-Driven SK3806-R21 * * * Used to open and close
Linear Actuator primary door; weighs 70
pounds.
SECONDARY
ACCESS
Secondary Door 3037-1050-( ) * * NA Heavy closure for access
shaft; weighs approximately
14,000 pounds.
Electromechanical BA22800 * * NA Used to raise/lower secondary
Actuator (EMA) door and control/monitor
URD 11406 secondary door positioning.
Weighs approximately 2,000
pounds.
Motor Drive BA22769 * * NA Provides power and control
Cabinet (MDC) interfaces for the EMA, ESS,
URD 11496 and the wiring and control
set. Weighs approximately
1,500 pounds.
Energy Storage BA22875 * Flywheel Power System
System (ESS) URD (FPS) that provides power for
11497 NA the EMA via the MDC.
BA23097 * * Weighs approximately 2,500
pounds.
Guide Rails HLK-126 ⁄ F42P-1 * * NA Keep secondary door from
rotating and tipping in access
shaft.
1-4 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 1-1. Leading Particulars - Continued

Telescoping Ladder 25-93767-( ) * * NA Three-section ladder assembly

providing means for personnel
to descend to the secondary
door to operate locks and to
descend to the first-level
equipment room when
secondary door is lowered.
Upper Section 25-93930-( ) * * NA Upper subassembly of tele-
scoping ladder.
Middle Section 25-93931-( ) * * NA Middle subassembly of tele-
scoping ladder.
Lower Section 25-93932-( ) * * NA Lower subassembly of tele-
scoping ladder.
Upper Mounting 25-93737-( ) * * NA Provides an upper attach point
Bracket for mounting the telescoping
ladder to the Personnel
Access Shaft (PAS).
Lower Mounting 25-93736-( ) * * NA Provides a lower-left attach
Bracket (Left) point for mounting tele-
scoping ladder to secondary
door.
Lower Mounting 25-93736-( ) * * NA Provides a lower-right attach
Bracket (Right) point for mounting tele-
scoping ladder to secondary
door.
WIRING AND 25-93920-( ) * * Controls and monitors
CONTROL SET secondary access system
operation.
Secondary Door 25-93700-( ) * * NA Monitors and controls the
Control Assembly secondary access system, and
(SDCA) URD provides a command and
10494 control interface between
wiring and control system and
secondary door. Weighs
approximately 90 pounds.
Secondary Door 25-93720-( ) * * NA Provides electromagnetic
Electrical Surge interference filtering for
Arrestor (ESA) power ⁄ signal lines.
URD 10493
Change 4 1-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 1-1. Leading Particulars - Continued

SARC 25-93695-( ) NA Maintenance Ground Equip-

ment (MGE) component of
the wiring and control set
providing a command and
control interface between the
security pit control station and
the SDCA and used for
normal site penetration.
Alarm Set A ⁄ F24P-4A * * Interconnect various personnel
access detectors with LF IZ
alarm system to cause an
inner-zone alarm when
attempt is made to enter
access shaft.
* Signifies that part number or type designator is effective for indicated wing
MGE maintained at Maintenance Support Building (MSB) and dispatched to LF, as required
Alarm set components installed in Vandenberg AFB LFs are nonfunctional and need not be maintained
1-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
1.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION.

1.2.1 Security Pit. The security pit (Figure 1-2), located at ground level next to the primary door, contains the locking
mechanism for the primary door and controls for normal entrance to the access shaft and equipment rooms. The controls are
part of the wiring and control set.
1.2.2 Vault Door. The security pit is closed and secured by a vault door. A weather cover over the vault door is secured
with handnuts and protects the entire pit and vault door. The vault door is equipped with a penetration detector and a
lock-scramble switch that are connected, via the alarm set, to the LF security system. The vault door locking bolts can be
retracted by dialing the correct combination and turning the bolt-operating handle.
1.2.3 Security Pit Functions. The security pit provides access to the primary door lock bolt (Figure 1-2). Turning the
bronze nut on the threaded shaft with a lock bolt wrench will either retract the lock bolt or extend it, depending on the direction
of rotation. When lock bolt has been fully withdrawn, the primary door may be opened.
1.2.3.1 Security Pit Control Station. The security pit contains secondary door J-box assembly (Figure 1-2) consisting of
a connector for installation of the Site Activation Remote Controller (SARC) used to enable secondary door operation and a
secondary door raise switch.
1.2.4 Primary Access. The primary door (Figure 1-1) is a heavy closure and weather seal for the PAS. The primary door
is locked closed by a lock bolt that, when extended from the security pit, engages a lug on the bottom of the primary door.
Environmental protection is provided by a preformed packing held in a groove under the outer edge of the door. [1][3][5] A
magnet under the edge of the door and a magnetically-operated switch in the wall of the access shaft are connected to the alarm
set. When the door is opened, the switch magnet under the door is removed from the vicinity of the switch and the switch
contacts open.< A safety barrier is installed around the access shaft when the primary door is open. The door is opened and
closed by a hand-driven linear actuator. A lifting eye is provided on top of the primary door to permit the use of a crane to
open the door if the actuator is inoperable.
1.2.5 Hand-Driven Linear Actuator. The hand-driven linear actuator is used to open and close the primary door and is
attached between an extension on the primary door and an anchor plate embedded in the apron. The actuator is operated by
a handcrank that drives a ball screw by means of a worm gear. The crankshaft is equipped with a safety device that prevents
autorotation of the actuator while under load. A telescoping sleeve, equipped with wiper scraper seals, protects the ball screw
from the environment. The actuator is lubricated during assembly and does not require additional lubrication.
1.2.6 Secondary Access. Secondary access consists of a secondary door that completely plugs the bore of the access
shaft, a wiring and control set that monitors and controls secondary door functions, and an EMA system that raises and lowers
the secondary door on two guide rails. When the primary door is open, the top of the secondary door is exposed. Lock bolts
in the secondary door mate with a locking ring recessed in the access shaft wall to lock the secondary door in place.
1.2.7 Secondary Door. The secondary door (Figure 1-3) completely plugs the bore of the access shaft when in the raised
position to deny unauthorized personnel access to the LF.
1.2.7.1 Secondary Door Top. The top of the secondary door (Figure 1-3) has one large covered recess containing two
combination lock dials and a lock-release handle. One small covered recess contains a mechanical lock bolt actuator shaft and
another small recess contains a mechanical override access adapter. In normal operation, the mechanical locking-bolt actuator
gear shaft, the lock-release handle, and the mechanical override access adapter are not used. The mechanical locking-bolt
actuator gear shaft is used when manual retraction of the lock bolts is required. The mechanical override access adapter is used
only when the emergency drive shaft is used to manually lower the secondary door.
1.2.7.2 Secondary Door Bottom. A cavity in the bottom of the door (Figure 1-3) contains lock bolts, lock bolt linear
actuator assembly, actuator locking bar assembly, two combination locks, and a plate that engages the top of the EMA lifting
ball screw. All electrical connections to the secondary door are accomplished with two cables attached to receptacles on the
bottom of the door and housed in a flexible cable track.
1.2.7.2.1 Security Pin Assembly. The security pin (Figure 1-3) is a spring-loaded latch that can be retracted by either
of two independent 12-Vdc solenoids located in the bottom of the secondary door. When the secondary door is in the raised
position and lock bolts extended, the security pin secures the actuator locking bar preventing actuator locking bar retraction.
The security pin is capable of being retracted by a single solenoid. This feature allows the security pin to be operated if one
of the solenoids fails due to corrosion or circuit failure. In the event of loss of commercial power, the security pin can be
retracted using a 12-Vdc input to the SARC.
Change 4 1-7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
1.2.7.2.2 Actuator Locking Bar. The actuator locking bar (Figure 1-3) is a solenoid-actuated latching system used to
prevent rotation of the lock bolt actuator. When the solenoid is energized, the lock-release mechanism is retracted allowing
operation of the lock bolt actuator. There are two limit switches to provide position status of the actuator locking bar. The
actuator locking bar release mechanism is spring loaded in the locked (engaged) position. If LF commercial power is lost, the
actuator locking bar release mechanism can be operated manually.
1.2.7.2.3 Linear Actuator. The linear actuator (Figure 1-3) is located in the bottom of the secondary door and is powered
by 24 Vdc. Two limit switches provide position status of the lock bolts to the SDCA via the wiring and control set. Lock bolts
can be retracted when both security pin assembly and actuator locking bar release mechanism have been retracted. If LF
commercial power is lost and the security pin has been retracted, the lock bolts can be manually retracted.
1.2.8 Wiring and Control Set. The wiring and control set consists of a SARC located topside at the LF, SDCA, ESA,
an alarm horn in LER-1, EMA actuation switches located in the security pit, LER-1 and LER-2, EMA jog switches, and
associated wiring. In normal operation, the wiring and control set receives electrical power from the LF electrical distribution
system. The wiring and control set also controls and monitors status of EMA, MDC, ESS, and secondary door locking
mechanisms. If commercial power is unavailable, the wiring and control set can be powered by an external 12-Vdc topside
dc power source to retract the security pin.
1.2.8.1 Site Activation Remote Controller. The SARC (Figure 1-4) is portable MGE and provides a topside interface
to the secondary door wiring and control set. SARC is maintained at the Missile Support Base (MSB), dispatched to an LF
when site penetration is required, and connected to the wiring and control set through an interface cable in the security pit.
Switches and indicators on SARC allow topside command and control of secondary door and provide system status. SARC
also houses a piezoelectric audible alarm to alert topside personnel of secondary door movement and changes in system status.
An auxiliary power cable is also included to provide a 12-Vdc input from a vehicle battery.
1.2.8.2 Secondary Door Electrical Surge Arrestor. The secondary door ESA (Figure 1-1) is mounted on the wall in
LER-1 and provides Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filtering for all power and signal lines between the SARC and
security pit and SDCA in LER-1.
1.2.8.3 Secondary Door Control Assembly. The SDCA (Figure 1-5) is a wall-mounted cabinet in LER-1 that consists
of a front panel, a swing-out panel, and back panel assemblies. SDCA provides switches, lamp indicators, and controls to
monitor, control, and troubleshoot the secondary access system. SDCA also houses the firmware component required for
wiring and control set operation. Secondary access system includes secondary door, EMA, MDC, and ESS. SDCA circuitry
provides a complete command and control interface for secondary access system, PAS lights, timing circuits for LF site
penetration, monitoring of operational status, motion and status alarms, and a time-tagged record of all internal operations.
Electrical power is provided through the LF electrical distribution system and inputs to SDCA are filtered by internal EMI
filters. If commercial power is lost to the LF, an interface is provided in PAS for the use of a topside portable 120 ⁄ 208, 60
Hz, three-phase, Vac generator to provide ac power to MDC that supplies 24-Vdc power to SDCA. Major components of the
SDCA are described in the following paragraphs.
1.2.8.3.1 SDCA Firmware Message Log. The firmware message log records internal system commands and status
changes in nonvolatile memory within SDCA. The log records each successful or unsuccessful secondary door raise or lower
sequence, system operation status, and all system NO-GO and FAULT conditions. Each event is recorded with a time reference
received from SDCA microcontroller’s clock and an event ⁄ fault description. The log will hold 700 entries. Once the memory
capacity has been filled, new records overwrite the old records starting at the beginning of the memory log. Each site
penetration can be identified by its sequence of events that are recorded and the time tags applied to each record.
1.2.8.3.2 SDCA Front Panel. The SDCA front panel (Figure 1-5) contains control switches, status indicators, and an
audible alarm. Front panel controls include SDCA activation, jog controls, maintenance and operation mode selection, raise
and lower switches, lock bolt controls, and lamp test, reset, and audible cancel switches. Status indicators include operation
status for the control and wiring system as well as the state of charge of the ESS.
1.2.8.3.3 SDCA Swing-Out Panel. The swing-out panel (Figure 1-5) provides controls and indicators for external ac
power, internal dc power supplies, PAH lights, ESS control, and security pin coil tests. Indicators are provided for all status
reported on the SDCA and SARC control panels plus additional status for troubleshooting of the MDC, ESS, SDCA timers,
and secondary door components.
1-8 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
1.2.8.3.4 SDCA Back Panel. The SDCA back panel (Figure 1-5) houses secondary access system timer circuits, Circuit
Card Assemblies (CCAs) and associated wiring, and components providing an interface between SDCA and wiring and
control set, MDC, ESS, and EMA.
1.2.8.3.5 SDCA EMI Filters. The EMI filters are provided at each interface between SDCA, MDC, and ESS. These filters
prevent high frequency noise from entering or exiting the SDCA.
1.2.8.4 Secondary Door Alarms. The wiring and control set alarm system consists of an alarm junction box, a wall alarm
(Figure 1-1) located above the PAH entrance in LER-1, and two secondary piezoelectric alarms located on the SARC and
SDCA control panels. Alarms are designed to provide audible warnings that signal secondary door movement and system
status. The primary function of the alarm system is to provide a 3-second chirp alarm to warn personnel that a secondary door
raise or lower command has been initiated, followed by a steady alarm tone when secondary door is in motion. The wall alarm
only sounds for door movement. Alarms on the control panels sound for all conditions. The system also supports audible chirp
alarms that are used to test switch contacts and indicate various system functions. Chirp alarms are also used to signal the
secondary door security pin retraction window (10-minute timer) and are provided when system FAULT or NO-GO
condition(s) are detected. A 10-second intermittent alarm sounds when operation, maintenance, or enhanced maintenance
mode is entered.
1.2.8.5 EMA Activation Switches. The EMA activation switches (Figure 1-1) are located in LER-1 and LER-2 and a
switch with raise capability only is located topside in the security pit.
1.2.8.6 EMA Jog Switch. An EMA jog switch (Figure 1-1) is located on the wall in LER-2 in the vicinity of the EMA
with a second EMA jog switch located on the SDCA front panel. Each provides maintenance personnel with accessible
controls for positioning of the secondary door. [1] An additional EMA jog switch is located in LER-1 in the vicinity of the
PAS.<
1.2.9 Electromechanical Actuator System. The EMA system consists of the ESS, the MDC, and the EMA. Command
and control of the actuator system is provided by the wiring and control set.
1.2.9.1 Energy Storage System. The ESS (Figure 1-1) consists of a hardened cabinet located in LER-1 that houses a
Flywheel Power System (FPS). A high-velocity-rotational-composite-fiber flywheel assembly within the ESS provides an
output voltage of 290 to 590 Vdc to the MDC at 120 kW to power the EMA drive motor. ESS gets power from MDC and
stores it for use on demand when the LF commercial power cannot meet that demand during a raise sequence. Under normal
operating conditions, the ESS stores sufficient energy for at least one motion cycle (up and down) when site power is lost after
an initial lowering of the secondary door. ESS is capable of being fully replenished from site power and powering two motion
cycles after an initial lowering. ESS reports energy storage status to the SDCA via the wiring and control set.
1.2.9.2 Motor Drive Cabinet. The MDC (Figure 1-1) consists of a hardened cabinet located in LER-1 that houses a motor
drive assembly and components necessary to power and control movement of the EMA. MDC receives 120 ⁄ 208V, 60-Hz,
three-phase power from the [1][3][5] Launcher Distribution B (LDB) panel [T9] Switchboard SWBD-3<. MDC can control
movement of EMA to within a ±0.010-inch tolerance band. The MDC prevents the secondary door from overtraveling the
maximum extended length of approximately 199 inches and restricts the secondary door retracted length of approximately 51
inches. MDC reports position of secondary door to SDCA via the wiring and control set. In the event of loss of LF commercial
power, MDC is capable of operating on auxiliary electrical power provided by a topside portable 120 ⁄ 208-Vac, 60-Hz,
three-phase generator.
1.2.9.3 Electromechanical Actuator. The EMA (Figure 1-6) consists of a ball screw, motor, gearbox, gearbox safety pin,
brake assembly, and incremental and absolute encoders. These are located below the secondary door in LER-2. In normal
operation, power is provided to EMA from the MDC and ESS and is controlled by the wiring and control system via the
SDCA. EMA raises the secondary door at a nominal rate of 10 inches per second and lowers the secondary door at a nominal
rate of 5 inches per second. EMA has the ability to raise the secondary door to the fully-raised position with lock bolts
extended into the lock ring within 30 seconds. EMA will lower door to the fully-lowered position including retracting security
pin, actuator locking bar, and lock bolts within 60 seconds. The incremental and absolute encoders allow positioning control
and position status monitoring of the secondary door.
1.2.9.3.1 EMA Gearbox Safety Pin. The EMA gearbox safety pin (Figure 1-6) is a mechanical device used to physically
lock the drive gear within the EMA gearbox during maintenance to prevent secondary door movement. When the EMA
gearbox safety pin is engaged, the EMA gearbox drive gear is locked and fiber optic photoelectric sensors mounted on the
gearbox safety pin complete a circuit sending a signal to the SDCA. This signal forces the secondary access system into
enhanced maintenance mode, preventing any secondary door motion. When the EMA gearbox safety pin in disengaged, the
photoelectric beam is broken and the secondary access system remains in enhanced maintenance mode until the MODE switch
on the front panel of the SDCA is cycled to operation mode.
Change 4 1-9
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
1.2.9.3.2 Absolute and Incremental Encoders. Two encoders are used by the secondary access system to provide speed
and position feedback to the secondary access system wiring and control set. The incremental encoder is located on the top
of the EMA gearbox and is driven by the EMA motor through a shaft. A timing gear drives the absolute encoder, located on
the bottom of the EMA gearbox.
1.2.10 Secondary Door Command and Control Functions. Command and control of secondary door and its
subcomponents is provided by SDCA via wiring and control set. Inputs to control secondary access system are received by
SDCA from SARC, a switch in the security pit, and wall switches in the LERs. The actuator system has three modes of
operation: operation mode, maintenance mode, and enhanced maintenance mode. In operation mode, all input commands
received from any location are received and processed in order of priority by the SDCA. In maintenance mode, all topside
controls and the raise and lower switches are locked out, and only jog commands are processed. Enhanced maintenance mode
is entered when the EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged. In enhanced maintenance mode, all secondary door movement
commands are locked out. Major access system command and control functions are described in the following paragraphs.
1.2.10.1 Site Penetration Sequence. Connection of a SARC in the security pit permits an operator to begin a site
penetration sequence. When SARC POWER switch is set to ON and ACTIVATE ⁄ DEACTIVATE switch is set to ACTIVATE,
the SDCA initiates a control system self-test; sets the personnel access shaft lights to ON; and boots up the MDC and ESS.
During the self-test, the ONLINE light flashes, then changes to the steady ON state when ESS State of Charge (SOC) reaches
25 percent. The operator then sets SECURITY PIN ENGAGE switch on the SARC to ENGAGE initiating a nonadjustable
64 (±4) minute site penetration delay timer. When the 64-minute timer times out, a 10-minute timer is started and the
secondary door security pin is retracted. Activation of the 10-minute timer is signaled by a chirp alarm on the SARC. During
this 10-minute window, the site penetration team can manually unlock either of the secondary door combination locks,
manually or automatically retract the actuator locking bar release mechanism and the lock bolts from the locking ring in the
wall of the access shaft, and lower the secondary door. The SARC controls the automatic operation of the security pin, actuator
locking bar, lock bolts, and EMA. If lock bolts have not been retracted prior to expiration of the 10-minute timer or if a
secondary door raise command is initiated anytime during site penetration, both timer circuits are reset and the secondary door
cannot be lowered from topside until the 64-minute timing sequence has been reinitiated.
1.2.10.2 Raise Command. In operation mode, a secondary door raise command from any source immediately
commands the MDC to raise the secondary door and extend the secondary door lock bolts. A raise command can be initiated
from the SARC, the security pit raise switch, or from activation switches in the LER. Once commanded, a raise command
overrides any other command. A 3-second intermittent audible alarm from the LER wall alarm and two piezoelectric alarms
on the SDCA and SARC control panels are initiated, followed by a steady alarm tone when secondary door is in motion. A
raise command can be overridden by an SDCA or LER lower or off command. The SARC cannot stop a raise command. In
maintenance mode, the raise command is locked out.
1.2.10.3 Lower Command. In operation mode, a secondary door lower command can be initiated from SARC topside,
SDCA, or wall activation switches in the LER. A lower command is overridden by a raise command input from any source.
A lower command from the SDCA or the LER wall switches can override a raise command. In order for a SARC lower
command to be accepted and processed by the SDCA, the security pin, actuator locking bar, and lock bolts must be retracted.
Following a raise command, the secondary door can be lowered from topside using the full-site penetration sequence including
time delays. The time delay is bypassed for a lower command initiated from the LERs. In maintenance mode, all lower
command inputs are locked out and can only be reactivated from SDCA by placing system back into operation mode.
1.2.10.4 Off Command. A secondary door off command is initiated from the SARC topside or from the front panel of
the SDCA in LER-1 in either operation, maintenance, or enhanced maintenance mode. An off command initiated from the
SARC halts secondary door downward motion when a lower command has been initiated, but cannot override a raise
command. An off command initiated from the SDCA halts any secondary door upward or downward motion overriding either
a raise or lower command. Unless otherwise locked out, secondary door movement can be reinitiated at anytime approximately
1 second after completion of the off command and is accomplished by the initiation of a raise or lower command from any
activation switch. The off command will also stop any lock bolt movement, reset the secondary access system timer circuits,
and in maintenance mode, will override a jog command halting secondary door movement.
1.2.10.5 Jog Command. The jog command is used to raise or lower the secondary door enough to facilitate maintenance
on the secondary door or EMA. This command operates only when the actuator system is placed in maintenance mode and
ESS SOC is equal to or greater than 62.5 percent. To initiate the jog command, the jog command switch must be actuated for
approximately 1 second before being released. This will allow the circuit to be energized. A jog command (JOG UP or JOG
DOWN) can be commanded from jog switches in LER-1 or LER-2.
1-10 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
1.2.10.6 Site Penetration Delay Timer. A 64 (±4) minute timer is located in the SDCA and delays site penetration to
prevent unauthorized entry to the LERs. The 64-minute timer is initiated from the SARC when SECURITY PIN ENGAGE
switch is set to ENGAGE during a site penetration sequence. If the SDCA receives a raise or off command from any source,
or if power is cycled to the wiring and control set during the site penetration sequence, the 64-minute timing cycle is reset.
A lower command issued from any LER activation switch bypasses the 64-minute time delay.
1.2.10.7 Security Pin Retract Timer. The 10-minute timer is located in the SDCA and is initiated at the expiration of
the 64-minute timing cycle. At the initiation of the security pin retract timer, the security pin is retracted, an audible alarm
sounds, and the SARC SECURITY PIN RETRACTED indicator illuminates. This timed window allows an operator to
manually open the secondary door combination locks and retract the actuator locking bar and lock bolts. The security pin
retract command is sent by the SDCA at the start of the 10-minute timing cycle, and the security pin remains retracted until
the 10-minute timer expires. The lock bolts must be retracted prior to the expiration of the 10-minute timing cycle. A SARC
lower command cannot be completed unless the security pin, actuator locking bar, and lock bolts have been retracted.
1.2.10.8 System NO-GO Condition. A secondary access system NO-GO condition is defined as a condition where one
or more components of the secondary access system fails and could prevent access system from being fully operational. A
NO-GO condition is indicated by the NO-GO indicator. The reset switch will clear the NO-GO register, but will not clear the
fault condition. If the condition remains, the NO-GO indicator will extinguish while the reset switch is active but then
reilluminates. The SDCA monitors for NO-GO conditions at a rate of at least once per second and logs the event in the SDCA
firmware message log.
1.2.10.9 System FAULT Condition. A secondary access system fault condition is defined as a condition where one or
more components of the secondary access system is ⁄ are functioning outside of allowable tolerances or component(s) of
redundant circuitry have failed, but the system is still operational. The reset switch will clear the fault registers but not the
condition. The SDCA monitors the system for fault conditions at a rate of at least once per second and logs the event in the
SDCA firmware message log.
1.2.11 Telescoping Ladder. A telescoping ladder (Figure 1-1) is installed between the top of the secondary door and the
upper part of the PAS to permit descent and ascent by personnel. As the secondary door is lowered, the three sections of the
ladder extend resulting in a completely extended ladder when the door is fully lowered. [0] Fixed ladders are installed in place
of the telescoping ladder.< A folding ladder provides access between the ground surface and the top of the [1][3][5] telescoping
[0] fixed< ladder.
1.2.12 Secondary Door Alternate Operation. The secondary door can be lowered using an auxiliary power input
provided to the MDC by a topside 120 ⁄ 208-Vac, 60-Hz, three-phase portable generator when commercial power is
unavailable. The backup ac generator is connected to the MDC through a connector in the PAS using the circuit breaker
assembly set. A 12-Vdc cable is also included as part of SARC and permits alternate retraction of the security pin with a
vehicle battery. When the security pin has been retracted and at least one combination lock has been unlocked, the actuator
locking bar and the lock bolts can be retracted.
1.2.13 Secondary Door Manual Operation. Lowering the secondary door can also be accomplished manually. An
external 12-Vdc source is required to initiate the 64- and 10-minute timers and retract the security pin. The combination locks
can be opened at any time within either timing cycle. When the security pin has been retracted, the lock-release handle can
be turned and the lock bolts can be manually retracted. After the mechanical override access adapter is removed from the door,
the emergency drive shaft is then lowered through the hole to the EMA gearbox. A funnel-shaped opening in the actuator
guides the end of emergency drive shaft so that it engages the EMA gearbox. Operation of the emergency drive shaft is
accomplished by a portable electric drill. When the secondary door is lowered by manual method, positioning of the door will
be the responsibility of the operator.
1.2.14 Alarm Set. The personnel access alarm set is comprised of cables that connect various detectors to indicate
authorized and unauthorized entry into the launcher PAS. The set operates on dc power from the LF alarm set group. Detection
components comprising the system operate in series and either an open or grounded circuit will cause an Inner Zone (IZ) alarm
at the Launch Control Center (LCC).
1.2.15 Combination Locks. Turning the dial of vault door combination lock or either of the secondary door combination
locks more than five dial divisions will independently cause an open in the circuit by means of sensitive switches operated
by a cam on the shaft of each lock dial. Combination locks must be scrambled and set to number 40 to close the circuit.
Opening the primary door opens contacts in the magnetic switch installed in the shaft lip, resulting in an open in the system.
Penetration of the security pit vault door will ground the alarm circuit, causing an alarm.
Change 4 1-11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-2. Security Pit (Sheet 1 of 2)
1-12
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-2. Security Pit (Sheet 2)
1-13
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-3. Secondary Door (Sheet 1 of 2)
1-14
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-3. Secondary Door (Sheet 2)
1-15
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-4. Site Activation Remote Controller (SARC) Set
1-16
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-5. Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) (Sheet 1 of 3)
1-17
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-5. Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) (Sheet 2)
1-18 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-5. Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) (Sheet 3)
1-19
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 1-6. Electromechanical Actuator (EMA)
1-20 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 2
TOOLS AND MATERIALS
2.1 TOOLS AND MATERIALS.
2.2 SPECIAL TOOLS.

Maintenance tools and equipment are listed in Table 2-1, and list of materials in Table 2-2. Tools and materials required for
vault door forced-entry are listed in Table 10-1.
2.2.1 Combination Change Key Modification.
a. Place combination change key P ⁄ N 68-007 in vise as shown in Figure 2-1. Tangs shall be parallel to vise jaws
and to right when facing vise. Key shall extend 4 inches below top of vise jaws.
Combination change key damage is possible. Hammer or mechanical means shall not be used
to bend key. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
b. Using hand force only, pull key forward to make a 90-degree bend, as shown.
c. Using hacksaw, cut bent-over key to make a handle 1-1 ⁄ 2-inches long, as shown.
2-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-1. Combination Change Key Modification
2-2
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 2-1. Maintenance Tools and Equipment
AN Type Designation ⁄ Model

Nomenclature No. ⁄ National Stock No. Use and Application
Bonding Meter (milliohmmeter) Shallcross Model 673D Used to perform bonding checks on
(6625-00-245-6444) secondary access system components.
or
Avtron T-207
(6625-00-712-4255)
[1][3][5] Breakout Box Ogden ALC Dwg 7027463 Provide test jacks for checking Inner
Zone (IZ) alarm circuits at filter
assembly [1] URD 10480 [3][5] URD
10443<.
Breathing Apparatus, self contained 4240-01-095-0892 Protect personnel in LER from toxic
4240-00-542-4087 gases when LF primary or secondary
door is closed.
Camshaft Nut Adapter Local manufacture Used to remove unlocking camshaft
from secondary door (Figure 2-2).
Carpenter’s Level, 72 inch P ⁄ N 42-572 Used to align guide rail segments.
Carpenter’s Level, 4 foot Local purchase Used during secondary door replace-
ment to check level of secondary door
prior to lowering.
Chain Hoist 3950-00-092-9064 Remove and replace MDC transformer.
(or equivalent)
Combination Change Key *68-007 Change combination of lock on
5120-01-471-3581AH A-vault door and secondary door.
(For optional short size, shorten per
Paragraph 2.2.1)
Drill Bit, 21 ⁄ 32-inch, 6-inch long, Type R56, Stock No. 91442 Used to drill holes in Personnel Access
tapered shank (CAGE 16568) Hatch (PAH) support bracket shims.
EMA Lifting Sling Beaver Aerospace Used for replacement of the Electro-
BA22901 mechanical Actuator (EMA).
EMA Orientation Guide Beaver Aerospace Used to align EMA for proper
BA22995 installation (Figure 2-7).
Local manufacture
ESS Cabinet Casters Beaver Aerospace Used to move ESS on floor. Used with
BA22973 pallet jack.
ESS Lifting Sling Beaver Aerospace Used to remove and replace ESS
BA22968 cabinet.
ESS Platform Shoring Set Beaver Aerospace Used to shore LER-1 hinged platform
BA22939 when removing or replacing Energy
Storage System (ESS).
Eyewash Bottle, portable McMaster-Carr Supply Company Flushing eyes or skin exposed to toxic
P ⁄ N 5531-T-14 solution.
615-P-5531-T-14
Change 4 2-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 2-1. Maintenance Tools and Equipment - Continued

Faceshield No. 4 4240-00-542-2048 Protect eyes and face when using

L-F-36C solvent and metal conditioner.
Feeler Gauge (Go/No-Go gauge) Manufacture per Figure 2-5 Used in the alignment of guide rail
segments.
Gloves, chemical resistant Required when using dry cleaning
(small) 8415-00-753-6551 solvent or alcohol.
(medium) 8415-00-753-6552
(large) 8415-00-753-6553
(xlarge) 8415-00-753-6554
Goggles, chemical 4240-01-292-2818 Protect eyes when using toxic solvent
and metal conditioner.
Jack Posts (3) McMaster-Carr 8808T14 Used to support secondary door in
15,000 pound steel jack post access shaft during secondary door
Local purchase replacement.
Jumper Lead Local manufacture using a Discharge filters.
10k ohm ⁄ 5W in-line resistor
Ladder, temporary egress SK2-2233-094 Provide emergency egress.
Local manufacture
Lock Bolt Sling Local manufacture Used to remove primary door lock
bolt, or along with the MDC lifting
fixture, to replace MDC transformer
T1 (Figure 2-3).
Machine Screw, 2 inch, 1 ⁄ 2-13 UNC 5035-NL Remove secondary door mechanical
(or local purchase) override access adapter.
MDC Lifting Fixture Beaver Aerospace Remove and replace MDC transformer
BA22996 (Figure 2-8).
Local manufacture
Multimeter Fluke 8025A Perform continuity and voltage checks
6625-01-147-6281 on wiring. Secondary access system
maintenance.
Oiler 4930-00-262-8870 Apply oil.
Pallet Jack Bishamon Used to move ESS on floor. Used with
BS-55H ESS cabinet casters.
Quick-Release Pins (6) 5340-00-715-2297 Used with steel jack posts.
Rotary File, McMaster-Carr Supply Company Debur secondary door gear shaft nut,
cylindrical-radius end, 4297A25 spindle shaft nut, or camshaft nut
1 ⁄ 2-inch-diameter head, setscrew hole.
1 ⁄ 4-inch shank, 1-inch long
Rubber Gloves Local purchase Protect hands when using solvents and
metal conditioner.
2-4 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

Screwdriver, applied motion Supplied with replacement lock Used on secondary door J-box lock
bolt drive or equivalent 2 mm flat bolt drive input ⁄ output connector
screwdriver screws.
Secondary Door J2 and J7 Test Plugs Local manufacture Check operation of secondary door
lock scramble and lock bolt sensitive
switches (Figure 2-6).
Secondary Door Emergency Drive *8742809-10 (Depot manufacture) Three-piece, 20-foot shaft can be
Shaft lowered through secondary door
permitting manual operation of EMA
from top of secondary door.
Secondary Door Lifting Eyebolt McMaster-Carr Supply Company Installed in top of secondary door to
(2 required) 3013T58 plain, 1-1 ⁄ 2-inch provide sling attach points when
shaft diameter, 3-1 ⁄ 2-inch replacing secondary door.
length (threads), 2-1 ⁄ 2-inch
eye inside diameter,
19,600-pound lifting weight
Shims, guide rail 3037-1034 Used to align guide rail segments.
or
Local fabrication per Figure 2-4
Shims, support bracket BACS40R40E47F Used to shim behind support bracket
assemblies.
Sling Set Local manufacture Remove secondary door.
Socket, 1-1 ⁄ 2-inch or 3 ⁄ 4-inch drive, Snap-On TS321 Install and remove nylon secondary
6-point (preferred) or 12-point, deep or door spindle shaft nuts and camshaft
well McMaster-Carr Supply Company nut (9512605-10).
5542A15
Socket Head Screw 5120-00-596-1199 Used to remove and install guide rail.
Segment Screws
Attachment, 3 ⁄ 8 inch
Spindle Shaft Nut Adapter Local manufacture Used to remove lock spindle shaft
from secondary door (Figure 2-2).
Steel Bracing Dexion Used with steel jack posts.
2 sections 3 feet long Local purchase
1 section 2 feet long
Steel Wire Brush, Local purchase Clean metal prior to conditioning for
corrosion resistant paint.
Stepladder, 8 foot Local purchase Provide personnel access to elevated
spaces.
Straightedge, 14-inches Local purchase Used during telescoping ladder rung
inspection.
Change 4 2-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

Tap (1-1/2-12UNF-2B) McMaster-Carr Supply Company Clear threads of secondary door lock
2521A862 spindle shaft and unlocking camshaft
(CAGE 3A054) nut openings of dirt, grease, and metal
filings prior to installation of nylon
shaft nuts.
Test Probe *25-48703-1 Provide test jacks for electrical check
Connector-Adapter of vault door. (Refer to T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-4.)
Test Probe Connector-Adapter *25-48703-6 Provide test jacks for trouble analysis
[1] *25-48703-7 of security alarm system at security
pit. (Refer to T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-4.)
Torque Wrench, 5120-00-221-7971 Torque screws securing primary door
1 ⁄ 4-inch drive, preformed packing.
0 to 25 inch-pound(s)
Torque Wrench, 5120-00-720-0714 Torque fasteners.
3 ⁄ 8-inch drive,
Torque Wrench, 5120-00-904-1022 Torque fasteners securing guide rails.
3 ⁄ 8-inch drive,
Torque Wrench, 5120-00-294-9506 Torque bolts.
1 ⁄ 2-inch drive,
700 to 1,600 inch-pound(s)
Torque Wrench, 5120-00-221-7945 Belly band installation.
3 ⁄ 4-inch drive,
1,200 to 4,800 inch-pound(s)
Torque Wrench, 5120-00-177-6801 Torque fasteners.
Truck-mounted Crane Not applicable Lift heavy equipment.
* No authorized equivalent
2-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 2-2. List of Materials

Abrasive Paper, Local purchase Remove corrosion from metal.

silicon carbide,
280 and 400 grit
Adhesive MMM-A-1617, Type II Cement neoprene rubber gaskets into
8040-00-664-4318 (pint) place. Attach washers to upper bracket
8040-00-290-4301 (quart) of telescoping ladder.
Adhesive Square 34-8506-1873-6 Required for installation of MDC and
ESS belly bands use with P ⁄ N
57NYLN-156-125-125
Alcohol, isopropyl 6810-00-205-6786 General cleaning.
TT-I-735
Antiseize Compound 8030-00-251-3980 Lubrication and corrosion inhibitor.
Bulb, LED, green FF200-OAG-28B Replacement bulb for Secondary Door
Ledtronics, Inc., Control Assembly (SDCA) (front
Torrance, CA 90505 panel) POWER indicator lamp only.
Bulb, LED, green FF200-OAG-014B Replacement bulb for Site Activation
Ledtronics, Inc., Remote Controller (SARC) or SDCA
Torrance, CA 90505 (front panel) green indicator lamps
(except SDCA (front panel) POWER
indicator).
Bulb, LED, yellow FF200-OUY-014B Replacement bulb for SARC and
Ledtronics, Inc., SDCA (front panel) yellow indicator
Torrance, CA 90505 lamps.
Bulb, LED, red FF200-OUR-014B Replacement bulb for SARC and
Ledtronics, Inc., SDCA (front panel) red indicator
Torrance, CA 90505 lamps.
Clay, modeling Local purchase Measure amount of lock bolt
engagement on primary door latch.
Cleaning Cloth Local purchase Clean equipment.
Corrosion-Inhibiting Compound MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 2 Corrosion protection for primary door
retainer ring screws.
Corrosion-Preventive Compound MIL-PRF-81309 Corrosion prevention.
Corrosion-Resistant Steel Wool Local purchase Remove corrosion from metal.
Desiccant MIL-D-3464 Placed in security pit and secondary
door.
Dry Cleaning Solvent MIL-PRF-680, Type III Clean surfaces prior to cementing
6850-01-377-1811 (pint) neoprene gaskets and exterior surfaces
6850-01-377-1808 (quart) of equipment.
6850-01-377-1809 (gallon)
6850-01-331-3349 (5 gallon)
Change 11 2-7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 2-2. List of Materials - Continued

Fuse, 3A, type 3AG 0312003 Provides SDCA timer control Circuit
Littelfuse Card Assemblies (CCAs) (A3A1
Des Plaines, IL 60016 through A3A4) circuit protection in
fuse holder F1.
Fuse, 3A, type MDL3 Copper Bussman Replacement for secondary door J-box
St. Louis, MO 63178 (URD 10499) terminal board fuses F1
and F2.
Fuse, 4A, type AGC4 Copper Bussman Replacement for secondary door J-box
St. Louis, MO 63178 (URD 10499) terminal board fuses F3
and F4.
Fuse, 5A, type 3AG 0312005 Provides SDCA power command CCA
Littelfuse (A2A3) circuit protection in fuse
Des Plaines, IL 60016 holders F1 and F2.
Fuse, 5A, type 3AG 0312005 Provides SARC set circuit protection
Littelfuse in fuse holders F1, F2, and in cable
Des Plaines, IL 60016 W3.
Grease, general purpose MIL-PRF-23827 Lubrication of secondary door lock
bolts.
Industrial Tape Local purchase Secure polyethylene sheet on EMA
(duct tape) manual drive guide.
Lubricant (air dry) 9150-00-754-0064 Lubricate primary door lock bolt and
MIL-L-23398 threaded shaft, and secondary door
guide rails.
Lubricant, gear oil MIL-L-2105, 90 weight Lubricate oil seals.
Lubricant MIL-G-21164 Lubricate primary door hinge and
(molybdenum disulfide) actuator clevis pins.
Lumber, Local purchase Cribbing to support secondary door on
4 by 4-inch by 5-foot cribbing ground and to support secondary door
in access shaft during maintenance.
Oil, Gear MIL-PRF-2105, No. 90 Used on combination lock spindle oil
seals.
Paint, nonskid Kelley Technical Coatings Used to provide a nonslip surface to
Super X Convoy ladder steps and rungs.
P ⁄ N 811
Local purchase
2-8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 2-2. List of Materials - Continued

Pencil ⁄ Marker Local purchase Mark guide rail and support bracket
(non-corrosive) assembly shims for reinstallation.
Plastic Square 57NYLN-156-125-125 Required for installation of MDC and
ESS belly bands use with P ⁄ N
34-8506-1873-6.
Polyethylene Sheet, Local purchase Cover manual drive guide on EMA.
4-mil clear
Primer Kelley Technical Coatings Used in conjunction with Super X
#219 Epoxy Metal Primer Convoy paint.
Local purchase
Sealing Compound MIL-S-8784B, Class B-1 ⁄ 2 Protect wiring in security pit control
station and junction box.
Silicone Grease (DC 33) A-A-59173, Type I Lubrication and corrosion inhibitor.
9150-00-145-0161
(8-ounce can)
9150-00-445-7819
(10-pound can)
Silicone Rubber Sealant Dow Corning RTV 3145 Seal crevices on top of secondary
MIL-A-46146A, Amend. 2, door.
Type III
Silicone Spray Lubricant 9150-00-823-7860 Lubrication and corrosion inhibitor.
FSN VV-D-1078
Sleeving, black, heat shrinkable 5970-01-060-0974 Repair minor damage to the A-vault
RayChem RP-4800, No. 1 cable.
Tape, nonskid McMaster Carr Used to provide a nonslip surface to
(Code 39428) ladder steps and rungs.
P ⁄ N 6970T65
Local purchase
Threadlocker MIL-S-46163, Type II, Grade M Retains adjustment on A-vault sensi-
(Loctite 222MS) 8030-01-069-3046 tive switches with metal screws and
P ⁄ N 22231 metal nuts only. (Sensitive switches
with plastic nuts will not require
threadlocker). Also used to secure lock
stand bolts, and combination lock
mounting screws.
Threadlocker MIL-S-46163, Type II, Used on Electromagnetic Interference
(Loctite 242MS) Grade N (EMI) filter and SDCA standoff screws
when required.
Change 11 2-9
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-2. Spindle Shaft Nut and Camshaft Nut Adapters
2-10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-3. Lock Bolt Sling
2-11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-4. Guide Rail Shim
2-12
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-5. Go ⁄ No-Go Gauge
2-13
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-6. Secondary Door Test Plugs
2-14 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-7. EMA Orientation Guide
2-15
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 2-8. MDC Lifting Fixture
2-16 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 3
INSPECTION
3.1 INSPECTION.
3.1.1 Telescoping Ladder. Telescoping ladder shall be inspected each time maintenance is performed on ladder. Inspect
telescoping ladder in accordance with Table 3-1.
3.1.2 Primary Door Hand-Driven Linear Actuator. The antirotation feature of the hand-driven linear actuator is
inspected as follows:
After crank is released, weight of door could cause crank to free spin. Personnel shall not
attempt to stop free-spinning crank. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
a. Open the primary door about 6 inches and release crank.
b. If crank auto rotates (free spins), replace hand-driven linear actuator per Paragraph 5.5.2.
3.1.3 **NSP** **ESD** SDCA Delay Timer Inspection. A visual inspection of the Secondary Door Control Assembly
(SDCA) delay timer circuits shall be performed anytime maintenance has been performed within the SDCA back panel, or
when otherwise directed. The inspection shall consist of a visual inspection of the timer control Circuit Card Assemblies
(CCAs) (A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4), delay timer relays (DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4, and DT5), SDCA cable W10, SDCA
cable W20, and associated wiring for evidence of damage, tampering, unauthorized components, or devices. Table 5-7, Figure
3-1, and Figure 5-44 shall be used to determine proper delay timer circuit configuration. Upon completion of the SDCA delay
timer inspection, a secondary access system timer functional checkout shall be performed in accordance with Table 4-2. If any
discrepancies are noted during the performance of the SDCA delay timer inspection, immediately notify Missile Maintenance
Operations Center (MMOC) and proceed as directed.
NOTE
If this procedure is being performed as a result of maintenance within the SDCA back panel
and secondary access system has been shutdown, proceed to step b; otherwise, proceed to
step a.
a. If not previously accomplished, perform preparation for SDCA maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.1.
NOTE
• Unless loose connections, connectors, cable damage, or tampering is suspected, cables
and wiring shall be visually inspected and disconnection for inspection of cable plugs or
connector jacks is not required.
• If any discrepancies are noted during the inspection portion of this procedure (steps b
through e), immediately notify MMOC and proceed as directed.
b. In the SDCA back panel, locate and inspect the SDCA delay timers (DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4, and DT5) using Fig-
ure 3-1, Figure 5-44 and Table 5-7, as follows:
(1) Visually inspect exterior of delay relay timers DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4, and DT5 for damaged components, loose
connections, or indications of unauthorized tampering or splices.
(2) Locate and visually inspect cable W10. Verify that cable W10 P1 is securely connected to controller interconnect
CCA A3A5 J10 and that cable, connector, and wiring are free of damage, burn marks, indications of unauthorized
tampering or splices, and are properly routed in accordance with Figure 3-1.
Change 4 3-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
c. In the SDCA back panel, locate and inspect the SDCA timer control CCAs (A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4), as
follows:
(1) Visually inspect timer control CCAs. Ensure CCA A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4 for damaged components, loose
connections, chipped or missing conformal coating, and indications of unauthorized tampering or splices.
(2) Verify that all cables are properly routed and connected to CCAs.
d. Locate and visually inspect cable W20. Verify that cable W20 P1 is securely connected to controller interconnect
CCA A3A5 J21 and that cable, connector, and wiring are free of damage, burn marks, and indications of unautho-
rized tampering or splices.
e. Visually inspect all SDCA back panel cables, wiring, cable clamps, and hardware to ensure no interference or
damage will occur when SDCA swing-out panel is closed and secured.
NOTE
If this procedure is being performed as a result of maintenance within the SDCA back panel,
return to procedure being performed; otherwise, proceed to step f.
f. Perform SDCA post maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
g. Perform secondary access system timer functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-2.
3.1.4 **NSP** Secondary Door Security Pin Inspection. A visual inspection of the secondary door security pin shall
be performed anytime either of the two secondary door bottom plate covering the actuator locking bar has been removed. This
procedure shall consist of a visual inspection of the security pin, security pin mounting hardware, and secondary door cable
BA22830 to verify that no visual evidence of damage, tampering, unauthorized components, or devices is noted. If any
discrepancies are noted during the performance of the security pin inspection, immediately notify MMOC and proceed as
directed.
a. On actuator locking bar (Figure 5-17, 75), visually inspect secondary door security pin (73) and security pin sole-
noids for missing or loose hardware, damaged components, or signs of tampering.
b. On actuator locking bar, visually inspect security pin and security pin solenoid wiring and connectors for loose
connections, damage, burn marks, indications of tampering, and unauthorized splices or devices.
c. Visually inspect Secondary Door Electromechanical Assembly (SDEA) cable BA22830 (72) and all visible con-
nectors for loose connections, damage, burn marks, indications of tampering, and unauthorized splices or devices.
d. Return to maintenance being accomplished.
3-2 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 3-1. **NSP** SDCA (URD 10494) Delay Timer Relay Schematic
3-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 3-1. Telescoping Ladder Inspection
Step Procedure Trouble Corrective Action Required
Secondary door movement during telescoping ladder maintenance is hazardous. Ensure secondary door
is in the raised position with lock bolts extended prior to performing maintenance on the telescoping
ladder assembly. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
This inspection can be performed with the telescoping ladder installed or removed from the Personnel
Access Shaft (PAS). Telescoping ladder shall be in the retracted (collapsed) condition if installed in
the PAS. If telescoping has been removed from the PAS, omit step 1, and proceed to step 2.
1. If not previously accomplished, ensure Ensure all personnel have exited the
Launcher Equipment Rooms (LERs) LERs and using Site Activation
are clear of personnel and that Remote Controller (SARC), raise and
secondary door is in the fully-raised lock secondary door IAW T.O.
position with lock bolts extended. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
2. Inspect for loose rungs and obvious Any loose rung or obvious Replace damaged ladder section with
structural damage. structural damage. similar section or replace entire ladder
assembly.
Inspect for bent ladder rung by laying Any rung bent more than Replace damaged ladder section with
a 14-inch straightedge on each rung at 0.1 inch or any loose rung. similar section or replace entire ladder
two points around the circumference assembly.
of the rung about 90 degrees apart. If
rungs are bent, measure distance
between rung and straight edge.
3. Inspect shear bolts ⁄ nuts (Figure 5-14, Shear bolts loose or failed. Replace damaged shear bolts IAW
14) on bottom end of lower ladder Figure 5-14 and Table 3-2.
section.
4. Inspect bottom ladder feet for damage. Brackets broken or bent. Replace bottom ladder feet IAW
Paragraph 5.6.3.1.
5. Inspect bottom brackets for damage. Brackets broken or bent. Replace bottom brackets IAW
Paragraph 5.6.3.1.
6. Inspect all ladder stops (Figure 5-15, Loose stop. Replace stops. If required, replace
6, 7). stops IAW Figure 5-15 and Table 3-2.
Stop damaged or contact Replace primary stop plate or primary
surface notched deeper than angle stop as required. Replace stops
1/16 inch. IAW Figure 5-15 and Table 3-2.
7. Inspect all welds on ladder. Crack in weld. Replace ladder assembly IAW
Paragraph 5.6.3.1.
3-4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 3-2. Telescoping Ladder Order of Assembly
3-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 3-2. Telescoping Ladder Hardware Torque Requirements
Ladder Component Torque Requirement
Upper Ladder Bracket Bolts 800 (±100) inch-pounds

Telescoping Ladder Upper Mounting Nuts (right, left) 200 (±25) inch-pounds.
Ladder Stop Nuts When completely removed, torque four nuts in cross
pattern to 13.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds, then tighten and torque
in cross pattern to 54 (±1) inch-pounds.
Ladder Section Cover Plate Cap Screws 20 (±1) inch-pounds.
Lower Mounting Bracket Bolts (right, left) 800 (±100) inch-pounds.
Ladder Feet Shear Nuts (right, left) 27 (±1) inch-pounds.
3-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 4
CHECKOUT AND TROUBLE ANALYSIS
4.1 CHECKOUT.
4.1.1 Secondary Access System Functional Checkout. The secondary access system functional checkout (Table 4-1)
shall be used to test overall secondary access system operation following maintenance, unless otherwise directed by procedure.
4.1.2 **NSP** Secondary Access System Timer Functional Checkout. The secondary access system delay timer
relay circuits are housed within the back panel of the SDCA and consist of two redundant 64 (±4) minute site penetration delay
timers, two redundant 10-minute lock bolt retract timers, and a 5-second timer used for wiring and control system timing. The
secondary access system timer functional checkout (Table 4-2) electrically tests the 64 (±4) minute and 10-minute timer
circuits and shall be performed following maintenance within the SDCA back panel assembly or whenever directed by
procedure.
4.1.3 Secondary Door Security Pin Functional Checkout. The secondary door security pin functional checkout (Table
4-3) shall be performed whenever maintenance has been performed on security pin mechanism or as a periodic inspection, as
required.
4.1.4 Secondary Door Electromechanical Assembly Functional Checkout. The secondary door electromechanical
assembly functional checkout (Table 4-4) shall be performed when directed by maintenance procedure.
4-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-1. Secondary Access System Functional Checkout
Step Procedure Observation Trouble
1. Perform secondary access system

startup IAW Table 5-2, if
required.
2. On Secondary Door Control MAINTENANCE (Figure 4-1, 9) OPERATION indicator is illuminated:
Assembly (SDCA) front panel, indicator is illuminated.
verify secondary access system On SDCA front panel, momentarily set
is in MAINTENANCE mode. MODE (10) switch to MAINTENANCE.
MAINTENANCE (9) indicator illuminates.
OPERATION (11) indicator extinguishes.
Performing maintenance under an insecure secondary door is hazardous. Whenever secondary door is raised
to perform maintenance, ensure EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged and system enters enhanced maintenance
mode prior to performing maintenance. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
When EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged, system enters enhanced maintenance mode and all secondary
door movement functions are locked out. Ensure secondary door is properly positioned prior to engagement
of EMA gearbox safety pin.
3. If not previously accomplished,

ensure Electromechanical
Actuator (EMA) gearbox safety
pin is engaged IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
loosen nine fasteners securing
SDCA front panel assembly and
open panel to provide access to
SDCA swing-out panel switches
and indicators (Figure 4-2).
NOTE
Steps 5 and 6 shall be repeated for each of the three Launcher Equipment Room (LER) EMA activation
switch positions (URD 11402, 11403, and 11404) in any order to facilitate ease of maintenance.
5. On EMA activation switch, Verify the following:

momentarily press RAISE
button.
Double beep is heard from Isolate fault as follows:
SDCA front panel audible alarm
(Figure 4-1, 18).
4-2
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-1. Secondary Access System Functional Checkout - Continued
5. - On SDCA swing-out panel, a. If alarm (SP1) only fails to sound,

Cont WALL RAISE (Figure 4-2, 104) test alarm IAW Paragraph 4.2.4.3.1
indicator is momentarily illumi- and Table 4-8, Menu Option 5.
nated. Replace alarm (SP1) IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.3.7, as required.
b. If indicator only fails to illuminate,
replace SDCA primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1.
c. If both alarm and indicator fail,
perform trouble analysis on faulty
switch IAW Secondary Access
System (SAS) schematic [1] FO-1 [3]
FO-2 [5] FO-3 <, as applicable.
6. On EMA activation switch, Verify the following: Perform trouble analysis IAW step 5.
momentarily press LOWER
button.
Double beep is heard from
(Figure 4-1, 18).
On SDCA swing-out panel,
WALL LOWER (Figure 4-2,
105) indicator is momentarily
illuminated.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each of
the three LER EMA activation
switch positions, then proceed to
step 8.
8. Set wall EMA jog switch to JOG Verify the following: Perform trouble analysis IAW step 5.
UP.
(Figure 4-1, 18).
WALL JOG UP (Figure 4-2,
102) indicator is illuminated
while switch is held.
4-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9. Set wall EMA jog switch to JOG Verify the following: Perform trouble analysis IAW step 5.
DOWN.
(Figure 4-1, 18).
WALL JOG DOWN (Figure 4-2,
103) indicator is illuminated
10. [1] Repeat steps 8 and 9 for
second EMA wall jog switch,
then proceed to step 11.<
11. On SDCA front panel, momen- Verify the following: Isolate fault as follows:
tarily set JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN
(Figure 4-1, 12) switch to JOG Double beep is heard from the a. If alarm (SP1) only fails to sound,
UP. SDCA front panel audible alarm test alarm IAW Paragraph 4.2.4.3.1
(18). and Table 4-8, Menu Option 5.
Replace alarm (SP1) IAW Paragraph
On SDCA swing-out panel, b. If indicator only fails to illuminate,
PANEL JOG UP (Figure 4-2, 82) replace SDCA primary control CCA
indicator is illuminated while A2A1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1.
switch is held.
c. If alarm fails to sound and indicator
fails to illuminate, replace SDCA
front panel toggle switch IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.3.6. If fault recurs,
proceed to Trouble d.
d. Check out and repair SDCA front
panel EMI filter EF6 and associated
wiring, as applicable.
12. On SDCA front panel, momen- Verify the following: Perform trouble analysis IAW step 11.
tarily set JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN
(Figure 4-1, 12) switch to JOG Double beep is heard from the
DOWN. SDCA front panel audible alarm
(18).
PANEL JOG DOWN (Figure
4-2, 83) indicator is illuminated
4-4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
tarily set RAISE (Figure 4-1, 14)
switch to RAISE. Double beep is heard from
(18).
PANEL RAISE (Figure 4-2, 79)
indicator is illuminated while
switch is held.
14. On SDCA front panel, momen- On SDCA swing-out panel, Perform trouble analysis IAW step 11.
tarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure PANEL LOWER (Figure 4-2,
4-1, 13) switch to LOWER. 80) indicator is momentarily
illuminated.
tarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure
4-1, 13) switch to OFF. Double beep is heard from
(18).
PANEL STOP (Figure 4-2, 81)
and OFF (STOP) (45) indicators
are momentarily illuminated.
16. In security pit, momentarily set Verify the following: Isolate fault as follows:
RAISE switch to RAISE.
Double beep is heard from a. If alarm (SP1) only fails to sound,
SDCA front panel audible alarm test alarm IAW Paragraph 4.2.4.3.1
(Figure 4-1, 18). and Table 4-8, Menu Option 5.
Replace alarm (SP1) IAW Paragraph
SARC RAISE (Figure 4-2, 95) replace SDCA primary control CCA
indicator is momentarily A2A1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1.
illuminated.
fails to illuminate, check out and
repair security pit RAISE switch
wiring IAW Secondary Access
System (SAS) schematic [1] FO-1 [3]
FO-2 [5] FO-3 <, as applicable. If
fault recurs, proceed to Trouble d.
d. Replace secondary door ESA A6
module IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.6.2. If
fault recurs, proceed to Trouble e.
e. Check out and repair SDCA EMI
filter EF5 and associated wiring, as
applicable.
Change 4 4-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
17. On SARC control box, momen- Verify the following: Isolate fault as follows:
tarily set SECONDARY DOOR
RAISE (Figure 4-6, 20) switch Double beep is heard from a. If audible alarm (SP1) only fails to
to RAISE. SDCA front panel audible alarm sound, test alarm IAW Paragraph
(Figure 4-1, 18). 4.2.4.3.1 and Table 4-8, Menu Option
5. Replace alarm (SP1) IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.3.7, as required.
SARC RAISE (Figure 4-2, 95) replace SDCA primary control CCA
illuminated.
fails to illuminate, replace SARC
IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
18. On SARC control box, momen- Verify the following: Isolate fault as follows:
tarily set SECONDARY DOOR
OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure 4-6, 19) Double beep is heard from a. If audible alarm (SP1) only fails to
switch to LOWER. SDCA front panel audible alarm sound, test alarm IAW Paragraph
(Figure 4-1, 18). 4.2.4.3.1 and Table 4-8, Menu Option
5. Replace alarm (SP1) IAW Para-
SARC LOWER (Figure 4-2, 96) replace SDCA primary control CCA
illuminated.
fails to illuminate, replace SARC
IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ). If
fault recurs, proceed to Trouble d.
d. Replace secondary door ESA A6
module IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.6.2. If
fault recurs, proceed to Trouble e.
e. Check out and repair SDCA EMI
filter EF5 and associated wiring, as
applicable.
19. On SARC control box, momen- On SDCA swing-out panel, Isolate fault as follows:
tarily set SECONDARY DOOR SARC STOP (Figure 4-2, 97)
OFF ⁄ LOWER Figure 4-6, 19) and OFF (STOP) (45) indicators a. If indicator fails to illuminate, replace
switch to OFF. are momentarily illuminated. SDCA primary control CCA A2A1
IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1.
b. Replace SARC IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
c. Replace secondary door ESA A7
module IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.6.2.
4-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
19. - d. Check out and repair SDCA EMI

Cont filter EF5 and associated wiring, as
applicable.
20. On SDCA front panel, momen- On SDCA swing-out panel,
tarily set LOCK BOLTS PANEL LOCK BOLT EXTEND
Isolate fault as follows:
EXT ⁄ RET. (Figure 4-1, 26) (Figure 4-2, 85) indicator is
switch to EXT. momentarily illuminated.
On SDCA front panel: a. If indicator fails to illuminate, replace
SDCA primary control CCA A2A1
NO-GO (Figure 4-1, 6) indicator b. Replace SDCA front panel toggle
is illuminated. switch IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.3.6.
c. Check out and repair SDCA front
panel EMI filter EF6 and associated
wiring, as applicable.
LOCK BOLTS RETRACTED Perform Secondary Door Electromechanical
(Figure 4-1, 25) indicator is Assembly (SDEA) functional checkout IAW
extinguished. Table 4-4
21. On SDCA front panel, momen-
tarily set RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1, 17) switch
to AUD CANCEL.
tarily set RESET ⁄ AUD PANEL RESET (Figure 4-2, 84)
CANCEL switch to RESET. indicator is momentarily
illuminated.
NOTE
Delay 10 seconds, then proceed to step 23.
tarily set LOCK BOLTS PANEL LOCK BOLT
EXT ⁄ RET. (Figure 4-1, 26) RETRACT (Figure 4-2, 86) indi-
switch to RET. cator is momentarily illuminated.
On SDCA front panel:
SECURITY PIN TIMER (Figure a. Perform SAS timer functional
4-1, 22) indicator is illuminated. checkout IAW Table 4-2.
b. Replace SDCA primary control CCA
LOCK BOLTS RETRACTED Perform SDEA functional checkout IAW
(Figure 4-1, 25) indicator is Table 4-4.
momentarily illuminated.
4-7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
24. On SDCA front panel, momen- Double beep is heard from If audible alarm (SP1) only fails to sound,
tarily set RAISE (Figure 4-1, 14) SDCA front panel audible alarm perform trouble analysis IAW step 25.
switch to RAISE. (18).
SECURITY PIN TIMER a. Perform secondary door security pin
(Figure 4-1, 22) indicator is functional checkout IAW Table 4-3.
extinguished.
b. Replace SDCA primary control CCA
On SDCA swing-out panel, Replace SDCA primary control CCA A2A1
PANEL RAISE (Figure 4-2, 79) IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1.
indicator is momentarily
illuminated.
25. On SDCA front panel, momen- On SDCA swing-out panel, OFF a. Replace SDCA primary control CCA
tarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure (STOP) (Figure 4-2, 45) indi- A2A1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1.
4-1, 13) switch to OFF. cator is momentarily illuminated.
b. Replace SDCA front panel toggle
switch IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.3.6.
c. Check out and repair SDCA EMI
filter EF6 and associated wiring as
applicable.
26. On SDCA front panel, momen- Double beep is heard from Perform trouble analysis IAW step 25.
tarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure SDCA front panel audible alarm
4-1, 13) switch to LOWER. (18).
SECURITY PIN TIMER (22) Perform trouble analysis IAW step 24.
indicator is illuminated.
On SDCA swing-out panel, Perform trouble analysis IAW step 24.
PANEL LOWER (Figure 4-2,
80) indicator is momentarily
illuminated.
27. On SDCA front panel, momen- Double beep is heard from Perform trouble analysis IAW step 25.
tarily set RAISE (Figure 4-1, 14) SDCA front panel audible alarm
switch to RAISE. (18).
SECURITY PIN TIMER (22) Perform trouble analysis IAW step 24.
indicator is extinguished.
On SDCA swing-out panel, Perform trouble analysis IAW step 24.
PANEL RAISE (Figure 4-2, 79)
indicator is momentarily
illuminated.
4-8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
• In steps 28 and 29, the SEC. PIN COIL COIL 1 TEST or COIL 2 TEST switch shall be pressed and held
for approximately 5 seconds for observation column indications to occur. Verify observation indication
before releasing switch.
• Keypad display reading (x.xxx) in line 2 of COIL 1 TEST and COIL 2 TEST is displayed in amperage
for steps 28 and 29. Due to variables in wire length and coil temperature, passing amperage value will
vary between 1.330 and 2.070 amps.
28. On SDCA swing-out panel, press On SDCA swing-out panel:

and hold SEC. PIN COIL -
COIL 1 TEST (Figure 4-2, 13) While switch is depressed, COIL If COIL 1 TEST (Figure 4-2, 12) indicator
switch. When observation 1 TEST (12) indicator illumi- fails to illuminate, replace SDCA power
column indications are observed, nates and keypad display (Figure command CCA A2A3 IAW Paragraph
release SEC. PIN COIL - COIL 4-3, 1) indicates: 5.9.1.4.3.
1 TEST switch. COIL 1 TEST PASSED Perform trouble analysis IAW Table 4-16,
↑ x.xxx ↓ x.xxx → x.xxx FAULT 007.
and hold SEC. PIN COIL -
COIL 2 TEST (Figure 4-2, 15) While switch is depressed, COIL If COIL 2 TEST (Figure 4-2, 14) indicator
switch. When observation 2 TEST (14) indicator illumi- fails to illuminate, replace SDCA power
column indications are observed, nates and keypad display (Figure command CCA A2A3 IAW Paragraph
release SEC. PIN COIL - COIL 4-3, 1) indicates: 5.9.1.4.3.
2 TEST switch. COIL 2 TEST PASSED Perform trouble analysis IAW Table 4-16,
↑ x.xxx ↓ x.xxx → x.xxx FAULT 008.
30. On SDCA swing-out panel, On SDCA swing-out panel:
momentarily set PAH LIGHTS
(Figure 4-2, 11) switch to OFF, PAH LIGHTS ON/OFF (10) a. If PAH LIGHTS ON/OFF indicator
then ON. indicator extinguishes then illuminates, and Personnel Access
illuminates. Shaft (PAS) lights fail to illuminate,
perform trouble analysis as follows:
In Personnel Access Shaft (PAS), (1) Replace SDCA A3K1 IAW Paragraph
verify PAH lights are extin- 5.9.1.5.7.
guished, then illuminated.
(2) Perform trouble analysis on PAS
lighting wiring IAW Paragraph 5.1.5.
(3) Replace SDCA power command CCA
b. If PAS lights are illuminated and
PAH LIGHTS ON/OFF (Figure 4-2,
10) indicator fails to illuminate, or if
both PAS lights and PAH LIGHTS
ON ⁄ OFF indicator fail to illuminate,
replace SDCA power command CCA
Change 4 4-9
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
31. On SDCA swing-out panel,

perform SDCA firmware indi-
cator tests IAW Paragraph
4.2.4.3.2, (Menu Option 5)
32. On SDCA swing-out panel, press On SDCA swing-out panel: Indicator fails to illuminate:
and hold ESS OFF (Figure 4-2,
21) switch, then release. ESS OFF (48) indicator is illu- a. Replace SDCA power command CCA
minated while switch is held. A2A3 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.3.
ESS OFF (48) indicator is extin- b. Replace SDCA 24V driver CCA
guished when switch is released. A2A2 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.2.
33. On ESS control panel display, On ESS control panel display: a. Check out and repair SDCA EMI
check SOC: State of Charge bar filter EF1 and associated wiring, as
(Figure 4-5, 8) and RPM: Revo- SOC: Decreases applicable.
lutions Per Minute value (6) RPM: Decreases
indicators, then check SDCA
swing-out panel indicator. On SDCA swing-out panel: b. Replace ESS IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
ESS SHUTDOWN (Figure 4-2,
17) indicator is illuminated.
and hold ESS ON (Figure 4-2,
20) switch, then release. ESS ON indicator (47) is illumi- Perform trouble analysis IAW step 32
nated while switch is held.
ESS ON indicator is extin-
guished when switch is released.
35. On ESS control panel display, On ESS control panel display: Perform trouble analysis IAW step 33.
check SOC: State of Charge bar
(Figure 4-5, 8) and RPM: Revo- SOC: Increases
lutions Per Minute value (6) RPM: Increases
indicators, then check SDCA
swing-out panel indicator. On SDCA swing-out panel:
ESS STARTUP (Figure 4-2, 62)
indicator and ESS CHARGE
(61) indicator are illuminated.
36. On EMA gearbox, disengage
EMA gearbox safety pin IAW
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ) and
ensure SAS is placed in MAIN-
TENANCE mode.
4-10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
37. On SDCA front panel, verify that On SDCA front panel: If SDCA front panel FAULT or NO-GO
FAULT (Figure 4-1, 5) and indicator is illuminated, set RESET ⁄ AUD
NO-GO (6) indicators are extin- FAULT indicator is extinguished. CANCEL (17) switch to RESET. If indica-
guished. tors remain illuminated, perform SDCA
NO-GO indicator is swing-out panel keypad trouble analysis
extinguished. IAW and Table 4-16 and ⁄ or Table 4-17, as
required, to isolate for fault and ⁄ or NO-GO
trouble analysis.
Personnel egress through PAS shall not be impeded. When performing tests involving secondary door move-
ment, do not permit secondary door to be raised so personnel egress through the PAS is impeded. Failure to
comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
ESS STATE OF CHARGE (SOC) must be equal to or greater than 62.5 percent in order for jog commands
to function.
38. On SDCA front panel, press and Secondary door jogs up while
hold JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN switch is actuated.
(Figure 4-1, 12) switch in JOG
UP position moving secondary On SDCA swing-out panel, JOG Indicator fails to illuminate:
door upward a few inches. UP ((Figure 4-2, 42) indicator is
illuminated, then extinguished a. Replace SDCA 24V driver CCA
Ensure PAS egress is not A2A2 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.2.
impeded and observe observation when switch is released.
column indications, then release b. Replace SDCA primary control CCA
switch. A2A1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1.
Indicator illuminates but secondary door
fails to jog and SDCA NO-GO reports:
a. Perform SDCA keypad trouble
analysis IAW Paragraph 4.2.4.4 and
Table 4-17, to isolate NO-GO
reporting.
b. Perform trouble analysis IAW Table
4-17.
4-11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
38. - Indicator illuminates, secondary door fails

Cont to jog, but no SDCA NO-GO reports:
a. Check wiring between MDC and
SDCA IAW applicable schematic
diagrams and repair or replace
components, if required.
b. Replace MDC motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
39. On SDCA front panel, press and Secondary door jogs down while
hold JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN switch is actuated.
(Figure 4-1, 12) switch in JOG
DOWN position moving
secondary door downward a few
inches, then release switch.
On SDCA swing-out panel, JOG Perform trouble analysis IAW step 38.
DOWN (Figure 4-2, 43) indi-
cator is illuminated, then extin-
guished when switch is released.
NOTE
If observation column normal indication is not received within ten seconds, release JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN
switch and troubleshoot as required.
40. On SDCA front panel, while Secondary door jog movement is a. Review MCD LCP IAW Paragraph
holding JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN cancelled. 4.2.5.1 and Table 4-19, Quick Menu,
(Figure 4-1, 12) switch in JOG Menu Level II, Input #2, (QUICK-
UP position, momentarily set MENU 4 of 20).
OFF ⁄ LOWER (13) switch to
OFF. When observation column b. If MDC LCP read out indicates
indication occurs, release JOG 000000001 when switch is pressed,
UP ⁄ JOG DOWN switch. proceed to Trouble b(1), otherwise
proceed to Trouble c.
(1) Replace MDC motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
c. MDC LCP read out indicates
000000000 when switch is pressed.
(1) Check wiring between MDC and
SDCA IAW applicable schematic
diagrams and repair or replace
components, if required.
4-12
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
41. Perform secondary door homing

IAW Paragraph 7.1.2, if required.
Rapid movement of secondary door and telescoping ladder are extremely hazardous. Notify all onsite
personnel that secondary access system power shall be restored. Whenever any audible alarm is heard,
personnel shall immediately stand clear of the secondary door, telescoping ladder, and bottom of secondary
door. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
Before proceeding, carefully read steps 42 through 45 and ensure onsite personnel are briefed on all antici-
pated secondary door movement events.
42. Notify all onsite personnel of

secondary access system power
restoration and secondary access
system status, as required.
tarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10)
switch to OPERATION.
Personnel egress through PAS shall not be impeded. When performing test of RAISE command, do not
permit secondary door to be raised so personnel egress through the PAS is impeded. When secondary door
movement is signaled by a steady alarm and secondary door upward movement is observed, immediately
issue a secondary door STOP command to halt secondary door movement. Failure to comply could result in
personnel injury or death.
44. On SDCA front panel, momen- At EMA wall alarm: a. If either 3-second or steady alarm
tarily set RAISE (Figure 4-1, 14) fails to sound from EMA wall alarm,
switch to RAISE. When steady A 3-second intermittent audible proceed to Trouble a(1); if a 3-second
wall alarm signal is heard and alarm signals command of a intermittent wall alarm sounded, but
secondary door upward motion is secondary door movement event. there was no secondary door move-
observed, immediately set ment, proceed to Trouble b.
OFF/LOWER (13) switch to Steady audible alarm signals
OFF. secondary door movement event. (1) Repeat step 44 while monitoring
SDCA swing-out panel LER WALL
ALARM OUT (Figure 4-2, 54)
indicator.
4-13
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
44. - (2) If SDCA swing-out panel LER

Cont WALL ALARM OUT indicator failed
to illuminate, replace SDCA 24V
driver CCA A2A2 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.2, otherwise proceed to
Trouble a(3).
(3) If SDCA swing-out panel LER
WALL ALARM OUT indicator illu-
minated, troubleshoot EMA wall
alarm IAW applicable schematic
diagrams and ⁄ or replace IAW
Paragraph 5.9.1.8.
b. Perform SDCA keypad trouble
analysis IAW Paragraph 4.2.4.4 to
isolate faults(s) and ⁄ or NO-GO(s)
and perform trouble analysis IAW
Table 4-16 and ⁄ or Table 4-17, as
applicable.
45. On SDCA front panel, momen- At EMA wall alarm:
tarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure
4-1, 13) switch to LOWER.
A 3-second intermittent audible Perform trouble analysis IAW step 44.
alarm signals command of a
secondary door movement event.
Steady audible alarm signals

secondary door movement event.
46. On SDCA front panel, observe On SDCA front panel: If either NO-GO or FAULT indicator are
NO-GO (6) and FAULT (5) indi- illuminated, review SDCA firmware
cators. NO-GO indicator is message log on SDCA swing-out panel
extinguished. keypad display (Figure 4-2, 111) IAW
Paragraph 4.2.4.3.2 to isolate no-go or fault
FAULT indicator is extinguished. conditions, as required.
47. On MDC display readout (Figure Verify no abnormal conditions Perform MDC trouble analysis IAW Table
4-4, 1), verify no NO-GO or were recorded during secondary 4-19.
FAULT conditions are displayed. access functional checkout.
48. On ESS control panel display Verify no abnormal conditions Perform ESS trouble analysis IAW Table
(Figure 4-5), verify no NO-GO were recorded during secondary 4-20.
or FAULT conditions are access functional checkout.
displayed.
49. If no further maintenance is
required, notify MMOC that
secondary access system is
operational.
4-14
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-2. **NSP** Secondary Access System Timer Functional Checkout
Step Procedure Normal Indication Corrective Action

on SDCA front panel, momen-
tarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10)
NOTE
Functional checkout of the secondary access system timer circuits require initiation and expiration of the
64- (±4) minute and 10-minute timers. When directed in the following procedure, carefully note times to
ensure proper operation of timer circuits.

open panel to provide access to
SDCA swing-out panel controls
and indicators.
3. Using multimeter (Table 2-1) on 12 Vdc Replace SDCA power command CCA
SDCA swing-out panel, check A2A3 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.4.3.
voltage between TP1 (-) (Figure
4-2, 22) and TP2 (+) (23).
NOTE
• Time recorded in step 5 is critical to the functional checkout of the secondary access system timer
circuits. Setting the SECURITY PIN ENGAGE switch on the SARC control box to ENGAGE initiates
the 64 (±4) minute site penetration delay timer and shall be used throughout this procedure as a base for
ensuring timer circuits are accurately tested at appropriate time intervals. Before proceeding, carefully
review the following steps to ensure each is performed in the sequence and time frame specified.
• Any RAISE or OFF command received by the SDCA will reset the 64- or 10-minute timers. If a RAISE
or OFF command is initiated anytime after completion of step 5, immediately discontinue this procedure
and return to step 1 to repeat secondary access system timer functional checkout.
• If required, the secondary access system timer functional checkout may be terminated and reset by
performing an OFF command issued from the SDCA front panel. Return to step 1 to repeat secondary
access system timer functional checkout.
4. On SDCA front panel, set On SDCA front panel, SECU-

OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure 4-1, 13) RITY PIN TIMER (22) indicator
switch to OFF. is extinguished.
4-15
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-2. **NSP** Secondary Access System Timer Functional Checkout - Continued
5. On SARC control box, momen-

tarily set SECURITY PIN
ENGAGE (Figure 4-6, 17)
switch to ENGAGE and start
stopwatch. Record time SECU-
RITY PIN ENGAGE switch was
actuated initiating the 64-minute
timer.
6. Using multimeter on SDCA 0 Vdc If any voltage is present between test
swing-out panel, check voltage points, proceed as follows:
between TP1 (-) (Figure 4-2, 22)
and TP10 (+) (31). a. Replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
DT1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
b. Replace SDCA timer control CCA
c. Replace SDCA controller interconnect
CCA A3A5 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.2.
swing-out panel, check voltage points, proceed as follows:
between TP1 (-) (Figure 4-2, 22)
and TP11 (+) (32). a. Replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
b. Replace SDCA timer control CCA
c. Replace SDCA controller interconnect
8. Monitor time. Fifty-nine minutes
after SECURITY PIN ENGAGE
(Figure 4-6, 17) switch was acti-
vated in step 5, proceed to step
9.
swing-out panel, check voltage points, replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
between TP1 (-) (Figure 4-2, 22) DT1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
and TP10 (+) (31).
4-16
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
swing-out panel, check voltage points, replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
between TP1 (-) (Figure 4-2, 22) DT3 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
and TP11 (+) (32).
Secondary door lock out could occur. Each timer circuit (A & B) consists of a 64- and 10-minute timer oper-
ating inline to energize one of two security pin coils. Each timer circuit must be checked to verify the integ-
rity of the redundant coil system. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
A multimeter reading of 12 Vdc signals expiration of the 64- (±4) minute timer and initiation of the
10-minute timer. A normal indication for step 11, shall be received between 64-minute timer initiation step
5, ±4 minutes.
11. Monitor time and observe multi- Multimeter reads 0 Vdc before a. If voltage is incorrect between TP1
meter readings between SDCA expiration of 64-minute timer, and TP10, perform the following;
swing-out panel, TP1 (-) (Figure then 12 Vdc on expiration of otherwise proceed to Trouble b.
4-2, 22) and TP10 (+) (31), and 64-minute timer and initiation of
between TP1 (-) (22) and TP11 10-minute timer. (1) Replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
(+) (32). Record time each of the DT1 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
two circuit readings change from (2) Replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
0 Vdc to 12 Vdc. DT2 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
(3) Replace SDCA timer control CCA
(4) Replace SDCA controller interconnect
b. If voltage is incorrect between TP1
and TP11, perform the following:
(1) Replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
4-17
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Steps 12 and 13 shall be performed concurrently. Periodically monitor timer circuit voltages until a normal
indication for step 13 is observed.
12. Continue to monitor and observe 12 Vdc while 10-minute timer is a. If voltage is incorrect between TP1
multimeter readings between initiated. and TP10, perform the following;
SDCA swing-out panel TP1 (-) otherwise proceed to Trouble b.
(Figure 4-2, 22) and TP10 (+)
(31), and between TP1 (-) (22) (1) Replace SDCA delay timer relay A3
and TP11 (+) (32). DT2 IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
b. If voltage is incorrect between TP1
and TP11, perform the following:
NOTE
A multimeter reading of 0 Vdc signals the expiration of the 10-minute timer. A normal indication for step
13 shall be received at 10 (±1) minutes after expiration of each 64-minute timer circuit.
13. On multimeter, observe readings Multimeter reads 12 Vdc, then 0 Perform trouble analysis IAW step 12.
between SDCA swing- out panel Vdc on expiration of each of the
TP1 (-) (Figure 4-2, 22) and timer circuits.
TP10 (+) (31), then between TP1
(-) (22) and TP11 (+) (32). When
normal indication is received on
either circuit (TP1 to TP10 or
TP1 to TP11), record time then
monitor second circuit. Record
time normal indication is
received on second circuit.
4-18
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
14. Perform readout of firmware No faults detected. Perform fault and ⁄ or NO-GO trouble
message log IAW Paragraph analysis IAW Table 4-16 and ⁄ or Table
4.2.4.3.2. Review message log 4-17, as required.
for any faults detected during
timer circuit functional checkout.
15. Return to maintenance being
performed.
Table 4-3. Secondary Door Security Pin Functional Checkout
Step Procedure Corrective Action
1. If not previously accomplished, ensure secondary access

system startup has been accomplished IAW Table 5-2.
2. Loosen nine fasteners securing SDCA front panel
assembly and open panel to access SDCA swing-out
panel controls and indicators.
3. On SDCA swing-out panel, verify that SECURITY PIN Perform trouble analysis for SDCA Fault 030 or
ENGAGED (Figure 4-2, 72) indicator is extinguished 041, as applicable, IAW Table 4-16.
and SECURITY PIN RETRACTED (73) indicator is
illuminated.
NOTE
• COIL 1 TEST switch shall be held for approximately 5 seconds for current reading to be obtained in
step 4b.
• Keypad display reading (x.xxx) in line 2 of COIL 1 TEST and COIL 2 TEST is displayed in
amperage for steps 4b and 6b. Due to variables in wire length and coil temperatures, passing
amperage value will vary between 1.330 and 2.070 amps.
4. On SDCA swing-out panel, press and hold SEC. PIN

COIL - COIL 1 TEST (Figure 4-2, 13) switch.
a. While switch is held, on SDCA swing-out panel, If COIL TEST indicator fails to illuminate,
COIL 1 TEST (12) indicator is illuminated. replace SDCA power command CCA A2A3 IAW
Paragraph 5.9.1.4.3.
b. While switch is held, on SDCA swing-out panel, If SDCA keypad display indicator fails to illumi-
keypad display (Figure 4-3, 1) indicates: nate, replace SDCA primary control CCA A2A1
COIL 1 TEST PASSED If coil 1 TEST fails, perform trouble anaylsis
↑ x.xxx ↓ x.xxx → x.xxx IAW Table 4-16, Fault 007.
Change 4 4-19
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-3. Secondary Door Security Pin Functional Checkout - Continued
5. On SDCA swing-out panel, release SEC. PIN COIL -

COIL 1 TEST (Figure 4-2, 13) switch.
NOTE
COIL 2 TEST switch shall be held for approximately 5 seconds for current reading to be obtained in
step b.
6. On SDCA swing-out panel, press and hold SEC. PIN

COIL - COIL 2 TEST (15) switch.
a. While switch is held, on SDCA swing-out panel, Perform trouble analysis IAW step 4 a.
COIL 2 TEST (14) indicator is illuminated.
b. While switch is held, on SDCA swing-out panel, Perform trouble analysis IAW step 4 b.
keypad display (Figure 4-3, 1) indicates:
COIL 2 TEST PASSED
↑ x.xxx ↓ x.xxx → x.xxx
7. On SDCA swing-out panel, release SEC. PIN COIL -
COIL 2 TEST (Figure 4-2, 15) switch.
8. **HCP** Inspect SDCA RFI gasket IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30F-112.
9. Close SDCA front panel assembly and secure with nine
fasteners.
4-20
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-4. Secondary Door Electromechancial Assembly Functional Checkout
1. If required, set SDCA front panel MODE (Figure 4-1, 10)

switch to MAINTENANCE.
a. MAINTENANCE (9) indicator illuminates. Perform secondary access system functional
checkout IAW Table 4-1.
2. Using EMA jog switch, position secondary door to facilitate Perform secondary access system functional
maintenance. checkout IAW Table 4-1.
Performing maintenance under an insecure secondary door is hazardous. Whenever secondary door is raised
to perform maintenance, ensure EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged and system enters enhanced mainte-
nance mode prior to performing maintenance. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
When EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged, system enters enhanced maintenance mode and all secondary
door movement functions are locked out. Ensure secondary door is properly positioned prior to engage-
ment of EMA gearbox safety pin.
3. On EMA gearbox, engage EMA gearbox safety pin IAW

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
4. Disconnect both cables from the bottom of the secondary
door.
5. On bottom of secondary door, while supporting cable track,
remove cable track (Figure 5-18, 6) from bottom of
secondary door IAW Paragraph 5.7.1.14.2, steps b through
e. Retain hardware for reinstallation and position cable track
and cables to facilitate secondary door bottom plate
removal.
6. On bottom of secondary door, remove both secondary door
bottom covers and position to facilitate secondary door
maintenance.
7. Identify secondary door lock bolts that would interfere with
lock bolt extension, and remove lock bolt connecting link(s)
IAW Paragraph 5.7.1.12, steps h and i.
8. On bottom of secondary door, reinstall two cables removed
in step 4.
9. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1, 17) switch to RESET.
4-21
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-4. Secondary Door Electromechancial Assembly Functional Checkout - Continued
10. If not previously accomplished, loosen nine fasteners

securing SDCA front panel assembly and open panel to
access SDCA swing-out panel switches and indicators
(Figure 4-2).
11. On SDCA swing-out panel, verify the following:
a. LOCK BOLT 24V READY (Figure 4-2, 71) Perform trouble analysis IAW Table 4-17, NO-GO
indicator illuminates. 012 fault flow.
b. SECURITY PIN ENGAGED (72) indicator is Perform secondary door security pin functional
extinguished. checkout IAW Table 4-3.
c. SECURITY PIN RETRACTED (73) indicator is Perform secondary door security pin functional
illuminated. checkout IAW Table 4-3.
NOTE
• If erroneous indication(s) is/are observed in step 11 d through g, note all indications and proceed to step
11 g, Correction Action 1.
• The T-HANDLE RETRACT indicator should illuminate during the lock bolt retract sequence and then
extinguish approximately 2 seconds later.
d. T-HANDLE RETRACTED (74) indicator is

extinguished.
e. T-HANDLE ENGAGED (75) indicator is
extinguished.
f. LOCK BOLT RETRACTED (77) indicator is
illuminated.
g. LOCK BOLT EXTENDED (76) indicator is 1. Ensure lock bolts are retracted. If
extinguished. required, manually retract lock bolts IAW
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ). If fault
recurs proceed to next step.
2. If both LOCK BOLT EXTENDED and
LOCK BOLT RETRACTED are illumi-
nated, proceed to next step, otherwise,
proceed to Corrective Action 3.
a. Verify switch LS1 adjustment per
Paragraph 7.1.1. If fault recurs,
proceed to next step.
b. Replace faulty SDCA primary
control CCA A2A1 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.4.1.
4-22 Change 8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
11. - 3. If both LOCK BOLT EXTENDED and

Cont LOCK BOLT RETRACTED are extin-
guished, proceed to next step, otherwise,
proceed to Corrective Action 4
graph 5.9.1.4.1.
4. If either T-HANDLE RETRACTED or
T-HANDLE ENGAGED indicators are
illuminated proceed to next step.
a. Adjust ALB switches IAW Para-
graph 7.1.4. If fault recurs,
b. Replace faulty SDEA actuator
locking bar IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.16. If fault recurs proceed to
next step.
c. Replace faulty SDCA primary
graph 5.9.1.4.1.
12. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set LOCK BOLTS
EXT. ⁄ RET. (Figure 4-1, 26) switch to EXT.
NOTE
• Allow 10 seconds for normal indicators to occur.
• If erroneous indication(s) is/are observed in step 13 a through f, note all indications and proceed to step
13 f, Corrective Action 1.
13. On SDCA swing-out panel, verify the following:

a. SECURITY PIN ENGAGED (Figure 4-2, 72)
indicator is illuminated
b. SECURITY PIN RETRACTED (73) indicator is
extinguished.
c. T-HANDLE RETRACTED (74) indicator is
extinguished.
d. T-HANDLE ENGAGED (75) indicator is
illuminated.
e. LOCK BOLT RETRACTED (77) indicator is
extinguished.
Change 8 4-23
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
13. - f. LOCK BOLT EXTENDED (76) indicator is 1. Ensure lock bolts are extended. If lock
Cont illuminated. bolts are extended, proceed to Corrective
Action 3; otherwise manually extend lock
bolts IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
If lock bolts can not be manually
extended, proceed to step a; if lock bolts
are manually extended, proceed to
Corrective Action 2.
a. If lock bolts cannot be manually
extended, troubleshoot and repair
lock bolt binding.
2. If lock bolts are manually extended,
perform the following:
a. Replace faulty secondary door
J-box lock bolt drive M2 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.2.1. If fault recurs,
b. Replace faulty SDEA linear
actuator IAW Paragraph 5.7.1.15.
3. If both LOCK BOLT RETRACTED and
LOCK BOLT EXTENDED indicators are
illuminated, proceed to next step, other-
wise proceed to Corrective Action 4.
graph 5.9.1.4.1.
4. If both LOCK BOLT RETRACTED and
LOCK BOLT EXTENDED indicators are
extinguished, proceed to next step, other-
graph 5.9.1.4.1.
4-24 Change 8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
13. - 5. If T-HANDLE RETRACTED is illumi-

Cont nated or T-HANDLE ENGAGED is
extinguished, proceed to next step; other-
a. Adjust ALB switches IAW Para-
graph 7.1.4. If fault recurs,
b. Replace faulty SDEA actuator
5.7.1.16. If fault recurs, proceed
to next step.
c. Replace faulty SDCA primary
graph 5.9.1.4.1.
6. (Deleted)
7. If either SECURITY PIN RETRACTED
or SECURITY PIN ENGAGED indicator
is illuminated without the other indicator,
proceed to next step; otherwise proceed to
Corrective Action 8.
a. Replace faulty SDEA actuator
to next step.
graph 5.9.1.4.1.
8. If SECURITY PIN RETRACTED and
SECURITY PIN ENGAGED indicators
are both extinguished with lock bolts
extended, replace faulty SDEA actuator
locking bar IAW Paragraph 5.7.1.16.
Change 4 4-25
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
14. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set LOCK BOLTS

EXT./RET. (Figure 4-1, 26) switch to RET. Allow 10
seconds for lock bolts to retract, then proceed to next step.
NOTE
• Allow 10 seconds for normal indications to occur. The T-HANDLE RETRACT indicator should illumi-
nate during the lock bolt retract sequence and then extinguish approximately 2 seconds later.
• If erroneous indication(s) is ⁄ are observed in step 14 a through f, note all indications and proceed to
step 14 f, Corrective Action 1.
a. SECURITY PIN ENGAGED (Figure 4-2, 72)

b SECURITY PIN RETRACTED (73) indicator is
illuminated.
c. T-HANDLE RETRACTED (74) indicator is
extinguished.
d. T-HANDLE ENGAGED (75) indicator is
extinguished.
e. LOCK BOLT RETRACTED (77) indicator is
illuminated.
f. LOCK BOLT EXTENDED (76) indicator is 1. Select improper indication from below
extinguished. and proceed as directed:
Verify that SDEA security pin, ALB, and secondary a. If SDEA security pin failed to
door lock bolts retracted. If successful, proceed to retract, proceed to Corrective
step 15; otherwise proceed to Corrective Action 1. Action 2; otherwise proceed to
next step.
b. If SDEA ALB failed to retract,
proceed to Corrective Action 3;
otherwise proceed to next step.
c. If secondary door lock bolts
failed to retract, proceed to
Corrective Action 5; otherwise
2. If security pin failed to retract, replace
faulty SDEA ALB IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.16.
4-26 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
14. - 3. If ALB failed to retract, proceed to

Cont next step.
a. While observing T-HANDLE
PULL (Figure 4-2, 52) and
T-HANDLE HOLD (53) indica-
tors on SDCA swing-out panel,
momentarily set LOCK BOLTS
EXT./RET. (Figure 4-1, 26)
switch to RET. and proceed to
next step:
T-HANDLE PULL indicator
illuminates for 2 seconds.
T-HANDLE HOLD indicator
illuminates for 10 seconds.
b. If T-HANDLE PULL and/or
T-HANDLE HOLD indicator(s)
failed to illuminated normally,
proceed to Corrective Action 4; if
both indicators illuminated,
c. Replace faulty SDEA actuator
to next step.
d. Check and replace secondary door
J-box terminal board fuses F1 and
F2 IAW Paragraph 5.8.2.2, as
required. If fault recurs, proceed
to next step.
e. Check and replace faulty MDC
CB6 and/or CB7, IAW Paragraph
5.8.3.9, as required. If fault
recurs, proceed to next step.
f. Replace faulty MDC relay K1
IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.5. If fault
g. Replace faulty MDC relay K2
h. Replace faulty MDC Diode D3
4-27
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
14. - i. Replace faulty MDC power

Cont supply PS1 IAW Paragraph
to next step.
j. Replace faulty MDC power
supply PS2 IAW Paragraph
5.8.3.10.
4. If both T-HANDLE PULL and
T-HANDLE HOLD indicators were
abnormal in Corrective Action 3b,
proceed as follows:
a. Replace fault SDCA 24V driver
A2A2 CCA IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.2. If fault recurs, proceed
to next step.
b. Replace fault SDCA primary
control A2A1 CCA IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.4.1. If fault recurs,
5. If secondary door lock bolts failed to
retract perform the following:
a. Replace faulty SDEA linear
actuator IAW Paragraph 5.7.1.15.
If fault recurs, proceed to next
step.
b. Replace faulty secondary door
J-box lock bolt drive M2 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.2.1.
15. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set OFF/LOWER
(Figure 4-1, 13) switch to OFF and verify the following:
a. TIMER (Figure 4-1, 22) indicator is extinguished.
NOTE
Steps 11 through 15 shall be accomplished three times to verify proper operation. If steps 11 through 15
have been repeated three times, proceed to step 17; otherwise, proceed to step 16.
16. Repeat steps 11 through 16.

17. On secondary door, disconnect retractile cables from J2 and
J7.
18. Reinstall lock bolts and lock bolt linkages IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.12, steps m and n.
4-28 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
18A. Before installing bottom plate, ensure all lock bolt

connecting links (Figure 5-17, 19) and other parts of
locking mechanism are properly connected and all screws
are tight.
18B. **NSP** Perform secondary door security pin inspection
IAW Paragraph 3.1.4.
Change 10 4-28.1/(4-28.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
19. Reinstall secondary door bottom covers, and place two

desiccant bags (Table 2-2) in secondary door.
20. Install secondary door cable track IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.14.2, steps m through o.
21. On secondary door, reinstall secondary door cables on J2
and J7.
22. Ensure area below secondary door is clear of all tools and
equipment.
23. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set RESET/AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1, 17) switch to RESET.
24. On EMA gearbox, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin IAW
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
25. On SDCA swing-out panel verify the following:
a. SECURITY PIN ENGAGED (Figure 4-2, 72) Perform secondary door security pin functional
indicator is extinguished. checkout IAW Table 4-3.
b. SECURITY PIN RETRACTED indicator (73) is Perform secondary door security pin functional
illuminated. checkout IAW Table 4-3.
NOTE
The T-HANDLE RETRACT indicator should illuminate during the lock bolt retract sequence and then
extinguish approximately 2 seconds later.
c. T-HANDLE RETRACTED (74) indicator is Observe and record all indications for step 25 c
extinguished. through f, and perform trouble analysis IAW step
11 g, Corrective Action 1.
d. T-HANDLE ENGAGED (75) indicator is Observe and record all indications for step 25 c
e. LOCK BOLT RETRACTED (77) indicator is Observe and record all indications for step 25 c
illuminated. through f, and perform trouble analysis IAW step
f. LOCK BOLT EXTENDED (76) indicator is Observe and record all indications for step 25 c
26. If further secondary access system maintenance is required,
return to maintenance being performed; otherwise, proceed
to step 27.
27. **HCP** Inspect SDCA RFI gasket IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30F-112.
28. Close SDCA front panel assembly and secure with nine
fasteners.
Change 4 4-29
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
4.2 TROUBLE ANALYSIS.

Trouble analysis of the secondary access system shall be performed using Chapter 4 tables and schematic diagrams as
required, at the discretion of the team chief.
4.2.1 Security Pit Vault Door Trouble Analysis. Trouble analysis of the security pit vault door shall be performed using
Table 4-5 and schematic diagrams, as applicable.
4.2.2 Primary Access Trouble Analysis. Trouble analysis of the primary access shall be performed using Table 4-6.
4.2.3 Miscellaneous Secondary Access System Trouble Analysis. Trouble Analysis of miscellaneous Secondary
Access System (SAS) faults shall be performed IAW Table 4-7 and schematic diagrams, as applicable.
4.2.4 Secondary Door Control Assembly Trouble Analysis. Trouble analysis of the SDCA shall be performed using
lamp indications identified on SDCA front and swing-out panels (Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2), test points located on swing-out
panel, and by identifying secondary access system NO-GOs and FAULTs using the SDCA firmware message log that is
accessible using the keypad and keypad display located on the swing-out panel.
4.2.4.1 SDCA Front Panel Indicator Trouble Analysis. The SDCA front panel indicators (Figure 4-1) are used
throughout secondary access system fault isolation and trouble analysis to identify system failures. When directed by
procedures, or whenever an indicator failure is suspected, checkout of the SDCA front panel indicators shall be accomplished
4.2.4.1.1 SDCA Front Panel Indicator Checkout. Checkout of SDCA front panel indicators shall be performed as
follows:
a. On SDCA front panel (Figure 4-1), set and hold LAMP TEST (19) switch in UP position. The following front
panel indicators illuminate:
(1) POWER (1) indicator is illuminated and remains illuminated, and ACTIVATED (2) indicator is illuminated.
(2) SECURE (20) and ACCESS/EGRESS (21) indicators are illuminated.
(3) ONLINE (4), FAULT (5), UP MOTION (7), NO-GO (6), and DOWN MOTION (8) indicators are illuminated.
(4) MAINTENANCE (9) and OPERATION (11) indicators are illuminated.
b. Release LAMP TEST (19) switch. If any indicator fails to illuminate, replace indicator lamp, or repair IAW Para-
c. On SDCA front panel (Figure 4-1), set and hold LAMP TEST (19) switch in DOWN position. The following
front panel indicators illuminate:
NOTE
Energy storage system status (15 and 16) indicators are not tested during SDCA front panel
lamp test.
(1) SECURITY PIN TIMER (22) and SECURITY PIN RETRACTED (23) indicators are illuminated.
(2) LOCK BOLTS EXTENDED (24) and LOCK BOLTS RETRACTED (25) indicators are illuminated.
d. Release LAMP TEST (19) switch. If any indicator fails to illuminate, replace indicator lamp (Table 2-2), or repair
IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.3.1, as required.
4.2.4.2 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Test Point Trouble Analysis. The SDCA swing-out panel contains 14 test points (TP1
through TP14) (Figure 4-2, 22 through 35). Using multimeter (Table 2-1), TP1 through TP14 shall be used in secondary access
system trouble analysis when directed by procedure.
4-30
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
4.2.4.3 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Trouble Analysis Using Keypad Display. The SDCA swing-out panel keypad (Figure
4-3, 6), keypad display (1), along with Table 4-8 are used to navigate the SDCA menu, display SDCA events and perform tests.
4.2.4.3.1 SDCA Firmware Message Log (Menu 1). Readout of the SDCA firmware message log, Menu item 1.1, shall
be performed when directed by procedure, during system troubleshooting, or at the discretion of the team chief as required.
Menu 1.2 provides a count of entries in the SDCA message log. Read out of the message log can be accomplished in either
OPERATION or MAINTENANCE mode. The two-line keypad display consists of a time stamp followed by the display
message.
4.2.4.3.1.1 SDCA Message Log Time Stamp. The time stamp reads chronologically from the earliest event to the latest
event with 00:00:00 being the first event recorded in the log. Using Table 4-9 as an example of a typical penetration sequence,
if it takes 64 minutes and 4 seconds for the security pin retracted indicator to illuminate on the SARC from the start of
activation, the point of activation would have a time stamp of 00:00:00, and the start of the 10-minute timer would have a time
stamp of 01:04:04. Table 4-10 is an example of a typical SARC RAISE sequence.
4.2.4.3.1.2 SDCA Message Log Details. The display messages consist of START (Table 4-11), INPUT (Table 4-12),
and GENERAL DIAGNOSTIC (Table 4-13) log entries that detail secondary access system command and control functions.
The display messages also consist of FAULT (Table 4-14) and NO-GO (Table 4-15) log entries that denote secondary access
system malfunctions. Troubleshooting of FAULT and NO-GO indications is accomplished using Table 4-16 and Table 4-17,
and typical examples of normal indications that can be used to compare against actual indications (Table 4-9 and Table 4-10).
4.2.4.3.2 SDCA Firmware Tests and Records Display (Menus 2-6). The SDCA firmware provides additional tests
and records that can be accessed using the swing-out panel keypad (Figure 4-3, 6) and keypad display (1). These consist of
the read out of SDCA power supply voltages (Table 4-8, Menu 2), the performance of an SDCA I ⁄ O extender test (Menu 3),
the verification of the SDCA firmware version (Menu 4), the performance of an SDCA indicator test (Menu 5), and the
performance of an SDCA equipment check (Menu 6). All menu options, except 5 and 6, can be performed in either
OPERATION or MAINTENANCE mode. Menu options 5 and 6 can only be performed in MAINTENANCE mode. Menus
2 through 6 may be accessed when directed by procedure, during system troubleshooting, or at the discretion of team chief
as required.
4.2.4.4 SDCA Keypad Operation. The SDCA keypad display is operated by pressing the up or down arrow on the
keypad to cycle through the items of the current menu level. Press the ENT button to select a menu item or press the ESC
button to exit the current menu level.
4.2.4.5 Trouble Analysis of SDCA Fault or NO-GO Conditions. Table 4-16 and Table 4-17 provide trouble analysis
for SDCA FAULT and NO-GO conditions recorded by the SDCA firmware. Whenever performing trouble analysis of a SDCA
fault or NO-GO, SDCA firmware message log shall be read IAW Paragraph 4.2.4.3.2, and trouble analysis shall be initiated
using the earliest FAULT or NO-GO contained in the message log. In some instances, FAULT or NO-GOs are driven by
hardware faults associated with the SDEA, the MDC, and ⁄ or the ESS. When analyzing fault conditions, SDEA, MDC,
and ⁄ or ESS related trouble analysis shall also be reviewed in order to determine best method of correcting condition.
4.2.5 Motor Drive Cabinet Trouble Analysis. Trouble analysis of Motor Drive Cabinet (MDC) shall be performed using
Local Control Panel (LCP) (Figure 4-4) located on the front of MDC cabinet, when directed by procedure. Operation of MDC
LCP is performed IAW Paragraph 4.2.5.1 and trouble analysis is contained in Table 4-18.
4.2.5.1 MDC Local Control Panel Operation.. There are two menus accessible using the MDC LCP, reference Figure
4-4. The display/status menu provides EMA motor status, and the quick menu provides command and control status between
MDC, EMA, and SDEA components. Table 4-19 provides operational instructions for read out of the MDC LCP when
required for secondary access system trouble analysis.
4.2.6 Energy Storage System Trouble Analysis. Trouble analysis of ESS shall be performed using indications from the
Control Panel (CP) (Figure 4-5) located on the front of ESS cabinet, when directed by procedure. Trouble analysis is contained
in Table 4-20.
4-31
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 4-1. SDCA Front Panel Controls and Indicators (Sheet 1 of 6)
4-32
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 4-1. SDCA Front Panel Controls and Indicators (Sheet 2)
4-33
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
4-34
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
Function Feature Description
No.
Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) Switches and Indicators
1 POWER Green LED Illuminated when power is available to SDCA.

2 ACTIVATED Green LED Indicates power has been applied to the SDCA and
MDC internal circuits.
3 ACTIVATE ⁄ DEACTIVATE Momentary Applies or removes power to the processing
switch circuits (208-Vac enable relay).
Secondary Door System Indicators
4 ONLINE Green LED Intermittent indicates site activation switch is ON.

Steady indicates ESS is at 25% state of charge or
greater.
5 FAULT Yellow LED Indicates a fault condition has been sensed in
SDCA, MDC, or ESS. A FAULT condition could
affect secondary door operation.
6 NO-GO Red LED Indicates a NO-GO condition has been sensed in
SDCA, MDC, or ESS. A NO-GO condition may
affect secondary door operation.
7 UP MOTION Yellow LED Indicates secondary door is moving upward.
8 DOWN MOTION Yellow LED Indicates secondary door is moving downward.
Mode Switches and Indicators
9 MAINTENANCE Yellow LED Indicates secondary access system is in MAINTE-

NANCE mode.
10 MODE Momentary Used to select either MAINTENANCE or OPERA-
switch TION mode.
11 OPERATION Green LED Indicates secondary access system is in OPERA-
TION mode.
12 JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN Momentary Used in MAINTENANCE mode to move
switch secondary door at a slower rate for positioning for
maintenance.
13 OFF ⁄ LOWER Momentary Set to LOWER sends LOWER command to
switch secondary door. Set to OFF switch stops any
secondary door movement. From SDCA,
OFF ⁄ LOWER switch overrides a topside RAISE
command and allows secondary door to be lowered
bypassing the 64-minute site penetration timer.
14 RAISE Momentary Sends RAISE command to secondary door.
switch
4-35
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
Energy Storage System Status Indicators
15 ESS OVER TEMP Red Indicates ESS rotating energy storage mass has
overheated.
16 STATUS BAR - (bottom to top) ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS BAR -
(bottom to top).
STATUS (< 1 CYCL - bottom red Red Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS < 12.5%
indicator) Indicator STATE OF CHARGE (SOC).
STATUS (< 1 CYCL - second red Red Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 12.5% to
indicator) Indicator 25% SOC.
STATUS (1 CYCL - bottom yellow Yellow Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 25% to
indicator) Indicator 37.5% SOC.
STATUS (1 CYCL - second yellow Yellow Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 37.5% to
indicator) Indicator 50% SOC.
STATUS (1 CYCL - top yellow indi- Yellow Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 50% to
cator) Indicator 62.5% SOC.
STATUS (JOG ENABLE - bottom Green Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 62.5% to
green indicator) Indicator 75% SOC. Minimum charge required to perform
jog commands.
STATUS (JOG ENABLE - second Green Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 75% to
green indicator) Indicator 87.5% SOC.
STATUS (JOG ENABLE - 2 CYCL - Green Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 87.5% to
(third green indicator) Indicator 95% SOC.
STATUS (JOG ENABLE - 2 CYCL - Green Bar ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM STATUS 95% to
(top green indicator) Indicator 100% SOC.
Test ⁄ Reset ⁄ Alarm Panel
17 RESET ⁄ AUD CANCEL Momentary Sends a RESET command to SDCA, MDC, and
switch ESS. AUD CANCEL terminates an audible alarm
once it has sounded.
18 AUDIBLE ALARM Speaker Piezoelectric alarm sounds for secondary door
movement, change of secondary access system
mode, and FAULT ⁄ NO-GO conditions.
19 LAMP TEST Momentary This switch tests all lamp indicators on SARC
switch control panel, except ESS STATUS indicators.
4-36
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
Secondary Door Switches And Indicators
20 SECURE Green LED Indicates secondary door is in full up position and

lock bolts are extended.
21 ACCESS ⁄ EGRESS Green LED Indicates secondary door is in full down position.
22 SECURITY PIN TIMER Yellow LED Indicates 64- and 10-minute timer(s) is active.
23 SECURITY PIN RETRACTED Yellow LED Indicates secondary door security pin has been
retracted.
24 LOCK BOLTS EXTENDED Yellow LED Indicates secondary door lock bolts are extended.
25 LOCK BOLTS RETRACTED Yellow LED Indicates secondary door lock bolts are retracted.
26 LOCK BOLTS EXT./RET. Momentary Can send either a RETRACT or an EXTEND
switch command to the secondary door lock bolt drive
mechanism.
27 CAPTIVE FASTENER Sliding Door Used to secure SDCA front panel. (9 places).
Clamps
4-37
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 4-2. SDCA Swing-Out Panel Switches and Indicators (Sheet 1 of 10)
4-38 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 4-2. SDCA Swing-Out Panel Switches and Indicators (Sheet 2)
4-39
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
4-40
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
4-41
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
SDCA Swing-Out Panel Power Command (A2A3) Switches and Indicators
1 CB-1 Circuit 10-amp, 120-Vac circuit breaker provides circuit

breaker power protection for SDCA internal circuits.
2 HOMED Yellow LED Indicates EMA encoder position HOMED has been
set.
3 HOME Momentary Sends command to MDC to reset the HOMED
switch registers to existing position of secondary door.
4 120 VAC Green LED Indicates circuit breaker CB-1 is set to ON and 120
Vac is available.
5 POWER 120 VAC Toggle Applies 120 Vac to SDCA internal power supplies.
switch
6 24 VDC INTERNAL Green LED Indicates internal 24-Vdc power supply is online.
7 POWER 24 VDC INTERNAL Toggle Enables internal +24-Vdc power supply.
switch
8 24 VDC EXTERNAL Green LED Indicates external 24-Vdc is available from MDC.
9 POWER 24 VDC EXTERNAL Toggle Enables 24-Vdc from MDC power supplies to
switch SDCA.
10 PAH LIGHTS ON ⁄ OFF Green LED Indicates PAH lights are illuminated.
11 PAH LIGHTS Momentary Controls PAH lights. Default state is ON.
switch
12 COIL 1 TEST Green LED Indicates security pin coil test No. 1 is in process.
13 SEC. PIN COIL - COIL 1 TEST Momentary Activates security pin coil No. 1 and starts
switch measuring current in solenoid wiring while switch
is depressed.
14 COIL 2 TEST Green LED Indicates security pin coil test No. 2 is in process.
15 SEC. PIN COIL - COIL 2 TEST Momentary Activates security pin coil No. 2 and starts
switch measuring current in solenoid wiring while switch
is depressed.
16 ESS STARTUP Green LED Indicates ESS has been set to ON and is not
charged.
17 ESS SHUTDOWN Green LED Indicates ESS is in DISCHARGE mode.
18 ESS CHARGE Green LED Indicates ESS is set to ON and at least 0% charged
(25K RPM).
19 ESS SAFE Green LED Indicates ESS is discharged and OFF.
20 ESS ON Momentary Sends an ON command to ESS.
switch
4-42
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
SDCA Swing-Out Panel Power Command (A2A3) Switches and Indicators - Continued
21 ESS OFF Momentary Sends an OFF command to ESS.

switch
22 TP1 (Test Point 1 Test jack Ground for test point reference for dc signals only.
23 TP2 (Test Point 2) Test jack 12 Vdc +.
24 TP3 (Test Point 3) Test jack External 24 Vdc input before fuse F2.
25 TP4 (Test Point 4) Test jack Internal 24 Vdc input before fuse F1.
26 TP5 (Test Point 5) Test jack External 24 Vdc output after fuse F2.
27 TP6 (Test Point 6) Test jack Internal 24 Vdc output after fuse F1.
28 TP7 (Test Point 7) Test jack RAISE lockout for topside controls.
29 TP8 (Test Point 8) Test jack RAISE sense for any controls.
30 TP9 (Test Point 9) Test jack RAISE sense (SDCA only).
31 TP10 (Test Point 10) Test jack 64-minute delay timer A output.
32 TP11 (Test Point 11) Test jack 64-minute delay timer B output.
33 TP12 (Test Point 12) Test jack Output of 24 Vdc post delay voltage.
34 TP13 (Test Point 13) Test jack 120 Vac Line.
35 TP14 (Test Point 14) Test jack 120 Vac Neutral.
SDCA Swing-Out Panel 24V Driver (A2A2) Indicators
36 24V SOURCE Blue LED Indicates 24V power available from SDCA or
MDC.
37 24V PRE-DELAY Blue LED Indicates voltage applied to delay relay.
38 24V POST-DELAY Blue LED Indicates voltage at output of delay relay.
39 MAINT MODE ENGAGED Blue LED Indicates system is in MAINTENANCE MODE.
40 RAISE Blue LED Indicates a RAISE command is being sent to
MDC.
41 LOWER Blue LED Indicates a LOWER command is being sent to
MDC.
42 JOG UP Blue LED Indicates a JOG UP command is being sent to
MDC.
43 JOG DOWN Blue LED Indicates a JOG DOWN command is being sent to
MDC.
44 HOME Blue LED Indicates a HOME command is being sent to
MDC.
45 OFF (STOP) Blue LED Indicates an OFF command is being sent to MDC.
4-43
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
SDCA Swing-Out Panel 24V Driver (A2A2) Indicators - Continued
46 MDC RESET Blue LED Indicates a RESET command is being sent to

MDC.
47 ESS ON Blue LED Indicates an ON command is being sent to ESS.
48 ESS OFF Blue LED Indicates an OFF command is being sent to ESS.
49 ESS RESET Blue LED Indicates a RESET command is being sent to ESS.
50 LOCK BOLT RETRACTED Blue LED Indicates a RETRACT command is being sent to
secondary door lock bolts.
51 LOCK BOLT EXTENDED Blue LED Indicates an EXTEND command is being sent to
secondary door lock bolts.
52 T-HANDLE PULL Blue LED Indicates a 2-second RETRACT command is being
sent to secondary door actuator locking bar.
53 T-HANDLE HOLD Blue LED Indicates a 10-second command is being sent to
secondary door actuator locking bar.
54 LER WALL ALARM OUT Blue LED Indicates LER wall alarm is being activated.
SDCA Swing-Out Panel Primary Control (A2A1) Functions and Indicators
55 ESS OVERTEMP Blue LED Indicates ESS flywheel power system has over-
heated and will not charge.
56 ESS FAULT Blue LED Indicates a FAULT status has been received from
ESS.
57 ESS NO-GO Blue LED Indicates a NO-GO status has been received from
ESS.
58 ESS SHUTDOWN Blue LED Indicates ESS has been commanded OFF and
charge status is less than 0% SOC.
59 ESS OFF Blue LED Indicates ESS is OFF and RPM is less than 200.
60 ESS DISCHARGE Blue LED Indicates power is being supplied from ESS to
MDC.
61 ESS CHARGE Blue LED Indicates a CHARGE status has been received from
ESS. Indicator illuminates at 0% SOC.
62 ESS STARTUP Blue LED Indicates ESS is ON and charging, but has not
reached 0% SOC. Indicator extinguishes at 0%
SOC status.
63 HOMED Blue LED Indicates a HOMED status has been received from
MDC.
64 UP MOTION Blue LED Indicates an UP MOTION status has been received
from MDC.
4-44 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
SDCA Swing-Out Panel Primary Control (A2A1) Functions and Indicators - Continued
65 DOWN MOTION Blue LED Indicates a DOWN MOTION status has been
received from MDC.
66 MOTOR ON Blue LED Indicates a MOTOR ON status has been received
from MDC.
67 MDC NO-GO Blue LED Indicates a NO-GO status has been received from
MDC.
68 FULL UP Blue LED Indicates a FULL UP status has been received from
MDC.
69 LOCKRING SECURE Blue LED Indicates a LOCK BOLTS SECURE status has
been received from MDC.
70 FULL DOWN Blue LED Indicates a FULL DOWN status has been received
from MDC.
71 LOCK BOLT 24V READY Blue LED Indicates lock bolt can be exercised.
72 SECURITY PIN ENGAGED Blue LED Indicates security pin is engaged.
73 SECURITY PIN RETRACTED Blue LED Indicates security pin is retracted.
74 T-HANDLE RETRACTED Blue LED Indicates actuator locking bar is retracted. (LED
should extinguish approximately 2 seconds after the
retraction sequence indicating the locking bar has
been released by the solenoid allowing it to posi-
tion itself between the fully retracted and fully
extended positions.)
75 T-HANDLE ENGAGED Blue LED Indicates actuator locking bar is engaged.
76 LOCK BOLT EXTENDED Blue LED Indicates lock bolts are extended.
77 LOCK BOLT RETRACTED Blue LED Indicates lock bolts are retracted.
78 GEARBOX SAFETY PIN Blue LED Indicates EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged in
EMA drive gear.
79 PANEL RAISE Blue LED Indicates SDCA RAISE switch is active.
80 PANEL LOWER Blue LED Indicates SDCA LOWER switch is active.
81 PANEL STOP Blue LED Indicates SDCA OFF switch is active.
82 PANEL JOG UP Blue LED Indicates SDCA JOG UP switch is active.
83 PANEL JOG DOWN Blue LED Indicates SDCA JOG DOWN switch is active.
84 PANEL RESET Blue LED Indicates SDCA RESET switch is active.
85 PANEL LOCK BOLT EXTEND Blue LED Indicates LOCK BOLT EXTENDED switch is
active.
86 PANEL LOCK BOLT RETRACT Blue LED Indicates LOCK BOLT RETRACTED switch is
active.
Change 4 4-45
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
87 PANEL MAINT. MODE Blue LED Indicates SDCA MAINTENANCE mode switch is
active.
88 PANEL OPS MODE Blue LED Indicates SDCA OPERATION mode switch is
active.
89 PANEL AUD. CANCEL Blue LED Indicates SDCA AUD CANCEL switch is active.
90 SARC AUD. CANCEL Blue LED Indicates SARC AUD CANCEL switch is active.
91 SARC REMOTE RAISE Blue LED Not used.
92 SARC REMOTE 2 Blue LED Not used.
93 SARC REMOTE 1 Blue LED Not used.
94 SARC RESET Blue LED Indicates SARC RESET switch is active.
95 SARC RAISE Blue LED Indicates SARC RAISE switch is active.
96 SARC LOWER Blue LED Indicates SARC LOWER switch is active.
97 SARC STOP Blue LED Indicates SARC STOP (OFF) switch is active.
98 SARC LOCK BOLT RETRACT Blue LED Indicates SARC LOCK BOLTS RETRACTED
switch is active.
99 SARC DEACTIVATE Blue LED Indicates SARC DEACTIVATE switch is active.
100 SARC ACTIVATE Blue LED Indicates SARC ACTIVATE switch is active.
101 SARC TIMER TRIGGER Blue LED Indicates SARC TIMER ENGAGE switch is
active.
102 WALL JOG UP Blue LED Indicates LER wall JOG UP switch is active.
103 WALL JOG DWN Blue LED Indicates LER wall JOG DOWN switch is active.
104 WALL RAISE Blue LED Indicates LER wall RAISE switch is active.
105 WALL LOWER Blue LED Indicates LER wall LOWER switch is active.
106 12V LOGIC Blue LED Indicates 12V logic is ON.
107 RELAY 1 LED Blue LED Indicates relay K1 is ON.
110 MAINTENANCE MODE Blue LED Indicates system is in MAINTENANCE MODE.
111 KEYPAD DISPLAY LCD display Used with key pad to read out SDCA firmware
panel message log and secondary door security pin coil
currents.
4-46 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
112 KEYPAD Four button Enter, Up, Down, Exit to view/command the LCD
touch pad display.
113 SERIAL PORT P1 Four button Used to readout and/or download event log.
touch pad
See Figure 4-3 for Keypad ⁄ Keypad Display Breakdown
Change 4 4-46.1/(4-46.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 4-3. SDCA Swing-Out Panel Keypad and Keypad Display
4-47
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 4-4. MDC Local Control Panel (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-48
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
MDC Local Control Panel Indicators
1 DISPLAY READOUT LCD First Line: Indicates up to three measurements in

Display normal operating status or text to explain the
second line.
Second Line: Shows a measurement with the
respective unit of measure except during an error.
Third Line: Normally blank and is used in menu
mode to show the selected parameter number or
parameter group number and name.
Fourth Line: Indicates status message text in
normal mode and indicates parameter values in
data change mode.
2 ON Green LED Indicates when motor drive is powered up via 24
Vdc.
3 WARNING Yellow LED Indicates when drive status has exceeded a warning
threshold.
4 ALARM Red LED Indicates when drive status has exceeded an alarm
threshold.
MDC Local Control Panel Keys
5 QUICK MENU Control Key Displays incremental encoder position, absolute

encoder position, and the motor drive I ⁄ O status.
6 MENU Control Key Displays motor drive parameters.
7 CANCEL Control Key Used to cancel a selected parameter entry.
8 OK Control Key Enters a parameter change into memory.
9 + Control Key Selects a parameter, changes the selected parameter
value, or changes the readout in line 2.
10 (RIGHT ARROW) Control Key Used for selecting a parameter group and to move
cursor when changing numerical value of a param-
eter.
11 - Control Key Selects a parameter, changes selected parameter
value, or changes the readout in line 2.
Figure 4-4. MDC Local Control Panel (Sheet 2)
4-49
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
MDC Local Control Panel Keys - Continued
12 START Control Key Used to start motor drive program after a stop
command via the control keys.
13 FWD. ⁄ REV. Control Key Deactivated.
14 JOG Control Key Deactivated.
15 STOP ⁄ RESET Control Key Deactivated.
16 (LEFT ARROW) Control Key Used for selecting a parameter group and to move
cursor when changing numerical value of a param-
eter.
17 CHANGE DATA Control Key Selects a parameter for editing in menu mode.
18 DISPLAY ⁄ STATUS Control Key Selects the mode of display or changes back to
display mode from quick menu mode.
Figure 4-4. MDC Local Control Panel (Sheet 3)
4-50
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 4-5. ESS Control Panel Display
4-51
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-5. Security Pit Vault Door Trouble Analysis
Step Trouble Corrective Action
1. Combination lock will not dial open. Perform vault door forced-entry procedures per
Chapter 10.
2. Bolt operating handle does not retract lock bolts. Ensure combination lock is unlocked.
Perform vault door forced-entry procedures per
Chapter 10.
3. Combination lock does not accept combination Replace combination lock assembly (Paragraph
change. 5.2.2.3 and Paragraph 5.2.2.4) or vault door (Para-
graph 5.2.2.1).
4. Combination lock opens, but operation is erratic or a. Remove combination lock cover and
binding. check lock assembly and dial and shaft
assembly for freedom of rotation.
b. Loosen combination lock assembly and
check for binding. If combination lock
assembly is not binding, retighten lock
assembly and recheck for binding.
c. Check scrambler driver for adjustment
(Paragraph 5.2.2.6) and drive cam for
adjustment (Paragraph 5.2.2.4).
d. Replace combination lock assembly
(Paragraph 5.2.2.3 and Paragraph 5.2.2.4)
or vault door (Paragraph 5.2.2.1).
5. Bolt operating handle does retract lock bolts but Replace vault door (Paragraph 5.2.2.1).
does not turn smoothly.
6. Vault door causes IZ alarm when lock is correctly Adjust or replace lock sensitive switch (Paragraph
scrambled, or IZ resets when off of scramble 5.2.2.5) or replace vault door (Paragraph 5.2.2.1).
number.
Table 4-6. Primary Access Trouble Analysis
1. Primary door lock bolt difficult to retract. a. Ensure linear actuator is not applying
tension load.
b. If temperatures are below freezing, blow
hot air on threaded shaft nut to thaw ice.
c. Clean and lubricate lock bolt and
threaded shaft (Paragraph 6.1.1).
2. Linear actuator difficult to operate. a. Ensure lock bolt is fully retracted.
b. Replace actuator (Paragraph 5.5.2).
4-52
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-7. Miscellaneous Secondary Access System Trouble Analysis
1. Combination lock dial does not rotate freely. a. Ensure dial does not rub on dial ring or
drag on felt washer.
b. Remove combination lock cover and
check lock assembly and dial and shaft
assembly for freedom of rotation. If
combination lock dial is not binding,
inspect and clean lock IAW Paragraph
5.2.2.7.
c. Loosen combination lock assembly and
check for binding. If combination lock
assembly is not binding, retighten lock
assembly and recheck for binding.
d. Remove combination lock assembly IAW
Paragraph 5.7.1.5, and check lock
assembly and dial and shaft assembly for
freedom of rotation. If dial or shaft is
binding, remove dial and shaft IAW Para-
graph 5.7.1.9 and repair as necessary. If
lock assembly is binding, inspect and
clean lock parts IAW Paragraph 5.2.2.7.
If cleaning does not correct problem,
replace lock assembly or lock IAW Para-
graph 5.7.1.5.
2. Secondary door combination lock fails to unlock. a. Verify correct combination and redial.
b. If other combination lock unlocks,
complete LF penetration. If neither
combination lock can be unlocked,
perform secondary door forced-entry
procedures per Chapter 10.
c. Ensure correct combination is inserted in
lock by performing combination change
procedures IAW Paragraph 8.1.2.
d. Ensure proper operation of lock mecha-
nism IAW Paragraph 5.7.1.8.
e. Inspect and clean lock parts IAW Para-
graph 5.2.2.7. If cleaning does not correct
problem, replace combination lock
assembly or lock case, IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.7.
4-53
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-7. Miscellaneous Secondary Access System Trouble Analysis - Continued
3. Secondary door cannot be lowered manually using Perform secondary door forced-entry procedures IAW
emergency drive shaft. T.O. 35M37-4-12.
4. Secondary door lock bolts bind on manual Perform trouble analysis IAW Table 4-4.
retraction.
5. Secondary door T-handle does not turn freely in Remove and clean unlocking camshaft IAW
manual operation. Paragraph 5.7.1.10.
6. Actuator Locking Bar (ALB) (T-handle) fails to Perform trouble analysis IAW Table 4-4.
retract.
7. Security pin fails to retract. Perform trouble analysis IAW Table 4-4.
8. Lock bolts fail to retract. Perform trouble analysis IAW Table 4-4.
9. SAS fails to change mode of operation when a. If not previously accomplished, perform
commanded from SDCA. SDCA lamp test IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ). Replace defec-
tive lamp if required; otherwise, proceed
to next step.
b. Replace SDCA MODE (Figure 4-1, 10)
switch IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.3.6. If fault
c. Replace SDCA primary control CCA
10. Abnormal indications when EMA gearbox safety pin a. Clean EMA gearbox safety pin sensor
is engaged or disengaged. IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ). If
fault recurs, proceed to next step.
b. Replace EMA gearbox safety pin photo-
electric sensor IAW Paragraph 5.8.1.3. If
fault recurs, proceed to next step.
c. Replace SDCA primary control CCA
4-54
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-8. Secondary Door Control Assembly Menu
Menu Level I Menu Level II Normal Indications
MENU 1
FIRMWARE MESSAGE LOG
MENU 1.1 Move up and down arrow to display entries
VIEW LOG ENTRIES that reside between TOP OF LOG AND END
OF LOG.
MENU 1.2 Display reads:
ENTRY COUNT
xxxxx ENTRIES IN
FIRMWARE MESSAGE LOG
MENU 2
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
SDCA 12VDC CIRCUIT A
SDCA 12VDC CIRCUIT A
XX.XX VOLTS
SDCA 12VDC CIRCUIT B
SDCA 12VDC CIRCUIT B
XX.XX VOLTS
SDCA 24VDC INTERNAL
SDCA 24VDC INTERNAL
XX.XX VOLTS
SDCA 24VDC EXTERNAL
SDCA 24VDC EXTERNAL
XX.XX VOLTS
SDCA 24VDC COMBO
SDCA 24VDC COMBO
XX.XX VOLTS
SDCA 12VDC BUS
SDCA 12VDC BUS
XX.XX VOLTS
MENU 3 Display reads:
IO EXTENDER TEST
IO EXTENDER TEST
TEST (PASSED/FAILED)
4-55
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-8. Secondary Door Control Assembly Menu - Continued

FIRMWARE VERSION
B-PLUG FIRMWARE
VERSION X.XX
INDICATOR TEST
(Maint Mode Only)
INDICATOR TEST START
3 seconds later
Display reads:
SECURE INDICATOR
3 seconds later
Display reads:
ACCESS INDICATOR
3 seconds later
Display reads:
ONLINE INDICATOR
3 seconds later
Display reads:
FAULT INDICATOR
3 seconds later
Display reads:
NO-GO INDICATOR
3 seconds later
Display reads:
ESS SOC INDICATOR
3 seconds later
Display reads:
SDCA & SARC SPEAKER
MENU 6
EQUIPMENT CHECK
(Maint Mode Only)
CMD LOCK BOLT EXTEND Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING LOCK BOLT
EXTEND
Display reads for 1 second:
SENT LOCK BOLT EXTEND
4-56
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
MENU 6 CMD MDC OFF Display reads for 1 second:

EQUIPMENT CHECK
(Maint Mode Only) - Cont SENDING MDC OFF
SENT MDC OFF
CMD MDC RESET Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING MDC RESET
SENT MDC RESET
CMD MDC JOG UP Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING MDC JOG UP
SENT MDC JOG UP
CMD MDC JOG DOWN Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING MDC JOG DOWN
SENT MDC JOG DOWN
CMD ESS RESET Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING ESS RESET
SENT ESS RESET
CMD ESS ON Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING ESS ON
SENT ESS ON
CMD ESS OFF Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING ESS OFF
SENT ESS OFF
CMD T-HANDLE PULL Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING T-HANDLE PULL
SENT T-HANDLE PULL
4-57
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
MENU 6 CMD T-HANDLE HOLD Display reads for 1 second:

EQUIPMENT CHECK
(Maint Mode Only) - Cont SENDING T-HANDLE HOLD
SENT T-HANDLE HOLD
CMD LOCK BOLT RETRCT Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING LOCK BOLT

RETRCT
SENT LOCK BOLT RETRCT
CMD T-HANDLE PULL Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING T-HANDLE PULL
SENT T-HANDLE PULL
CMD T-HANDLE HOLD Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING T-HANDLE HOLD
SENT T-HANDLE HOLD
CMD LOCK BOLT RETRCT Display reads for 1 second:
SENDING LOCK BOLT
RETRCT
SENT LOCK BOLT RETRCT
4-58
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-9. Typical Firmware Message Log Entries During SARC Site Penetration Sequence
Sequence of Events Time Stamp SDCA Keypad Display Message

(Typical) (Typical)
SITE PENETRATION SEQUENCE (TYPICAL)

- SDCA Activated --
00:00:00 GDM085 CTRL LOG FROM EEPROM
00:00:00 GDM001 SELF TEST PASS
00:00:00 B-Plug Firmware Version 1.00
00:00:00 INPUT471 208VAC ENBL RELY-ON
00:00:00 INPUT501 208VAC PRI CNTCT-ON
00:00:00 INPUT571 LCK BLT 24V RDY-ON
00:00:00 INPUT601 LCK BLT EXT-ON
00:00:00 INPUT621 SEC PIN ENG-ON
00:00:00 INPUT641 T-HNDLE ENG-ON
00:00:00 INPUT661 EMA DRVR 5V STAT-ON
00:00:04 START001 ENTR OPER MODE
-- SARC Timer Engage Switch Activated --
00:00:04 INPUT351 TMR TRIGGER-ON
00:00:04 INPUT361 LGIC TMR ENG-ON
00:00:04 INPUT361 LGIC TMR ENG-ON
00:00:04 GDM101 FAULT SCAN SUSPND
00:00:04 GDM059 60MIN A TMR VRF STRT
00:00:04 GDM062 60MIN B TMR VRF STRT
00:00:45 START003 STARTUP TMR CMPL
00:00:45 START004 FLT & NO-GO SCAN ON
00:00:45 INPUT371 MDC HOMED-ON
00:00:45 INPUT411 MDC FULL UP-ON
00:00:45 INPUT461 MDC LCK RNG SEC-ON
00:00:45 INPUT671 ESS STARTUP-ON
00:00:47 START005 STARTUP RESET
00:00:47 GDM022 RESET STRT
00:00:47 GDM023 RESET ESS AND MDC
4-59
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-9. Typical Firmware Message Log Entries During SARC Site Penetration Sequence - Continued

(Typical) (Typical)
-- SARC Timer Engage Switch Activated -- - Cont

00:00:53 GDM024 RESET CMD ESS ON
00:00:55 GDM025 RESET CMPL
00:13:35 INPUT541 ESS SOC 0%-ON
00:13:35 INPUT670 ESS STARTUP-OFF
00:13:35 INPUT701 ESS CHRG-ON
00:18:59 INPUT551 ESS SOC 25%-ON
00:27:20 INPUT561 ESS SOC 62.5%-ON
00:35:35 INPUT700 ESS CHRG-OFF
4-60
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Typical) (Typical)
-- SARC Timer Engage Switch Activated -- - Cont

01:04:04 INPUT251 LGIC VRF 0A-ON
01:04:04 INPUT301 LGIC VRF 1B-ON
01:04:04 INPUT311 LGIC VRF 0C-ON
01:04:04 INPUT331 LGIC VRF 0D-ON
01:04:04 INPUT620 SEC PIN ENG-ON
01:04:04 INPUT261 LGIC VRF 1A-ON
01:04:04 INPUT271 LGIC VRF 0B-ON
01:04:04 GDM060 60MIN A TMR VRF PASS
01:04:04 GDM063 60MIN B TMR VRF PASS
01:04:05 GDM065 10MIN A TMR VRF STRT
01:04:05 GDM068 10MIN B TMR VRF STRT
01:04:05 INPUT631 SEC PIN RET-ON
01:04:08 GDM039 COIL 1 AMP PASS
01:04:08 COIL 1 MAX=1.803 MIN=1.803 MEAN=1.803
01:04:08 GDM041 COIL 2 AMP PASS
01:04:08 COIL 2 MAX=1.530 MIN=1.530 MEAN=1.530
-- SARC Lock Bolt Retract Switch Activated --
01:05:22 INPUT001 SARC LB RET SW-ON
01:05:22 GDM008 LCKBLT RET SQ STRT
01:05:22 GDM030 SECPIN RET WT STRT
01:05:22 SECPIN RET WT CMPL
01:05:22 INPUT000 SARC LB RET SW-OFF
4-61
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Typical) (Typical)
-- SARC Lock Bolt Retract Switch Activated -- - Cont

01:05:22 GDM032 T-HNDL PULL & HOLD
01:05:22 INPUT640 T-HNDLE ENG-OFF
01:05:23 GDM035 T-HNDL RET WT CMPL
01:05:23 GDM033 T-HNDL PULL OFF
01:05:23 GDM010 LCKBLT RET STRT
01:05:23 INPUT651 T-HNDLE RET-ON
01:05:24 INPUT600 LCK BLT EXT-OFF
01:05:28 INPUT611 LCK BLT RET-ON
01:05:28 DM034 T-HNDL HOLD OFF
01:05:28 GDM011 LCKBLT RET CMPL
01:05:28 INPUT650 T-HNDLE RET-OFF
01:05:29 GDM009 LCKBLT RET SQ CMPL
-- SARC Lower Switch Activated --
01:05:45 INPUT001 SARC LWR SW-ON
01:05:46 GDM026 SARC LWR SQ STRT
01:05:46 GDM014 MDC LWR STRT
01:05:46 INPUT030 SARC LWR SW-OFF
01:05:46 INPUT431 MDC MOTOR ON-ON
01:05:51 INPUT451 MDC DWN MOTION-ON
01:05:51 INPUT711 ESS DSCHRG-ON
01:05:51 INPUT410 MDC FULL UP-OFF
01:06:16 INPUT460 MDC LCK RNG SEC-OFF
01:06:29 INPUT450 MDC DWN MOTION-OFF
01:06:29 INPUT710 ESS DSCHRG-OFF
01:06:30 INPUT430 MDC MOTOR ON-OFF
01:06:32 INPUT421 MDC FULL DWN-ON
01:06:34 GDM015 MDC LWR CMPL
01:06:34 GDM027 SARC LWR SQ CMPL
4-62
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Typical) (Typical)
-- Secondary Door Lowered, 10-minute Timers Run Until Time-Out --

01:14:04 INPUT250 LGIC VRF 0A-OFF
01:14:04 INPUT270 LGIC VRF 0B-OFF
01:14:04 INPUT300 LGIC VRF 1B-OFF
01:14:04 INPUT310 LGIC VRF 0C-OFF
01:14:04 INPUT330 LGIC VRF 0D-OFF
01:14:04 INPUT 350 TMR TRIGGER-OFF
01:14:04 INPUT360 LGIC TMR ENG-OFF
01:14:04 INPUT260 LGIC VRF 1A-OFF
01:14:04 GDM066 10MIN A TMR VRF PASS
01:14:04 GDM069 10MIN B TMR VRF PASS
01:14:07 GDM102 FAULT SCAN RESUME
-- All Messages Related To Site Penetration Complete --
4-63
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-10. Typical Firmware Message Log Entries During SARC Raise Sequence

(Typical) (Typical)
SITE PENETRATION SEQUENCE (TYPICAL)

-- SARC Raise Activated --
01:16:03 INPUT011 SARC RSE SW-ON
01:16:03 INPUT431 MDC MOTOR ON-ON
01:16:03 GDM097 LGIC VRF EVENTS CAN
01:16:03 GDM101 FAULT SCAN SUSPND
01:16:03 INPUT010 SARC RSE SW-OFF
01:16:03 GDM020 MDC RSE SQ STRT
01:16:03 GDM018 MDC RSE STRT
01:16:07 INPUT441 MDC UP MOTION-ON
01:16:07 INPUT420 MDC FULL DWN-OFF
01:16:07 INPUT711 ESS DSCHRG-ON
01:16:11 INPUT461 MDC LCK RNG SEC-ON
01:16:19 INPUT440 MDC UP MOTION-OFF
01:16:19 INPUT710 ESS DSCHRG-OFF
01:16:20 INPUT430 MDC MOTOR ON-OFF
01:16:22 INPUT411 MDC FULL UP-ON
01:16:24 GDM019 MDC RSE CMPL
01:16:24 GDM066 LCKBLT EXT STRT
01:16:24 INPUT610 LCK BLT RET-OFF
01:16:28 INPUT601 LCK BLT EXT-ON
01:16:28 INPUT630 SEC PIN RET-OFF
01:16:29 INPUT641 T-HNDLE ENG-ON
01:16:29 GDM007 LCKBLT EXT CMPL
01:16:29 INPUT SEC PIN ENG-ON
01:16:29 GDM021 MDC RSE SQ CMPL
01:16:31 GDM102 FAULT SCAN RESUME
- Raise Command Complete -
4-64
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-11. SDCA Firmware Message Log START Messages
LCD Keypad Display Function Description
START001 Firmware has entered During startup, the firmware entered

ENTR OPER MODE OPERATION mode. OPERATION mode.
START002 Firmware has entered During startup, the firmware entered
ENTR MAIN MODE MAINTENANCE mode. MAINTENANCE mode.
START003 Startup timer has completed. Firmware self test completed and the firmware
STARTUP TMR CMPL 45-second MDC and ESS startup timer has
expired.
START004 FAULT and NO-GO scanning is Firmware has begun its monitoring for FAULT
FLT & NO-GO SCAN ON now active. and NO-GO conditions.
START005 Startup reset has started. Startup reset was sent to the MDC and ESS to
STARTUP RESET prevent erroneous FAULTs and NO-GOs.
Time stamp not shown
4-65
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-12. SDCA Firmware Message Log INPUT Messages
INPUT000 The SARC Lock Bolts Retract The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 0 was set False.
SARC LB RET SW-OFF Switch signal has been set to
OFF.
INPUT001 The SARC Lock Bolts Retract The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 0 was set True.
SARC LB RET SW-ON Switch signal has been set to
ON.
INPUT010 The SARC Raise Switch signal The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 1 was set False.
SARC RSE SW-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT011 The SARC Raise Switch signal The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 1 was set True.
SARC RSE SW-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT020 The SARC Raise Remote Switch The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 2 was set False.
SARC RSE RM SW-ON signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT021 The SARC Raise Remote Switch The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 2 was set True.
SARC RSE RM SW-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT030 The SARC Lower Switch signal The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 3 was set False.
SARC LWR SW-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT031 The SARC Lower Switch signal The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 3 was set True.
SARC LWR SW-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT040 The SARC Off Switch signal has The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 4 was set False.
SARC OFF SW-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT041 The SARC Off Switch signal has The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 4 was set True.
SARC OFF SW-ON been set to ON.
INPUT050 The SARC of SDCA Reset The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 5 was set False.
RESET SW-OFF Switch signal has been set to
OFF.
INPUT051 The SARC or SDCA Reset The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 5 was set True.
RESET SW-ON Switch signal has been set to
ON.
INPUT060 The SDCA Operating Mode The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 6 was set False.
SDCA OP MD SW-OFF Switch signal has been set to
OFF.
INPUT061 The SDCA Operating Mode The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 6 was set True.
SDCA OP MD SW-ON Switch signal has been set to
ON.
INPUT070 The SDCA Maintenance Mode The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 7 was set False.
SDCA MNT MD SW-OFF Switch signal has been set to
OFF.
INPUT071 The SDCA Maintenance Mode The IO Extender Port 0 Bit 7 was set True.
SDCA MNT MD SW-ON Switch signal has been set to
ON.
4-66
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-12. SDCA Firmware Message Log INPUT Messages - Continued
INPUT100 The SDCA Raise Switch signal The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 0 was set False.
SDCA RSE SW-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT101 The SDCA Raise Switch signal The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 0 was set True.
SDCA RSE SW-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT110 The SDCA Lower Switch signal The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 1 was set False.
SDCA LWR SW-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT111 The SDCA Lower Switch signal The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 1 was set True.
SDCA LWR SW-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT120 The SDCA Off Switch signal has The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 2 was set False.
SDCA OFF SW-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT121 The SDCA Off Switch signal has The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 2 was set True.
SDCA OFF SW-ON been set to ON.
INPUT130 The SDCA Jog Up Switch signal The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 3 was set False.
SDCA JOG UP SW-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT131 The SDCA Jog Up Switch signal The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 3 was set True.
SDCA JOG UP SW-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT140 The SDCA Jog Down Switch The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 4 was set False.
SDCA JOG DWN SW-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT141 The SDCA Jog Down Switch The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 4 was set True.
SDCA JOG DWN SW-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT150 The SDCA Lock Bolts Retract The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 5 was set False.
SDCA LB RET SW-OFF Switch signal has been set to
OFF.
INPUT151 The SDCA Lock Bolts Retract The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 5 was set True.
SDCA LB Switch signal has been set to
RET SW-ON ON.
INPUT160 The SDCA Lock Bolts Extend The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 6 was set False.
SDCA LB EXT SW-OFF Switch signal has been set to
OFF.
INPUT161 The SDCA Lock Bolts Extend The IO Extender Port 1 Bit 6 was set True.
SDCA LB EXT SW-ON Switch signal has been set to
ON.
INPUT230 The LER Wall Raise Switch The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 3 was set False.
LER WALL RSE SW-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT231 The LER Wall Raise Switch The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 3 was set True.
LER WALL RSE SW-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT240 The LER Wall Lower Switch The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 4 was set False.
LER WALL LWR SW-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT241 The LER Wall Lower Switch The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 4 was set True.
LER WALL LWR SW-ON signal has been set to ON.
4-67
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INPUT250 The Logic Verification 0-A signal The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 5 was set False.
LGIC VRF 0A-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT251 The Logic Verification 0-A signal The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 5 was set True.
LGIC VRF 0A-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT260 The Logic Verification 1-A signal The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 6 was set False.
LGIC VRF 1A-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT261 The Logic Verification 1-A signal The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 6 was set True.
LGIC VRF 1A-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT270 The Logic Verification 0-B signal The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 7 was set False.
LGIC VRF 0B-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT271 The Logic Verification 0-B signal The IO Extender Port 2 Bit 7 was set True.
LGIC VRF 0B-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT300 The Logic Verification 1-B signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 0 was set False.
LGIC VRF 1B-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT301 The Logic Verification 1-B signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 0 was set True.
LGIC VRF 1B-ON has been set to OFF.
INPUT310 The Logic Verification 0-C signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 1 was set False.
LGIC VRF 0C-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT311 The Logic Verification 0-C signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 1 was set True.
LGIC VRF 0C-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT320 The Logic Verification 1-C signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 2 was set False.
LGIC VRF 1C-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT321 The Logic Verification 1-C signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 2 was set True.
LGIC VRF 1C-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT330 The Logic Verification 0-D signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 3 was set False.
LGIC VRF 0D-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT331 The Logic Verification 0-D signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 3 was set True.
LGIC VRF 0D-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT340 The Logic Verification 1-D signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 4 was set False.
LGIC VRF 1D-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT341 The Logic Verification 1-D signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 4 was set True.
LGIC VRF 1D-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT350 The Logic Timer Trigger signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 5 was set False.
TMR TRIGGER-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT351 The Logic Timer Trigger signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 5 was set True.
TMR TRIGGER-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT360 The Logic Timer Engage signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 6 was set False.
LGIC TMR ENG-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT361 The Logic Timer Engage signal The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 6 was set True.
LGIC TMR ENG-ON has been set to ON.
4-68
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INPUT370 The MDC Homed signal has The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 7 was set False.
MDC HOMED-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT371 The MDC Homed signal has The IO Extender Port 3 Bit 7 was set True.
MDC HOMED-ON been set to ON.
INPUT400 The MDC NO-GO signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 0 was set False.
MDC NO-GO-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT401 The MDC NO-GO signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 0 was set True.
MDC NO-GO-ON been set to ON.
INPUT410 The MDC Full Up signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 1 was set False.
MDC FULL UP-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT411 The MDC Full Up signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 1 was set True.
MDC FULL UP-ON been set to ON.
INPUT420 The MDC Full Down signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 2 was set False.
MDC FULL DWN-OFF been set to OF
INPUT21 The MDC Full Down signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 2 was set True.
MDC FULL DWN-ON been set to ON.
INPUT430 The MDC Motor On signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 3 was set False.
MDC MOTOR ON-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT431 The MDC Motor On signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 3 was set True.
MDC MOTOR ON-ON been set to ON.
INPUT440 The MDC Up Motion signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 4 was set False.
MDC UP MOTION-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT441 The MDC Up Motion signal has The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 4 was set True.
MDC UP MOTION-ON been set to ON.
INPUT450 The MDC Down Motion signal The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 5 was set False.
MDC DWN MOTION-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT451 The MDC Down Motion signal The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 5 was set True.
MDC DWN MOTION-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT460 The MDC Lock Ring Secure The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 6 was set False.
MDC LCK RNG SEC-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT461 The MDC Lock Ring Secure The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 6 was set True.
MDC LCK RNG SEC-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT470 The 208 VAC Enable Relay The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 7 was set False.
208VAC ENBL RELY-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT471 The 208 VAC Enable Relay The IO Extender Port 4 Bit 7 was set True.
208VAC ENBL RELY-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT500 The 208 VAC Primary Contactor The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 0 was set False.
208VAC PRI CNTCT-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT501 The 208 VAC Primary Contactor The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 0 was set True.
208VAC PRI CNTCT-ON signal has been set to ON.
4-69
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INPUT510 The 208 VAC Auxiliary The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 1 was set False.
208VAC AUX CNTCT-OFF Contactor signal has been set to
OFF.
INPUT511 The 208 VAC Auxiliary The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 1 was set True.
208VAC AUX CNTCT-ON Contactor signal has been set to
ON.
INPUT520 The ESS Fault signal has been The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 2 was set False.
ESS FAULT-OFF set to OFF.
INPUT521 The ESS Fault signal has been The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 2 was set True.
ESS FAULT-ON set to ON.
INPUT530 The ESS NO-GO signal has been The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 3 was set False.
ESS NO-GO-OFF set to OFF.
INPUT531 The ESS NO-GO signal has been The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 3 was set True.
ESS NO-GO-ON set to ON.
INPUT540 The ESS State of Charge 0% The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 4 was set False.
ESS SOC 0%-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT541 The ESS State of Charge 0% The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 4 was set True.
ESS SOC 0%-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT550 The ESS State of Charge 25% The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 5 was set False.
ESS SOC 25%-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT551 The ESS State of Charge 25% The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 5 was set True.
ESS SOC 25%-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT560 The ESS State of Charge 62.5% The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 6 was set False.
ESS SOC 62.5%-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT561 The ESS State of Charge 62.5% The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 6 was set True.
ESS SOC 62.5%-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT570 The Lock Bolt 24 Volt Ready The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 7 was set False.
LCK BLT 24V RDY-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT571 The Lock Bolt 24 Volt Ready The IO Extender Port 5 Bit 7 was set True.
LCK BLT 24V RDY-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT600 The Lock Bolt Extended signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 0 was set False.
LCK BLT EXT-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT601 The Lock Bolt Extended signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 0 was set True.
LCK BLT EXT-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT610 The Lock Bolt Retracted signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 1 was set False.
LCK BLT RET-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT611 The Lock Bolt Retracted signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 1 was set True.
LCK BLT RET-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT620 The Secure Pin Engaged signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 2 was set False.
SEC PIN ENG-OFF has been set to OFF.
4-70
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INPUT621 The Secure Pin Engaged signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 2 was set True.
SEC PIN ENG-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT630 The Secure Pin Retracted signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 3 was set False.
SEC PIN RET-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT631 The Secure Pin Retracted signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 3 was set True.
SEC PIN RET-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT640 The T-Handle Engaged signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 4 was set False.
T-HNDLE ENG-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT641 The T-Handle Engaged signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 4 was set True.
T-HNDLE ENG-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT650 The T-Handle Retracted signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 5 was set False.
T-HNDLE RET-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT651 The T-Handle Retracted signal The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 5 was set True.
T-HNDLE RET-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT660 The EMA Driver 5 Volt Status The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 6 was set False.
EMA DRVR 5V STAT-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT661 The EMA Driver 5 Volt Status The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 6 was set True.
EMA DRVR 5V STAT-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT670 The ESS Startup signal has been The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 7 was set False.
ESS STARTUP-OFF set to OFF.
INPUT671 The ESS Startup signal has been The IO Extender Port 6 Bit 7 was set True.
ESS STARTUP-ON set to ON.
INPUT700 The ESS Charge signal has been The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 0 was set False.
ESS CHRG-OFF set to OFF.
INPUT701 The ESS Charge signal has been The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 0 was set True.
ESS CHRG-ON set to ON.
INPUT710 The ESS Discharge signal has The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 1 was set False.
ES DSCHRG-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT711 The ESS Discharge signal has The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 1 was set True.
ESS DSCHRG-ON been set to ON.
INPUT720 The ESS Off signal has been set The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 2 was set False.
ESS OFF-OFF to OFF.
INPUT721 The ESS Off signal has been set The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 2 was set True.
ESS OFF-ON to OFF.
INPUT730 The ESS Shutdown signal has The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 3 was set False.
ESS SHUTDOWN-OFF been set to OFF.
INPUT731 The ESS Shutdown signal has The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 3 was set True.
ESS SHUTDOWN-ON been set to ON.
INPUT740 The SDCA Coil 1 Test Switch The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 4 was set False.
COIL 1 TEST SW-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
4-71
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INPUT741 The SDCA Coil 1 Test Switch The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 4 was set True.
COIL 1 TEST SW-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT750 The SDCA Coil 2 Test Switch The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 5 was set False.
COIL 2 TEST SW-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT751 The SDCA Coil 2 Test Switch The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 5 was set True.
COIL 2 TEST SW-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT760 The MDC Gearbox Safety signal The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 6 was set False.
MDC GRBOX SAFETY-OFF has been set to OFF.
INPUT761 The MDC Gearbox Safety signal The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 6 was set True.
MDC GRBOX SAFETY-ON has been set to ON.
INPUT770 The Audible Cancel Switch The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 7 was set False.
AUDIBLE CAN SW-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT771 The Audible Cancel Switch The IO Extender Port 7 Bit 7 was set True.
AUDIBLE CAN SW-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT800 The Maintenance Mode Sense The IO Extender Port 8 Bit 0 was set False.
MAINT MODE SENSE-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT801 The Maintenance Mode Sense The IO Extender Port 8 Bit 0 was set True.
MAINT MODE SENSE-ON signal has been set to ON.
INPUT810 The ESS Over Temperature The IO Extender Port 8 Bit 1 was set False.
ESS OVERTEMP-OFF signal has been set to OFF.
INPUT811 The ESS Over Temperature The IO Extender Port 8 Bit 1 was set True.
ESS OVERTEMP-ON signal has been set to ON.
4-72
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-13. SDCA Firmware Message Log GENERAL DIAGNOSTIC Messages
GDM001 Self Test Passed. All Self Test routines completed successfully.
SELF TEST PASS
GDM002 Jog Down Event started. A Jog Down Event was started.
JOG DWN STRT
GDM003 Jog Down Event completed. Active Jog Down Event has completed.
JOG DWN CMPL
GDM004 Jog Up Event started. A Jog Up Event was started.
JOG UP STRT
GDM005 Jog Up Event completed. Active Jog Up Event has completed.
JOG UP CMPL
GDM006 Lock Bolt Extend Event started. A Lock Bolt Extend Event was started.
LCKBLT EXT STRT
GDM007 Lock Bolt Extend Event Active Lock Bolt Extend has completed.
LCKBLT EXT CMPL completed.
GDM008 Lock Bolt Retract Sequence A Lock Bolt Retract Sequence was started.
LCKBLT RET SQ STRT started.
GDM009 Lock Bolt Retract Sequence Active Lock Bolt Retract Sequence has
LCKBLT RET SQ CMPL completed. completed.
GDM010 Lock Bolt Retract Event started. A Lock Bolt Retract Event was started.
LCKBLT RET STRT
GDM011 Lock Bolt Retract Event Active Lock Bolt Retract Event has completed.
LCKBLT RET CMPL completed.
GDM012 MDC Home Event started. A MDC Home Event was started.
MDC HOME STRT
GDM013 MDC Home Event completed. Active MDC Home Event has completed.
MDC HOME CMPL
GDM014 MDC Lower Event started. A MDC Lower Event was started.
MDC LWR STRT
GDM015 MDC Lower Event completed. Active MDC Lower Event has completed.
MDC LWR CMPL
GDM016 MDC Off Event started. A MDC Off Event was started.
MDC OFF STRT
GDM017 MDC Off Event completed. Active MDC Off Event has completed.
MDC OFF CMPL
GDM018 MDC Raise Event started. A MDC Raise Event was started.
MDC RSE STRT
GDM019 MDC Raise Event completed. Active MDC Raise Event has completed.
MDC RSE CMPL
GDM020 MDC Raise Sequence started. A MDC Raise Sequence was started.
MDC RSE SQ STRT
4-73
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-13. SDCA Firmware Message Log GENERAL DIAGNOSTIC Messages - Continued
GDM021 MDC Raise Sequence completed. Active MDC Raise Sequence has completed.
MDC RSE SQ CMPL
GDM022 Reset Event started. A Reset Event was started.
RESET STRT
GDM023 Reset Event has sent ESS Reset MDC Reset and ESS Reset signals were set True
RESET ESS AND MDC and MDC Reset. as part of the Reset Event for 1 second.
GDM024 Reset Event has sent ESS On. ESS On signal was set True as part of a Reset
RESET CMD ESS ON Event for 1 second.
GDM025 Reset Event completed. Active Reset Event has completed.
RESET CMPL
GDM026 SARC Lower Sequence started. SARC commanded Lower Sequence was started.
SARC LWR SQ STRT
GDM027 SARC Lower Sequence Active SARC commanded Lower Sequence has
SARC LWR SQ CMPL completed. completed.
GDM028 SDCA Lower Sequence started. SDCA commanded Lower Sequence was started.
SDCA LWR SQ STRT
GDM029 SDCA Lower Sequence Active SDCA commanded Lower Sequence has
SDCA LWR SQ CMPL completed. completed.
GDM030 Wait for Secure Pin Retracted The firmware Security Pin Wait timer has been
SECPIN RET WT STRT signal to be set True started. started. It waits for the Security Pin signal to be
set True.
GDM031 Wait for Secure Pin Retracted The Security Pin Retracted signal was set True
SECPIN RET WT CMPL signal to be set True completed. and the firmware Security Pin Wait timer stopped.
GDM032 T-Handle Pull and T-Handle T-Handle Pull and T-Handle Hold signals were set
T-HNDL PULL & HOLD Hold signals set True. True.
GDM033 T-Handle Pull signal set False. T-Handle Pull signal was set False.
T-HNDL PULL OFF
GDM034 T-Handle Hold signal set False. T-Handle Hold signal was set False.
T-HNDL HOLD OFF
GDM035 Wait for T-Handle Retracted T-Handle Retracted signal was set True and the
T-HNDL RET WT CMPL signal to be set True has firmware T-Handle Retract wait timer stopped.
completed.
GDM036 Firmware has entered Operating The firmware entered Operation Mode and has set
ENTR OPER MODE Mode. the Maintenance Mode Request signal to False.
GDM037 Firmware has entered Mainte- The firmware entered Maintenance Mode and has
ENTR MAINT MODE nance Mode. set the Maintenance Mode Request signal to True.
GDM038 Firmware has entered Enhanced The firmware entered Maintenance Mode and has
ENHNCD MAINT MODE Maintenance Mode. set the Maintenance Mode Request signal to True.
4-74
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
GDM039 Coil 1 amperage reading was During a Security Pin Coil 1 Test, the Security
COIL 1 AMP PASS inside its allowable limits and Pin Coil 1 amperage was inside its allowable
has passed the amperage test. limits.
COIL 1 AMP FLT outside of its allowable limits Pin Coil 1 amperage was outside of its allowable
and has failed the amperage test. limits.
COIL 2 AMP PASS inside its allowable limits and Pin Coil 2 amperage was inside of its allowable
has passed the amperage test. limits.
and has failed the amperage test. tolerances.
GDM043 Stopped the active Lock Bolt Active Lock Bolt Extend Event was stopped
STOP LCKBLT EXT Extend Event. because a new command was received.
GDM044 Stopped the active Lock Bolt Active Lock Bolt Retract Sequence was stopped
STOP LCKBLT RET SQ Retract Sequence. because a new command was received.
GDM045 Stopped the active Lock Bolt Active Lock Bolt Retract Event was stopped
STOP LCKBLT RET Retract Event. because a new command was received.
GDM046 Stopped the active MDC Home Active MDC Home Event was stopped because a
STOP MDC HOME Event. new command was received.
GDM047 Stopped the active MDC Jog Active MDC Jog Down Event was stopped
STOP MDC JOG DOWN Down Event. because a new command was received.
GDM048 Stopped the active MDC Jog Up Active MDC Jog Up Event was stopped because
STOP MDC JOG UP Event. a new command was received.
GDM049 Stopped the active MDC Lower Active MDC Lower Event was stopped because a
STOP MDC LWR Event. new command was received.
GDM050 Stopped the active MDC Off Active MDC Off Event was stopped because a
STOP MDC OFF Event. new command was received.
GDM051 Stopped the active MDC Raise Active MDC Raise Sequence was stopped
STOP MDC RSE SQ Sequence. because a new command was received.
GDM052 Stopped the active MDC Raise Active MDC Raise Event was stopped because a
STOP MDC RSE Event. new command was received.
GDM053 Stopped the active Reset Event. Active Reset Event was stopped because a new
STOP RESET command was received.
GDM054 Stopped the active SARC MDC Active SARC issued MDC Lower Sequence was
STOP SARC MDC LWR SQ Lower Sequence. stopped because a new command was received.
GDM055 Stopped the active SDCA MDC Active SDCA issued MDC Lower Sequence was
STOP SDCA MDC LWR SQ Lower Sequence. stopped because a new command was received.
GDM056 Stopped the active Secure Pin Active Security Pin Coil 1 Test Event was
STOP SP COIL 1 TEST Coil 1 Test. stopped because a new command was received.
4-75
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
GDM057 Stopped the active Secure Pin Active Security Pin Coil 2 Test Event was
STOP SP COIL 2 TEST Coil 2 Test. stopped because a new command was received.
GDM0058 Stopped the active T-Handle Active T-Handle Retract Event was stopped
STOP T-HANDL RET Retract Event. because a new command was received.
GDM059 60 minute A timer length verifi- Timer length verification of the 60 minute A timer
60MIN A TMR VRF STRT cation started. started in response to the Logic Timer Trigger
signal being set True.
GDM060 60 minute A timer length verifi- The 60 Minute A timer length verification passed
60MIN A TMR VRF PASS cation passed. because the duration between when Logic Timer
Trigger was set True and when Logic Verification
1-A was set True was measured and found to be
inside the timers limits.
GDM061 60 minute A timer length verifi- This message is used to record the results of a
60MIN A TMR VRF FAIL cation failed. subsequent test when FAULT005 is already
active. The 60 Minute A timer length verification
failed because the duration between when Logic
Timer Trigger was set True and when Logic Veri-
fication 1-A was set True was measured and
found to be outside of the timers limits.
GDM062 60 minute B timer length verifi- Timer length verification of the 60 minute B timer
60MIN B TMR VRF STRT cation started. started in response to the Logic Timer Trigger
GDM063 60 minute B timer length verifi- The 60 Minute B timer length verification passed
60MIN B TMR VRF PASS cation passed. because the duration between when Logic Timer
Trigger was set True and when Logic Verification
1-B was set True was measured and found to be
inside the timers limits.
GDM064 60 minute B timer length verifi- This message is used to record the results of a
60MIN B TMR VRF FAIL cation failed. subsequent test when FAULT006 is already
active. The 60 Minute B timer length verification
failed because the duration between when Logic
Timer Trigger was set True and when Logic Veri-
fication 1-B was set True was measured and
found to be outside of the timers limits.
GDM065 10-minute A timer length verifi- Timer length verification of the 10-minute A timer
10MIN A TMR VRF STRT cation started. started in response to the Logic Verification 1-A
GDM066 10-minute A timer length verifi- The 10-minute A timer length verification passed
10MIN A TMR VRF PASS cation passed. because the duration of Logic Verification 1-A
was measured and found to be inside the timers
limits.
4-76
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
GDM067 10-minute A timer length verifi- This message is used to record the results of a
10MIN A TMR VRF FAIL cation failed. subsequent test when FAULT001 is already
active. The 10-minute A timer length verification
failed because the duration of Logic Verification
1-A signal was measured and found to be outside
of the timers limits.
GDM068 10-minute B timer length verifi- Timer length verification of the 10-minute B timer
10MIN B TMR VRF STRT cation started. started in response to the Logic Verification 1-B
GDM069 10-minute B timer length verifi- The 10-minute B timer length verification passed
10MIN B TMR VRF PASS cation started. because the duration of Logic Verification 1-B
limits.
GDM070 10-minute B timer length verifi- This message is used to record the results of a
10MIN B TMR VRF FAIL cation failed. subsequent test when FAULT002 is already
active. The 10-minute B timer length verification
1-B was measured and found to be outside of the
timers limits.
GDM071 10-minute C timer length verifi- Timer length verification of the 10-minute C timer
10MIN C TMR VRF STRT cation started. started in response to the Logic Verification 1-C
GDM072 10-minute C timer length verifi- The 10-minute C timer length verification passed
10MIN C TMR VRF PASS cation passed. because the duration of Logic Verification 1-C
limits.
GDM073 10-minute C timer length verifi- This message is used to record the results of a
10MIN C TMR VRF FAIL cation failed. subsequent test when FAULT003 is already
active. The 10-minute C timer length verification
1-C was measured and found to be outside of the
timers limits.
GDM074 10-minute D timer length verifi- Timer length verification of the 10-minute D
10MIN D TMR VRF STRT cation started. timer started in response to the Logic Verification
1-D signal being set True.
GDM075 10-minute D timer length verifi- The 10-minute D timer length verification passed
10MIN D TMR VRF PASS cation passed. because the duration of Logic Verification 1-D
limits.
GDM076 10-minute D timer length verifi- This message is used to record the results of a
10MIN D TMR VRF FAIL cation failed. subsequent test when FAULT004 is already
active. The 10-minute D timer length verification
1-D was measured and found to be outside of the
timers limits.
4-77
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
GDM077 Security Pin Driver for Logic This message is used to record the results of a
SECPIN DRV 0A FAIL Verification 0-A failed. subsequent test when NO-GO023 is already
active. The Logic Verification 0-A signal was set
True and one second later the Logic Verification
1-A and Logic Verification 1-C signals were set
False.
SECPIN DRV 0B FAIL Verification 0-B failed. subsequent test when NO-GO024 is already
active. The Logic Verification 0-B signal was set
1-B and Logic Verification 1-D signals were set
False.
SECPIN DRV 0C FAIL Verification 0-C failed. subsequent test when NO-GO025 is already
active. The Logic Verification 0-C signal was set
False.
SECPIN DRV 0D FAIL Verification 0-D failed. subsequent test when NO-GO026 is already
active. The Logic Verification 0-D signal was set
False.
SECPIN DRV 1A FAIL Verification 1-A failed. subsequent test when FAULT037 is already
active. The Logic Verification 1-A signal was set
False.
SECPIN DRV 1B FAIL Verification 1-B failed. subsequent test when FAULT038 is already
active. The Logic Verification 1-B signal was set
False.
SECPIN DRV 1C FAIL Verification 1-C failed. subsequent test when FAULT039 is already
active. The Logic Verification 1-C signal was set
0-C and Logic Verification 0-A signals were set
False.
4-78
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
SECPIN DRV 1D FAIL Verification 1-D failed. subsequent test when FAULT040 is already
active. The Logic Verification 1-D signal was set
0-D and Logic Verification 0-B signals were set
False.
GDM085 Firmware Message Log state The firmware message Log pointer was restored
CTRL LOG FROM EEPROM read from EEPROM memory. from the EEPROM nonvolatile memory.
GDM086 Firmware Message Log was The firmware message Log pointer array is initial-
CTRL LOG INITIALIZE initialized. ized. This is done when the checksum bits for the
pointer entries do not match.
GDM087 Firmware has already canceled The switch to cancel NO-GO audibles was acti-
ALREADY CAN AUDIBLES NO-GO audibles. vated but the NO-GO audibles have already been
canceled.
GDM088 Firmware is already in Mainte- The SDCA Maintenance Mode switch was acti-
ALREADY MAINT MODE nance Mode. vated and the firmware is already in Maintenance
Mode.
GDM089 Firmware is already in Operating The SDCA Operation Mode switch was activated
ALREADY OPER MODE Mode. and the firmware is already in Operation Mode.
GDM090 Requested Event is already A switch was activated and its associated event is
EVENT ALREADY ACTV active. already active.
GDM091 Jog Down has been stopped An ongoing Jog Down Event was stopped
JOG DWN STOP ESS 62% because ESS State Of Charge because the ESS state of charge dropped below
dropped below 62.5%. 62.5%.
GDM092 Jog Down has been stopped An ongoing Jog Down Event was stopped
JOG DWN STOP LCKBLT because the Lock Bolt Retracted because the Lock Bolt Retracted signal is False.
signal is False.
GDM093 Jog Up has been stopped because An ongoing Jog Up Event was stopped because
JOG UP STOP ESS 62% ESS State Of Charge dropped the ESS state of charge dropped below 62.5%.
below 62.5%.
GDM094 Jog Up has been stopped because An ongoing Jog Up Event was stopped because
JOG UP STOP LCKBLT the Lock Bolt Retracted signal is the Lock Bolt Retracted signal is False.
False.
GDM095 Lock Bolt Retracted signal is not SARC Lower switch was activated and the Lock
LCKBLT NOT RET on prior to requested event. Bolt Retracted signal is False.
GDM096 Lock Bolt Retract Sequence has During a Lock Bolt Retract Sequence, either the
LCKBLT RET SQ END ended because a dependant event Security Pin Pull Wait or the T-Handle Pull or the
failed to complete. T-Handle Hold or the Lock Bolt Retract Event
timer expired, which caused the Lock Bolt Retract
Sequence to end.
GDM097 Logic Verification Events have All ongoing Logic timer verifications have been
LGIC VRF EVENTS CAN been canceled. canceled by a Raise or Off Event.
4-79
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
GDM098 MDC Raise Sequence is already A Raise Event is ongoing when one of the Raise
MDC RSE SQ ACTV active. switches is activated.
GDM099 There is no active NO-GO The Audible Cancel switch is activated and there
NO ACTV NO-GO audible to cancel. are no active NO-GOs or associated audible.
GDM100 ESS Reset and MDC Reset During Reset Event, the MDC is active so the
NO ESS OR MDC RESET cannot be completed during an ESS Reset and MDC Reset are not sent.
active MDC Event
GDM101 FAULT scanning has been The firmware has an event that is active that has
FAULT SCAN SUSPND suspended for those faults that suspended some of the FAULT conditions from
are only scanned for when an being checked.
event is not active.
GDM102 Full FAULT scanning has The firmware no longer has an active event so all
FAULT SCAN RESUME resumed. FAULT condition checking is resumed.
GDM103 Requested Event can only be A switch that is only valid when the firmware is
NOT IN MAINT MODE completed when in Maintenance in Maintenance Mode has been activated.
Mode.
GDM104 Reset is already active. The automatic startup reset is active so the
RESET IS ACTV commanded reset is ignored.
GDM105 SDCA Lower Sequence has During an SDCA Lower Sequence, either the
SDCA LWR SQ END ended because a dependent event Security Pin Pull Wait or the T-Handle Pull or the
failed to complete. T-Handle Hold or the Lock- Bolt Retract Event
timer expired, which caused the SDCA Lower
Sequence to end.
GDM106 Security Pin Retract signal was The SARC Lock Bolts Retract switch was acti-
SECPIN NOT RET not on prior to requested event. vated and the Security Pin Retracted signal is
No action taken. False.
GDM107 Startup was still active when During Startup, one of the following switches was
STARTUP IS ACTV event was requested. No action activated and ignored: LER Wall Lower, LER
taken. Wall Raise, SARC Remote Raise, Lock Bolt
Extend, Lock Bolt Retract, Raise, Lower, Reset,
Jog Down, or Jog Up.
4-80
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-14. SDCA Firmware Message Log FAULT Messages
FAULT001 10-minute DT2 timer length Fault occurs on a failure of the A timer circuit,
10MIN A TMR VRF FAIL verification failed. 10-minute timer length after it has been initiated
by the SARC.
FAULT002 10-minute DT4 timer length Fault occurs on a failure of the B timer circuit,
10MIN B TMR VRF FAIL verification failed. 10-minute timer length after it has been initiated
by the SARC.
FAULT003 10-minute DT2 timer length Fault occurs on a failure of the A timer circuit,
10MIN C TMR VRF FAIL verification failed. 10-minute timer length after it has been initiated
by the SDCA.
FAULT004 10-minute DT4 timer length Fault occurs on a failure of the B timer circuit,
10MIN D TMR VRF FAIL verification failed. 10-minute timer length after it has been initiated
by the SDCA.
FAULT005 64-minute DT1 timer length The 64-minute A timer circuit length verification
60MIN A TMR VRF FAIL verification failed. failed.
FAULT006 64-minute DT3 timer length The 64-minute B timer circuit length verification
60MIN B TMR VRF FAIL verification failed. failed.
FAULT007 Coil 1 amperage reading was During a Security Pin Coil 1 Test, the Security
and has failed the coil amperage tolerances.
test.
FAULT008 Coil 2 amperage reading was During a Security Pin Coil 2 Test, the Security
and has failed the coil amperage tolerances.
test.
FAULT009 ESS Discharge signal was set The ESS was discharging without secondary door
ESS DSCHRG NO MOTION True without a supporting movement.
secondary door motion.
FAULT010 ESS Fault signal was set True. The ESS Fault signal was sent from the ESS.
ESS FLT
FAULT011 The ESS State of Charge signals The fault checks the SDCA 0, 25, and 62.5
ESS NON CONTINUOUS are noncontinuous. percent State of Charge (SOC) indicators. Fault
reports if any of the upper level SOC indicators
are set True with a lower SOC indicator set False.
FAULT012 Gearbox Safety Pin and one of The MDC Gearbox Safety Pin Engaged signal
GEARBOX & MDC ACTV the MDC Motion signals was set was set True and either the MDC Up Motion
True at the same time. signal was set True or the MDC Down Motion
signal was set True or the MDC Motor On signal
was set True.
FAULT013 Lower commanded without The MDC Down Motion signal was not set True
INIT LWR W ⁄ O MOTION MDC Down Motion signal being within the first 10 seconds of a MDC Lower
set True. Event.
4-81
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-14. SDCA Firmware Message Log FAULT Messages - Continued
FAULT014 Lower commanded without The MDC Motor On signal was not set True
INIT LWR W ⁄ O MOTOR MDC Motor On signal being set within the first 10 seconds of a MDC Lower
True. Event.
FAULT015 Raise commanded without MDC The MDC Up Motion signal was not set True
INIT RSE W ⁄ O MOTION Up Motion signal being set True. within the first 10 seconds of a MDC Raise
Event.
FAULT016 Raise commanded without MDC The MDC Motor On signal was not set True
INIT RSE W ⁄ O MOTOR Up Motion signal being set True. within the first 10 seconds of a MDC Raise
Event.
FAULT017 Lock Bolt Extended and Lock The Lock Bolt Retracted signal was set True and
LCKBLT EXT AND RET Bolt Retracted signals were set the Lock Bolt Extended signal was set True at the
True at the same time without an same time when an event was not active.
active event.
FAULT018 Enable Relay did not close. The Enable Relay status contact did not close
NO ENABLE RELAY when the relay was activated. Either the Relay
has failed or the status contact has failed.
FAULT019 Lock Bolt Retracted and Security The Lock Bolt Retracted signal was set True and
LCKBLT&SECPIN CNFLT Pin Engaged signals set True at the Security Pin Engaged signal was set True at
the same time without an active the same time when an event was not active.
event.
FAULT020 The timer trigger signal is off Logic Timer Trigger signal was set False when 64
LGIC TMR TGR FLT when the 64-minute timers are minute timer circuit was set True.
on.
FAULT021 Maintenance Mode Sense signal When the firmware was in Maintenance Mode,
MAINT MODE SNSE FLT was either set True during Opera- the Maintenance Mode Sense signal was set False
tions Mode or set False during and the SDCA Operation Mode switch was not
Maintenance Mode when mode set True or the firmware was in Operation Mode
change was not active. and the Maintenance Mode Sense signal was set
True and the SDCA Maintenance Mode Switch
was not set True.
FAULT022 MDC Full Up and MDC Full The MDC Full Up signal was set True and the
MDC FULL UP & DWN Down signals where set at the MDC Full Down signal was set True at the same
same time without an active time when an event was not active.
event.
FAULT023 MDC Full Up and either MDC The MDC Full Up signal was set True and either
MDC FULL UP & MOTION Up Motion, MDC Down Motion, the MDC Up Motion signal was set True or the
or MDC Motor On signals were MDC Down Motion signal was set True or the
set True without an active event. MDC Motor On signal was set True when an
event was not active.
FAULT024 MDC Full Down and either The MDC Full Down signal was set True and
MDC FULLDWN & MOTION MDC Up Motion, MDC Down either the MDC Up Motion signal was set True or
Motion or MDC Motor On the MDC Down Motion signal was set True or
signals were set True without an the MDC Motor On signal was set True when an
active event. event was not active.
4-82
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT025 MDC Up Motion or MDC Down Either the MDC Up Motion signal was set True
MDC MOTION NO EVENT Motion signals were set True or the MDC Down Motion signal was set True
without an active event. when an event was not active.
FAULT026 MDC Raise Sequence timer During a Raise Sequence, the firmware Secondary
MDC RSE SEQ TMR EX expired before the Security Pin Door Raise Sequence timer expired before the
Engaged, T-Handle Engaged, and MDC Full Up signal was set True and the
MDC Full Up signals were Set T-Handle Engaged signal was set True and the
True. Security Pin Engaged signal was set True.
FAULT027 MDC Up Motion and MDC The MDC Up Motion signal was set True and the
MDC UP & DWN MOTION Down Motion signals were set MDC Down Motion signal was set True at the
True at the same Time without same time when an event was not active.
an active event.
FAULT028 Lock Bolt Extended and Lock The Lock Bolt Extended signal was set False and
NO LCKBLT EXT OR RET Bolt Retracted signals were set the Lock Bolt Retracted signal was set False at
False at the same time without the same time when an event was not active.
an active event.
FAULT029 Primary Contactor and Auxiliary The 208 Vac Primary Contactor signal was set
PRI AND AUX CNTCR ON Contactor signals were set True True and the 208 Vac Auxiliary Contactor signal
at the same time. was set True at the same time.
FAULT030 Security Pin Retracted and Secu- The Security Pin Retracted signal was set False
NO SECPIN RET OR ENG rity Pin Engaged signals Set and the Security Pin Engaged signal was set False
False at the same time without at the same time when an event was not active.
an active event.
FAULT031 SDCA 12 Vdc A reading was The analog to digital converter +12 Vdc A
SDCA 12VDC A FLT outside of its allowable limits. FAULT signal was outside of its allowable toler-
ance.
FAULT032 A SDCA 12 Vdc B reading was The analog to digital converter +12 Vdc B
SDCA 12VDC B FLT outside of its allowable limits. FAULT signal was outside of its allowable toler-
ance.
FAULT033 A SDCA 12 Vdc Bus reading The analog to digital converter +12 Vdc Bus
SDCA 12VDC BUS FLT was outside of its allowable signal reading was outside of its allowable toler-
limits. ance.
FAULT034 A SDCA 24 Vdc Combo reading The analog to digital converter +24 Vdc Combi-
SDCA 24VDC COMBO FLT was outside of its allowable nation Bus signal reading was outside of its
limits. allowable tolerance.
FAULT035 A SDCA 24 Vdc External The analog to digital converter +24 Vdc External
SDCA 24VDC EXT FLT reading was outside of its allow- signal reading was outside of its allowable toler-
able limits. ance.
FAULT036 A SDCA 24 Vdc Internal reading The analog to digital converter +24 Vdc Internal
SDCA 24VDC INT FLT was outside of its allowable signal reading was outside of its allowable toler-
limits. ance.
FAULT037 Security Pin Driver for Logic The 64 minute A timer circuit has timed out and
SECPIN DRV 1A FAIL Verification 1-A failed. the 10-minute timer failed to start.
4-83
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT038 Security Pin Driver for Logic The 64 minute B timer circuit has timed out and
SECPIN DRV 1B FAIL Verification 1-B failed. the 10-minute timer failed to start.
FAULT039 Security Pin Driver for Logic The 10-minute A timer circuit was started, but the
SECPIN DRV 1C FAIL Verification 1-C failed. output of circuit did not drive the security pin
relay coils.
FAULT040 Security Pin Driver for Logic The 10-minute B timer circuit was started, but the
SECPIN DRV 1D FAIL Verification 1-D failed. output of circuit did not drive the security pin
relay coils.
FAULT041 Secure Pin Retracted and Secu- The Security Pin Retracted signal was set True
SECPIN RET & ENG rity Pin Engaged signals are set and the Security Pin Engaged signal was set True
True at the same time without an at the same time when an event was not active.
active event.
FAULT042 T-Handle Retracted and T-Handle The T-Handle Retracted and T-Handle Engaged
T-HNDL RET & ENG Engaged signals are set True at signals are set true at the same time when an
the same time without an active event was not active.
event.
4-84
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-15. SDCA Firmware Message Log NO-GO Messages
NO-GO001 Self Test failure detected. The One of the Self Test steps failed. The test step
SELF TEST FAIL inside panel LCD will display where the failure occurred is displayed on the
the step at which the self test LCD on the SDCA front panel.
failed.
NO-GO002 Both 10-minute A & B timer Both Faults 001 and 002 have occurred.
10MIN A & B TMR FAIL circuit length failed.
10MIN C & D TMR FAIL circuit length failed.
60MIN A & B TMR FAIL circuit length failed.
NO-GO005 MDC Down Motion signal still An Off Event was Active and the firmware Off
DWN MOTION AFTER OFF set True after Off Event Switch Timer expired before the MDC Down
completed. Motion signal was set False.
NO-GO006 EMA Driver 5 VDC signal was The 24V Driver PCB 5V Status signal was set
EMA DRVR 5VDC FAIL set False. False.
NO-GO007 ESS Charge and ESS Discharge The ESS Charge signal was set True and the ESS
ESS CHRG & DSCHRG signals are both set True at the Discharge signal was set True at the same time.
same time.
NO-GO008 ESS NO-GO signal was set True. The ESS NO-GO signal was set True.
ESS NO-GO
NO-GO009 ESS State of Charge dropped ESS 62.5% State Of Charge was changed to
ESS SOC BELOW 62.5% below 62.5%. False.
NO-GO010 ESS Startup and ESS Charge The ESS Startup (precharge) signal was set True
ESS STARTUP & CHRG signals were set True at the same and the ESS Charge signal was set True at the
time. same time.
NO-GO011 SDCA Input/Output Extender After self test completed and during normal
IO EXTENDER FAIL loop back test failed. operation, the firmware detected an IO Extender
error.
NO-GO012 Lock Bolt 24 Vdc signal was set After Startup, the Lock Bolt 24V Ready signal
LCKBLT 24VDC OFF False. was set False.
NO-GO013 Lock Bolt Extend timer expired A Lock Bolt Extend Event was Active and the
LCKBLT EXT EXP before Lock Bolt Extend Event Firmware Lock Bolt Extend timer expired before
completed. the Lock Bolt Extended signal was set True and
the Lock Bolt Retracted signal was set False.
NO-GO014 Lock Bolt Retract timer expired A Lock Bolt Retract Event was Active and the
LCKBLT RET EXP before Lock Bolt Retract Event Firmware Lock Bolt Retract timer expired before
completed. the Lock Bolt Retract signal was set True and the
Lock Bolt Extended signal was set False.
NO-GO015 MDC NO-GO signal was set The MDC NO-GO signal was set True.
MDC NO-GO True.
NO-GO016 MDC Homed signal was set The MDC Homed signal was set False.
MDC NOT HOMED False.
4-85
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-15. SDCA Firmware Message Log NO-GO Messages - Continued
NO-GO017 MDC Raise timer expired before A Raise Event was Active and the Firmware
MDC RSE EXP MDC Raise was completed. Raise timer expired before the MDC Full Up
signal was set True and the MDC Up Motion,
MDC Down Motion, and MDC Motor On signals
were set False.
NO-GO018 MDC Motor On signal still set An Off Event was Active and the firmware Off
MOTOR ON AFTER OFF True after Off Event completed. Switch Timer expired before the MDC Motor On
signal was set False.
NO-GO019 Primary Contactor and Auxiliary The 208 Vac Primary Contactor signal was set
PRI AND AUX CNTCTR Contactor signals were set False false and the 208 Vac Auxiliary Contactor signal
at the same time. was set False at the same time.
NO-GO020 SARC commanded Lower A SARC Lower Event was Active and the firm-
SARC LWR SEQ EXP Sequence timer expired before ware SARC Lower timer expired before the MDC
Lower Event completed. Full Down signal was set True, and the MDC Up
Motion, MDC Down Motion, and MDC Motor
On signals were set False.
NO-GO021 SDCA commanded Lower A SDCA Lower Sequence was Active and the
SDCA LWR SEQ EXP Sequence timer expired before firmware SDCA Lower Sequence timer expired
Lower Event completed. before the Security Pin Retracted, T-Handle
Retracted, Lock Bolt Retracted, and the MDC
Full Down signals were set True and the MDC
Up Motion, MDC Down Motion, and the MDC
Motor On, signals were set False.
NO-GO022 Both Security Pin Coil 1 and Both Faults 007 and 008 have occurred setting
SECPIN COILS FAIL Security Pin Coil 2 amperage this NO-GO.
tests failed.
NO-GO023 The A timer circuit Security Pin Security Pin Coil 1 is on without either the
SECPIN DRV 0A FAIL Driver failed. 10-minute or the 64 minute timer active.
NO-GO024 The B timer circuit Security Pin Security Pin Coil 2 is on without either the
SECPIN DRV 0B FAIL Driver failed. 10-minute or the 64-minute timer active.
NO-GO025 The A timer circuit Security Pin Security Pin Coil 1 is on without either the
SECPIN DRV 0C FAIL Driver failed. 10-minute or the 64-minute timer active.
NO-GO026 The B timer circuit Security Pin Security Pin Coil 2 is on without either the
SECPIN DRV 0D FAIL Driver failed. 10-minute or the 64-minute timer active.
NO-GO027 The Security Pin Retract signal Security Pin Retract signal was not set True
SECPIN RET FAIL was not set True before timer before Pull Wait timer expired.
expired.
NO-GO028 The Security Pin Retract signal Security Pin Retract signal was not set True
SECPIN TMR EXP was not set True before timer before Pull Verify timer expired.
expired.
NO-GO029 State machine decoded value The firmware detected an invalid memory address
STATE - BAD ADR contains a bad address. during state machine decoding verification.
4-86
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-15. SDCA Firmware Message Log NO-GO Messages - Continued
NO-GO030 State machine decoded value The firmware detected an invalid command
STATE - BAD CMD contains a bad command. during state machine decoding verification.
NO-GO031 State machine decoded value The firmware detected an invalid value for a vari-
STATE - BAD VAR contains a bad variable. able during state machine decoding verification.
NO-GO032 T-Handle Hold timer expired A Lock Bolt Retract Event was Active and the
T-HNDL HOLD EXP before Lock Bolt Retract signal firmware T-Handle Hold timer expired before the
was set True. Lock Bolt Retracted signal was set True and the
Lock Bolt Extended signal was set False.
NO-GO033 T-Handle Pull timer expired A T-Handle Retract Event was Active and the
T-HNDL PULL EXP before T-Handle Retracted signal firmware T-Handle Pull timer expired before the
was set True. T-Handle Retracted signal was set True.
NO-GO034 MDC Up Motion signal was still A Off Event was Active and the firmware Off
UP MOTION AFTER OFF set True after Off Event Switch Timer expired before the MDC Up Motion
completed. signal was set False.
4-87
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-16. SDCA FAULT Trouble Analysis
Trouble Probable Cause Isolation Procedure Remedy
FAULT001 10 MIN A TIMER VRF FAIL
NOTE
Indicates the 10-minute A timer circuit out of timing limits.
Fault 001 a. Review SDCA firmware

Reporting message log IAW Para-
graph 4.2.4.3.1. If NO-GO
002 and ⁄ or 003 report,
perform trouble analysis
IAW Table 4-17; other-
wise, proceed to next step.
10-minute SDCA delay timer b. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
relay A3 DT2, SDCA CCA delay timer relay A3 DT2
A3A1, A2A1 or A3A5. IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
If fault recurs, proceed to
next step.
2. Replace faulty SDCA
timer control CCA A3A1
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1. If fault recurs,
controller interconnect
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-88
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-16. SDCA FAULT Trouble Analysis - Continued
FAULT002 10 MIN B TIMER VRF FAIL
NOTE
Indicates the 10-minute B timer circuit out of timing limits.

IAW Table 4-17, other-
relay A3 DT4, SDCA CCA delay timer relay A3 DT4,
A3A2, A2A1, or A3A5. IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
next step.
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-89
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT003 10 MIN C TIMER VRF FAIL
NOTE

next step.
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-90
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT004 10 MIN D TIMER VRF FAIL
NOTE
Fault 004
Reporting
10-minute SDCA delay timer a. Review SDCA firmware
relay A3 DT4, SDCA CCA message log IAW Para-
A3A4, A2A1 or A3A5. graph 4.2.4.3.1. If NO-GO
002 and/or 003 report,
b. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
delay timer relay A3 DT4
next step.
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-91
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT005 60 MIN A TIMER VRF FAIL
NOTE

004 reports, perform
trouble analysis IAW
Table 4-17; otherwise,
A3A1, A2A1 or A3A5. IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.3.
next step.
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-92
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT006 60 MIN B TIMER VRF FAIL
NOTE

004 reports, perform
Table 4-17; otherwise,
next step.
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-93
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT007 COIL 1 AMP FLT
NOTE
• Indicates the security pin coil 1 current is out of tolerance during coil test. Nominal current for
security pin coil 1 or coil 2 is 1.330 to 2.070 amperes.
• If both Fault 007 and 008 are reporting, NO-GO 22 will report.

and ⁄ or 008 message log IAW Para-
Reporting graph 4.2.4.3.1. Read and
record amperage recorded
during security pin coil
test 1 and coil test 2, then
b. On SDCA swing-out
panel, using a multimeter
set for Vdc, check for
12.6 (±0.6) Vdc between
TP2 (+) and TP1 (-).
Read and record voltage,
then proceed to next step.
c. On SDCA swing-out
set for Vdc, press and
hold COIL 1 TEST for 5
seconds while checking
for 12.6 (±0.6) Vdc
between TP2 (+) and TP1
(-), then release COIL 1
TEST switch. Read and
record voltage, then
d. On SDCA swing-out
set for Vdc, press and
hold COIL 2 TEST for 5
seconds while checking
for 12.6 (±0.6) Vdc
between TP2 (+) and TP1
(-), then release COIL 2
TEST switch. Record
voltage, then using
recorded indications,
proceed to following to
determine appropriate
fault isolation.
4-94
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT007 COIL 1 AMP FLT - Cont
Fault 007 (1) If current recorded is low

and ⁄ or 008 and voltage recorded
Reporting drops, refer to Probable
Cause 1.
(2) If current recorded is low
and voltage recorded is
normal, refer to Probable
Cause 2.
(3) If current recorded is high
and voltage is present,
refer to Probable Cause 3.
(4) If current recorded is not
present and voltage is
present, refer to Probable
Cause 4.
(5) If current is not present
and voltage is not present,
refer to Probable Cause 5.
1. SDCA power supplies A3 a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
PS2 and PS3, or SDEA power supplies A3 PS2
ALB. and PS3 IAW Paragraph
2. Replace faulty SDEA
ALB IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.16.
2. SDEA ALB, SDCA power a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDEA
supplies A3 PS2 and PS3, ALB IAW Paragraph
CCA A2A1, or wiring. 5.7.1.16. If fault recurs,
power supplies A3 PS2
and PS3 IAW Paragraph
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
4-95
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Fault 007 4. Using schematic

and ⁄ or 008 diagrams, perform trouble
Reporting analysis on wiring
between SDCA and
SDEA ALB.
3. Wiring, SDEA ALB, or a. Disconnect secondary
SDCA CCA A2A1. door cable W1 P2 from
connector J2.
panel, repeat coil test for
failed coil by pressing
SEC. PIN COIL 1 TEST
(Figure 4-2, 13) or SEC.
PIN COIL 2 TEST (15),
as required, while
observing keypad display
(111). Note indication and
c. If coil test current reads 1. Using schematic
greater than 0 amps, diagrams, perform trouble
proceed to Remedy 1; analysis on wiring
otherwise, proceed to between SDCA and
Remedy 2. SDEA ALB. If no fault is
found, or fault recurs,
ALB IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.16. If fault recurs,
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4. SDEA ALB, SDCA CCA a. If coil 1 failed, proceed to 1. Replace faulty SDEA
A3A3 (for coil 1) ⁄ A3A4 Remedy 1. If coil 2 failed, ALB IAW Paragraph
(for coil 2), or wiring. proceed to Remedy 3. If 5.7.1.16. If fault recurs,
both coils failed, proceed proceed to next step.
to Probable Cause 5.
next step.
4-96 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Fault 007 3. Replace faulty SDCA

and ⁄ or 008 primary control CCA
Reporting A2A1 IAW Paragraph
proceed to Remedy 7.
ALB IAW Paragraph
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
7. Using schematic
diagrams, perform trouble
analysis on wiring
between SDCA and
SDEA ALB.
5. SDCA A3 PS2 and PS3. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
power supplies A3 PS2
and PS3 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.5.5.
FAULT008 COIL 2 AMP FLT
NOTE
• Indicates the security pin coil 2 current is out of tolerance during coil test.
• If both Fault 007 and 008 are reporting, NO-GO 22 will report.
• Perform Fault 008 trouble analysis IAW Fault 007 fault flow.
4-97
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT009 ESS DSCHRG NO MOTION
NOTE
• Indicates the ESS is discharging without movement of the secondary door.
• If Fault 018 is reporting, perform trouble analysis IAW Fault 018 fault flow.
Fault 009 a. If failure occurred during

reporting movement of the
secondary door, proceed
to Probable Cause 4;
otherwise, proceed to next
step.
b. Check ESS Control Panel
Display (CPD) (Figure
4-5). If Control Panel
indicates ESS is
discharging without
motion, proceed to Prob-
able Cause 1; otherwise,
proceed to Probable Cause
3.
1. Loss of 120 ⁄ 208-Vac, a. On [1][3][5] Launcher 1. Restore LF 120/208-Vac,
3-phase LF power or ESS. Distribution B (LDB) 3-phase power to ESS, as
[T9] Switchboard required. If fault recurs,
SWBD-3<, verify that proceed to Remedy 2.
circuit breaker [1] CB26,
28, 30 [3] CB30, 32, 34
[5] CB8, 10, 12 [T9]
CB2< is set to ON. If
circuit breaker was OFF
or tripped, proceed to
Remedy 1; otherwise,
b. On ESS CPD, check DC 2. Replace ESS IAW Para-
BUSS voltage (9). If DC graph 5.8.4.3.
BUSS voltage is greater
than 555 volts, proceed to
2.
4-98 Change 3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT009 ESS DSCHRG NO MOTION - Cont
NOTE
If ESS main buss circuit breaker was previously reset and fault recurs, proceed to Probable
Cause 2, Isolation Procedure b, Remedy 7.
2. MDC failure or ESS DC a. Perform ESS preparation

BUSS circuit breaker. for maintenance IAW
Paragraph 5.8.4.1, steps a
through e, and verify that
ESS main buss circuit
breaker (Figure 5-35, 11)
is set to ON.
b. If ESS main buss circuit 1. Reset ESS main buss
breaker was off or tripped, circuit breaker. If fault
perform ESS post- recurs, proceed to next
maintenance IAW Para- step.
graph 5.8.4.2, then
proceed to Remedy 1;
otherwise, proceed to
Remedy 2.
2. Check MDC CB8.
Replace CB8, if required,
IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.8;
step.
3. Replace faulty MDC
current limit control CL1
IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.12.
next step.
motor drive (M1) IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9. If fault
recurs, proceed to next
step.
5. Replace faulty MDC high
current filter (FL2) IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.16. If
fault recurs, proceed to
next step.
transformer (T1) IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.14.
4-99
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT009 ESS DSCHRG NO MOTION - Cont
7. Replace ESS IAW Para-

graph 5.8.4.3 3.
3. ESS or SDCA CCA A2A1 a. On SDCA swing-out 1. Using schematic
panel, check ESS diagrams, perform trouble
DISCHARGE (Figure 4-2, analysis on wiring
60) indicator. If ESS between SDCA and ESS.
DISCHARGE indicator If no fault is found, or
was illuminated, proceed fault recurs, proceed to
to Remedy 1; otherwise, next step.
. 2. Replace ESS IAW Para-
graph 5.8.4.3.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4. MDC motor drive M1 or a. On SDCA swing-out 1. Replace faulty MDC
SDCA A2A1. panel, check UP motor drive (M1) IAW
MOTION (Figure 4-2, Paragraph 5.8.3.9. If fault
64), DOWN MOTION recurs, proceed to next
DOWN (65), and step.
MOTOR ON (66) indica-
tors while performing an
SDCA-initiated JOG UP
and JOG DOWN
command. If proper indi-
cations fail to respond to
jog commands, proceed to
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-100
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT010 ESS FLT
NOTE
Indicates an ESS internal fault.
Fault 010 a. On ESS, check CPD for

reporting abnormal indications.
b. On SDCA front panel,
momentarily set
RESET ⁄ AUD CANCEL
(Figure 4-1, 17) switch to
RESET.
NOTE
Monitor ESS CPD indications for a minimum of 15 seconds after reset clears registers for
return of status conditions.
c. On ESS, check CPD for

abnormal indications. If
abnormal indications are
present, proceed to Prob-
2.
1. ESS failure. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform ESS trouble
analysis IAW Paragraph
4.2.6.
2. SDCA CCA A2A1, A3A5. a. On SDCA swing-out 1. Replace faulty SDCA
panel, verify that ESS primary control CCA
FAULT (Figure 4-2, 56) A2A1 IAW Paragraph
indicator is extinguished. 5.9.1.4.1. If fault recurs,
If indicator is illuminated, proceed to next step.
return to Probable Cause
1; otherwise, proceed to
Remedy 1.
2. Replace SDCA controller
interconnect CCA A3A5
4-101
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT011 ESS NON CONTINUOUS
NOTE
Indicates ESS State Of Charge (SOC) progressing out of sequence.
Fault 011 a. On ESS, check CPD for

reporting abnormal indications.
momentarily set
RESET/AUD CANCEL
RESET.
NOTE
• Monitor ESS CPD indications for a minimum of 15 seconds after reset clears registers for
return of status conditions.
• Prior to proceeding to next step, ensure ESS SOC is a minimum of 62.5%.
c. If ESS status bar (Figure

4-2, 16) is properly illu-
minated through 62.5%
(DETAIL B), proceed to
Probable Cause 2;
Probable Cause 1.
1. ESS wiring or ESS. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Using schematic
diagrams, perform trouble
analysis on wiring
between SDCA and ESS.
If no fault is found, or
next step.
2. Perform ESS trouble
analysis IAW Paragraph
4.2.6.
2. SDCA CCA A2A1 failure. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA primary
control CCA A2A1 IAW
4-102
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT012 GEARBOX & MDC ACTV
NOTE
Indicates a gearbox safety pin is engaged and up motion, down motion, or motor on occurred.
Fault 012 a. On SDCA front panel,

reporting momentarily set
RESET. If fault resets, no
further maintenance
required; otherwise,
panel, verify that UP
MOTION (Figure 4-2,
64), DOWN MOTION
(65), and MOTOR ON
(66) indicators are extin-
guished. If any indicator
is illuminated, proceed to
Probable Cause 1; other-
wise, proceed to Probable
Cause 2.
1. MDC motor drive M1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty MDC
motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
2. SDCA CCA A2A1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-103
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT013 INITL LWR W ⁄ O MOTION
NOTE
Indicates secondary door LOWER sensor is true and DOWN motion sensor is false.
Fault 013, 014, a. On SDCA front panel,

015, or 016 momentarily set
reporting RESET ⁄ AUD CANCEL
RESET, then proceed to
Isolation Procedure b.
• Personnel egress through the PAS shall not be impeded. When performing tests involving
secondary door movement, do not permit secondary door to be raised so that personnel egress
through the PAS is impeded. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
• Movement of secondary door is extremely hazardous. Ensure personnel access shaft is clear of
personnel, tools, and equipment prior to initiating secondary door movement. Failure to
comply could result in personnel injury, death, or equipment damage.
NOTE
When performing secondary door RAISE and LOWER command(s) SDCA swing-out panel
indicators and secondary door movement shall be monitored. Read Isolation Procedure b
through b(4) carefully before proceeding to ensure SDCA front panel OFF ⁄ LOWER switch can
be set to OFF before a full secondary door raise or lower command is executed.
b. With SAS in OPERA-

TION mode, and EMA
gearbox safety pin disen-
gaged, on SDCA front
panel, momentarily set
RAISE (Figure 4-1, 14) or
OFF ⁄ LOWER (13), as
applicable, to raise or
lower secondary door
movement, as required
below, then immediately
set OFF ⁄ LOWER switch
to OFF.
(1) RAISE (Figure 4-2, 40) or
LOWER (41) indicator, as
applicable, illuminates.
4-104
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT013 INITL LWR W ⁄ O MOTION - Cont
(2) UP MOTION (64) or

DOWN MOTION (65)
indicator illuminates, as
applicable.
(3) MOTOR ON (66) indi-
cator illuminated.
(4) Secondary door movement
corresponds with appli-
cable command.
1. SDCA CCA A2A1. a. If RAISE or LOWER 1. Replace faulty SDCA
indicator, as applicable, primary control CCA
failed to illuminate, A2A1 IAW Paragraph
proceed to Remedy 1; 5.9.1.4.1.
Probable Cause 2.
2. SDCA CCA A2A1 or a. If secondary door motion 1. Replace faulty SDCA
MDC motor drive M1. occurs, UP MOTION or primary control CCA
DOWN MOTION, as A2A1 IAW Paragraph
applicable, and MOTOR 5.9.1.4.1. If fault recurs,
ON indicators illuminated, proceed to next step.
motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
3. MDC motor drive M1. a. If secondary door move- 1. Replace faulty MDC
ment did not occur as motor drive M1 IAW
expected, proceed to Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
Remedy 1.
4-105
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT014 INIT LWR W ⁄ O MOTOR
NOTE
• Indicates secondary door LOWER sensor is true and DOWN motion sensor is false.
FAULT015 INIT RSE W ⁄ O MOTION
NOTE
• Indicates secondary door RAISE sensor is true and UP motion sensor is false.
FAULT016 INIT RSE W ⁄ O MOTOR
NOTE
• Indicates secondary door RAISE sensor is true and MOTOR ON sensor is false.
FAULT017 LCKBLT EXT AND RET
NOTE
Indicates lock bolts are both extended and retracted at same time.
Fault 017 or a. At secondary door, ensure

028 lock bolts are fully
retracted.
1. SDEA failure. a. On SDCA front panel, 1. Perform SDEA trouble
check LOCK BOLTS analysis IAW Table 4-4.
EXTENDED (Figure 4-1,
24) and LOCK BOLTS
RETRACTED (25) indi-
cators. If both
EXTENDED and
RETRACTED indicators
are illuminated or extin-
guished simultaneously
Remedy 1.
4-106 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT017 LCKBLT EXT AND RET - Cont
Fault 017 or 2. Lock bolts sensitive a. Lock bolts sensitive 1. Perform checkout of lock
028 switch(es) LS1, LS2, or switch(es) LS1, LS2, or bolt extend and retract
SDCA CCA A3A5 failure. SDCA CCA A3A5 failure. sensitive switches IAW
Table 4-4 and adjust if
required. If no fault is
found, proceed to next
step.
2. Replace SDCA controller
interconnect CCA A3A5
IAW Paragraph 5.9.1.5.5
5.
FAULT018 NO ENABLE RELAY
NOTE
Indicates enable relay is not functioning.

reporting, Fault momentarily set
009 could be ACTIVATE ⁄
reporting DEACTIVATE (Figure
4-1, 3) switch to ACTI-
VATE then proceed to
next step.
NOTE
Delay a minimum of 45 seconds prior to performing step b.
b. On MDC Local Control

Panel (LCP) (Figure 4-4),
verify MDC operating
status. If MDC is oper-
ating, proceed to Probable
Cause 3; otherwise,
4-107
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT018 NO ENABLE RELAY - Cont
c. On SDCA swing-out
set for Vdc, check for
12.6 (±0.6) Vdc between
TP2 (+) (Figure 4-2, 23)
and TP1 (-) (22). If
voltage is out of toler-
ance, proceed to Probable
Cause 1; otherwise,
2.
1. SDCA PS2, PS3, or CCA a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA A3
A2A1 failure. power supplies PS2 and
PS3 IAW Paragraph
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
2. MDC K6 enable relay a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace MDC K6 relay
failure. IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.6.
3. MDC K6 or SDCA CCA a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace MDC K6 relay
A2A1. IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.6. If
next step.
2. Replace SDCA primary
4-108 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT019 LCKBLT AND SECPIN CNFLT
NOTE
Indicates lock bolts are retracted and security pin is engaged.

RESET/AUD CANCEL
RESET. If fault clears,
proceed to Probable-
Cause 3; otherwise,
panel, check SECURITY
PIN ENGAGED (Figure
4-2, 72) and LOCK BOLT
cators. If both indicators
are extinguished, proceed
to Probable Cause 1; if
both indicators are illumi-
nated, proceed to Probable
Cause 2; otherwise,
3.
1. SDCA A2A1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
2. SDEA ALB. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDEA
ALB IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.16.
3. SDEA fault. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform trouble analysis
IAW SDEA functional
checkout Table 4-4.
4-109
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT020 LGIC TMR TGR FLT
NOTE
Indicates the 64-minute timers have timed out without having been activated.

reporting check SECURITY PIN
TIMER (Figure 4-1, 22)
indicator. If indicator is
illuminated but was not
commanded on, proceed
step.
b. Review SDCA firmware
message log IAW Para-
graph 4.2.4.4. If SECU-
RITY PIN TIMER (Figure
4-1, 22) is extinguished
and 1-A bit was set in
SDCA firmware message
log, proceed to Probable
Cause 2; otherwise,
c. If SECURITY PIN
TIMER is extinguished
and 1-B bit was set in
SDCA firmware message
log, proceed to Probable
Cause 3.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
2.
2. SDCA CCA A2A1 or a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
A3A1. primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
4-110
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT020 LGIC TMR TGR FLT - Cont
Fault 020 3. SDCA CCA A2A1 or a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
reporting A3A2. primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
FAULT021 MAINT MODE SNSE FLT
NOTE
Indicates entrance or exit of maintenance mode when not commanded.
Fault 021 a. Verify the EMA gearbox

reporting safety pin is disengaged
IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-
2-10-( ) and place SAS in
MAINTENANCE mode.
b. If SAS mode of operation
changed with no erro-
neous indications, no
further maintenance is
required. If mode of
operation did not change,
1.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-111
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT022 MDC FULL UP AND DWN
NOTE
Indicates secondary door is both full up and full down at same time.
Fault 022 a. Disengage EMA gearbox

reporting safety pin IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
momentarily set MODE
MAINTENANCE. MAIN-
TENANCE (9) indicator
illuminates and audible
alarm signals change of
mode.
c. Using SDCA JOG
UP ⁄ JOG DOWN (12)
switch, jog secondary
door slightly upward out
of the fully down posi-
tion.
NOTE
Delay a minimum of 4 seconds prior to performing step d.
d. On SDCA front panel,

(10) switch to OPERA-
TION. OPERATION (11)
indicator illuminates and
audible alarm signals
change of mode.
e. On SDCA swing-out
panel, check FULL UP
(Figure 4-2, 68) and
FULL DOWN (70) indi-
cators. If either indicator
Cause 2.
4-112
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT022 MDC FULL UP AND DWN - Cont

motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9 9.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
FAULT023 MDC FULL UP AND MOTION
NOTE
Indicates secondary door is both full up and still moving.

21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
MAINTENANCE. MAIN-
mode.
c. Using SDCA JOG
UP/JOG DOWN (12)
tion.
4-113
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT023 MDC FULL UP AND MOTION - Cont
NOTE

OPERATION indicator
(11) illuminates and
change of mode.
(Figure 4-2, 68), UP
MOTION (64), DOWN
MOTION (65), and
MOTOR ON (66) indica-
tors. If any indicator is
illuminated, proceed to
Cause 2.
motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-114
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT024 MDC FULL DWN AND MOTION
NOTE
Indicates secondary door is both full down and still moving.

21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
MAINTENANCE. MAIN-
mode.
c. Using SDCA JOG
tion.
NOTE

OPERATION (11) indi-
cator illuminates and
change of mode.
panel, check FULL
DOWN (Figure 4-2, 70),
UP MOTION (64),
DOWN MOTION (65),
and MOTOR ON (66)
indicators. If any indicator
Cause 2.
4-115
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT024 MDC FULL DWN AND MOTION - Cont

motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
FAULT025 MDC MOTION NO EVENT
NOTE
Indicates secondary door is moving when it should not move.
Fault 025 or a. Disengage EMA gearbox

Fault 027 safety pin IAW T.O.
reporting 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
MAINTENANCE. MAIN-
mode.
c. Using SDCA JOG
tion.
NOTE

OPERATION (11) indi-
cator illuminates and
change of mode.
4-116
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT025 MDC MOTION NO EVENT - Cont
panel, check UP
MOTION (Figure 4-2,
64), DOWN MOTION
(65) indicators. If any
indicator is illuminated,
Probable Cause 2.
motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
FAULT026 MDC RSE SEQ TMR EX
NOTE
Indicates secondary door raise timer has expired.
Fault 026 a. Perform SAS functional

reporting checkout IAW Table 4-1,
and ensure secondary door
homing is performed IAW
Paragraph 7.1.2 in
conjunction with
checkout, then proceed to
next step.
b. If secondary door failed to
raise, proceed to step
b(1); otherwise, proceed
to next step.
(1) On SDCA swing-out
(Figure 4-2, 68) indicator.
If indicator is extin-
guished, proceed to Prob-
able Cause 1. If indicator
Probable Cause 2.
4-117
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT026 MDC RSE SEQ TMR EX - Cont
Fault 026 c. If secondary door is in the

reporting full up position, perform
the following:
(1) On SDCA front panel,
momentarily set
OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure
4-1, 13) switch to
LOWER.
(2) Using a stopwatch and
monitoring the SDCA
front panel SECURE (20)
indicator, momentarily set
RAISE (14) switch to
RAISE while measuring
the time between the
initiation of a RAISE
switch and illumination of
SECURE indicator.
Proceed to next step.
(3) If time between initiation
of RAISE switch in step
c(2) and illumination of
SECURE indicator was
under 31 seconds, proceed
Probable Cause 4.
1. ESS or MDC fault. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Check MDC LCP display
readout (Figure 4-4, 1) for
MDC faults. If any
faults/errors are displayed,
perform MDC trouble
analysis IAW Table 4-18;
step.
2. Check ESS CPD (Figure
4-5) for ESS faults. If any
faults/errors are displayed,
perform ESS trouble
analysis IAW Table 4-20;
step.
4-118
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT026 MDC RSE SEQ TMR EX - Cont
Fault 026 3. On ESS CPD, check ESS

reporting State of Charge (SOC)
percent (8) indicator. If
SOC was equal to or
greater than 25%, replace
EMA IAW Paragraph
5.8.1. If SOC is less than
25%, replace ESS IAW
Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
2. MDC motor drive M1 or a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty MDC
EMA absolute and incre- motor drive IAW Para-
mental encoders. graph 5.8.3.9. If fault
step.
2. Replace both EMA abso-
lute and incremental
encoders IAW Paragraph
5.8.1.4.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1
4. Secondary door lock a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Check secondary door
bolts ⁄ ALB binding, guide lock bolts and ALB for
rail alignment, or EMA mechanical binding and
failure. repair, if required. If fault
step.
2. Check secondary door
guide rail alignment and
adjust, as required, IAW
Paragraph 7.1.1. If fault
step.
3. Replace faulty EMA IAW
Paragraph 5.8.1.
4-119
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT027 MDC UP AND DWN MO
NOTE
• Indicates secondary door is moving up and down at the same time.
FAULT028 NO LCKBLT EXT OR RET
NOTE
• Indicates lock bolt sensors are neither retracted or extended.
FAULT029 PRI AND AUX CNTCR ON
NOTE
• Indicates both MDC primary (K5) and auxiliary (K4) contactors are closed with system in
operation.
• Perform Fault 029 trouble analysis IAW Table 4-17, NO-GO 19 fault flow.
4-120
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT030 NO SEC PIN RET OR ENG
NOTE
Indicates security pin is neither engaged or retracted.
Fault 030 or a. On SDCA front panel, 1. Perform SDEA checkout

Fault 041 momentarily set IAW Table 4-4.
reporting RESET/AUD CANCEL
RESET. If fault resets,
proceed to Remedy 1;
step.
panel, check SECURITY
PIN ENGAGED (Figure
4-2, 72) and SECURITY
PIN RETRACTED (73)
indicators. If performing
trouble analysis for Fault
030, proceed to step b(1).
If performing trouble
analysis for Fault 041,
proceed to step b(2).
(1) For Fault 030, if both
indicators are not extin-
guished simultaneously,
proceed to Probably
Cause 1; otherwise,
2.
(2) For Fault 041, if both
indicators are not illumi-
nated simultaneously,
Probable Cause 2.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
2. SDEA ALB. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDEA
ALB IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.16.
4-121
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT031 SDCA 12VDC A FLT
Electrical hazard is present. Use extreme care when performing SDCA back panel electrical
trouble analysis with power applied. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
• Indicates the 12 Vdc A power source is out of tolerance (15.05 (+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc).
• Fault 033 may be reporting.
Fault 031 a. On SDCA, open front and

reporting, Fault swing-out panels in prepa-
033 could be ration for trouble analysis.
reporting
b. In SDCA back panel,
locate terminal boards
TB1 (Figure 5-44, 15) and
TB3 (2) then proceed as
follows:
(1) Using a multimeter set for
Vdc, check for 15.05
(+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc
between TB1 terminal 10
(-) and TB3 terminal 1
(+). If voltage is within
tolerance, proceed to next
step. If voltage is out of
tolerance, proceed to
Probable Cause 1.
c. Using a multimeter set for
(+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc
Probable Cause 2.
4-122
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT031 SDCA 12VDC A FLT - Cont
Fault 031 d. Using a multimeter set for

reporting, Fault Vdc, check for 15.05
033 could be (+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc
reporting between TB3 terminal 3
Probable Cause 4. If
Cause 3.
1. SDCA power supply PS2. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA A3 power
supply PS2 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.5.
2. SDCA diode D1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA A3 diode
D1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.5.6.
3. SDCA diode D2. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace diode D2 IAW
4. SDCA CCA A2A1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA primary
4-123
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT032 SDCA 12VDC B FLT
NOTE
• Indicates the 12 Vdc B power source is out of tolerance (15.05 (+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc).
• Fault 033 may be reporting.
Fault 032 a. On SDCA, open front and

reporting, Fault swing-out panels in prepa-
033 could be ration for trouble analysis.
reporting
b. In SDCA back panel,
locate terminal boards
TB4 (14) then proceed as
follows:
(1) Using a multimeter set for
(+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc
Probable Cause 1.
(+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc
Probable Cause 2.
4-124
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT032 SDCA 12VDC B FLT - Cont
Fault 032 d. Using a multimeter set for

reporting, Fault Vdc, check for 15.05
033 could be (+0.48 ⁄ -0.99) Vdc
reporting between TB4 terminal 3
Cause 3.
1. SDCA power supply PS3. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA A3 power
supply PS3 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.5.
D3 located between TB4
terminals 1 and 2 IAW
D4 located between TB4
terminals 2 and 3 IAW
4. SDCA CCA A2A1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA primary
4-125
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT033 SDCA 12VDC BUS FLT
NOTE
Indicates a 12 Vdc failure on the primary control CCA.
Fault 033 a. In SDCA firmware

reporting message log, verify that
Fault 031 or 032 are not
reporting. If Fault 031 or
032 are reporting, perform
Fault 031 or 032, as
b. Using a multimeter set for
Vdc, on SDCA swing-out
panel, check voltage
between TP2 (+) (Figure
4-2, 23) and TP1 (-) (22)
for 12.6 (±0.6) Vdc. If
Cause 1; otherwise,
2.
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-126 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT034 SDCA 24VDC COMBO FLT
NOTE
• Indicates the SDCA 24-Vdc power supply is out of tolerance (23.79 (±2.46) Vdc).
• Fault 034 reporting without Fault 035 and ⁄ or 036 reporting, indicates a failure of the SDCA
A2A1 voltage divider circuitry. Any other condition is accompanied by a Fault 035 and/or 036.
• If Faults 035 and ⁄ or 036 are reporting in conjunction with Fault 034, perform trouble analysis
IAW Fault 035 or 036 fault flow, as required.

reporting message log IAW Para-
graph 4.2.4.3.1. If Fault
035 or 036 is present,
proceed to Fault 035 or
036 fault flow. If Fault
035 or 036 are not
present, proceed to next
step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-127
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT035 SDCA 24VDC EXT FLT
NOTE
Indicates the SDCA 24-Vdc external power supply is out of tolerance (23.79 (+0.88 ⁄ -1.47)
Vdc).
Fault 035 a. Ensure that MDC motor

reporting disconnect (DISC1)
(Figure 5-25, 8) switch is
set to ON.
panel, ensure that
POWER 24 VDC
EXTERNAL (Figure 4-1,
9) switch to ON, and
POWER 24 VDC
INTERNAL (7) switch is
set to OFF.
between TP5 (+) (Figure
4-2, 26) and TP1 (-) (22)
for 23.79 (+ 0.88 ⁄ -1.47)
Vdc. Record indication
and proceed to next step.
d. Using a multimeter set for
between TP3 (+) (24) and
TP1 (-) for 23.97 (+
0.88 ⁄ -1.47) Vdc. If no
voltage is present, proceed
step.
e. If voltage was present
between swing-out panel
test points TP3 and TP1,
and no voltage was
present between TP5 and
TP1, proceed to Probable
Cause 1; otherwise,
4-128
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT035 SDCA 24VDC EXT FLT - Cont
e1. Open SDCA swing-out

panel and locate EMI
filter EF2 (Figure 5-43, 5)
in bottom right-hand side
of SDCA back panel.
e2. Using a multimeter set for
Vdc, check voltage on
filter EF2 between FL2
(+) (Figure 5-45, 12) and
FL4 (-) (13) for 23.97
(+0.88 ⁄ -1.47) Vdc. If
voltage is present proceed
to Probable Cause 5
otherwise proceed to next
step.
f. Locate terminal boards
TB2 (29) in SDCA back
panel.
g. In SDCA back panel,
using a multimeter set for
Vdc, check voltage
between TB1-10 (-) and
TB2-8 (+) for 23.97
(+ 0.88 ⁄ -1.47) Vdc. If
voltage is within toler-
Cause 4. If voltage is out
of tolerance, proceed to
Probable Cause 2.
1. SDCA CCA A2A3 fuse a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty fuse F2 on
F2. SDCA power command
CCA A2A3 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.4.3.1.
2. SDCA back panel diode a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA A3
D6. diode D6 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.5.6.
Change 10 4-129
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT035 SDCA 24VDC EXT FLT - Cont
3. MDC CB3, MDC DISC1, a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Reset or replace faulty

SDCA CCA A2A3, MDC MDC circuit breaker CB3
PS3. IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.8. If
next step.
motor disconnect (DISC1)
switch IAW Paragraph
Power Command CCA
A2A3 IAW Paragraph
power supply PS3 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.11.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
5. SDCA A3A5 or Internal a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Inspect wiring and replace
Wiring as necessary. If wiring is
good proceed to next step.
Interconnect CCA, A3A5,
4-130 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT036 SDCA 24VDC INT FLT
NOTE
Indicates the SDCA 24-Vdc internal power supply is out of tolerance (23.79 (+0.88 ⁄ -1.47)
Vdc).
Fault 036 a. On SDCA swing-out

reporting panel, ensure that 24 VDC
EXTERNAL (Figure 4-2,
9) switch is set to OFF,
and 24 VDC INTERNAL
switch (7) is set to ON.
b. Using a multimeter set for
TP1 (-) (22) for 23.79 (+
0.88 ⁄ -1.47) Vdc. Record
indication and proceed to
next step.
TP1 (-) (22) for 23.79 (+
0.88 ⁄ -1.47) Vdc. If no
voltage is present, proceed
step.
Change 10 4-130.1/(4-130.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT036 SDCA 24VDC INT FLT - Cont
Fault 036 d. If voltage was present

reporting between swing-out panel
test points TP4 and TP1,
and no voltage was
present between TP6 and
TP1, proceed to Probable
Cause 1; otherwise,
e. Open SDCA swing-out

panel and locate terminal
boards TB1 (Figure 5-44,
15) and TB2 (29) in
SDCA back panel.
f. In SDCA back panel,
using a multimeter set for
Vdc, check voltage
between TB1-1 (-) and
TB2-3 (+) for 23.97 (+
0.88 ⁄ -1.47) Vdc. If
voltage is within toler-
Cause 4. If voltage is out
Probable Cause 2.
1. SDCA CCA A2A3 fuse a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty fuse F1 on
F1. SDCA power command
CCA A2A3 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.4.3.1.
2. SDCA back panel diode a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA A3
D5. diode D5 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.5.6.
3. SDCA PS1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-131
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT037 SECPIN DRV 1A FAIL
NOTE
• Indicates delay timer relay DT2 circuit failure.
• Fault 037 is reported if the A timer 64-minute timer expired and the 10-minute timer did not
start.

reporting panel, while monitoring
SDCA keypad display
(Figure 4-2, 111), press
COIL 1 TEST (13)
switch, then release.
b. If COIL 1 TEST current
displayed is within toler-
Cause 1. If current is
zero, proceed to Probable
Cause 2.
2. SDCA A3 DT2. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
delay timer relay DT2
4-132
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT038 SECPIN DRV 1B FAIL
NOTE
• Fault 038 is reported if the B timer 64-minute timer expired and the 10-minute timer did not
start.

reporting panel, while monitoring
SDCA keypad display
(Figure 4-2, 111) press
COIL 2 TEST (15)
switch, then release.
b. If COIL 2 TEST current
displayed was within
current was zero, proceed
2. SDCA A3 DT4. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
delay timer relay DT4
4-133
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT039 SECPIN DRV 1C FAIL
NOTE
• Fault 039 is reported if SDCA lower has been commanded and 10-minute timer did not start.
Fault 039 1. SDCA CCA A3A3. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA timer
reporting control CCA A3A3 IAW
FAULT040 SECPIN DRV 1D FAIL
NOTE
• Fault 040 is reported if SDCA lower has been commanded and 10-minute timer did not start.
Fault 040 1. SDCA CCA A3A4. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace SDCA timer
reporting control CCA A3A4 IAW
FAULT041 SECPIN RET AND ENG
NOTE
• Indicates security pin is both engaged and retracted.
• Perform FAULT 041 trouble analysis IAW Fault 030 fault flow.
4-134
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FAULT042 T-HNDL RET AND ENG
NOTE
Indicates T-Handle (actuator locking bar) both retracted and engaged at the same time.

reporting panel, check T-HANDLE
RETRACTED (Figure
4-2, 74) and T-HANDLE
ENGAGED (75) indica-
tors. If both indicators are
Cause 2.
1. SDEA ALB. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Adjust ALB switches
IAW Paragraph 7.1.4. If
next step.
ALB IAW Paragraph
5.7.1.16.
2. SDCA CCA A2A1 a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
Change 4 4-135
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-17. SDCA NO-GO Trouble Analysis
NO-GO001 SELF TEST FAILED
NOTE
Indicates a failure of a SDCA self test function or routine.
NO-GO 001, a. Perform secondary access

029, 030, system shutdown IAW
and/or 031 Table 5-1 to reset SDCA
reporting software.
b. Perform secondary access
system startup IAW Table
5-2 to reset SDCA soft-
ware.
c. If NO-GO clears, no
further maintenance
required. If NO-GO
reports after reset of
SDCA software, proceed
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
NO-GO002 10MIN A AND B TMR FAIL
NOTE
• Indicates that both 10-minute timer circuits failed.
• NO-GO 002 is preceded by both Faults 001 and 002 reporting.
NO-GO 002 or a. Perform SDCA A3 delay

003 reporting timer relay (DT1 through
DT4) inspection IAW
Paragraph 3.1.3. If fault
recurs or is not corrected,
1.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-136
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-17. SDCA NO-GO Trouble Analysis - Continued
NO-GO003 10MIN C AND D TMR FAIL
NOTE
• Indicates that both 10-minute timer circuits failed.
• Perform NO-GO 003 trouble analysis IAW NO-GO 002 fault flow.
NO-GO004 60MIN A AND B TMR FAIL
NOTE
• Indicates both 64-minute timer circuits failed.
• NO-GO 004 is preceded by both Faults 005 and 006 reporting.
Change 10 4-137
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO005 DWN MOTION AFTER OFF
NOTE
• Indicates MDC down motion signal is still set with off event completed.
• SDCA JOG UP or JOG DOWN commands may be used to verify secondary door motion.
NO-GO 005, a. On SDCA front panel,

018, or 034 momentarily set
reporting OFF ⁄ LOWER (Figure
4-1, 13) switch to OFF
while monitoring SDCA
swing-out panel OFF
(STOP) (Figure 4-2, 45)
indicator. If OFF (STOP)
indicator did not illumi-
nate while switch was
pressed, proceed to Prob-
while holding the JOG
UP ⁄ JOG DOWN (Figure
4-1, 12) switch in the
JOG UP position, ensure
secondary door is jogging
upward and then momen-
tarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER
(13) switch to OFF.
Observe secondary door
movement and release
JOG UP ⁄ JOG DOWN
switch. If secondary door
movement did not stop as
a result of the OFF
command, proceed to
c. For NO-GO 005 proceed
to step c(1), for NO-GO
018 proceed to step c(2),
or for NO-GO 034
proceed to step c(3).
4-138
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO005 DWN MOTION AFTER OFF - Cont
NO-GO 005, (1) For NO-GO 005: On

018, or 034 SDCA front panel,
reporting momentarily set JOG
UP ⁄ JOG DOWN switch
to the JOG DOWN posi-
tion while monitoring
SDCA swing-out panel
DOWN MOTION indi-
cator (Figure 4-2, 65),
then proceed to step d.
(2) For NO-GO 018: On
SDCA front panel,
momentarily set JOG
4-1, 12) switch to either
the JOG UP or JOG
DOWN position while
monitoring SDCA
swing-out panel MOTOR
ON (Figure 4-2, 66) indi-
cator, then proceed to step
d.
(3) For NO-GO 034: On
SDCA front panel,
momentarily set JOG
4-1, 12) switch to the
JOG UP position while
monitoring SDCA
swing-out panel UP
MOTION (Figure 4-2, 64)
indicator, then proceed to
step d.
d. If appropriate swing-out
panel indicator did not
illuminate while
performing step c,
Probable Cause 3.
1. SDCA CCA A2A2. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA 24V
driver CCA A2A2 IAW
2. MDC Motor drive M1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty MDC
motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
4-139
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO005 DWN MOTION AFTER OFF - Cont
NO-GO 005, 3. SDCA CCA A2A1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
018, or 034 primary control CCA
reporting A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
NO-GO006 EMA DRVR 5VDC FAIL
NOTE
• Indicates 24V Driver CCA A2A2 is missing 5-Vdc power supply.
• NO-GO 006 denotes that SDCA A2A2 CCA is missing 5-Vdc that supplies power for MDC
and ESS drive commands.
NO-GO 006 1. SDCA CCA A2A2 or a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA 24V
reporting A2A1 driver CCA A2A2 IAW
Paragraph 5.9.1.4.2. If
next step.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-140
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO007 EMA CHRG AND DSCHRG
NOTE
Indicates ESS is charging and discharging at the same time.
NO-GO 007 a. On ESS CPD (Figure

reporting 4-5), check display indica-
tions. If faults or alarms
are present, proceed to
panel, check ESS
CHARGE (Figure 4-2,
61) and ESS
DISCHARGE (60) indica-
tors. If both indicators are
Cause 2.
1. ESS failure a. On SDCA front panel,
momentarily set
RESET.
b. If NO-GO clears, no 1. Replace faulty ESS IAW
further maintenance Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
required. If fault recurs,
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-141
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO008 ESS NO-GO
NOTE
Indicates an internal ESS NO-GO has occurred.

panel, check ESS NO-GO
If indicator is illuminated,
Probable Cause 2.
1. ESS failure. a. On SDCA front panel,
momentarily set
RESET.
b. If NO-GO clears, no 1. Perform ESS trouble
further maintenance analysis IAW Paragraph
required. If fault recurs, 4.2.6.
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
4-142
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO009 ESS SOC BELOW 62.5%
Secondary access system RAISE capability could be degraded. If an unanticipated ESS SOC drop
below 62.5% occurs, perform response to unexplained decrease of ESS SOC IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ), as required. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
• Indicates ESS SOC has dropped below the critical level of 62.5% and affects the amount of
time left for an emergency raise.
• NO-GO will occur as a normal indication if ESS system has been exercised multiple times
causing ESS SOC to drop below 62.5%.
NO-GO 009 a. On SDCA front panel,

reporting check ESS OVER TEMP
If ESS OVER TEMP indi-
cator is extinguished
perform fault trouble
analysis IAW Table 4-16,
Fault 009 fault flow. If
ESS OVER TEMP indi-
cator is illuminated,
b. If SDCA front panel ESS
NO-GO (Figure 4-1, 15)
indicator is illuminated,
allow ESS to cool. If ESS
indicator extinguishes
within 30 minutes of
system cool down,
proceed to next step. If
ESS NO-GO indicator
fails to extinguish within
30 minutes of system cool
down, proceed to Prob-
able Cause 1.
4-143
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO009 ESS SOC BELOW 62.5% - Cont
NO-GO 009 c. On ESS CPD, check State

reporting of Charge (SOC) bar
graph (Figure 4-5, 7) indi-
cator. If ESS SOC is
increasing, no further
maintenance required. If
ESS SOC fails to increase
perform fault trouble
analysis IAW Table 4-16,
Fault 009 fault flow.
1. ESS failure. a. Proceed to remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty ESS IAW
Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
NO-GO010 ESS STARTUP AND CHRG
NOTE
Indicates ESS is in both the startup and charge modes at the same time.

panel, check ESS
CHARGE (Figure 4-2,
61) and ESS STARTUP
(62) indicators. If both
indicators are illuminated,
Probable Cause 2.
1. ESS failure. a. On SDCA front panel,
momentarily set
RESET.
b. If NO-GO clears, no 1. Replace faulty ESS IAW
further maintenance Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
4-144
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO010 ESS STARTUP AND CHRG - Cont
NO-GO 010 2. SDCA CCA A2A1 or a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
reporting A3A5. primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
NO-GO011 IO EXTENDER FAIL
NOTE
Indicates firmware detected an I ⁄ O extender error after self test.

RESET/AUD CANCEL
RESET. If NO-GO resets,
no further maintenance is
1.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4-145
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO012 LCKBLT 24VDC OFF
NOTE
Indicates lock bolt drive module in the secondary door J-Box is not ready.
NO-GO 012 a. On SDCA swing-out

reporting panel, check POWER 24
VDC EXTERNAL
(Figure 4-2, 9) and LOCK
BOLT 24V READY (71)
indicators. If both indica-
tors are illuminated,
1. If both indicators are
extinguished, proceed to
Cause 3.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
2. MDC CB5. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty MDC
circuit breaker CB5 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.8.
3. Secondary door J-Box a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Check secondary door
fuse F4, or lock bolt drive J-box fuse F4 (Figure
M2. 5-24, 15) IAW Paragraph
5.8.2.2. Replace F4, if
required. If fuse F4 is not
faulty, or fault recurs,
2. Replace faulty secondary
door J-box lock bolt drive
M2 IAW Paragraph
5.8.2.1.
4-146
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO013 LCKBLT EXT EXP
NOTE
Indicates lock bolts did not extend before the lock bolt extend timer expired.
NO-GO 013 or 1. SDEA failure. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform SDEA functional

014 reporting checkout IAW Table 4-4.
NO-GO014 LCKBLT RET EXP
NOTE
• Indicates lock bolts did not retract before the lock bolt retract timer expired.
NO-GO015 MDC NO-GO
NOTE
Indicates an internal MDC NO-GO condition has occurred.
NO-GO 015 a. On MDC LCP (Figure

reporting 4-4), check display. If
MDC faults/alarms are
present, proceed to Prob-
panel, check MDC
Cause 2.
1. MDC failure. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform trouble analysis
IAW Paragraph 4.2.5 and
Table 4-18.
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
4-147
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO015 MDC NO-GO - Cont
NO-GO 015 2. Replace faulty SDCA

reporting controller interconnect
CCA A3A5 IAW Para-
graph 5.9.1.5.2.
NO-GO016 MDC NOT HOMED
NOTE
• Indicates secondary door position has lost its location coordinates.
• NO-GO 016 is a normal indication if secondary door homing is required and resets upon
completion of secondary door homing.

report momentarily set
RESET. If NO-GO resets,
no further maintenance
required. If NO-GO
recurs, proceed to Prob-
able Cause 1.
1. Secondary door off home. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform secondary door
homing IAW Paragraph
7.1.2.
NO-GO017 MDC RSE EXP
NOTE
• Indicates secondary door did not raise and lock within 30-second time frame.
4-148
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO018 MOTOR ON AFTER OFF
NOTE
• Indicates an event was active and firmware off timer expired before motor active signal goes
false.
NO-GO019 NO PRI OR AUX CNTCTR
NOTE
• Indicates both the primary (K5) and auxiliary contactors (K4) in the MDC are open at the
same time.
• If Fault 018 is reporting in conjunction with NO-GO 019, perform trouble analysis IAW Table
4-16, Fault 018 fault flow.
NO-GO 019 1. MDC K4/K5 contactor a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty MDC
reporting relay or SDCA CCA K4 ⁄ K5 contactor relay
A2A1. IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.7.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
NO-GO020 SARC LWR SEQ EXP
NOTE
• Indicates a SARC lower command was not completed before MDC lower timer expired.
• If NO-GO 015 is reporting in conjunction with NO-GO 020 or 021, perform trouble analysis
IAW NO-GO 015 fault flow.
NO-GO 020 or a. Monitor secondary door

021 reporting movement. If secondary
door is not in the fully
down position, proceed to
panel, check FULL
DOWN (Figure 4-2, 70)
extinguished, proceed to
Probable Cause 2. If indi-
cator is illuminated,
4-149
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO020 SARC LWR SEQ EXP - Cont
Fire or ECS shutdown could present a hazardous condition. Secondary door shall not be raised
until it is verified that an emergency breathing apparatus for each person and an operable flash-
light are located in the LERs. The emergency breathing apparatus shall be configured for imme-
diate use with cylinder valve open and breathing hose/tube connected to the regulator. Comply
with applicable emergency breathing apparatus T.O. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury or death.
c. Ensure personnel in
Launcher Equipment
Room (LER) have emer-
gency breathing apparatus
configured for immediate
use for each person and
an operable flashlight.
Loss of communication with personnel in LERs could be hazardous. At least one person outside
LER shall be in communication with personnel in LER while secondary door is raised. If commu-
nication is interrupted for more than 3 minutes for any reason, secondary door shall be lowered.
Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
d. Ensure personnel in LER

are in communication
with outside personnel. If
communications are lost,
topside personnel shall set
ringer unit of LSB tele-
phone switch to IN posi-
tion so that communica-
tions can be reestablished
through Missile Combat
Crew Commander
(MCCC). Do not exceed 3
minutes in a planned
break in communications.
4-150
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
e. If communications
between personnel inside
LER and personnel
outside LER are lost for
more than 3 minutes
while secondary door is
closed, immediately lower
secondary door.
Movement of secondary door is extremely hazardous. Ensure personnel access shaft is clear of
personnel, tools, and equipment prior to initiating secondary door movement. Failure to comply
could result in personnel injury, death, or equipment damage.
f. Notify topside personnel

that secondary door shall
be raised and lowered to
facilitate SAS trouble
analysis.
g. Ensure PAS is clear of
personnel, tools and
equipment.
h. In LER-2, ensure area
beneath the secondary
door is clear of all
personnel, tools, equip-
ment, and that secondary
door is configured to
perform a secondary door
RAISE command.
i. On SDCA front panel,
momentarily set RAISE
RAISE, then proceed to
next step.
4-151
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
j. Using a stopwatch to time

LOWER sequence and
observing secondary door
movement, monitor
SDCA swing-out panel
LOWER (Figure 4-2, 41)
and FULL DOWN (70)
indicators, then momen-
tarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER
(Figure 4-1, 13) switch on
SDCA front panel to
LOWER. Record time
between initiation of
secondary door LOWER
command and illumination
of FULL DOWN indi-
cator, then proceed to next
step.
k. Using timing and indica-
tions recorded above,
as follows:
(1) If secondary door moved
and lower command
sequence was timed at 64
seconds or less, proceed
step.
(2) If no secondary door
movement occurred and
LOWER indicator failed
to illuminate, proceed to
(3) If no secondary door
movement occurred and
LOWER indicator illumi-
nated proceed to Probable
Cause 2; otherwise,
4-152
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
(4) If secondary door moved

and lower command
sequence was timed at
greater than 64 seconds,
5.
1. MDC motor drive M1, a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty MDC
absolute and incremental motor drive M1 IAW
encoders, or EMA. Paragraph 5.8.3.9. If fault
step.
2. Replace faulty EMA abso-
lute and incremental
encoders IAW Paragraph
Paragraph 5.8.1.
motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
4. SDCA CCA A2A2. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA 24V
driver CCA A2A2 IAW
5. MDC motor drive M1 or a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty MDC
EMA. motor drive M1 IAW
step.
Paragraph 5.8.1.
4-153
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO021 SDCA LWR SEQ EXP
NOTE
• Indicates a SDCA lower command was not completed before MDC lower timer expired.
NO-GO022 SECPIN COILS FAIL
NOTE
• Indicates both security pin coils did not draw current within acceptable limits during a coil
test.
• A NO-GO 022 indication requires that both security pin solenoid coils fail. Malfunction will
also report as a SDCA Fault 007 or Fault 008.
• Security pin coils are tested by firmware each time security pin solenoids are energized such
as during site penetration, or when coils test command(s) are manually intimated from the
SDCA swing-out panel.
• Perform NO-GO 022 trouble analysis IAW Table 4-16, Fault 007 fault flow.
NO-GO023 SECPIN DRV OA FAIL
NOTE
Indicates the drive current to security pin coil 1 is on without either the 10-minute or 64-minute
timer active.
NO-GO 023 1. SDCA CCA A3A1. a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Replace faulty SDCA
reporting timer control CCA A3A1
NO-GO024 SECPIN DRV OB FAIL
NOTE
timer active.
4-154
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO025 SECPIN DRV OC FAIL
NOTE
timer active.
NO-GO026 SECPIN DRV OD FAIL
NOTE
timer active.
NO-GO027 SECPIN RET FAIL
NOTE
Indicates security pin is not retracted before timer expires.
NO-GO 027 or 1. SDEA security pin fault a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform security pin func-
028 reporting tional checkout, IAW
Table 4-3.
NO-GO028 SECPIN TMR EXP
NOTE
• Indicates security pin retracted before security pin retract timer expired.
NO-GO029 STATE-BAD ADR
NOTE
• Indicates an invalid memory address during self test.
4-155
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NO-GO030 STATE-BAD CMD
NOTE
• Indicates an invalid command during self test.
NO-GO031 STATE-BAD VAR
NOTE
• Indicates an invalid variable value during self test.
NO-GO032 T_HNDL HOLD EXP
NOTE
Indicates lock bolts were not retracted by actuator locking bar before T-Handle hold timer
expired.
NO-GO 032 1. SDEA fault a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform SDEA functional

reporting checkout, IAW Table 4-4.
NO-GO033 T_HNDL PULL EXP
NOTE
Indicates lock bolts were not retracted by actuator locking bar before T-Handle pull timer
expired.
NO-GO 033 1. SDEA fault a. Proceed to Remedy 1. 1. Perform SDEA functional

reporting checkout, IAW Table 4-4.
NO-GO034 UP MOTION AFTER OFF
NOTE
• Indicates MDC up motion signal was still set true after off event completed.
4-156
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-18. MDC LCP Alarm and Error Trouble Analysis
ALARM 4 - MAINS PHASE LOSS
NOTE
One of the 208 VAC phases has been lost.
MDC Alarm 4 1. Perform MDC preparation

Set for maintenance IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.1.
Faulty MDC current limit control 2. Using multimeter set for a. If resistance is out of
CL1. resistance, on MDC tolerance on any of the
current limit control CL1 terminals, replace MDC
(Figure 5-26, 12), check current limit control CL1
the output (X1, X2, and IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.12.
X3) terminals to ground If fault recurs, perform
with the wires removed. MDC preparation for
The meter should indicate maintenance IAW Para-
greater than 1M ohm. If graph 5.8.3.1 and proceed
resistance less than 1M to Isolation Procedure 3.
ohm, proceed to Remedy
a; otherwise, proceed to
Isolation Procedure 3.
NOTE
A faulty fuse(s) detected in Isolation Procedure 3 indicates a fault within the MDC current limit
control CL1 and replacement of fuse(s) only will not correct condition.
Faulty MDC current limit control 3. Using multimeter set for a. Replace faulty MDC
CL1. resistance, in MDC current limit control CL1
current limit control CL1 IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.12.
(Figure 5-26, 12), check If fault recurs, perform
each of the three fuses for MDC preparation for
continuity. If faulty fuse is maintenance IAW Para-
found, perform Remedy a; graph 5.8.3.1 and proceed
otherwise, proceed to to Isolation Procedure 4.
4. If MDC was operating on
primary power from the
[1][3][5] LDB panel [T9]
Switchboard SWBD-3<,
proceed to Isolation
Procedure 5. If MDC was
operating on auxiliary
power from the topside
120 ⁄ 208 backup
generator, proceed to
Change 3 4-157
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-18. MDC LCP Alarm and Error Trouble Analysis - Continued
ALARM 4 - MAINS PHASE LOSS - Cont
Faulty MDC high current filter 5. On MDC high current a. Replace MDC high
FL2. filter FL2 (Figure 5-32, 1) current filter FL2 IAW
disconnect output terminal Paragraph 5.8.3.16. If
wires and using a multim- fault recurs, proceed to
eter set for resistance, Isolation Procedure 8.
check between respective
FL2 input and output
terminals. If an open is
observed, proceed to
Remedy a; otherwise,
Procedure 7.
Faulty MDC high current filter 6. On MDC high current a. Replace MDC high
FL1. filter FL1 (Figure 5-32, 2) current filter FL1 IAW
disconnect output terminal Paragraph 5.8.3.16. If
wires and using a multim- fault recurs, proceed to
eter set for resistance, Isolation Procedure 8.
check between respective
FL1 input and output
terminals. If an open is
observed, proceed to
Procedure 7.
Faulty MDC contactor relay 7. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace MDC contactor
K4/K5 assembly relay K4 ⁄ K5 IAW Para-
graph 5.8.3.7. If fault
recurs, proceed to Isola-
tion Procedure 8.
Faulty MDC circuit breaker CB8 8. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace MDC circuit
breaker CB8 (Figure 5-26,
26) IAW Paragraph
Procedure 9.
Faulty MDC transformer T1. 9. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace MDC transformer
T1 (Figure 5-26, 10) IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.14. If
4-158
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ALARM 4 - MAINS PHASE LOSS - Cont
Faulty MDC motor drive M1. 10. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace MDC motor drive
M1 (Figure 5-26, 13)
ALARM 7 - DC LINK OVERVOLTAGE
NOTE
The DC Buss has exceeded 850 Vdc.
MDC Alarm 7 1. Perform MDC preparation

Set for maintenance IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.1.
Faulty MDC regen resistor R1. 2. On MDC regen resistor a. Replace MDC regen
R1 (Figure 5-26, 11), resistor R1 IAW Para-
disconnect resistor wiring graph 5.8.3.15. If fault
from terminals and using recurs, proceed to Isola-
a multimeter set for resis- tion Procedure 3.
tance, check for 4.7 (±1)
ohms. If resistance is out
Procedure 3.
M1 (Figure 5-26, 13)
ALARM 8 - DC LINK UNDERVOLTAGE
NOTE
• The DC Buss has fallen below 402 Vdc.
• Perform MDC Alarm 8 trouble analysis IAW MDC Alarm 4 fault flow.
MDC Alarm 8
Set
4-159
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ALARM 9 - INVERTER TIME
NOTE
• The Motor Drive (M1) has been overloaded for too long and is overheated.
• If additional SDCA Faults or NO-GOs, except NO-GO 015, are reporting, perform trouble
analysis first IAW appropriate SDCA Fault (Table 4-16) or NO-GO (Table 4-17) fault flow.
MDC Alarm 9, 1. On SDCA front panel,

12, or 13 Set momentarily set
RESET. If fault resets, no
further maintenance
Procedure 2.
2. While monitoring EMA
operation and using either
EMA jog switch (wall or
SDCA front panel), jog
secondary door up, then
down. If unusual noise is
heard from EMA, proceed
to Isolation Procedure 3;
Faulty EMA motor ⁄ gearbox 3. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace EMA IAW Para-
graph 5.8.1. If fault
recurs, proceed to Isola-
tion Procedure 4.
Faulty MDC motor drive M1 4. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace MDC motor drive
M1 IAW Paragraph
b. Replace EMA IAW Para-
graph 5.8.1.
4-160
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ALARM 12 - TORQUE LIMIT
NOTE
• The MDC motor drive M1 has exceeded the torque limit.
MDC Alarm 12
Set
ALARM 13 - OVERCURRENT
NOTE
• The motor has exceeded the peak current limit.
MDC Alarm 13
Set
ALARM 14 - EARTH FAULT
NOTE
There is a discharge from the motor to earth ground.
MDC Alarm 1. Perform MDC preparation

14, 30, 31, or for maintenance IAW
32 Set Paragraph 5.8.3.1.
Faulty MDC motor drive M1. 2. Using multimeter set for a. Replace MDC motor drive
resistance, check for M1 IAW Paragraph
continuity between motor 5.8.3.9. If fault recurs,
drive M1 (Figure 5-26, proceed to Isolation
13) terminals U, V, and W Procedure 3.
(FO-6, Sheet 4) to ground.
If a short is observed,
proceed to Remedy a;
4-161
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ALARM 14 - EARTH FAULT - Cont
MDC Alarm Faulty MDC motor drive M1. 3. In EMA motor J-box a. Replace EMA motor
14, 30, 31, or (Figure 5-22, 9), using a (Figure 5-22, 6) IAW
32 Set multimeter set for resis- Paragraph 5.8.1.1. If fault
tance, check motor leads recurs, proceed to Isola-
L1, L2, and L3 (FO-2, tion Procedure 4.
Sheet 6) to motor case.
The meter should indicate
greater than 1M ohm. If
resistance less than 1M
ohm, proceed to Remedy
a., otherwise, proceed to
Faulty MDC motor drive. 4. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace MDC motor drive
M1 IAW Paragraph
5.8.3.9.
ALARM 15 - SWITCH MODE FAULT
NOTE
Power supply failure in the motor drive.
MDC Alarm Faulty MDC motor drive M1. 1. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace MDC motor drive
15, 29, or 37 M1 (Figure 5-26, 13)
Set IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
4-162 Change 11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ALARM 16 - CURR. SHORT CIRCUIT
NOTE
There is a short circuit on the motor drive terminals or at the motor.
MDC Alarm 16 1. With power applied to the

Set secondary access system,
rotate MDC motor discon-
nect switch (DISC1)
(Figure 5-25, 8) to OFF.
Faulty MDC motor drive M1 or 2. On SDCA front panel, a. Replace MDC motor drive
EMA motor momentarily set M1 (Figure 5-26, 13)
RESET/AUD CANCEL IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.9. If
(Figure 4-1, 17) switch to fault recurs proceed to
RESET. If MDC alarm next step.
condition did not reset,
proceed to Remedy a;
Remedy b.
b. Replace EMA motor
(Figure 5-22, 6) IAW
recurs, proceed to
Remedy c.
c. Perform trouble analysis
on MDC wiring IAW with
schematic diagrams.
ALARM 29 - HEAT SINK OVER TEMP
NOTE
• The motor drive temperature limit has been exceeded.
MDC Alarm 29
Set
4-163
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ALARM 30 - MISSING MOT. PHASE U
NOTE
• Phase U between the motor drive and the motor is missing.
MDC Alarm 30
Set
ALARM 31 - MISSING MOT. PHASE V
NOTE
• Phase V between the motor drive and the motor is missing.
MDC Alarm 31
Set
ALARM 32 - MISSING MOT. PHASE W
NOTE
• Phase W between the motor drive and the motor is missing.
MDC Alarm 32
Set
ALARM 37 - INVERTER FAULT
NOTE
• Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) has failed in motor drive.
MDC Alarm 37
Set
4-164
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
O.ERR_5 - ERROR NOT CLEARED
NOTE
A motion command was received prior to resetting a fault.
O.ERR_5, 10, Faulty MDC motor drive M1. 1. On SDCA front panel, a. Replace MDC motor drive
13, 16, 17, 18, momentarily set M1 (Figure 5-26, 13)
or 19 Set RESET ⁄ AUD CANCEL IAW Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
RESET. If MDC condition
does not clear, proceed to
Remedy a. If condition
resets, no further mainte-
nance required.
O.ERR_8 - POSITION ERROR
NOTE
The difference between feedback from the incremental encoder compared to the commanded
position calculated in the motor drive (tolerated position error) was exceeded.
O.ERR_8 Set 1. If not previously accom-

plished, on SDCA front
panel, loosen nine captive
fasteners (Figure 4-1, 27)
securing SDCA front
panel (1) and open panel
to facilitate maintenance.
Faulty EMA incremental 2. On SDCA swing-out a. Replace faulty EMA
encoder. panel, check the HOMED incremental encoder IAW
(Figure 4-2, 2) indicator. Paragraph 5.8.1.4.
If indicator is extin-
guished, proceed to
Procedure 3.
Faulty MDC motor drive M1 3. On SDCA front panel, a. Replace faulty MDC
momentarily set motor drive M1 IAW
RESET/AUD CANCEL Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
RESET. If NO-GO 15
does not clear, proceed to
Procedure 4.
4-165
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
O.ERR_8 - POSITION ERROR - Cont
O.ERR_8 Set 4. Ensure SAS is operating

in MAINTENANCE
mode, MDC motor
disconnect switch DISC1
is set to ON, and that
EMA gearbox safety pin
is disengaged IAW T.O.
21M- LGM30G-2-10-( ),
then proceed to Isolation
Procedure 5.
Faulty EMA, MDC circuit 5. While monitoring EMA a. Replace faulty EMA IAW
breaker CB1, MDC relay K3, brake operation, use EMA Paragraph 5.8.1.
MDC power supply PS2, or jog switch to jog
MDC motor drive M1. secondary door up and
then down. If EMA brake
disengages, proceed to
proceed to Remedy b.
b. Replace faulty MDC CB1
c. Replace faulty MDC relay
K3 IAW Paragraph
5.8.3.6.
d. Replace faulty MDC
Paragraph 5.8.3.10.
e. Replace faulty MDC
motor drive M1 IAW
Paragraph 5.8.3.9.
4-166
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
O.ERR_9 - INDEX NOT FOUND
NOTE
Incremental encoder not found.
O.ERR_9 Set Faulty incremental encoder. 1. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace EMA (URD
11406) incremental
encoder (Figure 5-22, 11)
IAW Paragraph 5.8.1.4. If
M1 (Figure 5-26, 13)
O.ERR_10 - UNKNOWN COMMAND
NOTE
• Communication or program error.
• Perform O.ERR_10 trouble analysis IAW O.ERR_5 fault flow.
O.ERR_10 Set
O.ERR_13 - GENERAL VLT ERROR
NOTE
• A drive status error was detected.
O.ERR_13 Set
O.ERR_16 - PARAM. ERROR EEPROM
NOTE
• Parameters in the Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) are
corrupted.
O.ERR_16 Set
4-167
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
O.ERR_17 - PROGR. ERROR EEPROM
NOTE
• Programs in the EEPROM are corrupted.
O.ERR_17 Set
O.ERR_18 - RESET BY CPU
NOTE
• The Central Processing Unit (CPU) has been stopped and a reset was executed.
O.ERR_18 Set
O.ERR_19 - USER ABORT
NOTE
• The program has been aborted by the user.
O.ERR_19 Set
4-168
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-19. Operation of MDC LCP
Menu I Menu Level II Normal Indication
DISPLAY/STATUS MENU OPTIONS
NOTE
• XXX displayed in Normal Indication column line 2 (Figure 4-4) indicates motor speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM).
• Normal Indication column line 1 (1) entries xxxV, x.xxA, and xxx indicate DC BUSS VOLTAGE,
MOTOR CURRENT (amperage), and POSITION ERROR, respectively.
1. On MDC LCP, press Display ⁄ Status Line #1 Not Toggled

(18) key to display not toggled and
toggled (Menu Level II) Normal Indi-
cation, as required.
Line #1 Toggled
QUICK MENU OPTIONS
NOTE
• XXX displayed in Normal Indication column line 2 (Figure 4-4) indicates motor speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM).
• Input/Output (I ⁄ O) status is indicated by 1 (high) or 0 (low) in the Least Significant Bit (LSB) posi-
tion (00000000x) of the Normal Indication line 4 (4) readout.
1. Press MDC LCP up arrow + (9) or Incremental Encoder Position

down arrow - (11) to scroll through
quick menu (Menu Level II) Normal
Indication column screens, as
required.
4-169
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-19. Operation of MDC LCP - Continued
QUICK MENU OPTIONS - Cont
2. Press MDC LCP Display ⁄ Status key Absolute Encoder Position

(18) to exit quick menu, as required.
Input #1 - Home Command

Signal
Input #2 - Stop Command

Signal
Input #3 - Jog Down

Command Signal
Input #4 - Jog Up Command

Signal
4-170 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
2. - Input #5 - Lower Command

Cont Signal
Input #6 - Raise Command

Signal
Input #7 - Spare
Input #8 - ALB Engaged
Input #16 - Reset Command

Signal
Output #1 - Full Down
4-171
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
2. - Output #2 - Full Up
Cont
Output #3 - Lock Ring Secure
Output #4 - Motor On
Output #5 - Down Motion
Output #6 - Up Motion
Output #7 - Homed
4-172
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
2. - Output #8 - MDC NOGO

Cont
Output #46 - Set Encoder

Home
4-173
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-20. Energy Storage System Control Panel Display Trouble Analysis
ESS Fault Probable Cause Isolation Procedures Remedy
STATOR TEMP ESS stator temperature 1. Allow ESS to cool for a. Replace faulty ESS
is greater than 180 °C. 30 minutes. If fault IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
does not automatically
clear in the 30-minute
time frame, proceed to
Remedy a.
GROUND FAULT ESS ground fault. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
17) switch to RESET.
2. Check ESS CPD
(Figure 4-5). If fault
resets, no further main-
tenance required; other-
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
HW OVERVOLTAGE ESS voltage exceeds 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
850 Vdc. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
IGBT OVERTEMP ESS IGBT limit 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
exceeded. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
4-174
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 4-20. Energy Storage System Control Panel Display Trouble Analysis - Continued
X PHASE OC Vac phase over current 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
where X = phase A, B, panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
or C. RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
VACUUM FAULT ESS drag power. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
RUNOUT FAULT ESS rotor out of 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
balance. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
MISER FAULT ESS axial bearing posi- 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
tion offset too high. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
4-175
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
BEARING FAULT ESS magnetic bearing 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
failure. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
CONTACTOR CLOSE ESS contactor condition 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
FAIL failure. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
CONTACTOR CLOSE ESS contactor condition 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
TIMEOUT failure. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
AUX POWER LOW ESS 24V power supply 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
voltage low. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
4-176
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
PWR SPLY VOLT ESS internal power 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
supply. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
UNDEF PDP INT ESS processor. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
HW OVERSPEED ESS flywheel over 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
speed detected. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
MOT CURRENT ESS motor current 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
OFFSET fault. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
4-177
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
SW OV ESS over voltage. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS

RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
CHECKSUM ESS memory failure. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
FCOMPOE TIMEOUT ESS Pulse Width 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
Modulator (PWM) panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3
failed. RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
ROTOR TEMP ESS rotor temperature 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
is greater than 190 °C. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
4-178
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INTER PRCR COMM ESS internal communi- 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
cation error. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
PRECHARGE ESS internal ⁄ external 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
PROTECT voltage difference. panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
PUMP OPEN ⁄ SHORT ESS coolant pump. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
FAN1 OPEN ⁄ SHORT ESS fan. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
4-179
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
INT FAN ESS internal fan. 1. At the SDCA front a. Replace faulty ESS
OPEN ⁄ SHORT panel, momentarily set IAW Paragraph 5.8.4.3.
RESET ⁄ AUD
CANCEL (Figure 4-1,
2. Check ESS CPD
wise, proceed to
Remedy a.
No Display Faulty ESS CPD. 1. Proceed to Remedy a. a. Replace faulty ESS
CPD IAW Paragraph
b. Replace faulty ESS
4-180
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
SARC Control Panel Indicators
1 POWER Green LED Indicates power available and SARC POWER ON

switch is set to ON.
2 B-PLUG SYSTEM ONLINE Green LED Intermittent indicates site activation switch is
turned ON. Steady indicates ESS is at 25% state of
charge or greater.
3 B-PLUG SYSTEM NO-GO Red LED Indicates a NO-GO condition has been sensed.
Figure 4-6. SARC Control Box Switches and Indicators (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-181
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
SARC Control Panel Indicators - Continued
4 SECURITY PIN TIMER Yellow LED Indicates 64- or 10-minute timer(s) is active. An
audible alarm will sound when 10-minute timer is
active and if combination lock(s) are not manually
unlocked and secondary door security pin and lock
bolts are not retracted within the 10-minute timer
window, the 64-minute timer must be reinitiated
and expire before site penetration can be reiniti-
ated.
5 SECURITY PIN RETRACTED Yellow LED Indicates security pin has been retracted.
6 LOCK BOLTS RETRACTED Yellow LED Indicates lock bolts have been retracted.
7 MOTION Yellow LED Indicates secondary door is moving.
8 LOCK BOLTS SECURE Green LED Indicates secondary door is full up and lock bolts
have been extended.
9 MAINTENANCE MODE Red LED Indicates control system is in MAINTENANCE
MODE. SARC command functions are locked out.
10 REMOTE RAISE Yellow LED Not Used.
11 REMOTE LOW BAT Yellow LED Not Used.
12 REMOTE II Yellow LED Not Used.
13 REMOTE I Yellow LED Not Used.
14 Audible Alarm Speaker Piezoelectric alarm sounds for secondary access
system MODE change, NO-GO ⁄ FAULT condi-
tions, and switch tests. Alarm may be silenced
using the AUD CANCEL switch.
15 POWER ON ⁄ OFF ON ⁄ OFF ON when 12-Vdc power is available to SARC and
switch switch is set to ON.
16 ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE Momentary Applies or removes power to the processing
switch circuits (208-Vac enable relay).
17 SECURITY PIN ENGAGE Momentary Starts the 64-minute timer that will eventually
switch retract security pin. Topside site penetration is
locked out until expiration of 64-minute timer.
18 LOCK BOLTS RETRACT Momentary Sends command to retract lock bolts. A LOCK
switch BOLTS RETRACT command is performed in
10-minute timer window following expiration of
64-minute timer and the manual unlocking of
secondary door combination lock(s). Senses retrac-
tion of security pin prior to commanding lock bolt
retraction.
Figure 4-6. SARC Control Box Switches and Indicators (Sheet 2)
4-182
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Item
No.
SARC Control Panel Indicators - Continued
19 SECONDARY DOOR OFF ⁄ LOWER Momentary In LOWER position sends a LOWER command to
switch lower secondary door, or in OFF position sends a
STOP command to stop secondary door downward
movement. Topside LOWER command is locked
out until lock bolts have been retracted or
following any RAISE command.
20 SECONDARY DOOR RAISE Momentary In OPERATION mode sends a RAISE command to
switch secondary door. SARC cannot stop secondary door
following any RAISE command. During site
penetration, initiation of any RAISE command
resets the 64- and 10-minute timers.
21 LAMP TEST Momentary This switch tests all indicators on SARC control
switch panel. Movement of switch to UP position tests
upper SARC indicators. Movement of switch to
DOWN position tests lower SARC indicators.
22 RESET ⁄ AUD CANCEL Momentary Sends a RESET command to SDCA, MDC, and
switch ESS to reset secondary access system
NO-GO/FAULT conditions. AUD CANCEL termi-
nates piezoelectric alarms on SARC and SDCA
when an alarm has sounded. Does not silence LER
wall alarm.
23 SECURITY PIT Connector Connector Connects SARC to SARC J-box in security pit to
J1 provide command and control of secondary door
control set.
24 AUX. 12V Connector Connector Provides an auxiliary 12-Vdc input to the
J2 secondary door control set when commercial power
is unavailable.
25 Fuse F1 Fuse holder Provides circuit protection for SARC control box.
Protects SARC from SDCA 12 Vdc.
26 Fuse F2 Fuse holder Provides circuit protection for SARC control box.
Protects SARC from external 12 Vdc power
source.
27 Spare Fuse holder Contains a spare replacement fuse for SARC F1
and F2 fuse holders.
28 SARC Mounting Lugs (2 places) N⁄A SARC mounting lug, locknuts, and washers (two
places) are used to secure SARC control box on
two tethers in SARC flex case.
Figure 4-6. SARC Control Box Switches and Indicators (Sheet 3)
4-183/(4-184 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 5
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
5.1 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT.

5.1.1 Secondary Access System Shutdown. Secondary access system shutdown shall be performed in accordance with
Table 5-1 when directed by procedure or whenever performing maintenance on secondary access system electrical
components.
5.1.2 Secondary Access System Startup. Secondary access system startup shall be performed in accordance with Table
5-2 when directed by procedure or whenever secondary access system shutdown was performed to facilitate other
maintenance.
5.1.3 Power Isolation of the Electromechanical Actuator. Power isolation of the EMA shall be accomplished when
secondary access system repair or replacement is to be performed on the EMA brake, EMA motor, or when EMA motor J-box
is opened. Power isolation of the EMA is accomplished IAW Table 5-3.
5.1.4 Electromechanical Actuator Power Restoration. EMA power restoration is performed following completion of
EMA maintenance and repair and is accomplished IAW Table 5-4.
5.1.5 Maintenance on Personnel Access Shaft Lights. Maintenance shall be performed on Personnel Access Shaft
(PAS) lights with power removed at [1][3][5] the LDB panel [T9] Switchboard SWBD-3<. For power isolation and restoration
for maintenance on PAS lights, proceed as follows:
a. [1][3][5] At LDB, set CB9 to OFF.
a1. [T9] At switchboard SWBD-3, set CB12 to OFF.<
NOTE
Setting [1][3][5] LDB CB9 [T9] SWBD-3 CB12< to OFF generates a FAULT036 SDCA
24VDC INT FLT indicating that the 24 VDC INTERNAL reading is outside of the allowable
limit.
b. On Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) front panel, FAULT (Figure 4-1, 5) indicator will illuminate and
audible alarm will sound.
c. If not previously accomplished, loosen nine captive fasteners (27) securing SDCA front panel assembly and open
panel to gain access to swing-out panel switches and indicators.
d. On SDCA swing-out panel, verify that 120 VAC (Figure 4-2, 4) and 24 VDC INTERNAL (6) indicators are
extinguished.
NOTE
With [1][3][5] LDB CB9 [T9] SWBD-3 CB12< set to OFF, SDCA swing-out panel PAH
LIGHTS ON/OFF indicator may be illuminated reflecting status of K1 relay. If PAH
LIGHTS ON ⁄ OFF indicator is illuminated, this does not indicate that voltage is present on
PAH lights circuit.
e. On SDCA swing-out panel, PAH LIGHTS ON ⁄ OFF (10) indicator may be illuminated.
f. Using multimeter, verify power has been removed from circuit being repaired.
g. Perform PAS light maintenance, as required.
h. [1][3][5] At LDB panel, set CB9 to ON.
h1. [T9] At switchboard SWBD-3, set CB12 to ON.<
i. On SDCA swing-out panel, verify that 120 VAC (4) and 24 VDC INTERNAL indicators are illuminated.
j. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set RESET/AUD CANCEL (Figure 4-1, 17) switch to RESET. If no other
secondary access system faults are present, FAULT (5) indicator is extinguished.
k. On SDCA swing-out panel, cycle PAH LIGHTS (Figure 4-2, 11) switch to verify PAH lights operation.
Change 3 5-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Omit steps l and m if access to SDCA swing-out panel is required for further maintenance.
l. **HCP** If SDCA front panel is to be closed, inspect SDCA RFI gasket IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
m. Close SDCA front panel assembly and secure with nine captive fasteners (Figure 4-1, 27).
5.1.6 Minor Repair Procedures. The following paragraphs contain repair procedures for the PAS. In most cases this will
be removal and replacement actions. Minor repairs not covered by specific paragraphs are also authorized and include the
following:
a. Tightening loose nuts, screws, and replacing defective attaching hardware.
b. Repairing electrical wiring, cabling, and retractile cables, and tightening loose hardware connections.
c. Using abrasive paper (Table 2-2), clean and repair electrical contacts.
• Silicone rubber adhesive ⁄ sealant (RTV-3145) is flammable and hazardous. Do not use
near ignition sources. Wear approved eye and hand protection and use in a well--
ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
• Sealing compound (MIL-S-8784B, Class B-1 ⁄ 2) is flammable and hazardous. Do not use
near ignition sources. Wear approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated
area. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
d. Performing necessary tasks to reinstall loose sealing gaskets and seals installed at security pit and/or primary door
using adhesive (Table 2-2).
5-2 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-1. Secondary Access System Shutdown
Hazardous secondary door movement could occur. If secondary door has been positioned to facilitate main-
tenance, ensure Electromechanical Actuator (EMA) gearbox safety pin is engaged to prevent secondary door
free-fall. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
Ensure secondary door is positioned to facilitate maintenance, if required, prior to power removal; other-
wise, proceed to step 2.
1. Verify secondary door is posi- Using jog switch, position secondary

tioned for maintenance. door, as required, for task being
performed.
2. Engage EMA gearbox safety pin
IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-
10-( ).
3. On Site Activation Remote Disconnect cable(s) between auxiliary
Controller (SARC), verify AUX. 12-Vdc power source and AUX. 12V
12V connector (Figure 4-6, 24) jack J2 on SARC.
(J2) input is disconnected.
Electrical hazard is present. Motor disconnect switch (DISC1) shall be locked out and tagged prior to
performing any maintenance in the vicinity of the EMA motor or gears. Failure to comply could result in
4. On Motor Drive Cabinet (MDC),

set motor disconnect switch
(DISC1) (Figure 5-25, 8) to OFF.
Secondary Door Control Assembly
(SDCA) front panel assembly and
open panel to gain access to
swing-out panel switches and indi-
cators.
5-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-1. Secondary Access System Shutdown - Continued
6. On Secondary Door Control On SDCA front panel: a. On SDCA swing-out panel,

Assembly (SDCA) swing-out monitor ESS OFF (Figure 4-2,
panel, press ESS OFF (Figure 4-2, POWER (Figure 4-1, 1) 59) indicator while repeating
21) switch. indicator remains step 6. If indicator illuminates,
illuminated. proceed to Corrective Action 1.
If indicator fails to illuminate,
proceed to Corrective Action 2.
(ESS) display, verify ESS begins to (1) On ESS Control Panel
spin down: Display (CPD) (Figure
4-5), press function key
RPM: indication decreases. (12) F2 and check
RPM: indication on ESS
CPD. If RPM:
decreases, using sche-
matic diagrams, perform
trouble analysis on
Secondary Access
System (SAS) wiring
between the SDCA and
ESS; otherwise, replace
ESS IAW Paragraph
5.8.4.3.
(2) Replace SDCA 24V
driver CCA A2A2 IAW
next step.
(3) Replace SDCA primary
NOTE
• Ensure ESS State of Charge (SOC:) indicates zero in step 6. prior to continuing procedure.
• At approximately 62.5% SOC, a NO-GO will occur with an audible alarm from the SDCA. Resetting the
NO-GO will cancel ESS shutdown and ESS will resume charge. To terminate the audible alarm, momen-
tarily set SDCA front panel RESET/AUD CANCEL switch to AUD CANCEL.
• ESS spin down requires approximately 30 minutes.
7. On ESS CPD, (Figure 4-5), ensure On ESS CPD, verify the following:
ESS has spun down to less than
200 Revolutions Per Minute SHUTDOWN RPM: indi-
(RPM) and STATE OF CHARGE cates < 200 SOC: indicates
indicates 0±. < 0.00%
5-4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
8. On SDCA front panel, set On SDCA front panel, verify: a. Repeat step 8. If fault recurs,
ACTIVATE ⁄ DEACTIVATE proceed to Corrective Action b.
(Figure 4-1, 3) switch to ACTIVATED (2) indicator is
DEACTIVATE. extinguished.
On ESS CPD, verify 640 Vdc BUS b. Perform trouble analysis as

voltage (Figure 4-5) continues to follows:
decrease:
BUS: voltage indication (1) Perform step 10 through
decreases. step 12, then return to
Corrective Action b(2).
Electrical hazard is present. Delay a minimum of 10 minutes before proceeding with trouble analysis to
ensure SAS is sufficiently deenergized. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
(2) Delay a minimum of 10

minutes following
completion of Correc-
tive Action b(1).
(3) Replace faulty SDCA
front panel ACTIVATE/
DEACTIVATE (Figure
4-1, 3) switch IAW
Corrective Action b(4).
primary control CCA
A2A1 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.1.
Hazardous current could be present. Prior to continuing procedure, 640 Vdc BUS voltage (BUS:) shall be
less than 20 Vdc. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
9. On ESS CPD, observe ESS 640 BUS: < 20V

Vdc BUS indication.
5-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
10. Set [1][3][5] CB9 on Launcher ESS display (Figure 4-5) is OFF.
Distribution B (LDB) panel [T9]
CB12 on switchboard SWBD-3< On SDCA front panel, POWER
to OFF. (Figure 4-1, 1) indicator is extin-
guished.
On SDCA swing-out panel, 120
VAC (Figure 4-2, 4) indicator is
extinguished.
11. Set [1] CB26, 28, 30 [3] CB30,
32, 34 [5] CB8, 10, 12 [T9] CB2<
on [1][3][5] LDB panel [T9]
switchboard SWBD-3 < to OFF.
Hazardous voltage could be present. If 208-Vac backup generator is connected and operating, hazardous
voltage is still present on SDCA and MDC. Ensure backup generator is shut down and disconnected from
topside auxiliary J-box. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
12. Verify 208-Vac backup generator Shut down and disconnect 208-Vac
is not operating or connected to backup generator IAW T.O.
auxiliary J-box (URD 11400) in 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
Personnel Access Shaft (PAS).
5-6 Change 3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-2. Secondary Access System Startup
Rapid movement of secondary door and telescoping ladder is extremely hazardous. Notify all onsite
personnel that secondary access system power shall be restored. Whenever any audible alarm is heard,
personnel shall immediately stand clear of secondary door, telescoping ladder, and bottom of the secondary
door. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
1. Ensure all onsite personnel are

briefed on secondary door power
restoration.
2. Visually inspect secondary access
system and verify the following:
a. SARC is installed IAW
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-
10-( ).
b. On SARC, set POWER Install SARC IAW T.O.
ON/OFF (Figure 4-6, 15) 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
switch to ON.
c. In PAS, ensure secondary Reinstall secondary door IAW
door and telescoping ladder Paragraph 5.7.1.2.
are installed and access
shaft is clear of all
personnel, tools, and equip-
ment.
Reinstall telescoping ladder IAW
Paragraph 5.6.3.1.
d. Ensure secondary door Unlock secondary door combination
combination locks are lock(s) IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-
unlocked, top and bottom 10-( ).
cover plates are installed,
and secondary door cable Reinstall secondary door cover
track and secondary door plates.
cables are connected.
Reinstall secondary door cable
track.
Reinstall secondary door cables.

e. Ensure all secondary access Reinstall, as required.
system cables and conduits
are installed.
Change 4 5-7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-2. Secondary Access System Startup - Continued
2. -
Cont
Hazardous secondary door movement could occur. If secondary door has been positioned to facilitate main-
tenance, ensure EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged to prevent secondary door free-fall. Failure to comply
could result in personnel injury or death.
f. If not previously accom-

plished, engage EMA
gearbox safety pin IAW
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-
10-( ).
NOTE
ESS dc circuit breaker is located within ESS cabinet and under normal operating conditions is set to the
ON position. Unless ESS has been replaced or maintenance has been performed within ESS cabinet,
proceed to step 4.
3. If required, verify that ESS dc main

bus circuit breaker (Figure 5-35, 11)
is set to ON.
**HCP** Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is present when ESS or MDC EMI shielding is compro-
mised. Ensure ESS and MDC are closed with all EMI ⁄ Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) gaskets,
covers, and cable penetrations properly installed prior to performing secondary access system startup.
Failure to comply could result in personnel injury, death, or equipment damage.
4. **HCP** Verify ESS cabinet **HCP** Inspect ESS and ⁄ or

(Figure 5-35) and MDC (Figure MDC EMI ⁄ RFI gasket(s) IAW
5-25) are closed with EMI/RFI T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112, and rein-
gaskets, access covers, and cable stall cabinet cover(s) and ⁄ or
penetrations installed. conduits as required.
5. On MDC, ensure motor disconnect
switch (DISC1) (Figure 5-25, 8) is
set to OFF.
open panel to gain access to
swing-out panel switches and indi-
cators (Figure 4-2).
5-8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
7. On SDCA swing-out panel, ensure

POWER 120 VAC (5) switch is set
to OFF (down).
8. Verify SDCA swing-out panel
switches are set as follows:
a. POWER 24 VDC
INTERNAL (Figure 4-2, 7)
and POWER 24 VDC
EXTERNAL (9) switches
are set to OFF.
9. Set [1][3][5] CB9 on Launcher
Distribution B (LDB) panel [T9]
CB12 on switchboard SWBD-3< to
ON.
10. On SDCA swing-out panel, set On SDCA swing-out panel, 120 a. On SDCA swing-out panel,
POWER 120 VAC (Figure 4-2, 5) VAC (4) indicator is illuminated. press CB-1 (Figure 4-2, 1).
switch to ON. If 120 VAC (4) indicator
illuminates, no further
maintenance is required;
Corrective Action b.
b. Replace faulty SDCA
power command CCA
A2A3 IAW Paragraph
5.9.1.4.3.
11. On SDCA swing-out panel, set 24 VDC INTERNAL (6) indicator Perform trouble analysis IAW Table
POWER 24 VDC INTERNAL (7) is illuminated. 4-16, Fault 036.
switch to ON.
On SDCA front panel, POWER
(Figure 4-1, 1) indicator is illumi-
nated.
On SARC, POWER (Figure 4-6, 1)
12. On SDCA swing-out panel, set
POWER 24 VDC EXTERNAL
(Figure 4-2, 9) switch to ON.
13. Set [1] CB26, 28, 30 [3] CB30, 32,
34 [5] CB8, 10, 12 [T9] CB2< on
[1][3][5] LDB panel [T9] switch-
board SWBD-3< to ON.
14. On MDC, set motor disconnect
switch (DISC1) (Figure 5-25, 8) to
ON.
Change 3 5-9
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
15. On SDCA front panel, set On SDCA front panel:

ACTIVATE ⁄ DEACTIVATE (Figure
4-1, 3) switch to ACTIVATE.
SDCA ACTIVATED (2) a. Replace faulty SDCA front
indicator is illuminated. panel ACTIVATE ⁄
DEACTIVATE switch IAW
Paragraph 5.9.1.3.6. If fault
recurs, proceed to Correc-
tive Action b.
primary control CCA A2A1
MAINTENANCE (9) indi- a. Clean EMA gearbox safety
cator is illuminated, after a pin fiber optic
minimum of 2 seconds. cables/sensors IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ). If
b. Replace EMA gearbox
safety pin photoelectric
sensor IAW Paragraph
5.8.1.3.
NOTE
If ONLINE indicator flashes or comes on steady, continue procedure.
ONLINE (4) indicator a. On SDCA front panel,

flashes while ESS SOC: momentarily set LAMP
indicator (Figure 4-5, 8) is TEST (Figure 4-1, 19)
≤ 25 percent, then illumi- switch to the up position. If
nates steady. ONLINE indicator failed to
illuminate, replace bulb
(Table 2-2); otherwise,
proceed to Corrective
Action b.
5-10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
15. - FAULT (Figure 4-1, 5) and a. If FAULT and/or NO-GO

Cont NO-GO (6) indicators are lamp indicators are illumi-
extinguished. nated, momentarily set
(17) switch to RESET. If
b. If FAULT and/or NO-GO
lamp indicators remain illu-
minated, troubleshoot IAW
Table 4-16 or Table 4-17,
as required.
NOTE
SARC B-PLUG SYSTEM ONLINE indicator (Figure 4-6, 2) should mirror the ONLINE indicator
(Figure 4-1, 4) and could be flashing or steady. If indicator flashes or comes on steady, continue
procedure.
On SARC:
B-PLUG SYSTEM a. On SARC, momentarily set
ONLINE (Figure 4-6, 2) LAMP TEST (Figure 4-6,
indicator flashes until ESS 21) switch to the up posi-
SOC: indicator (Figure 4-5, tion. If B-PLUG SYSTEM
8) is ≤ 25%, then illumi- ONLINE indicator failed to
nates steady. illuminate, replace bulb
(Table 2-2); otherwise,
Audible alarm proceed to Corrective
(Figure 4-6, 14) could Action b.
chirp.
NOTE
Normal indication for step 16 could take up to 45 seconds to update.
16. Observe ESS control panel On ESS, display (Figure 4-5) Troubleshoot ESS IAW Table 4-20.
(Figure 4-5) display RPM: status illuminates.
RPM: is increasing Perform trouble analysis IAW Table
4-16, Fault 010 fault flow.
Change 4 5-11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
17. On SDCA swing-out panel, observe 24 VDC EXTERNAL indicator is Perform trouble analysis IAW Table
24 VDC EXTERNAL illuminated. 4-16, Fault 035 fault flow.
18. If required, perform secondary
access system functional checkout
IAW Table 4-1.
NOTE
If no further maintenance is required, perform steps 19 through 21.
19. Disengage EMA gearbox safety pin

IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
20. **HCP** Inspect SDCA
RFI gasket IAW
T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
21. Close SDCA front panel assembly
and secure with nine captive
fasteners (27).
5-12
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-3. Power Isolation of Electromechanical Actuator
NOTE
If secondary access system is in OPERATION mode perform step 1; otherwise proceed to step 2.
1. If not previously accom- On SDCA front panel:

plished, on SDCA front panel,
momentarily set MODE OPERATION (11) indicator is extin- Perform trouble analysis IAW
(Figure 4-1, 10) switch to guished. Table 4-16, Fault 021 fault
MAINTENANCE. flow.
MAINTENANCE (9) indicator is illumi-
nated.
Audible alarm signals change of mode.
Hazardous secondary door movement could occur. If secondary door has been positioned to facilitate
maintenance, ensure EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged to prevent secondary door free-fall. Failure to
NOTE
Ensure secondary door is positioned to facilitate maintenance, if required, prior to power removal,
otherwise; proceed to step 3.
2. If required, using EMA jog

switch, position secondary
door, as required to facilitate
maintenance.
3. If not previously accom-
plished, engage EMA gearbox
safety pin IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
5-13
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-3. Power Isolation of Electromechanical Actuator - Continued
Electrical hazard is present. Motor disconnect switch (DISC1) shall be locked out and tagged prior to
performing any maintenance in the vicinity of the EMA motor or gears. Failure to comply could result
in personnel injury or death.

switch (DISC1) (Figure 5-25,
8) to OFF.
5. On EMA motor J-box loosen
six cover screws (Figure 5-22,
9) and open J-box cover plate.
6. In EMA motor J-box, using 0 Vac If voltage is present, replace
multimeter set for a minimum faulty MDC motor disconnect
of +460 Vac, verify that no switch (DISC1) IAW
voltage is present between L1, Paragraph 5.8.3.3.
L2, and L3 terminals.
7. In EMA motor J-box, using 0 Vdc If voltage is present, replace
multimeter set for a minimum faulty MDC motor disconnect
of +24 Vdc, verify that no switch (DISC1) IAW
voltage is present between Paragraph 5.8.3.3.
BRK1, BRK2, and ground.
NOTE
If no further maintenance is required with EMA J-box cover removed, perform steps 8 and 9; other-
wise, proceed to step 10.
8. **HCP** On EMA motor If required, repair or replace

J-box inspect J-box RFI gasket EMA motor J-box RFI gasket
IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112. IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
9. **HCP** Using six cover
screws reinstall EMA motor
J-box cover.
10. Proceed to maintenance being
accomplished.
5-14
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-4. Electromechanical Actuator Power Restoration
1. **HCP** If not previously If required, repair or replace EMA

accomplished, on EMA motor motor J-box RFI gasket IAW T.O.
J-box inspect J-box RFI gasket 21M-LGM30F-112.
IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
2. **HCP** If not previously
accomplished, using six cover
screws reinstall EMA motor J-box
(Figure 5-22, 9) cover.
switch (DISC1) (Figure 5-25, 8)
to ON.
NOTE
If no further maintenance is required, perform steps 4 and 5; otherwise, proceed to next maintenance
task, as required.
4. If required, disengage EMA

gearbox safety pin IAW T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
5. If secondary door was positioned
for maintenance, using jog switch,
lower secondary door into down
position.
5-15
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.2 SECURITY PIT.

5.2.1 Lock bolt, Threaded Shaft, and Thrust Nut.
a. Open primary door per applicable technical order.
NOTE
• Removal of the lock bolt and threaded shaft may be completed with the secondary door
in the raised or lowered position.
• If thrust nut (Figure 5-1, 6) is jammed on threaded shaft (7), preventing removal of lock
bolt (1) and threaded shaft, it will be necessary to first remove retainer (3) per step e and
pull threaded shaft and thrust nut into pit so threaded shaft can be cut off ahead of thrust
nut or thrust nut can be split off shaft with a chisel.
b. Using wrench (5), extend lock bolt (1) into access shaft until threaded shaft is free of thrust nut.
NOTE
Lock bolt weighs 70 pounds. Personnel shall use care while removing lock bolt.
c. Remove lock bolt and threaded shaft by way of access shaft. If lock bolt sling (Figure 2-3) is available, sling may
be used to remove lock bolt per steps (1) through (5).
(1) Position hoist hook approximately 1 foot above primary door lock bolt.
(2) Extend lock bolt to fully extended position.
(3) Form slip loops on both legs of lock bolt sling, as shown in Figure 2-3, and place both slip loops around lock bolt.
Attach upper end of sling to hoist.
(4) With one leg of sling remaining wrapped around outboard end of lock bolt, slide other leg of sling toward rear of
lock bolt while carefully pulling lock bolt outward.
(5) When lock bolt is clear of bushing, take up slack in hoist and remove lock bolt and threaded shaft assembly from
access shaft.
NOTE
Overall length of lock bolt and threaded shaft assembly is matched to the facility to prevent
vault door from seating in security pit if lock bolt does not sufficiently engage door latch. If
it is necessary to separate threaded shaft from lock bolt, first measure and record overall
length to facilitate reinstallation.
d. If required, remove setscrew (Figure 5-1, 8) and unscrew threaded shaft (7) from lock bolt (1).
e. If thrust nut (6) is defective, remove retainer (3) and thrust nut as follows:
NOTE
In the following step, use of a grinder and/or file is preferred. Flame cutting may be used only
if adequate shielding is provided to protect thrust nut and retainer from cutting flame and
spatter.
(1) [3][5] If required, using grinder, rotary file, or cutting torch, cut notch in skirt of vault door frame (4) as required
to permit removal of top retainer screw.<
(2) Remove six retainer screws, noting their respective locations, and remove retainer and thrust nut. Grind or file vault
door frame as required to permit removal of retainer.
(3) After removal of thrust nut, and if not previously accomplished, smooth up notch in vault door frame using grinder.
Prime and paint steel metal per T.O. 21M-LGM30F-101 ensuring no paint gets on surfaces contacting thrust nut.
5-16 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
MIL-PRF-680, Type III, is combustible and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources.
Wear appproved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply
could result in personnel injury.
(4) Prior to installation, using cloth (Table 2-2) and MIL-PRF-680, Type III, thoroughly clean all debris from lock bolt
bore, thrust nut area, and security pit.
f. If new lock bolt and/or new threaded shaft is being installed, adjust length of assembly as follows:
(1) Rotate threaded shaft (Figure 5-1, 7) into lock bolt (1) to obtain the same overall length as the removed assembly,
so flat surface on threaded shaft is parallel with flat surface on top of lock bolt.
(2) Install setscrew (8) and only tighten enough to prevent shaft rotation. Ensure head of setscrew does not protrude
from lock bolt causing scoring of lock bolt bushing.
(3) Install lock bolt and threaded shaft assembly by way of access shaft and fully retract lock bolt by rotating thrust
nut (6).
(4) Attach modeling clay wrapped in plastic to lip of door latch and close primary door.
(5) Using wrench (5), extend lock bolt (1) until end of threaded shaft is 2-1 ⁄ 4 inches from center line of security pit
as shown in Figure 5-1. If lock bolt stops before 2-1 ⁄ 4-inch dimension is attained, determine cause. If thread is
damaged causing nut to bind, clean thread with file or replace threaded shaft (7) and/or nut as required. If lock bolt
and threaded shaft assembly is too long, shorten assembly.
(6) Retract lock bolt and open primary door.
(7) Measure amount of lock bolt engagement on door latch as indicated by putty impression. With end of threaded shaft
2-1 ⁄ 4 inches from pit centerline, lock bolt must overlap door latch by 7 ⁄ 8 to 1-1 ⁄ 8 inch as shown in Figure 5-1.
If overlap is not within tolerance, note amount and direction of error.
(8) Remove lock bolt and threaded shaft. Adjust length, as required, to satisfy requirements of step (7). One shaft
rotation changes overall length by 1 ⁄ 4 inch.
(9) When final length is attained, remove setscrew and mark setscrew center on threaded shaft. Remove threaded shaft
and drill a 23 ⁄ 64-inch diameter by 1 ⁄ 8-inch minimum full depth hole in threaded shaft. Reassemble threaded shaft
in lock bolt. Install and tighten setscrew.
g. Prior to reassembly and installation, inspect and lubricate lock bolt and threaded shaft per Paragraph 5.2.1.
h. Installation is the reverse of removal. If reinstalling original lock bolt and threaded shaft, ensure threaded shaft is
threaded into lock bolt to original depth and setscrew seats at same spot on shaft.
i. After installation, extend and retract lock bolt and verify wrench turns smoothly. At no time should other than
hand operation be required.
5.2.2 Security Pit Vault Door.
5.2.2.1 Security Pit Vault Door Replacement.
Damage to vault door electrical cable could occur. Vault door electrical cable shall not be
stretched any more than necessary when moving vault door. Vault door shall not be set down
on cable or cable connector. Security pit weather-protective cover shall not close on cable.
Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
If vault door cannot be unlocked, refer to chapter 10 for removal.
a. Unlock and remove vault door (Figure 5-2, 2) per applicable technical order.
5-17
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Electrical power does not need to be removed from circuit prior to disconnecting or
connecting vault door cable. Dust caps shall be installed on demated connectors.
b. Disconnect electrical cable (Figure 5-2, 3) from vault door and tag defective door with combination, if known.
c. Insert new combination in replacement vault door per Paragraph 8.1.1.
d. Connect electrical cable to vault door and install in pit IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
5.2.2.2 Security Pit Vault Door Combination Lock Assembly. The following procedure is for removal and installation
of the combination lock assembly, lock stand, spindle, or sensitive switch.
5.2.2.3 Lock Assembly Removal.
a. Remove bottom cover (Figure 5-3, 23) by unscrewing four captive bolts (24).
b. Inspect gaskets (25, 26) for serviceability. If damaged, document for replacement.
c. Remove two screws (Figure 5-4, 31) and cover (30) from wheel case (13).
d. Rotate drop release plate (34) counterclockwise to gain access to lifter plate (28) and drive cam (26).
e. Remove lifter plate screw (29) and lifter plate.
f. Remove two keys (27) from drive cam and remove drive cam by holding it and rotating dial (Figure 5-3, 1)
counterclockwise.
g. Remove four mounting screws (Figure 5-4, 15).
5.2.2.4 Lock Assembly Installation.
a. Remove two screws (Figure 5-4, 31) and cover (30) from wheel case (13).
b. Rotate drop release plate (34) counterclockwise to gain access to lifter plate (28) and drive cam (26).
c. Remove lifter plate screw (29) and lifter plate.
d. Remove drive cam (26).
e. Turn bolt operating handle (Figure 5-3, 36) clockwise to extend lock bolt (9).
f. Apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to threads on mounting screws (Figure 5-4, 15); secure wheel case with four
mounting screws and firmly tighten.
g. Align wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (20, 23) and engage drop lever (35).
Lockout could occur. Lock drive cam shall be correctly indexed on spindle. Failure to
comply could result in equipment damage.
h. Align drive cam with drop lever and while holding drive cam in place, turn dial (Figure 5-3, 1) clockwise until
drive cam (Figure 5-4, 26) is threaded on spindle shaft and drawn down towards the wheel pack assemblies
(tumblers) (20, 23).
NOTE
With drop lever (Figure 5-3, 40) engaged with drive cam (39), the dial must indicate in the
vicinity of zero. If correct indexing cannot be obtained, repeat step. If correct indexing still
cannot be obtained, replace spindle (2) or lock assembly (17) as necessary.
i. While keeping the drop lever aligned with the drive cam, turn dial clockwise until snug. Back off dial a minimum
of one-half turn to a maximum of one and one-half turns until keyways of the spindle (2) are aligned to the LH
and RH index marks on the drive cam. Dial should indicate between 90 and 10.
5-18
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
In order to retain grip integrity, lock manufacturer recommends that when removing or
replacing lock assembly or spindle, all removed keys should be replaced if replacements are
available. Keys are provided with each new lock or spindle.
j. Insert two keys (Figure 5-4, 27) into keyways on spindle (1) and drive cam (26) with short leg pointing away
from the center of spindle. Install keys snugly using a punch to seat them.
k. Disengage drop lever (35) from drive cam. Line up change keyholes of wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (20, 23)
with change keyhole on bottom of wheel case (13). Turn dial one-quarter turn clockwise to disengage roller from
lifter plate (28).
l. Install lifter plate and lifter plate screw (29).
m. Rotate drop release plate (34) clockwise and ensure it does not interfere with wheel case cover (30).
n. Ensure drop lever screw (33) is tight.
o. Install lock cover with two screws (31).
p. Set up lock combination per Paragraph 8.1.1.
q. Position gaskets (Figure 5-3, 25, 26) on bottom cover (23).
r. Install four captive bolts (24), securely fastening bottom cover to vault door (7).
5.2.2.5 Lock Stand/Sensitive Switch Replacement.
a. Remove combination lock assembly per Paragraph 5.2.2.3.
b. If necessary, remove wire clamp nearest sensitive switch (Figure 5-3, 12) to gain slack in wires.
Wire breakage could occur. Care shall be used to avoid breaking wires connected to sensitive
switch when pulling lock stand away from vault door. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
c. Remove four mounting bolts (22) and pull lock stand (16) away from vault door (7).
d. Remove sensitive switch (12) by removing two screws (10), washers (18), and nuts (19).
e. Disconnect wires from sensitive switch.
f. If required, remove and inspect the scrambler tumblers (15) as follows:
(1) Remove retaining ring (Figure 5-4, 4) from scrambler tumbler post and lift off scrambler tumblers (5, 7, 8),
scrambler tumbler spacers (6), and spacer washers (9).
MIL-PRF-680, Type III is combustible and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources.
Wear approved eye and hand protection, and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply
(2) Clean scrambler tumblers, as required, using lint-free wiping materials and MIL-PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2), if
necessary. Ensure all foreign matter is removed.
Silicone spray lubricant (VV-D-1078) is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition
sources. Wear approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to
comply could result in personnel injury.
(3) Lubricate scrambler stack with silicone spray lubricant (Table 2-2) prior to assembly.
5-19
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
• Tumblers in scrambler stack numbered 1, 2, and 3 are to be installed in that sequence. The
number is stamped in the groove in the inside disk. If inside disk should become detached
from outside ring, the sequence of stacking can be determined by checking the location
of semicircular notch on circumference of outer ring. The notch is between 0 and 90 on
the No. 1 and No. 3 tumblers and between 40 and 50 on the No. 2 tumbler. The index
mark on inside disk shall be aligned with 40 on outer ring. Locks with chrome inside disk
will have index mark placed at 45.
• Bent spacer washer (Figure 5-4, 9) is made locally by placing a flat A-510026 spacer
washer on a flat surface, holding the washer down across its largest diameter with a steel
rule laid flat, and lifting the exposed half of washer so it will stay 1/8 inch above flat
surface.
(4) Install scrambler stack by placing a minimum of three flat and one bent spacer washers (9), scrambler tumbler
spacers (6), scrambler tumblers (5, 7, 8), and retaining ring (4) on scrambler post in order shown in Figure 5-4.
Spacer washers on scrambler stack may be added or removed to attain smooth operation, leaving no less than three
flat and one bent spacer washers on the stack.
g. Connect wires to sensitive switch (Figure 5-3, 12) common and normally closed terminals.
NOTE
• Only new sensitive switches equipped with an adjustable lever arm and adjusting
setscrew shall be installed. Nonadjustable sensitive switches shall be removed and
discarded.
• If adjustable sensitive switches are not available, install nonadjustable sensitive switch
and document serial number of security pit vault door for future sensitive switch
replacement.
• If necessary to install a nonadjustable sensitive switch, adjustment of switch will be
performed by a combination of bending the actuating arm and moving body of the switch
after loosening the attaching screws, to obtain acceptable operation of the switch
• Bending lever arm on adjustable sensitive switch is not a means of adjustment. If an
adjustable sensitive switch is found with a bent lever arm, the switch will be replaced.
h. Install adjustable sensitive switch (12) on lock stand (16) with two screws (10), washers (18), and nuts (19).
Tighten attaching hardware.
• Sensitive switch damage could occur. When adjusting sensitive switch, ensure at least two
full threads of setscrew are always showing. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
• Adjusting setscrew could turn with difficulty. Turning adjusting setscrew too far
(clockwise) into lever arm will put pressure on sensitive switch case and could break the
top of the switch away from switch body. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
i. Perform adjustment of adjustable sensitive switch (12) before installing combination lock assembly (17) as
follows:
(1) Manually turn scrambler tumblers (15) so cam notches on outer edge of each tumbler are aligned with switch
follower (11) on adjustable sensitive switch actuating arm, and switch follower is resting in bottom of cam notch.
(2) Actuate sensitive switch (12) by pressing sensitive switch follower (11) with finger, listening for a click. If a click
is heard, proceed to step (3). If no click is heard, install a 1 ⁄ 16-inch allen wrench into setscrew and backoff
(counterclockwise) until a click is heard.
5-20
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
(3) Install connector-adapter P ⁄ N 25-48703-( ) on vault door receptacle J-5.

(4) Set multimeter to measure resistance.
(5) Connect multimeter leads to connector-adapter, terminals C and D. Meter indicates less than 5 ohms. If greater than
5 ohms, replace sensitive switch.
(6) Rotate all three scrambler tumblers together in either direction to position switch follower approximately half way
out of cam notch. Restraining tumblers in this position, meter indicates greater than 5 ohms. If less than 5 ohms,
turn setscrew counterclockwise until meter indicates greater than 5 ohms.
(7) Rotate all three scrambler tumblers together so switch follower is resting in bottom of cam notch. Meter indicates
less than 5 ohms. If greater than 5 ohms, replace sensitive switch.
(8) If necessary, repeat steps (1) through (7) until sensitive switch is properly adjusted.
j. Apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to threads of mounting bolts (Figure 5-3, 22) and install lock stand on vault door
(7).
k. Install wire clamp, if removed.
l. Install lock assembly on stand per Paragraph 5.2.2.4.
5.2.2.6 Spindle Replacement.
a. Remove lock stand per Paragraph 5.2.2.5.
b. Remove keys (Figure 5-4, 3) from scrambler driver (2).
c. Hold scrambler driver and remove from spindle (1) by turning dial (Figure 5-3, 1) counterclockwise.
d. Remove dial and spindle (2) by pulling straight out of door. Inspect dial and spindle. If spindle is not straight,
dial skirt is loose on knob, or there is any evidence of twisting, reject dial and spindle assembly.
e. Inspect preformed packing (3) for damage and replace, if necessary.
f. If corrosion is suspected between combination dial ring (6) and vault door (7), lift felt washer (4) from combina-
tion dial ring and perform the following:
(1) Scribe vault door next to index mark on combination dial ring to ensure it will be reinstalled in original position.
(2) Remove three retaining screws (5) to remove combination dial ring.
(3) Clean spindle (2), and combination dial ring (6) as required, using lint-free wiping materials and MIL-PRF-680,
Type III (Table 2-2), if necessary. Ensure all foreign matter is removed.
(4) If combination dial ring was removed, loosely attach it to door with three retaining screws. Align index mark on
combination dial ring with scribe mark on vault door.
(5) Temporarily install dial (Figure 5-3, 1) and spindle (2) in door and verify dial does not rub on combination dial ring
(6); then tighten three screws (5).
Silicone grease is toxic and hazardous. Wear approved eye and hand protection. Use in a
well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
g. Apply a liberal coat of silicone grease (Table 2-2) to felt washer (Figure 5-3, 4) and place felt washer on top of
combination dial ring.
5-21
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Silicone spray lubricant (VV-D-1078) is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition
sources. Wear approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to
h. Apply a light coat of silicone spray lubricant (Table 2-2) to unthreaded portion of spindle (Figure 5-3, 2) and to
preformed packing (3).
i. Insert dial and spindle into vault door (7), making certain preformed packing is in groove.
j. Hold scrambler driver (13) with flat side against end of spindle and notch toward center of vault door. Thread
scrambler driver onto spindle by turning dial clockwise until top surface of driver is 1/4 inch from bottom surface
of vault door. Turn dial counterclockwise until dial is between 5 and 15 and spindle keyways are aligned with
scrambler driver keyways. If necessary, repeat step. If correct indexing still cannot be obtained, replace dial or
scrambler driver, as necessary.
Scrambler driver keys shall fit snug in keyways. In order to retain their grip integrity, lock
manufacturer recommends that when removing or replacing lock assembly or spindle, keys
should be replaced if replacements are available. Lock and scrambler keys are provided with
each new lock or spindle. Failure to comply could result in lockout and equipment damage.
k. Insert two keys (Figure 5-4, 3) into keyways of scrambler driver (2). Keys shall fit snugly in spindle (1) keyways
and shall be installed and seated with a punch.
l. Install lock stand (10) per Paragraph 5.2.2.5.
m. Checkout sensitive switch as follows:
Security switch could fail to reset. During checkout of sensitive switch, a potential condition
exists where the fly on scrambler tumbler number 3 could slip into machined cavity located
opposite drive pin on scrambler driver. This could occur if dimensional spacing between
driver and tumbler are too close. Failure to maintain an adequate spacing between these two
parts could cause the driver to engage tumbler number 3 at the wrong location. This would
prevent security switch from clicking, and would result in failure of security switch to reset.
NOTE
While performing steps (1) and (2), maintain an inward hand pressure on the dial at all times.
(1) Turn dial at least one full turn clockwise and four full turns counterclockwise stopping at 40. Slowly turn dial at
least one full turn clockwise and note dial position when sensitive switch clicks.
(2) Turn dial counterclockwise one turn and continue counterclockwise slowly past 40. Note dial position when
sensitive switch clicks. Switch should actuate between 36 and 39 when turning dial clockwise and between 41 and
44 when turning dial counterclockwise. Optimum setting is a 5- to 7-digit spread with 40 in the center.
(3) Loosen nuts (Figure 5-3, 19) and move sensitive switch (12), or bend sensitive switch-actuating arm as required (old
nonadjusting-type switch) to obtain correct switch operation. If switch fails to click, perform the following:
(a) Remove wire clamp and lock stand per Paragraph 5.2.2.5, steps b and c and remove keys (Figure 5-4, 3) from
scrambler driver(s).
(b) While holding scrambler driver, rotate dial clockwise exactly one full turn and reinstall both F keys per step k.
5-22
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
(c) Reinstall lock stand and wire clamp Paragraph 5.2.2.5, steps j and k.
(d) Repeat sensitive switch operational checkout per step m. If center of scramble spread is more than 5 digits away
from 40, verify combination dial ring, dial, and scrambler driver were correctly indexed during assembly, and
check for defective or damaged lock parts. If center of scramble spread is 2 to 5 digits away from 40, adjust
position of combination dial ring as follows:
1 Note amount and direction of combination dial ring error and mark exact position of combination dial ring
(Figure 5-3, 6) and index mark on door.
2 Remove dial (1) and spindle (2) per steps (a) through (d).
3 Loosen combination dial ring attaching screws and rotate combination dial ring (6) as required to eliminate
error. Tighten combination dial ring attaching screws.
4 Reinstall lock assembly per steps i through l.
5.2.2.7 Lock Disassembly and Assembly.
NOTE
• If a replacement lock assembly is available, the malfunctioning lock shall be replaced. If
a replacement lock is not available, the team chief may elect to disassemble, inspect, and
clean lock assembly to correct a malfunction per the following steps.
• This procedure assumes the combination lock assembly has been removed from vault
door or secondary door.
a. Remove two screws (Figure 5-4, 31) and wheel case cover (30) from wheel case (13).
b. Rotate drop release plate (34) counterclockwise out of the way for access to lifter plate (28) and drive cam (26).
c. Remove lifter plate screw (29), lifter plate, and two keys (27) from drive cam. Discard keys.
d. Remove drive cam by rotating dial or spindle counterclockwise.
e. Remove snapring (32) from drop lever screw (33).
f. Remove drop lever screw and drop release plate (34).
NOTE
When removing drop lever, be aware of drop lever spring tension.
g. Remove drop lever (35) and drop lever spring (36).
h. Remove snapring (25).
i. Remove wheel pack assemblies, flys, and spacers (20, 21, 22, 23, 24).
j. Remove wave washer (19) from wheel case (13).
NOTE
Ball detent underneath lock bolt should stop lock bolt prior to lock bolt exiting wheel case.
Use care not to drop ball detent after removal of lock bolt.
k. Press relock lever (16) and slide lock bolt (11) partially out of wheel case. When lock bolt stops at ball detent
(14), using scribe through smaller hole on lock bolt, press ball detent down to release lock bolt. Slide lock bolt
out of wheel case.
l. Remove ball detent and detent spring (12) from wheel case.
5-23
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
m. Clean lock parts as required, using lint-free wiping materials and MIL-PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2), if neces-
sary. Ensure all foreign matter is removed.
Floating tumbler could occur, resulting in a lockout. Carefully note the position of each
wheel pack (tumbler) keyhole bushing prior to installation. Failure to correctly position
bushings could result in a lockout condition.
n. Inspect each wheel pack (tumbler) (20, 23) to verify index mark on bushing around square keyhole is aligned
with index mark on top plate of wheel pack. If wheel pack does not have an index mark on bushing, align key-
hole bushing by rotating bushing until wheel pack is unlocked. Rotate keyhole bushing 90 degrees (one-quarter
turn) to lock wheel pack in aligned position.
• Excessive grease could act as a magnet to trap dust and dirt, resulting in a lockout. New
locks come with sufficient grease from the manufacturer and do not require further
lubrication by the user. The only exception is for a malfunctioning LF lock that the team
chief elects to disassemble, inspect, and clean on site. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
• Degradation of the lock internal lubrication and a possible lockout could occur. Cleaning
solvent MIL-PRF-680, Type III, removes and dissolves grease. After cleaning with
MIL-PRF-680, wipe all lock parts clean of chemical residues with a clean lint-free cloth
before relubricating. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
• Grease shall not be used on any lock part other than those parts identified in this
procedure. Do not apply silicone spray onto or into lock. Failure to comply could prevent
lock from operating and cause possible lockout.
o. Apply a very light coat of silicone grease (Table 2-2) only to the base of the wheel pack post, the underneath side
of lock bolt where it slides, and the raised portion of wheel pack case directly in front of drive cam only (Figure
5-4). Ensure grease does not get on any adjacent parts and wipe up any excess.
p. Position detent spring (12) and ball detent (14) in pocket in bottom of wheel case. Press relock lever (16), and
insert lock bolt (11) into wheel case (13).
q. While pressing ball detent, retract lock bolt into wheel case.
5-24
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Bottom wheel pack assembly (20) does not have a drive pin on the inside disk. The top and
middle wheel packs assemblies are interchangeable. Fly (24) has a raised flange and will be
installed on top wheel pack assembly (23).
r. Install wave washer (19), wheel packs (20, 23), flys (21, 24), spacers (22), and snapring (25) on wheel case (13)
in order shown in Figure 5-4. Ensure flys (21, 24) are flush with top of wheel pack assembly.
s. Install drop release plate (34) on drop lever screw (33).
t. Position drop lever spring (36) on drop lever (35). Engage end of drop lever spring in lock bolt (11), while hold-
ing lever spring and drop lever in position, install drop release plate and drop lever screw. Ensure drop lever
screw (33) is tight.
u. Install snapring (32) on drop lever screw.
v. Install lock assembly (Figure 5-3, 17) in secondary door per Paragraph 5.7.1.6, or in vault door per Paragraph
5.2.2.4.
5.2.3 Weather Cover Gasket.
a. Remove weather cover gasket (Figure 5-2, 6) by carefully cutting from recess.
Wear approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply
b. Using a clean cloth, MIL-PRF-680, Type III, and corrosion resistant steel wool (Table 2-2), clean gasket recess of
all foreign matter.
Solvent borne neoprene adhesive (MMM-A-1617) is flammable and hazardous. Do not use
c. Cement new gasket into recess using adhesive (Table 2-2).
d. Apply light coat of silicone grease (Table 2-2) to surface of gasket.
5-25
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-1. Primary Door Lock Bolt
5-26
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-2. Security Pit Vault Door
5-27
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-3. Security Pit Vault Door Components
5-28
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-4. Disassembly of Combination Lock
5-29
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.3 CONTROL STATION COMPONENTS.

5.3.1 Site Activation Remote Controller J-Box (URD 11401) Repair. The SARC Junction Box (J-box) is located in
the security pit. Repair consists of replacement of the SARC connector J1A, secondary door RAISE switch S1, and
miscellaneous components (Figure 5-5). The following procedure shall be used when performing component repair in the
SARC J-box:
Electrical hazard could be present. Before performing maintenance on SARC J-box

components, secondary access system shutdown shall be performed. Failure to comply could
result in personnel injury.
a. Perform secondary access system shutdown IAW Table 5-1.
b. Replace SARC J-box components, as required, IAW Figure 5-5.
c. Perform secondary access system startup IAW Table 5-2.
d. Perform secondary access system functional checkout IAW Table 4-1.
5.3.2 Secondary Door Generator J-Box (URD 11400) Repair. Secondary door generator J-box is located in personnel
access shaft. Repair consists of replacement of the secondary door backup generator connector J1, SARC connector J1A at
facilities with alternate URD 11400 configuration, and miscellaneous components as shown in Figure 5-6 or Figure 5-6A.
Electrical hazard could be present. Before performing maintenance on generator J-box

components, secondary access system shutdown shall be performed. Failure to comply could
result in personnel injury or death.
a. Perform secondary access system shutdown IAW Table 5-1.
b. Replace secondary door generator J-box components as shown in Figure 5-6 or Figure 5-6A, as required.
c. Perform secondary access system startup IAW Table 5-2.
NOTE
If alternate SARC connector J1A was repaired, proceed to step d, otherwise return to task
being performed.
d. If alternate SARC connector J1A was repaired, perform secondary access system functional checkout IAW
Table 4-1.
5-30 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-5. SARC J-Box Assembly (URD 11401)
5-31
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-6. Secondary Door Backup Generator J-Box (URD 11400)
5-32
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-6A. Alternate Secondary Door Backup Generator J-Box (URD 11400)
Change 4 5-32.1/(5-32.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.4 ALARM SET.

5.4.1 Security Pit Junction Box Components.
a. Replace security pit junction box components as shown in [1] Figure 5-7 [3][5] Figure 5-8 <. Installation is the
reverse of removal.
b. After installation, inspect condition of sealant in conduit openings. If sealant is missing or damaged, reseal as
follows:
(1) Clean surfaces to be sealed of all dust, dirt, grease, and metal chips by using a rag moistened with MIL-PRF-680,
Type III (Table 2-2).
Sealing compound (MIL-S-8784B, Class B-1 ⁄ 2) is flammable and hazardous. Do not use
(2) Mix sealing compound (MIL-S-8784B, Class B-1 ⁄ 2) (Table 2-2) according to instructions furnished by
manufacturer.
(3) Apply sealing compound to a depth of 1/4 inch, extending along each wire a minimum of 1/2 inch and into conduit
3/4 inch. Although sealant only cures above 50 °F, procedure may be continued without waiting for cure.
5.4.2 Security Pit Vault Cable Repair. This procedure is for repair of minor cuts, nicks, or cracks in outer insulation of
the A-vault cable and does not authorize repair of major damage. Install heat shrinkable sleeving on cable as follows:
a. Cut new piece of heat-shrinkable sleeving (Table 2-2) 2 inches longer than area to be repaired.
NOTE
The security pit end of A-vault cable may have to be disconnected in order to accomplish step
b.
b. Slide sleeving over A-vault cable from pigtail end to area to be repaired. Center sleeving over cut, nick, or crack.
Prolonged heating will cause cable insulation damage, excessive sleeving shrinkage, and will
result in splitting of the sleeving.
c. Use a heat gun to evenly apply heat over entire length of sleeving for smooth shrinkage action. Apply only
enough heat to provide a good envelope.
5.4.3 Security Pit Vault Door Cable Replacement.
a. Verify pin locations of security pit vault door cable connector P5 in accordance with Figure 5-9.
b. [3][5] Note color of wires connected to the security pit junction box.
NOTE
Do not cut bus wires.
c. Remove security pit cable by [3][5] cutting cable wires leaving enough wire to install compression splices [1]
disconnecting cable at connector J12< in the security pit.
5-33
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
d. Attach security pit cable [3][5] to bus wires by using previously cut wire and installing compression splices [1] to
connector J12< in the security pit.
e. Check cable as follows:
(1) Place a magnet over PAH switch.
(2) Set secondary door to scramble number.
(3) Connect test adapter 25-48703-( ) to connector P5.
(4) Connect multimeter negative test lead to pin B and positive test lead to pin C. Multimeter should indicate 10 to 17
Vdc. If indication is incorrect, go to step g.
(5) Remove magnet. Multimeter should indicate 0 Vdc. If indication is incorrect, go to step g.
(6) [3][5] Connect test leads to pins A and D. Multimeter should indicate less than 10 ohms. If indication is incorrect,
go to step g.
(7) Move one lock off scramble number. Multimeter should read [3][5] greater than 1 megohm [1] 0 Vdc<. If indication
is incorrect, go to step g.
(8) Return first lock to scramble number and repeat steps (6) and (7) for other lock.
f. If indications were correct and dispatch was for security pit cable replacement only, secure and depart site.
g. If any indication was incorrect, check out inner zone security system per T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-4.
5.4.4 Personnel Access Hatch Magnetic Switch and Magnet. Remove magnetic switch ⁄ magnet (Figure 5-10) per
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-4.
5-34
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-7. [1] Security Pit Junction Box
5-35
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-8. [3][5] Security Pit Junction Box
5-36
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-9. Security Pit Vault Door Connector P5
5-37
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-10. Primary Door Magnetic Switch and Actuating Block
5-38
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.5 PRIMARY ACCESS.

5.5.1 Primary Door Preformed Packing.
NOTE
The preformed packing shall be replaced when cut or when uncompressed packing does not
project at least 1 ⁄ 32 inch above bearing surface of door.
b. Remove screws (Figure 5-11, 4), retainer ring (3), and preformed packing (2) from primary door.
c. Using a clean cloth, MIL-PRF-680, Type III, and corrosion resistant steel wool (Table 2-2), clean gasket recess of
all foreign matter.
d. Installation is reverse of removal. Apply corrosion-inhibiting compound (MIL-C-16173, Grade 2) (Table 2-2) to
screw threads prior to installation and torque screws to 11 (±1) inch-pounds. Ensure screw heads do not protrude
beyond bearing surface of door.
e. Inspect new primary door preformed packing per applicable technical order.
5.5.2 Hand-Driven Linear Actuator.
NOTE
Omit step a if PAH restraint is properly installed as described per applicable technical order.
a. Close primary door, if required.
b. Remove cotter pin (Figure 5-12, 1), clevis pin (2), and washer (6). If clevis pins are tight, screwjack could be
exerting force on primary door. Turning crank could relieve force. If pins are still tight, use a brass or aluminum
pin to drive pins out.
NOTE
Omit step c if actuator is inoperable.
c. Turn handcrank to retract actuator while restraining free end from rotating.
d. Remove cotter pin (4), clevis pin (5) and washer (6), and remove hand-driven linear actuator (3).
Molybdenum disulfide lubricant (MIL-G-21164) is toxic and hazardous. Use in a well-

ventilated area. Wear approved eye protection and avoid skin contact. Failure to comply
e. Installation is reverse of removal. Lubricate clevis pins (2, 5) with lubricant (MIL-G-21164) (Table 2-2) prior to
installation.
f. Check hand-driven linear actuator per Paragraph 3.1.2.
5-39
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-11. Primary Door Seals
5-40
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-12. Hand-Driven Linear Actuator
5-41
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.6 LADDERS.
5.6.1 Folding Ladder.
NOTE
An 8-foot stepladder (Table 2-2) shall be used when replacing folding ladder.
b. Remove bolts and jamnuts (Figure 5-13, 9) from both ladder legs.
c. Remove ball lockpins (2) or bolts and disconnect ladder erecting chain (3) from primary door.
d. Remove folding ladder.
e. If secondary door is to be removed, remove folding ladder brackets, and ladder stops (10) after first marking the
position of each item on liner to provide easy reinstallation.
Nonskid paint and primer is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources.
NOTE
Painting ladders with a nonslip surface-type paint should only be done on rungs of folding
ladder. In lieu of painting, nonskid tape can be wrapped around the rungs.
f. Inspect steps ⁄ rungs of folding ladder for nonskid surfaces. If damaged or missing, repair as required using non-
skid tape or primer and paint (Table 2-2). Prepare surface IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30F-101.
g. Installation is the reverse of removal.
h. After installation, verify holes in folding ladder align with holes in mounting lugs (Figure 5-13, 1) when erecting
ladder. If holes do not align, or folding ladder does not center itself between mounting lugs, loosen bolts (8) and
reposition brackets, as required, to provide good alignment.
i. Adjust ladder stops (10), as required, to provide a minimum of 1/8-inch clearance between rails telescoping and
rung on folding ladder when in stowed position.
5.6.2 Egress Ladder Installation. This procedure shall be used whenever telescoping ladder is removed.
a. Attach clevises of egress ladder to telescoping ladder upper brackets with quick-release pins.
b. If upper bracket and folding ladder are removed, attach egress ladder to folding ladder mounting lugs.
5.6.3 Telescoping Ladder Assembly. The telescoping ladder assembly consists of the following repairable ⁄ replaceable
components: three ladder sections, the upper, middle, and lower sections; an upper bracket attached to the PAS wall; two lower
mounting brackets, two ladder feet, two shear screws, and ten telescoping ladder stops, two on the upper ladder section, and
four each on middle and lower ladder sections.
5-42
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.6.3.1 Telescoping Ladder Assembly Repair and Replacement. Repair and replacement of the telescoping ladder
assembly shall be accomplished with the secondary door in the raised position with lock bolts extended. Repair or replace
telescoping ladder assembly as follows:
Secondary door movement during telescoping ladder maintenance is hazardous. Ensure

secondary door is in the raised position with lock bolts extended prior to performing
maintenance on the telescoping ladder assembly. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury or death.
NOTE
If telescoping ladder has been removed and only installation is required, perform step a, step
b, and step e, then proceed to step k.
a. If not previously accomplished, exit LER and perform secondary door raise command in accordance with T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
b. If not previously accomplished, on SARC, set power ON ⁄ OFF switch to OFF. All lamp indicators extinguish.
Telescoping ladder movement is hazardous. Ensure all three ladder sections are securely
bound to prevent movement before attempting ladder removal or replacement. Failure to
c. Using rope or cargo tie down straps, bind three telescoping ladder sections to prevent free movement or sliding of
sections while being dismantled or lifted.
d. Attach lifting hoist to the top section of telescoping ladder and take up slack, as required, to prevent ladder from
freefalling while being dismantled.
Exit of PAS in an emergency is inhibited. Temporary egress shall be readily available before
removing telescoping ladder. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
e. Lower eight-foot stepladder (Table 2-1) into PAS and position to allow removal of telescoping ladder upper
mounting bracket hardware.
f. Using stepladder, remove two bolts (Figure 5-14, 22), nuts (21), washers (19, 20), and bushings (17, 18) attaching
upper section of faulty telescoping ladder (2) to upper mounting bracket (3). Retain all hardware for reinstallation
on replacement telescoping ladder.
g. On bottom section of faulty telescoping ladder, remove left lower mounting bracket (Figure 5-14, 10) by remov-
ing the two bolts (8), washers (9) and spacer(s) (11, 12) securing the mounting bracket. Retain hardware for rein-
stallation on replacement telescoping ladder.
h. Remove faulty telescoping ladder from right mounting bracket by sliding the ladder slide pin (15) out of the right
bracket.
NOTE
Individual telescoping ladder sections and/or ladder hardware may be replaced using Figure
3-2, Figure 5-15, Figure 5-14, and Table 3-2.
i. Lift faulty telescoping ladder from PAS. Disconnect hoist and stow faulty ladder, as required.
j. Verify that three telescoping ladder sections are securely bound together to prevent free movement or sliding of
sections while being lifted. If required, bind sections using rope or tie down straps.
k. Attach lifting hoist to upper section of replacement telescoping ladder and carefully lower into PAS.
l. With replacement telescoping ladder suspended from hoist and with slide pin washer (Figure 5-14, 16) in place,
carefully slide lower right slide pin (15) into right lower mounting bracket (10).
5-43
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
m. On lower section of replacement telescoping ladder, with ladder slide pin in place, loosely install the lower left
mounting bracket and spacer(s) (11, 12).
n. Ensure ladder rungs are even. If ladder rungs are not even, remove lower bracket mounting bolts and add or re-
move spacers (maximum of three) until ladder rungs are even.
o. Ensure both lower mounting brackets are parallel, and measure the distance between the left and right brackets.
Adjust loosened bracket, as required, to ensure distance between two brackets is 17-3 ⁄ 4 inches.
p. With lower mounting brackets held parallel and 17-3 ⁄ 4 inches apart, tighten and torque mounting bracket bolts to
800 (±100) inch-pounds.
q. Using stepladder, reinstall upper ladder section (Figure 5-15, 1) of telescoping ladder on upper mounting bracket
(Figure 5-14, 3) using two bolts (22), nuts (21), washers (19, 20), and bushings (17, 18). Torque to 200 (±25)
inch-pounds.
r. If telescoping ladder upper mounting bracket was loosened or removed, perform the following:
(1) If upper mounting bracket was removed, loosely install using four mounting bolts (5) and washers (4); otherwise,
(2) Carefully fold PAH folding ladder (1) into stowed position, while positioning upper mounting bracket so that
folding ladder side rails are evenly spaced on mounting bracket, and folding ladder freely drops into stowed
position.
(3) Ensuring upper mounting bracket and folding ladder are properly positioned, tighten and torque four upper
mounting bracket bolts (5) to 800 (±100) inch-pounds.
(4) Lift PAH folding ladder into erect position, then carefully stow in folded position to verify operation. If required,
loosen upper mounting bracket, readjust position as required, then tighten and torque mounting bolts in accordance
with step (3).
s. Remove straps used to bind three telescoping ladder sections and ensure each section is free to permit movement
of ladder sections.
Damage to telescoping ladder assembly could occur. Carefully inspect components of the
telescoping ladder assembly before exiting PAS. Ensure all binding straps are removed and
all mounting hardware is properly installed. Failure to comply could result in equipment
failure.
t. Remove all tools and equipment, and exit PAS.
5-44
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-13. Folding Ladder
5-45
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-14. Telescoping Ladder Mounting Hardware (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-46
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-14. Telescoping Ladder Mounting Hardware (Sheet 2)
5-47
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-15. Telescoping Ladder Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-48
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-15. Telescoping Ladder Assembly (Sheet 2)
5-49
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.7 SECONDARY ACCESS.

5.7.1 Secondary Door. For secondary door removal, perform Paragraph 5.7.1.1. For secondary door replacement,
perform Paragraph 5.7.1.2.
5.7.1.1 Secondary Door Removal.
a. Observe if lens on access shaft light protrudes into access shaft. If possible interference with removal of second-
ary door exists, remove lens.
Personnel will not be able to exit LER during an emergency. Temporary egress shall be
readily available before removing telescoping ladder. Failure to comply could result in
b. Ensure temporary egress ladder is available and could be installed quickly if an emergency occurred. (Refer to
Paragraph 5.6.2)
c. Remove folding ladder and brackets in accordance with Paragraph 5.6.1.
d. Remove telescoping ladder and upper and lower mounting brackets from access shaft in accordance with Para-
graph 5.6.3.1.
e. Lower three steel jack posts and steel bracing (Table 2-1) of secondary door shoring set (Figure 5-16) into access
shaft to lower level equipment room.
f. Using EMA jog switch, raise secondary door 6-1 ⁄ 2 feet to facilitate installation of secondary door shoring.
g. If shoring is being installed to facilitate secondary door removal, remove operational combination from both sec-
ondary door combination locks in accordance with Paragraph 8.1.2.
h. Position and adjust secondary door shoring set jack post to about 6-1 ⁄ 2 feet and set under door about 120 de-
grees apart as shown in Figure 5-16. Tie jack posts to each other with steel bracing. Adjust screw on top of jacks
until just touching bottom of door. Ensure jack post head plate does not contact bolts in bottom of door.
i. Remove two socket-head plugs (Figure 5-17, 45) located in top of secondary door and install two secondary door
lifting eyebolts (Table 2-1). Ensure an equal number of threads are showing on eyebolts to allow level removal of
door.
j. Attach sling set (Table 2-1) to eyebolts. Attach hoisting cable from truck-mounted crane to sling set.
Damage to EMA system components could occur. When taking up slack in hoisting cable,
do not attempt to lift secondary door. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
k. Take up slack in hoisting cable with crane and align cable with centerline of access shaft by positioning boom of
crane.
When EMA ballscrew is unbolted from bottom of the secondary door, EMA ballscrew could
freewheel downward. Ensure personnel stand clear of EMA ballscrew as secondary door and
EMA ballscrew are detached. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
l. Remove four bolts (Figure 5-18, 8) attaching EMA ballscrew (10) to bottom of secondary door.
m. Guide EMA ballscrew to fully lowered position.
n. Disconnect both cables from the bottom of the secondary door.
o. On bottom of secondary door, while supporting cable track, remove cable track (Figure 5-18, 6) from bottom of
secondary door in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.14.2, steps b through e. Retain hardware for reinstallation and
position cable track and cables to facilitate secondary door removal.
5-50 Change 6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Damage to ball raceways, gearbox, or brake surface could occur. Use care to prevent dirt,
debris, or foreign materials from contact with actuator mechanisms. Failure to comply could
result in equipment failure.
p. Cover EMA to prevent dirt or foreign materials from entering mechanism.
Fire or ECS shutdown could present a hazardous condition. Secondary door shall not be
raised until it is verified that an emergency breathing apparatus for each person and an
operable flashlight are located in the Launcher Equipment Room (LER). The emergency
breathing apparatus shall be configured for immediate use with cylinder valve open and
breathing hose ⁄ tube connected to the regulator. Comply with applicable emergency
breathing apparatus T.O. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
q. Check that personnel in LERs have emergency breathing apparatus configured for immediate use for each person
and an operable flashlight.
Loss of communication with personnel in LER could be hazardous. At least one person
outside LER shall be in communication with personnel in LER while secondary door is
raised. If communication is interrupted for more than 3 minutes for any reason, secondary
door shall be lowered. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
r. Ensure personnel in LER are in communication with outside personnel. If communication is lost, topside person-
nel shall set ringer unit of LSB telephone switch to IN position so that communication can be reestablished
through Missile Combat Crew Commander (MCCC). Do not exceed 3 minutes in a planned break in communica-
tions.
s. If communication between personnel inside LER and personnel outside LER is lost for more than 3 minutes,
immediately clear the personnel access shaft.
t. Remove secondary door from access shaft by use of crane. Observe that door does not cock and wedge on guide
rails.
Secondary door guide-rail groove must be aligned with the PAH magnetic switch, located on
the wall of the access shaft, for the secondary door to be removed without being wedged in
the access shaft. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
u. When the top of secondary door is approximately 18 inches from the top of access shaft, rotate secondary door so
that the guide-rail groove is aligned with the PAH magnetic switch located on the wall of the access shaft. Then
remove secondary door the remainder of the way to clear the access shaft.
5-51
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Damage to secondary door connectors could occur. Secondary door shall be placed on 4- by
4-inch timbers positioned to prevent damage to receptacle connectors on bottom of door
when door is not on shipping skid or installed. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
NOTE
If secondary door is being replaced, position faulty secondary door on transport vehicle. If
secondary door has been removed to facilitate other maintenance and shall be reinstalled,
position and cover on 4- by 4-inch timbers clear of personnel access shaft work area.
v. Lower secondary door onto 4- by 4-inch timbers (Table 2-2) positioned, as required, so receptacle connectors on
bottom of door are not damaged.
NOTE
If secondary door is being returned to Maintenance Support Building (MSB), perform step
w; otherwise, proceed to step x.
w. On secondary door:
(1) Remove secondary door lifting sling.
(2) Cover and secure secondary door for transportation (Figure 5-19) to MSB.
x. If secondary door is to be reinstalled, cover and secure secondary door for reinstallation.
5.7.1.2 Secondary Door Installation.
a. On replacement secondary door, measure distance from top of secondary door to flat surface on top of lock bolt.
Subtract 1 ⁄ 16 inch. Record resulting dimension.
(1) (Deleted)
(2) (Deleted)
b. If not previously accomplished, remove two socket-head plugs (Figure 5-17, 45) on top of secondary door. Install
two secondary door lifting eyebolts (Table 2-1). Ensure an equal number of threads is showing on eyebolts to
allow level installation of door.
c. If not previously accomplished, attach sling set (Table 2-1) to eyebolts. Attach hoisting cable from truck-mounted
crane to sling set.
d. Ensure Paragraph 5.7.1.1, steps a through e and k, have been accomplished.
operable flashlight are located in the LER. The emergency breathing apparatus shall be
configured for immediate use with cylinder valve open and breathing hose/tube connected to
the regulator. Comply with applicable emergency breathing apparatus T.O. Failure to comply
e. Check that personnel in LER have emergency breathing apparatus configured for immediate use for each person
5-52 Change 5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Damage to secondary door or guide rails is possible. Secondary door shall be kept level.
f. Raise secondary door minimum clearance above wooden blocks. Place 4-foot level across the top of secondary
door against eyebolts and verify the secondary door is level. If secondary door is not level, lower secondary door
and readjust as necessary.
g. Prior to installation of new secondary door, check access shaft and guide rails for obstructions. Ensure secondary
door lock bolts are fully retracted.
h. Position secondary door to hang plumb with centerline of access shaft by positioning boom of crane.
Secondary door guide-rail groove must be aligned with the Personnel Access Hatch (PAH)
magnetic switch, located on the wall of the access shaft, for the secondary door to be
removed without being wedged into the access shaft. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
NOTE
Exact alignment will be ensured by positioning door on guide rails.
i. Rotate secondary door so that the guide-rail groove is aligned with the PAH magnetic switch on the wall of the
access shaft. Slowly lower secondary door until the top of the secondary door is approximately 18 inches below
the top of the access shaft. Then rotate secondary door so that the combination locks are to the west side of the
access shaft.
NOTE
If door binds on guide rails in the following step, raise door out of PAH, perform step k, and
reaccomplish step j; otherwise, perform step j, and proceed to step l.
j. Slowly lower secondary door into access shaft and onto guide rails.
k. Remove eight barrier guides (Figure 5-17, 57) by removing screws (59). Remove guide shims (58) and reinstall
barrier guides (57) and screws (59).
NOTE
While lowering secondary door, edge of door must be checked constantly for clearance in
access shaft.
l. Lower secondary door onto secondary door shoring set (Figure 5-16).
m. Connect two cables to bottom of secondary door.
n. If not previously accomplished on EMA gearbox assembly, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin IAW T.O. 21M-
LGM30G-2-10-( ).
Change 10 5-53
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Positioning of ballscrew bolt plate using the jog switch is hazardous. Ensure personnel keep
hands clear of secondary door when seating ballscrew into secondary door recess. Failure to
NOTE
The EMA bolt plate can be positioned by turning the inner EMA ballscrew by hand. If EMA
power is available a combination of jog switch and manual positioning may be used to raise
the bolt plate into position for connection.
o. To position EMA ballscrew (Figure 5-18, 10) bolt plate, use EMA jog switch to raise EMA ballscrew until bolt
plate contacts bottom of secondary door. If EMA power is unavailable, manually turn inner EMA ballscrew until
bolt plate contacts bottom of secondary door. Ensure top of EMA ballscrew is seated in recess of secondary door
and bolt holes are aligned.
p. Connect EMA ballscrew to bottom of secondary door with four bolts (8). Torque bolts to 800 (±100) inch-pounds.
q. Remove sling set and hoisting cable from top of secondary door and remove two eyebolts. Reinstall two socket-
head plugs (Figure 5-17, 45) in top of secondary door.
r. Using EMA jog switch, raise secondary door off secondary door shoring set.
s. Retorque four bolts attaching ballscrew to door to 800 (±100) inch-pounds to ensure proper seating with actuator
supporting full weight of secondary door.
Performing maintenance under an insecure secondary door is hazardous. Whenever

secondary door is raised to perform maintenance, ensure EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged
and system enters enhanced maintenance mode prior to performing maintenance. Failure to
NOTE
When EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged, system enters enhanced maintenance mode and
all secondary door movement functions are locked out. Ensure secondary door is properly
positioned prior to engagement of EMA gearbox safety pin.
t. On EMA gearbox assembly, engage EMA gearbox safety pin IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
u. Remove secondary door shoring set.
v. Perform secondary door security pin functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-3.
w. Perform secondary door electromechanical assembly functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-4.
x. Change secondary door combination locks in accordance with Paragraph 8.1.2.
y. Reinstall lens on access shaft light, if removed.
z. Reinstall folding ladder in accordance with Paragraph 5.6.1, telescoping ladder mounting brackets, and telescoping
ladder assembly in accordance with Paragraph 5.6.3.1.
5.7.1.3 Secondary Door Combination Lock Assembly. The following procedures are for removal and installation of
secondary door locks, lock stands, sensitive switches, and other locking components.
5.7.1.4 Lock Assembly ⁄ Lock Stand Access. The following procedure is for access to secondary door locks, lock
stands, sensitive switches, and other locking components.
a. On SDCA front panel, set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to MAINTENANCE position. On SDCA front panel,
green OPERATION (11) indicator extinguishes, yellow MAINTENANCE (9) indicator illuminates, and 10-second
intermittent audible alarm signals change of mode.
b. Using LER-2 EMA jog switch, raise secondary door to facilitate maintenance, as required.
5-54 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

NOTE
c. On EMA gearbox assembly, engage EMA gearbox safety pin IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
Change 10 5-54.1/(5-54.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Some secondary doors have headless guide screws in bottom edge to make bottom plate
alignment easier. It is not necessary to remove these guide screws to remove bottom plates.
d. Remove half of door bottom plate below combination lock assemblies.
e. Remove shoulder screws (Figure 5-17, 24) from locking bolts in vicinity of locks and swing connecting links (19)
aside as necessary to expose lock combination assemblies.
f. Remove cam unlocking lever (27) by removing two shoulder screws (25) attaching lever to combination lock
bolts (32) and screw (26) attaching lever to cam locking bar.
5.7.1.5 Lock Removal. The following procedure is for removal of either the left or right combination locks or both.
a. Access combination locks per Paragraph 5.7.1.4.
b. Remove two screws (Figure 5-4, 31) and wheel case cover (30) from wheel case (13).
c. Rotate drop release plate (34) counterclockwise to gain access to lifter plate (28) and drive cam (26).
d. Remove lifter plate screw (29) and lifter plate.
e. Remove two keys (27) from drive cam and remove drive cam by holding it and rotating dial (Figure 5-17, 39)
counterclockwise.
f. Remove four mounting screws (Figure 5-4, 15) holding wheel case (13) to lock stand (10).
g. Remove lock from secondary door.
5.7.1.6 Lock Installation. The following procedure is for installation of either the left or right combination locks or both.
a. Remove two screws (Figure 5-4, 31) and wheel case cover (30) from wheel case (13).
b. Rotate drop release plate (34) counterclockwise to gain access to lifter plate (28) and drive cam (26).
c. Remove lifter plate screw (29) and lifter plate.
d. Remove drive cam.
e. Apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to threads on mounting screws (Figure 5-4, 15) and secure wheel case (13) with
four mounting screws and firmly tighten.
f. Align wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (20, 23) and engage drop lever (35).
g. Loosely install drive cam (26) on spindle (1). (See Figure 5-17, detail B.) Align drive cam (32B) with drop lever
(32C) and while holding cam in place, turn dial (39) clockwise until drive cam is threaded on lock spindle shaft
(48) and drawn down towards wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (Figure 5-4, 20, 23).
comply could result in lockout.
NOTE
With drop lever engaged with drive cam slot, the dial must indicate in the vicinity of zero.
If correct indexing cannot be obtained, repeat step. If correct indexing still cannot be
obtained, replace spindle or lock assembly as necessary.
h. While keeping drop lever aligned with drive cam slot, turn dial clockwise until snug. Back off dial a minimum of
one-half turn to a maximum of one and one-half turns until keyways of the lock spindle (Figure 5-17, 6) are
aligned to the LH and RH index marks on the drive cam (32B). Dial should indicate between 90 and 10.
Change 4 5-55
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Scrambler driver keys shall fit snug in keyways. Loosely installed scrambler driver keys
could work loose during lock operation. Failure to comply could result in lockout.
NOTE
In order to retain key grip integrity, lock manufacturer recommends new keys be installed
when replacing the lock assembly or spindle (if replacements are available). Keys are
provided with each new lock or spindle.
i. Insert two new keys (Figure 5-4, 27) into keyways on spindle (1) and drive cam (26) with short leg pointing
away from the center of spindle. Install keys snugly using a punch to seat them.
j. Turn dial about one-quarter turn counterclockwise to disengage drop lever (35) from drive cam. Line up change
keyholes of wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (20, 23) with change keyhole on bottom of wheel case (13).
k. Install lifter plate (28) and lifter plate screw (29).
l. Rotate drop release plate (34) clockwise and ensure it will not interfere with wheel case cover (30).
m. Ensure drop lever screw (33) is tight.
n. Install lock cover with two screws (31).
o. Perform secondary door lock checkout ⁄ securing after maintenance IAW Paragraph 5.7.1.8.
5.7.1.7 Lock Assembly ⁄ Lock Stand ⁄ Sensitive Switch ⁄ Scrambler Tumbler ⁄ Spindle Replacement..
a. Access combination locks assembly/lock stand per Paragraph 5.7.1.4.
NOTE
Lock on lock stand to be removed must be unlocked or removed to gain access to one of four
lock stand mounting bolts.
b. Unlock lock on the lock stand to be removed by dialing combination open. If lock cannot be dialed open, remove
lock per Paragraph 5.7.1.5.
c. Remove four mounting screws (Figure 5-17, 1) and lower combination lock assembly taking care not to break
wires attached to sensitive switch (4).
d. Disconnect wires from sensitive switch (4).
e. If sensitive switch will be replaced, perform the following:
NOTE
• Only new sensitive switches equipped with an adjustable lever arm and adjusting
setscrew shall be installed. Nonadjustable sensitive switches shall be removed and
discarded.
• If adjustable sensitive switches are not available, install nonadjustable sensitive switch
and document serial number of secondary door for future sensitive switch replacement.
• If necessary to install an obsolete, nonadjustable sensitive switch, adjustment of switch
will be performed by a combination of bending actuating arm and moving body of switch,
after loosening attaching screws, to obtain acceptable operation of sensitive switch, per
step (4)(e).
• Bending lever arm on new adjustable sensitive switch is not a means of adjustment. If an
adjustable sensitive switch is found with a bent lever arm, switch will be replaced.
(1) Detach sensitive switch from lock stand (9) by loosening nuts (2) and washers (3) and removing screws (5).
(2) Install adjustable sensitive switch (4) on combination lock assembly with two screws (5), washers (3), and nuts (2),
tightening attaching hardware completely.
(3) Connect wires to sensitive switch common and normally closed terminals.
5-56
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
• Sensitive switch damage could occur. When adjusting sensitive switch, at least two full
threads of the setscrew shall be showing. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
• Adjusting setscrew could be difficult to turn. Turning adjusting setscrew too far
(clockwise) into lever arm will put pressure on sensitive switch case and could break top
of switch away from switch body. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
(4) Perform adjustment of adjustable sensitive switch before installing combination lock assembly as follows:
(a) Manually turn scrambler tumblers so cam notches on outer edge of each tumbler are aligned with cam follower
on adjustable sensitive switch actuating arm, and cam follower is resting in bottom of cam notch.
(b) Actuate sensitive switch by pressing sensitive switch actuator arm with finger, listening for a click. If a click
is heard, proceed to next step. If no click is heard, install a 1 ⁄ 16-inch allen wrench into setscrew and back off
(counterclockwise) until a click is heard.
(c) Rotate all three scrambler tumblers together in either direction to position cam follower approximately half way
out of cam notch. Restraining tumblers in this position, turn switch setscrew clockwise until a click is heard.
(d) Turn setscrew back counterclockwise until click is heard again. Switch is now properly adjusted.
(e) Rotate scrambler tumblers in both directions with or without scrambler driver installed. The sensitive switch
should actuate when the cam follower is approximately one--half to two-thirds out of cam notch in either
direction. If necessary, repeat steps (a) through (d) until switch is properly adjusted.
(f) Apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to sensitive switch adjusting screws.
f. Inspect scrambler tumblers for damage and binding. If damaged, replace damaged part. If binding is noted,
perform the following:
(1) If lock is still attached to lock stand, remove screws and cover from wheel case. Remove two keys from drive cam
and discard. Remove spindle from drive cam by holding drive cam and rotating spindle counterclockwise.
(2) Remove retaining ring (Figure 5-4, 4) from scrambler tumbler post and lift off scrambler tumblers (5, 7, 8),
scrambler tumbler spacers (6), and spacer washers (9).
(3) Clean scrambler tumblers, as required, using lint-free wiping materials and MIL-PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2), if
necessary. Ensure all foreign matter is removed.
Silicone spray shall be used in a well-ventilated area. Keep away from ignition sources and
avoid skin contact and breathing of vapor or spray. Failure to comply could result in
personnel injury.
(4) Lubricate scrambler stack only with a light coating of silicone spray lubricant (Table 2-2) prior to assembly. See
Figure 5-4 for authorized lubrication areas.
5-57
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
• The tumblers in the scrambler stack numbered 1, 2, and 3 are to be installed in that
sequence. The number is stamped in the groove in the inside disk. If inside disk should
become detached from the outside ring, the sequence of stacking can be determined by
checking the location of the semicircular notch on the circumference of outer ring. The
notch is between 0 and 90 on No. 1 and No. 3 tumblers and between 40 and 50 on No.
2 tumbler. The index mark on inside disk shall be aligned with 40 on outer ring. Locks
with chrome inside disk will have index mark placed at 48.
• Bent spacer washer (9) is made locally by placing a flat spacer washer on a flat surface,
holding the washer down across its largest diameter with a steel rule laid flat, and lifting
the exposed half of washer so that it will stay 1/8 inch above flat surface.
(5) Install scrambler stack by placing a minimum of three flat and one bent spacer washers (9), scrambler tumbler
spacers (6), scrambler tumblers (5, 7, 8), and retaining ring (4) on scrambler post in order shown in Figure 5-4.
Spacer washers on scrambler stack may be added or removed to attain smooth operation, leaving no less than three
flat and one bent spacer washers on the stack.
g. Inspect lock spindle (Figure 5-17, 6) for damage. If damage is noted, replace spindle as follows:
(1) If lock is still attached to lock stand (9), remove screws and cover from wheel case (31). Remove two keys from
drive cam (32B) and discard. Remove lock spindle from drive cam by holding drive cam and rotating spindle
counterclockwise.
(2) Remove two keys (8) and unthread scrambler driver (7) from lock spindle (6).
(3) Thread scrambler driver (7) onto replacement lock spindle (6) until driver is against spindle shoulder.
(4) Observe position of notch in edge of scrambler driver in relation to fouling pin protruding from top of lock spindle.
Back off scrambler driver (7) two full turns. Continue to back off until notch is indexed as shown in Figure 5-17,
detail A.
(5) Measure gap between shoulder of lock spindle (6) and scrambler driver (7). Gap should be 1 ⁄ 32 to 3 ⁄ 32 inch. If
not correctly indexed or gapped, reposition scrambler as necessary to obtain proper measurement.
NOTE
(6) Install two keys (8). Keys shall fit snugly in spindle keyways and should be installed with a punch.
h. Verify scrambler driver (7) is correctly indexed on lock spindle (6) for respective lock assembly. (See Figure
5-17, detail A.) Measure gap between shoulder of lock spindle (6) and scrambler driver (7). Gap should be 1 ⁄ 32
to 3 ⁄ 32 inch. If not correctly indexed or gapped, adjust scrambler driver per step g.
i. Insert brass washer (Figure 5-4, 37) in scrambler driver hub.
j. Insert lock spindle (Figure 5-17, 6) into lock assembly. Loosely thread driver cam (Figure 5-4, 26) onto spindle
(1).
k. Connect wires to adjustable sensitive switch common and normally closed terminals.
Lockout could occur. Shoulder screws are designed to allow the component it secures
movement when the screw is tightened. Ensure applicable component is supported by the
head of the shoulder screw and not the shoulder. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
NOTE
Installation of the fourth of four lock assembly mounting screws (Figure 5-17, 1) is prevented
by the extended lock bolt. The fourth screw is installed in a later step.
l. Align tongue and pin on end of lock spindle (6) with matching slot and hole in lock spindle shaft (48) and attach
lock assembly to bottom of secondary door with three mounting screws (1). Do not install fourth screw under
combination lock bolt (32) at this time.
5-58 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
m. Align wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (Figure 5-4, 20, 23) and engage drop lever (35) with drive cam (26) slot.
While holding drive cam in place, turn dial (Figure 5-17, 39) clockwise until drive cam (32B) is threaded on lock
spindle (48) shaft and drawn up towards wheel pack assemblies (tumblers).
comply could result in lockout.
NOTE
With drop lever engaged with drive cam slot, dial must indicate in the vicinity of zero. If
correct indexing cannot be obtained, repeat step. If correct indexing still cannot be obtained,
replace spindle or lock assembly as necessary.
n. While keeping drop lever aligned with drive cam slot, turn dial clockwise until snug. Back off dial a minimum of
one-half turn to a maximum of one and one-half turns until keyways of lock spindle (6) are aligned to the LH
and RH index marks on the drive cam (32B). Dial should indicate between 90 and 10.
NOTE
o. Insert two keys (Figure 5-4, 27) into keyways on spindle (1) and drive cam (26) with short leg pointing away
from center of spindle. Install keys snugly using a punch to seat them.
p. Turn dial about one-quarter turn counterclockwise to disengage drop lever (35) from drive cam. Line up change
keyholes of wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (20, 23) with change keyhole on bottom of wheel case (13).
q. Install lifter plate (28) and lifter plate screw (29).
r. Rotate drop release plate (34) clockwise and ensure it will not interfere with wheel case cover (30).
s. Ensure drop lever screw (33) is tight.
t. Install wheel case cover (30) with two screws (31).
NOTE
In order to install cam unlocking lever (Figure 5-17, 27), one lock must be locked and the
other must be unlocked.
u. Attach cam unlocking lever (27) to combination lock bolts (32), with two shoulder screws (25) and spacers (28),
and to cam locking bar (29) with shoulder screw (25).
v. Set up lock combination per Paragraph 8.1.2, steps e through m.
w. Unlock lock and install fourth mounting screw (Figure 5-17, 1) under lock bolt.
x. Perform Paragraph 5.7.1.8.
Change 4 5-59
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.7.1.8 Secondary Door Lock Checkout ⁄ Securing After Maintenance. Perform the following steps after lock
maintenance has been performed prior to locking secondary door:
a. Ensure lock dial turns freely after lock cover is installed. If dial does not turn freely, loosen four mounting screws
(Figure 5-17, 1) and 15reposition lock assembly, then retighten screws.
NOTE
Operation of both scrambler-sensitive switches must be verified following lockstand,
sensitive switch, spindle, or scrambler tumbler maintenance/replacement. If only lock case
maintenance ⁄ replacement was performed, proceed to step (3).
b. Check scrambler-sensitive switch operation as follows:
(1) If J7 secondary door test plug (Figure 2-6) (Table 2-1) is available, disconnect P7 from secondary door and connect
J7 test plug cable to receptacle J7. Connect multimeter between breakout cable leads J7-A and J7-B.
(2) If J7 test plug cable is not available, remove cover from secondary door IZ (Inner Zone) J-Box (URD 11405) and
connect multimeter to terminals 1 and 2 on TB6.
(3) Scramble both locks by turning dials four times counterclockwise stopping at 40. Multimeter shall indicate
continuity. If continuity is not obtained, adjust scrambler-sensitive switch(es) per Paragraph 5.7.1.7, step e(4) as
required.
(4) Slowly turn dial associated with replaced lock clockwise while monitoring multimeter. Multimeter shall indicate an
open circuit between 35 and 39 on dial. If necessary, loosen nuts (Figure 5-17, 2) and reposition sensitive switch
(4) or bend switch actuating arm to obtain proper results.
(5) Turn dial counterclockwise one turn and continue slowly past 40. Multimeter shall indicate an open circuit between
41 and 45 on dial. Adjust switch as necessary.
(6) Repeat step (3), step (4), and step (5) for other combination lock.
(7) If J7 secondary door test plug was used, disconnect multimeter and J7 test plug cable and reconnect connector P7
to secondary door. If J7 test plug cable was not used, disconnect multimeter and reinstall terminal box cover.
head of the shoulder screw and not the shoulder. Failure to comply could result in lockout.
NOTE
In order to install cam unlocking lever (27), one lock must be locked and the other must be
unlocked.
c. If not previously accomplished, attach cam unlocking lever (27) to combination lock bolts (32), with two shoulder
screws (25) and spacers (29), and to cam locking bar (29) with shoulder screw (25).
Lock failure could occur. Lock mechanism checkout shall be performed prior to locking
secondary door. Failure to comply could result in lockout.
d. Check operation of locks as follows:
(1) Loosen setscrew (11) and remove shoulder screw (13) and actuator unlocking lever (12).
(2) Turn lock-release handle (33) to lock position.
5-60
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
(3) Scramble both locks then dial both locks open to verify that cam unlocking lever (27) does not interfere with
operation of either lock and cam locking bar (29) releases unlocking cam (10). Locate cause and correct any binding
that is noted. If cam unlocking lever (27) is cause of binding, inspect holes in cam unlocking lever (27). If holes
are less than 5/8-inch long, holes may be elongated longitudinally to a maximum of 5/8-inch by removing material
equally from both ends of hole.
(4) Turn lock-release handle (33) to unlock position.
(5) Reinstall actuator unlocking lever (12) with shoulder screw (13) ensuring both slotted ends of lever engage
corresponding pins on unlocking cam (10) and actuator locking bar. Verify cam unlocking lever (27) is not binding
on shoulder screw (13), then tighten setscrew (11).
Connector link screws could work loose during lock bolt operation. Screws (24) have nylon
insert in the threads to make screw self-locking. Failure to lock screws into place could result
in lockout.
NOTE
Screws that can be fully installed by hand shall be additionally locked in place with
threadlocker.
e. Swing connecting links (19) into position and attempt to install screws (24) by hand. If screw(s) can be fully
installed by hand, remove screw(s), apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to threads, and reinstall screw(s). Tighten
screw(s) with allen wrench. Document each screw that requires threadlocker for future replacement.
f. If not previously accomplished, place new combination into both locks per Paragraph 8.1.2.
Lockout could occur. Ensure all lock mechanism parts are properly connected. Failure to
properly connect any part of the lock mechanism could result in a lockout.
g. Before installing bottom plate, ensure all lock bolt connecting links (19) and other parts of locking mechanism are
properly connected and screws are tight.
g1. **NSP** Perform secondary door security pin inspection in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.4.
Bottom plate installation is critical for access to manual drive guide. Bottom plate emergency
drive shaft hole shall be lined up with manual drive guide. Failure to comply could result in
lockout.
h. Ensure bottom plate emergency drive shaft hole is aligned with manual drive guide.
i. Put two bags of desiccant (Table 2-2) in bottom of secondary door away from emergency drive shaft hole on
velcro strips.
j. Replace secondary door bottom plate half.
k. On EMA, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
l. Using EMA jog switch, position the secondary door to the fully lowered position.
m. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to OPERATION position. On SDCA front
panel, green OPERATION (11) indicator illuminates and 10-second intermittent audible alarm signals change of
mode.
Change 10 5-61
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.7.1.9 Lock Spindle Shaft. The following procedure is for removal and installation of either the left or right lock spindle
shaft, or both.
a. Perform Paragraph 5.7.1.7, steps a through d, to remove combination lock assembly associated with defective
shaft.
b. Pull dial off lock spindle (Figure 5-17, 48) shaft. If dial does not pull off easily, unscrew plastic cap (37), remove
screw (38), and pull dial (39) off.
Lock spindle shaft will drop when spindle shaft nut is removed. Hold spindle shaft while
removing shaft nut. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
Nylon shaft nuts are equipped with nylon inserts in threads to make them self-locking. Nylon
shaft nuts being removed may be reinstalled in a later step only if locking insert is serviceable
and provides resistance to turning by hand. If nylon shaft nut can be easily turned, nut must
be discarded and a new shaft nut installed. Failure to comply could result in lockout.
c. While holding lock spindle shaft (48) in place, use 1-inch socket (Table 2-1) to remove spindle shaft nut (Figure
5-17, 49) and carefully remove lock spindle shaft (48) by drawing it straight out of bottom of door.
NOTE
If corrosion is found on lock spindle shaft, nut, or bore, perform steps e through i to remove
corrosion prior to assembly.
d. Mark position of dial ring index mark and remove felt washer (40), three retaining screws (41), and dial ring (42)
from door. It may be necessary to chip sealant from around dial ring to permit removal of ring.
e. Inspect oil seal (43). Remove if brittle, cracked, or damaged.
f. Clean spindle shaft bores in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.2, step d, and step h.
Silicone spray lubricant is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear
approved eye and hand protection. Use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could
Bearing damage could occur. Abrasives shall not be used on soft bearing at upper end of
spindle shaft bore or on spindle shaft nut. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
g. Clean lock spindle shaft (Figure 5-17, 48) of corrosion with 280-grit silicon carbide abrasive paper and silicone
spray lubricant (Table 2-2).
5-62
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Gear oil is toxic and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear approved eye and
hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury.
h. If oil seal (Figure 5-17, 43) was removed in step f, lubricate new oil seal with gear oil (Table 2-2) and install seal
in door with spring down. If oil seal was not removed in step f, lubricate, as required.
i. Coat collar at bottom end of lock spindle shaft (48) with silicone grease (Table 2-2).
j. Carefully install lock spindle shaft (Figure 5-17, 48) in door taking care not to drive out bearing or oil seal at
upper end of bore.
Nylon shaft nuts are equipped with nylon inserts in threads to make them self-locking.
Previously removed nylon shaft nuts may be reinstalled only if the locking insert is
serviceable and provides resistance to turning by hand. If the nylon shaft nut can be easily
turned, the nut must be discarded and a new shaft nut installed. Failure to comply could result
in lockout.
k. Install spindle shaft nut (49) in door. Tighten nut until lock spindle shaft (48) just begins to bind, then back off
slightly (one-quarter to one-half turn) to permit shaft to turn freely.
l. Position dial ring (42) on door so that index mark is in original position.
m. Install three screws (41) to secure dial ring in place.
n. Apply coat of silicone grease (Table 2-2) to felt washer (Figure 5-17, 40) and place washer around lock spindle
shaft (48), inside dial ring (42).
o. Install dial (39) on lock spindle shaft. If removed in step c install screw (38) in end of shaft and screw plastic cap
(37) in place.
Silicone rubber sealant is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear
approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could
p. Apply silicone rubber sealant (Table 2-2) around outside of dial rings.
q. Perform Paragraph 5.7.1.6 to reinstall combination lock assemblies.
5.7.1.10 Unlocking Camshaft. Remove and clean unlocking camshaft as follows:
a. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to MAINTENANCE position. On SDCA
front panel, yellow MAINTENANCE (9) indicator illuminates and 10-second intermittent audible alarm signals
change of mode.
b. Operate jog switch to raise secondary door from lower position to allow working clearance under door.
5-63
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

NOTE
c. On EMA, engage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
d. Remove half of door bottom plate below combination lock assemblies. Plate has a large round access hole.
NOTE
Some secondary doors have headless guide screws in bottom edge to make bottom plate
alignment easier. It is not necessary to remove these guide screws to remove the bottom
plates.
e. Remove shoulder screws (Figure 5-17, 25) from lock bolts in vicinity of locks and swing connecting links (19)
aside, as necessary, to expose unlocking cam (55).
f. Loosen setscrew (11), and remove screw (13) and actuator unlocking lever (12).
g. Remove cam unlocking lever (27) by removing two shoulder screws attaching lever to combination lock bolt (32)
and screw (26) attaching lever to cam locking bar (29).
h. Remove four screws (18) and remove relocking sensor cover (17), cam locking bar, cover support bar (16), cam
locking bar guide (15), front guide spacer (30), and rear guide spacer (14).
i. Remove setscrew (34) and pull lock-release handle (33) and key (35) off unlocking camshaft (51).
j. Remove recessed nut (56) and pull unlocking cam and key (54) off unlocking camshaft.
Unlocking camshaft will drop when unlocking camshaft nut is removed. Unlocking camshaft
must be held in place during nut removal. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
Nylon shaft nuts are equipped with nylon inserts in threads to make them self-locking. Nylon
shaft nuts being removed may be reinstalled in later step only if the locking insert is
in lockout.
k. While holding unlocking camshaft in place, use 1-inch socket (Table 2-1) to remove camshaft nut (Figure 5-17,
52) and carefully remove unlocking camshaft (51) by drawing it straight out of bottom of door.
l. Inspect oil seal (36). Remove if brittle, cracked or damaged.
5-64
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Bearing damage could occur. Abrasive shall not be used on soft bearing at upper end of
unlocking camshaft bore and in camshaft nut. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
NOTE
If corrosion is found on unlocking camshaft or bore, perform steps o through q to remove
corrosion prior to assembly.
m. Clean unlocking camshaft bore in secondary door in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.2, step d, and step h.
Silicone spray is flammable and hazardous. Use in a well-ventilated area. Keep away from
ignition sources and avoid skin contact and breathing of vapor or spray. Failure to comply
n. Clean camshaft nut (52) threads with wire brush and clean bearing insert with nylon brush. Corrosion may be
loosened by using silicone spray lubricant (Table 2-2).
o. Clean unlocking camshaft (Figure 5-17, 51) of corrosion with 280-grit silicon carbide abrasive paper and silicone
spray lubricant (Table 2-2).
Gear oil is toxic and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear approved eye and
hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury.
p. If oil seal (Figure 5-17, 36) was removed in step l, lubricate new oil seal with gear oil (Table 2-2) and install seal
in door with narrow part of hole facing up. Lubricate as required.
q. Coat collar at bottom end of unlocking camshaft (51) with silicone grease (Table 2-2).
r. Carefully install unlocking camshaft (Figure 5-17, 51) in door, taking care not to drive out bearing or oil seal at
upper end of bore.
Nylon shaft nuts are equipped with nylon inserts in threads to make them self-locking.
Previously removed nylon shaft nuts may be reinstalled only if the locking insert is
in lockout.
s. Install unlocking camshaft nut in door. Tighten nut until unlocking camshaft just begins to bind, then back off
slightly (about one-quarter to one-half turn) to permit shaft to turn freely.
t. Install lock-release handle (33) and key (35) on upper end of unlocking camshaft and tighten setscrew (34).
u. Slide unlocking cam (55) and key (54) on camshaft and install nut (56).
v. Install front guide spacer (30), rear guide spacer (14) cam locking bar guide (15), cover support bar (16), cam
locking bar (29), and relocking sensor cover (17) with four screws (18).
w. Attach cam unlocking lever (27) to cam locking bar with shoulder screw (25) and to combination lock bolts (32)
with two shoulder screws and spacers (28).
5-65
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
x. Check operation of locks as follows:

(1) Loosen setscrew (11) and remove shoulder screw (13) and actuator unlocking lever (12).
(2) Turn lock-release handle to locked position.
(3) Scramble both locks then dial both locks open to verify cam unlocking lever does not interfere with operation of
either lock, and cam locking bar releases unlocking cam (10). Locate cause and correct any binding that is noted.
If cam unlocking lever is cause of binding, inspect holes in cam unlocking lever. If holes are less than 5/8-inch long,
holes may be elongated longitudinally to a maximum of 5/8 inch by removing material equally from both ends of
hole.
(4) Turn lock-release handle to unlocked position.
head of the shoulder screw and not the shoulder. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
y. Install actuator unlocking lever with shoulder screw ensuring both slotted ends of lever engage corresponding pins
on unlocking cam and actuator locking bar. Verify unlocking lever is not binding on shoulder screw, then tighten
setscrew.
Lockout could occur. Screws have nylon insert in the threads to make screw self-locking.
Screws shall be locked in place. Failure to comply could result in lockout.
NOTE
threadlocker.
z. Swing connecting links (19) into position and attempt to install screws (24) by hand. If a screw can be fully in-
stalled by hand, remove screw, apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to threads, and reinstall screw. Tighten screws with
allen wrench. Document each screw that requires sealant for future replacement.
Lockout could occur. All parts of lock mechanism shall be properly reconnected. Failure to
aa. Before installing bottom plate, ensure all lock bolt connecting links and other parts of locking mechanism are
properly connected and all screws are tight.
aa1. **NSP** Perform secondary door security pin inspection in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.4.
Lockout is possible. Bottom plate emergency drive shaft hole shall be lined up with manual
drive guide. Failure to comply could result in lockout.
ab. Ensure bottom plate emergency drive shaft hole is aligned with the manual drive guide.
ac. Replace secondary door bottom plate half.
ad. Put two bags of desiccant (Table 2-2) in bottom of secondary door away from emergency drive shaft hole.
5-66 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ae. On EMA, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
af. Using EMA jog switch, position the secondary door to the fully lowered position.
ag. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to OPERATION position. On SDCA front
mode.
5.7.1.11 Felt Washer. Remove and clean felt washer under lock dial as follows:
a. Remove felt washer (Figure 5-17, 40) from dial ring (42).
b. Thoroughly soak felt washer with MIL-PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2).
c. Massage felt washer until it is soft and all foreign matter is removed.
d. Squeeze felt washer dry and apply liberal coat of silicone grease (Table 2-2).
e. Installation is reverse of removal.
5.7.1.12 Lock Bolt. Replace secondary door lock bolt as follows:

NOTE
c. On EMA gearbox assembly, engage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
d. Disconnect cable track from bottom of secondary door.
e. Disconnect both secondary door cables from bottom of secondary door.
f. Remove secondary door bottom plate(s).
g. Remove secondary door lock bolt linear actuator in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.15, as required to facilitate
lock bolt removal.
5-67
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
The lock bolt weighs about 30 pounds.
h. Remove screw (Figure 5-17, 24) that attaches connecting link (19) to lock bolt.
i. Swing connecting link away from lock bolt.
j. Rotate lock bolt 180 degrees so lug is down.
k. Remove lock bolt from secondary door.
General purpose grease is toxic and hazardous. Wear approved eye protection and avoid skin
contact. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
l. Prior to lock bolt installation, apply grease (Table 2-2) to lock bolt and lock bolt bore in secondary door.
m. Installation is reverse of removal. When installing lock bolts, ensure lug on lock bolt is up.
Connector link screws could work loose during lock bolt operation. Screws have nylon insert
in the threads to make screw self-locking. Failure to lock screws into place could result in
lockout.
NOTE
• Screws that can be fully installed by hand shall be locked in place with threadlocker.
• If adjacent connecting link interferes with lock bolt removal, disconnect link from
respective lock bolt to provide clearance.
n. During connecting link (Figure 5-17, 19) to lock bolt (23) reassembly, attempt to install screws (24) by hand. If a
screw can be fully installed by hand, remove screw, apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to threads, and reinstall.
Tighten screws with allen wrench. Document each screw that requires sealant for future replacement.
o. Reinstall lock bolt linear actuator in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.15 if removed for lock bolt replacement.
• Lockout could occur. Ensure all lock mechanism parts are properly connected. Failure to
properly connect any part of the lock mechanism could result in a lockout.
• Bottom plate installation is critical for access to manual drive guide. Bottom plate
emergency drive shaft hole shall be lined up with manual drive guide. Failure to comply
could result in lockout.
o1. Before installing bottom plate, ensure all lock bolt connecting links (Figure 5-17, 19) and other parts of locking
mechanism are properly connected and all screws are tight.
o2. **NSP** Perform secondary door security pin inspection in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.4.
p. Install bottom cover plates and ensure bottom plate emergency drive shaft hole is aligned with the manual drive
guide.
q. Install two bags of desiccant (Table 2-2), in bottom of secondary door on Velcro strips away from emergency
drive shaft hole.
r. Reinstall secondary door cable track in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.14.2, steps n through o.
s. Reconnect both secondary door cables to bottom of secondary door.
t. On EMA, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
u. Using EMA jog switch, position the secondary door to the fully lowered position.
5-68 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
v. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE switch (Figure 4-1, 10) to OPERATION position. On SDCA front
mode.
5.7.1.13 Lock Bolt Sensitive Switch LS1 and LS2 Replacement.

NOTE
d. Disconnect both secondary door cables from bottom of secondary door.
e. On bottom of secondary door, while supporting cable track, remove cable track (Figure 5-20, 6) from bottom of
position cable track and cables to facilitate secondary door removal.
f. Remove bottom half cover plate from receptacle side of secondary door.
g. Remove lock bolt linkages, as required, to expose LS1 lock bolts extended (Figure 5-17, 46) and/or LS2 lock
bolts retracted (47) sensitive switch(es).
h. Remove two screws holding sensitive switch (4) to mounting bracket.
NOTE
For replacement of LS1 lock bolts extended sensitive switch, perform steps i and j, then
proceed to step m. For replacement of LS2 lock bolts retracted sensitive switch, proceed to
step k.
i. Disconnect LS1 NO and LS1 COM terminal interconnect wires from sensitive switch terminals. Position wiring
for ease of switch replacement.
j. Connect LS1 NO and LS1 COM terminal interconnect wires on replacement sensitive switch terminals.
k. Disconnect LS2 NO and LS2 COM terminal interconnect wires from sensitive switch terminals. Position wiring
for ease of switch replacement.
l. Connect LS1 NO and LS1 COM terminal interconnect wires on replacement sensitive switch terminals.
Lockout could occur. All parts of lock mechanism shall be properly reconnected. Failure to
m. Before installing bottom plate, ensure all lock bolt connecting links (19) and other parts of locking mechanism are
properly connected and all screws are tight.
Change 10 5-69
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Lockout could occur if connector link screws work loose during lock bolt operation. Screws
have nylon insert in the threads to make screw self-locking. Failure to lock screws into place
could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
Screws that can be fully installed by hand shall be locked in place with threadlocker.
n. Installation is reverse of removal. During connecting link (Figure 5-17, 19) to lock bolt (23) reassembly, attempt
to install screws (24) by hand. If screws can be fully installed by hand, remove screw, apply threadlocker (Table
2-2) to threads, and reinstall screw. Tighten screws with allen wrench. Document each screw that requires sealant
for future replacement.
n1. **NSP** Perform secondary door security pin inspection in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.4.
o. Before installing bottom half cover plate, reconnect cable track, both secondary door cables, and adjust sensitive
switch in accordance with Paragraph 7.1.1.
5.7.1.14 Secondary Door Cable and Cable Track Replacement. Two secondary door interface cables are attached to
the bottom of the secondary door and maintained within a replaceable cable track. Cable W3005 (BA22899A) connects to the
J7 connector on the bottom of the secondary door and interfaces with the IZ security loop carrying a 24-Vdc signal for
secondary door combination lock limit switches LS3 and LS4. Cable W1 (BA22929A) connects to the J1 connector on the
bottom of the secondary door and carries 24-Vdc signal and control circuits which interface the secondary door
electromechanical assemblies, security pin sensitive switch SW1, and lock bolts extended/retracted limit switches LS1/LS2
with the secondary door wiring and control set. Power removal is not required for removing either secondary door cable or
replacement of cable track. Replacement of secondary door cables is accomplished in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.14.1.
Replacement of secondary door cable track is accomplished in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.14.2.
5.7.1.14.1 Secondary Door Cable Replacement.
a. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to MAINTENANCE position. On SDCA
front panel, yellow MAINTENANCE (9) indicator illuminates, and 10-second intermittent audible alarm signals
change of mode.
b. If required, using EMA jog switch, raise secondary door to facilitate ease of maintenance.

NOTE
c. On EMA gearbox assembly, engage EMA gearbox safety pin IAW T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ). An intermittent
audible alarm signals change of mode.
5-70 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Damage to cables could occur. Ensure minimum-bend diameter limitations for intrasite
cables is maintained in accordance with applicable T.O. 21M-LGM30( )-2-21-( ) through-
out these procedures. Failure comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
Throughout cable removal and reinstallation, cable ties, tiedowns, rope, or equivalent may be
used to secure cable(s) in cable track to facilitate ease of maintenance, as required.
d. Disconnect secondary door cable W1 P1 from the secondary door J-box (URD 10499) J1.
Change 10 5-70.1/(5-70.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
e. Disconnect secondary door cable W3005 P6 from secondary door IZ J-box (URD 11405) J6.
f. Disconnect secondary door cable W1 P2 from the secondary door connector J2.
g. Disconnect secondary door cable W3005 P7 from the secondary door connector J7.
h. On secondary door cable track (Figure 5-18, 6) open each of the cable track chain links (7) to expose secondary
door cables.
i. At the secondary door side of the cable track, cut upper cable wire tie (1) securing cables into cable track.
j. Carefully lower secondary door cable(s) from cable track by supporting both cables. When cable(s) have been
sufficiently lowered to permit cutting LER wall side wire tie, cut tie and remove cable clamps and cable(s).
k. Allowing enough slack in cable for proper connection of lower connector(s), install replacement cable(s) to LER
wall side of cable track. Temporarily secure cable in place in cable track and adjust as required for proper fit.
l. With replacement cable(s) adjusted for ease of connection of LER wall side connectors, install permanent wire tie
at LER wall end of cable track. Position and route replacement cable(s) in cable track and close cable track chain
links (7), as required, while working cable into track. Continue routing cable(s) until all but the last two chain
links have been closed.
m. At secondary door end of cable track, verify that secondary door cables have sufficient slack to permit connection
of connectors, then install permanent wire tie. Close last two cable track chain links.
n. Connect secondary door cable W1 P2 to secondary door connector J2.
o. Connect secondary door cable W3005 P7 to secondary door connector J7.
p. Connect secondary door cable W1 P1 to secondary door J-box (URD 10499) J1.
q. Connect secondary door cable W3005 P6 to secondary door IZ J-box (URD 11405) J6.
r. Install cable clamps on LER wall.
s. Inspect cable track. Verify that all cable track chain links are closed, track is routed to permit secondary door
movement, permanent wire ties secure cables at both ends of track, and enough slack has been left in secondary
door cables to permit ease of installation and removal of four cable connectors. Adjust, as required.
t. Ensure area beneath secondary door is clear of all tools and equipment.
u. On EMA gearbox assembly, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
v. Using EMA jog switch, carefully raise and lower secondary door while observing secondary door cable track,
cables, and cable track. Verify that all components are functioning smoothly without any binding of secondary
door cables or track. If adjustment is required, return to step a and repeat steps as required.
NOTE
If no further maintenance is required, proceed to step w; otherwise, return to maintenance
being accomplished.
w. If no further maintenance is required, on SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to
OPERATION position. On SDCA front panel, yellow MAINTENANCE (9) indicator extinguishes, green OPERA-
TION (11) indicator illuminates, and 10-second intermittent audible alarm signals change of mode.
x. Perform secondary access system functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
Change 4 5-71
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.7.1.14.2 Secondary Door Cable Track Replacement.

a. Prepare secondary door cable track for removal, in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.14.1, steps a through c.
Damage to cables could occur. Ensure minimum-bend diameter limitations for intrasite
cables is maintained in accordance with applicable T.O. 21M-LGM30( )-2-21-( ) through-
out these procedures. Failure comply could result in equipment damage.
b. At LER wall side of cable track (Figure 5-18, 6), open first cable track chain link (7) to expose cable wire tie (1)
and cut wire tie to permit movement of cables.
Secondary door cable track and cable assembly is heavy and awkward. Use care when
loosening and removing LER-2 wall and secondary door cable track mounting brackets to
ensure cable track and cables are supported. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury.
c. At LER wall side of cable track, while supporting weight of cable track and cable assembly, remove four screws
(9) securing cable track to LER wall mount (2). Retain hardware for reinstallation.
d. At secondary door side of cable track, open first cable track chain link to expose cable wire tie and while sup-
porting cables, cut wire tie to permit movement of cables.
e. At secondary door side of cable track, while supporting weight of cable track and cable assembly, remove four
screws securing cable track to bottom of the secondary door. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
NOTE
Secondary door cable track and cables may be removed (in accordance with Paragraph
5.7.1.14.1) from LER-2 at discretion of the team chief and repaired topside.
f. Remove defective cable track by opening all remaining cable track chain links.
g. On replacement cable track, open all cable track chain links.
h. Carefully move cables W1 (11) and W3005 (13) into replacement cable track. Ensure cables have sufficient slack
at either end of replacement cable track to permit cable connector connection.
i. Leaving the cable track chain links at both ends of track open, carefully close the remaining cable track chain
links.
j. Using four screws, install cable track mounting bracket (5) on bottom of secondary door.
k. Install permanent wire tie at secondary door end of cable track to secure cables in track, then close cable track
chain link.
l. While supporting cables and track, carefully lift and position LER wall side of cable track and cable assembly.
m. Using four screws, install cable track mounting bracket on LER wall mount.
n. Install permanent wire tie at LER wall end of cable track to secure cables in track, then close cable track chain
link.
o. On EMA, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
5-72 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.7.1.15 Linear Actuator Replacement.

b. Using EMA jog switch, raise secondary door to facilitate secondary door maintenance.

prior to performing maintenance. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
NOTE
c. On EMA gearbox assembly, engage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ). A
10-second intermittent audible alarm signals change of mode.
d. Disconnect both cables from the bottom of the secondary door.
position cable track and cables to facilitate secondary door bottom plate removal.
f. Remove both secondary door bottom cover halves.
g. Disconnect actuator electrical cable BA22830 P1 (Figure 5-21, 5) from J1 (11) on linear actuator and remove
wire tie.
h. On faulty linear actuator, remove cotter pin (9) and linear actuator mounting plate (10) from base of the linear
actuator. Discard cotter pin and retain retaining plate for reinstallation.
i. On faulty linear actuator, remove cap screw (13) retaining the actuator arm to the inner diameter of the lock bolt
hub. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
j. Remove defective linear actuator from secondary door.
k. Position replacement linear actuator in secondary door and secure in place using linear actuator retaining plate (7)
and new cotter pin.
l. On replacement linear actuator, install cap screw on the actuator arm securing it to inner diameter of lock bolt
hub.
m. Connect actuator electrical cable BA22830 P1 (5) to J1 on replacement linear actuator, and using wire tie, secure
cable to actuator.
NOTE
Leave bottom halves of secondary door off and clear of work area beneath secondary door
until functional check of replacement components has been performed in accordance with
Table 4-4.
n. (Deleted)
o. (Deleted)
p. (Deleted)
q. Perform functional checkout of secondary door electromechanical assembly in accordance with Table 4-4.
Change 10 5-73
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
r. (Deleted)
s. (Deleted)
t. (Deleted)
u. (Deleted)
v. (Deleted)
w. (Deleted)
x. (Deleted)
5.7.1.16 Actuator Locking Bar Replacement.
b. Using EMA jog switch, raise secondary door to facilitate secondary door maintenance.

NOTE
d. Disconnect both cables from the bottom of the secondary door.
position cable track and cables to facilitate secondary door bottom plate removal.
f. Remove both secondary door bottom cover halves.
g. Remove lock bolt connecting link (Figure 5-17, 19) from vicinity of actuator locking bar (75) to facilitate mainte-
nance.
h. Disconnect electrical cable BA22830 P2 (Figure 5-21, 25) from J1 on actuator locking bar (18).
i. Remove setscrew (Figure 5-17, 11), shoulder screw (13), and actuator unlocking lever (12).
j. On faulty actuator locking bar (Figure 5-21, 18) remove four bolts (26). Retain hardware for reinstallation.
k. Carefully remove defective actuator locking bar from secondary door.
l. Install replacement actuator locking bar using four bolts removed in step j.
m. On replacement actuator locking bar, connect electrical cable BA22830 P2 (25) to J1.
n. Reinstall actuator unlocking lever (Figure 5-17, 12) with shoulder screw (13) ensuring both slotted ends of lever
engage corresponding pins on unlocking cam (10) and actuator locking bar (75). Verify cam unlocking lever (27)
is not binding on shoulder screw, then tighten setscrew (11).
5-74 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Connector link screws could work loose during lock bolt operation. Screws have nylon insert
in the threads to make screw self-locking. Failure to lock screws into place could result in
lockout.
NOTE
threadlocker.
o. Swing connecting links (19) into position and attempt to install screws (24) by hand. If screw(s) can be fully
installed by hand, remove screw(s), apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to threads, and reinstall screw(s). Tighten
screw(s) with allen wrench. Document each screw that requires threadlocker for future replacement.
NOTE
Leave bottom halves of secondary door off and clear of work area beneath secondary door
until functional check of replaced components have been performed in accordance with Table
4-4.
p. (Deleted)
q. (Deleted)
r. (Deleted)
s. (Deleted)
t. (Deleted)
u. (Deleted)
v. (Deleted)
w. (Deleted)
x. Perform secondary door electromechanical assembly functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-4.
Change 10 5-75
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-16. Secondary Door Removal Shoring
5-76
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-17. Replacement of Secondary Door Components (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 4 5-77
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-17. Replacement of Secondary Door Components (Sheet 2)
5-78 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-17. Replacement of Secondary Door Components (Sheet 3)
5-79
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-18. Secondary Door Cables and Cable Track
5-80 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-19. Secondary Door Transportation
5-81
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-20. EMA Gearbox Safety Pin Assembly
5-82
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-21. Secondary Door Electromechanical Assemblies
5-83
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL ACTUATOR SYSTEM.

5.8.1 EMA Assembly Replacement. The EMA assembly replacement consists of replacement of EMA gearbox, electric
motor and brake, and ballscrew assembly as a single unit. The EMA assembly weighs approximately 2,000 pounds.
a. Perform secondary door removal in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.1.
b. Perform power isolation of EMA in accordance with Table 5-3.
c. If installed, remove secondary door shoring (Figure 5-16) to facilitate removal of the EMA.
d. On EMA motor J-box (Figure 5-22, 9), loosen and loosen six cover plate fasteners (8). Remove cover plate and
retain cover plate and hardware.
e. In EMA motor J-box (9), disconnect and tag L1, L2, L3 (detail A), and ground wires.
f. On EMA motor J-box, loosen cable grip (7) and remove conduit (5). Pull cables and conduit from EMA motor
J-box (9) and position behind EMA to facilitate EMA removal.
g. On top rear of EMA, locate incremental encoder (11) and remove three screws securing encoder buss adapter
(10).
h. Carefully unplug encoder buss adapter by pulling upward from encoder body.
NOTE
When removing encoder conduits, ensure both incremental and absolute encoder conduits are
tagged to facilitate ease of reinstallation.
i. On side of EMA, remove and tag encoder conduit and position conduit and encoder buss adapter to facilitate
EMA removal.
j. On bottom rear of EMA, locate absolute encoder and remove three screws securing encoder buss adapter.
k. Carefully unplug encoder buss adapter by pulling downward from encoder body.
l. On side of EMA, remove and tag encoder conduit and position conduit and encoder buss adapter to facilitate
EMA removal.
m. On top of EMA gearbox (25), carefully disconnect electrical plug from photoelectric sensor (26) and move cable
to facilitate EMA removal.
NOTE
When removing EMA mounting plate bolts, note position of grounding cable removed to
facilitate reinstallation on replacement EMA.
n. On EMA mounting flange (21), loosen and remove six mounting bolts (16), washers (19) and EMA ground strap
(23). Note position of ground strap. Move ground strap and retain mounting bolts to facilitate reinstallation.
o. Using EMA lifting sling set (Table 2-1), install four lifting sling eyebolts on EMA lifting points (Figure 5-22, 12).
Adjust EMA lifting sling, as required, to ensure a level lift of EMA assembly.
NOTE
Ensure replacement EMA assembly and wood blocks for shipping of EMA assembly being
replaced are prepositioned topside, as required, to facilitate removal and replacement of
component.
p. Position crane above personnel access shaft and lower crane hook, as required.
q. Connect crane hook to EMA lifting sling attach point and take up cable slack, as required.
5-84 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Ballscrew mounted on EMA gearbox could break free of EMA assembly. EMA assembly
shall be maintained in the upright, level position at all times. Do not tilt EMA assembly when
lifting, moving, or handling. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
r. Carefully raise faulty EMA assembly through personnel access shaft and lower onto propositioned pallet. When
positioned, disconnect crane from lifting sling.
s. Remove lifting sling and eyebolts from faulty EMA assembly.
NOTE
Retain bolts used to secure replacement EMA assembly on shipping pallet for use when
positioning assembly on anchor plate in LER-2.
t. Unbolt replacement EMA assembly from shipping pallet, and retain shipping bolts.
u. Using EMA lifting sling (Table 2-1), install four lifting sling eyebolts on replacement EMA lifting points (Figure
5-22, 12). Adjust EMA lifting sling, as required, to ensure a level lift of EMA assembly.
v. Position crane above replacement EMA assembly and lower crane hook, as required.
w. Connect crane hook to EMA lifting sling attach point and take up cable slack, as required.
x. Raise replacement EMA assembly and using crane, position on 4- by 4-inch blocks to permit lubrication of bot-
tom of mounting flange.
y. In LER-2, visually inspect EMA assembly anchor plate (20). Ensure surface is clean and clear of corrosion.
z. Using crane, move EMA assembly on 4- by 4-inch blocks, as required, and apply a thin coat of grease (Table
2-2) to the bottom face of the EMA assembly mounting flange (Figure 5-22, 21).
aa. Carefully raise replacement EMA assembly from shipping pallet and lower into LER-2 through personnel access
shaft.
ab. With load suspended in LER-2, carefully guide EMA assembly down to approximately 1 inch above anchor plate
(20). Rotate EMA assembly, as required, to align manual drive funnel (30) to final installation position.
Damage to EMA assembly mounting bolts could occur. To avoid damaging EMA assembly
mounting bolts, use two of the bolts that had secured the replacement EMA assembly to
shipping pallet when aligning EMA assembly to anchor plate. Once EMA assembly is
properly aligned on anchor plate, shipping bolts shall be removed and replaced with EMA
assembly mounting bolts. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
ac. With load suspended so that EMA assembly can be positioned as required, align EMA assembly mounting flange
bolt holes with anchor plate and start one of the EMA shipping bolts. Ensure all bolt holes are properly aligned
and start a second shipping bolt.
ad. Ensure all mounting flange bolt holes are aligned and lower EMA assembly onto anchor plate.
ae. Remove and discard two EMA assembly shipping bolts used to align mounting flange with anchor plate.
af. Disconnect crane hook from EMA lifting sling, and raise and stow crane hook.
ag. Disconnect and remove EMA lifting sling from replacement EMA assembly.
5-85
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Secondary door lockout could occur. Proper alignment of EMA assembly manual drive
funnel is critical to alternate operation of the secondary door. Ensure proper alignment of
manual drive funnel before completing installation. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
ah. Using EMA orientation guide (Table 2-1) ensure all anchor plate and EMA assembly mounting flange holes are
aligned and manual drive funnel is positioned correctly. Install EMA assembly mounting flange bolts (16), wash-
ers (19), and ground strap (23). Torque bolts to 800 (±100) inch-pounds.
ai. Using milliohmmeter (Table 2-1), perform bonding check between ground strap and LER ground point (Figure
5-22, 24). Indication should be less that 0.001 ohm. If bonding resistance is greater than 0.001 ohm, remove any
nonconductive deposits on contact surfaces and repeat check.
aj. On EMA gearbox (25), carefully connect electrical plug to gearbox safety pin photoelectric sensor (26).
ak. On EMA motor J-box (9), loosen six cover plate fasteners (8). Remove cover plate and retain hardware for rein-
stallation.
al. Install incremental and absolute encoder conduits on side of EMA assembly.
am. On incremental encoder (11), slide encoder buss adapter (10) onto terminal.
an. On incremental encoder, install three screws to secure encoder buss adapter.
ao. On absolute encoder, slide encoder buss adapter onto terminal.
ap. On absolute encoder, install three screws to secure encoder buss adapter.
aq. On top of EMA motor J-box, push motor and brake wiring through J-box conduit opening and reinstall conduit
on top of EMA motor J-box.
ar. In EMA motor J-box, connect break and motor wiring, L1, L2, L3 and ground (detail A) wires.
as. Using six EMA cover plate fasteners, install EMA motor J-box cover plate.
at. Perform secondary door installation in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.2.
au. Verify manual drive alignment to secondary door access hole using bottom segment of secondary door emergency
drive shaft (Table 2-1).
av. Perform EMA power restoration in accordance with Table 5-4.
NOTE
Ensure secondary door homing is performed in accordance with Paragraph 7.1.2 while
performing secondary access system functional checkout.
aw. Perform secondary door function checkout to include secondary door homing in accordance with Table 4-1.
5.8.1.1 EMA Motor Assembly Replacement. EMA motor assembly is located on top of EMA gearbox and consists of
EMA motor and brake assemblies. The following procedure shall be accomplished for replacement of EMA motor assembly:
a. Perform secondary door removal in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.1.
b. Perform EMA power removal in accordance with Table 5-3.
c. On bottom of EMA brake shield (Figure 5-22, 1), loosen and remove two lower shield mounting bolts (3). Retain
hardware for reinstallation.
d. On upper EMA motor assembly, loosen and remove two upper brake shield mounting bolts. Remove shield and
retain shield and hardware for reinstallation.
e. On front of EMA motor assembly, loosen swivel clamp nut and disconnect manual brake release (2) rod.
f. On EMA motor J-box (9), loosen six cover plate fasteners (8). Remove cover plate and retain cover plate and
hardware.
g. In EMA motor J-box, disconnect and tag L1, L2, L3, BRK1, BRK2, suppressor (metal oxide varistor), and
ground (detail A) wires.
5-86
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
h. Remove jamnut holding left conduit on EMA motor J-box and pull motor cable and wiring from J-box.
i. Reinstall J-box cover plate.
j. On EMA motor flange, remove four EMA mounting bolts (14) and lockwashers (15). Retain hardware for rein-
stallation.
k. On top of EMA motor assembly, attach two hooks of nylon sling (Table 2-1) to motor assembly.
NOTE
Ensure replacement EMA motor assembly and wood blocks (Table 2-1) for shipping of EMA
motor assembly being replaced are prepositioned topside as required to facilitate removal and
replacement of component.
l. If not previously accomplished, position crane above personnel access shaft and lower crane hook, as required.
Damage to EMA system components could occur. When attaching crane, do not attempt to
lift EMA motor assembly until directed. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
m. Connect crane hook to nylon sling lifting ring and take up cable slack, as required.
NOTE
EMA motor assembly weighs approximately 500 pounds.
n. Using crane, carefully lift faulty EMA motor assembly through personnel access shaft, position for return to
MSB, as required, and remove lifting sling.
o. On replacement EMA motor assembly, inspect replacement motor shaft for corrosion.
p. On replacement EMA motor assembly shaft, apply a thin coat of grease (Table 2-2).
q. On replacement EMA motor assembly, attach two hooks of nylon sling (Table 2-1) to motor assembly.
r. Connect crane hook to nylon sling lifting ring and take up cable slack, as required.
s. Using crane, carefully lower replacement EMA motor assembly down personnel access shaft and carefully posi-
tion on EMA.
t. Apply a thin coat of grease (Table 2-2) to four EMA motor mounting bolts (Figure 5-22, 14) and lockwashers
(15). Preposition hardware for ease of reinstallation of replacement EMA motor assembly.
NOTE
When aligning EMA motor mounting flange to EMA, the EMA brake could inhibit
movement. If required, brake can be manually released by pressing down on manual release
rod and rotating motor, as required.
u. **HCP** On replacement EMA motor assembly, align flange and install four EMA motor mounting bolts and
lockwashers. Torque bolts to 2,700 (±100) inch-pounds.
v. On replacement EMA motor lifting sling, disconnect crane and raise crane hook from personnel access shaft.
w. On replacement EMA motor, remove lifting sling.
x. On replacement EMA motor J-box (9), loosen six cover plate fasteners (8). Remove cover plate and retain cover
plate and hardware.
Change 10 5-87
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
y. Thread replacement motor and brake wiring into EMA motor J-box and reinstall conduit and jam nut on left side
on EMA motor J-box.
z. In EMA motor J-box, connect ground, L1, L2, L3, BRK1, and BRK2 wires and reinstall suppressor (metal oxide
varistor).
aa. On EMA motor J-box, reinstall J-box cover plate using six cover plate fasteners.
ab. On back of EMA motor assembly, connect manual release rod (2) and reinstall swivel clamp and nut.
ac. Position brake shield (1) and reinstall two lower shield mounting bolts (3).
ad. Reinstall two upper shield mounting bolts.
ae. Perform EMA power restoration in accordance with Table 5-4.
af. Perform secondary door installation in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.2.
5.8.1.2 EMA Brake Assembly Replacement. EMA brake assembly is located on top of EMA motor. The following
procedure shall be accomplished for replacement of EMA brake assembly:
b. Using SDCA or LER-2 EMA jog switch, raise secondary door to facilitate maintenance.

NOTE
Electrical hazard is present. Motor disconnect switch (DISC1) shall be locked out and tagged
prior to performing any maintenance in the vicinity of EMA motor or gears. Failure to
d. Perform EMA power removal in accordance with Table 5-3.
e. On top of EMA motor (Figure 5-22, 6), locate faulty EMA brake assembly (4).
f. On bottom of brake shield (1), loosen and remove two lower shield mounting bolts (3). Retain hardware for rein-
stallation.
g. On top of brake assembly, loosen and remove two upper shield mounting bolts and stand-offs. Remove shield and
retain shield and hardware for reinstallation.
h. On EMA motor assembly, loosen upper swivel clamp nut and disconnect manual brake release (2) rod.
i. On EMA motor J-box (9), loosen six cover plate fasteners (8). Remove cover plate and retain shield and hardware
for reinstallation.
j. In EMA motor J-box, carefully disconnect and tag suppressor (metal oxide varistor), BRK1, BRK2 and ground
(detail A) wires.
k. On top of EMA motor J-box, loosen cable grip (7) and pull brake cable from J-box.
l. On top of brake assembly, loosen and remove four remaining brake mounting bolts and lockwashers. Retain hard-
ware for reinstallation.
5-88
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
EMA brake assembly weighs approximately 85 pounds.
m. Lifting upwards and manually releasing brake, remove faulty EMA brake assembly from EMA motor.
n. On EMA brake assembly, manually align internal gear teeth, as required, to facilitate installation of replacement
brake.
o. Align replacement EMA brake assembly to EMA motor, manually disengaging brake using brake lever, and lower
brake assembly until it is fully mated with motor.
NOTE
Two of the six allen screws that mount EMA brake assembly to motor are used to mount
brake shield assembly and shall be retained for installation when shield is replaced.
p. Install four brake mounting bolts and lockwashers removed in step l.
q. On top of EMA motor J-box, thread EMA brake assembly cable through top of cable grip and position cable in-
side J-box.
r. Crimp connectors to new brake wiring, as required, and connect ground, BRK2, and BRK1 (detail A), and sup-
pressor (metal oxide varistor) to EMA motor J-box terminals.
s. On top of EMA motor J-box, tighten cable grip.
t. **HCP** Inspect EMA motor J-box RFI gasket and mating surface in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
u. On EMA motor J-box, reinstall J-box cover plate using six cover plate fasteners.
v. Connect EMA brake manual release rod to upper swivel clamp nut.
w. Perform EMA power restoration in accordance with Table 5-4.
x. Perform EMA brake adjustment in accordance with Paragraph 7.1.3.
y. Position brake shield and reinstall two lower shield mounting bolts.
z. Reinstall two upper shield mounting bolts and ensure four brake mounting bolts are secured.
aa. On EMA gearbox assembly, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
ab. Using EMA jog switch, raise and lower secondary door and observe EMA brake functionality. Readjust brake
linkage, if required.
5.8.1.3 EMA Gearbox Safety Pin Photoelectric Sensor Replacement. The photoelectric sensor for the EMA gearbox
safety pin in mounted on top of the EMA gearbox beside the gearbox safety pin. The following procedure shall be
accomplished for replacement of the EMA gearbox safety pin photoelectric sensor.
a. If required, jog secondary door to facilitate maintenance.

NOTE
b. On EMA gearbox, engage gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
c. On EMA gearbox, locate faulty gearbox safety pin photoelectric sensor (Figure 5-20, 5).
d. On faulty gearbox safety pin photoelectric sensor, disconnect miniature quick-disconnect cable (8). Position cable
to facilitate removal of photoelectric sensor.
Change 8 5-89
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
e. On safety pin photoelectric sensor, disconnect two glass fiber optic cables (4 and 12). Position cables to facilitate
removal of photoelectric sensor.
f. On top of EMA gearbox, remove two screws (6) securing the photoelectric sensor to the top of EMA gearbox.
Retain hardware for reinstallation of replacement photoelectric sensor.
g. Position replacement photoelectric sensor on top of EMA gearbox, and using two screws removed in step f, install
and tighten replacement photoelectric sensor.
h. On replacement photoelectric sensor, connect and tighten two fiber optic cables.
i. On top of EMA gearbox, verify that two fiber optic cables are routed to the top of gearbox safety pin shaft collar
(15) to ensure smooth operation of the gearbox safety pin.
j. Verify that gearbox safety pin shaft collar and fiber optic cable connections are securely fitted to top of gearbox
safety pin. Tighten cable connections and/or collar setscrew (1), if required.
k. On replacement photoelectric sensor, connect miniature quick-disconnect cable.
l. On replacement photoelectric sensor, verify that green power LED is ON steady, red LED is OFF.
m. On EMA gearbox, disengage gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
n. On EMA gearbox, engage gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
o. If all maintenance is complete, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-
10-( ).
5.8.1.4 EMA Absolute/Incremental Encoder Replacement. There are two encoders located on the EMA gearbox. The
incremental encoder is located on the top of the EMA gearbox below the EMA motor J-box and the absolute encoder is located
underneath the EMA gearbox. The following procedure shall be used to replace either the absolute or incremental encoder:
a. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to the MAINTENANCE position. On
SDCA front panel, green OPERATION (11) indicator extinguishes, yellow MAINTENANCE (9) indicator illumi-
nates, and ten-second intermittent audible alarm beep signals change of mode.
b. Using EMA jog switch, raise secondary door to facilitate encoder maintenance.
Performing maintenance under an insecure secondary door is hazardous. Ensure EMA

gearbox safety pin is engaged and system enters enhanced maintenance mode prior to
performing maintenance under the secondary door. Failure to comply could result in
NOTE
When EMA gearbox safety pin is engaged system enters enhanced maintenance mode and all
secondary door movement functions are locked out. Ensure secondary door is properly
d. On EMA gearbox locate faulty encoder (Figure 5-23, 4 or 5).
NOTE
For replacement of incremental encoder, perform steps e through h, otherwise, proceed to
step i.
e. On EMA motor J-Box (8), loosen six cover plate fasteners (7) and open J-box to access EMA motor wiring.
5-90
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
f. Disconnect EMA motor wiring from EMA motor J-box terminals as follows:
Wire From Terminal

23-4 L1
24-4 L2
25-4 L3
26-4 Ground
Damage to wiring could occur. Use care to ensure EMA brake wiring is not stretched or
damaged when removing and repositioning EMA motor J-box. Failure to comply could result
in equipment damage.
g. Inside EMA motor J-box, remove four allen-head screws securing J-box to motor.
h. Carefully move EMA motor J-box to facilitate incremental encoder (5) repair.
i. On the faulty encoder connector (16), loosen three captive screws (15) and carefully pull buss adapter (20) from
top of encoder body, unplugging buss adapter.
j. Carefully move the encoder connector and the attached conduit to facilitate encoder replacement.
k. On the faulty encoder, use allen wrench to remove the four encoder mounting screws (18) and lockwashers. Re-
tain hardware for reinstallation.
l. Through encoder mouse hole (17), locate the encoder coupler assembly (12, 13, 14). On inboard coupler farthest
from the gearbox assembly, carefully loosen setscrew on encoder shaft coupler (14) and remove coupler and
spacer (13).
m. Visually inspect couplers and coupler interface for evidence of damage to mechanical components. Replace any
damaged components, as required.
NOTE
Replacement encoder assembly is equipped with a replacement connector and buss adapter
card. Retain these replacement components for possible use in step s.
n. On replacement encoder, prepare encoder for installation by loosening three captive screws and carefully pulling
replacement connector and buss adapter card (22) from top of encoder body (19), while unplugging buss adapter.
o. Inspect replacement encoder interface shaft, encoder, and spacer coupler, if required.
p. Loosely install encoder coupler with pins facing away from the encoder, then install coupler spacer on coupler.
Damage to encoder could occur. When aligning encoder shaft, minimize angular or parallel
alignment. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
q. Carefully align replacement encoder shaft, couplers and coupler spacer and install replacement encoder assembly.
Adjust alignment of couplers, as required, and tighten setscrews.
r. On replacement encoder, reinstall four mounting screws and lockwashers securing encoder to the EMA gearbox.
Torque to 40 (±2) inch-pounds.
5-91
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
• Damaged or corroded buss adapter card or wiring could result in improper operation of
the secondary access system. Thoroughly inspect encoder buss adapter card and all wiring
prior to installation. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
• Damage to secondary access system wiring and control set could occur. If either encoder
buss adapter card requires replacement, a full secondary access system shutdown is
required. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
If installed connector and buss adapter card are serviceable, replacement of these components
are not required.
s. Visually inspect encoder connector buss adapter card, serial interface buss adapter (20), terminal board (23), wir-
ing, and terminals for evidence of damage to circuit board or connector, corrosion, burning, or discoloration. If
required, replace buss card assembly in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.4.1, then return to step s; otherwise, pro-
ceed to next step.
t. Position encoder connector as required and carefully plug buss adapter onto encoder body. Tighten three captive
screws securing buss adapter connector to encoder body.
An insecure secondary door is hazardous. Ensure all personnel, tools, and equipment are
clear of the corridor beneath the secondary door before disengaging the EMA gearbox safety
pin. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage, personnel injury, or death.
u. Ensure secondary door corridor is free of personnel, tools, and equipment.
Damage to secondary access system could occur. If absolute encoder was disconnected,
removed, or replaced, secondary door homing is required in accordance with Paragraph
7.1.2. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
v. Perform secondary door functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1. If absolute encoder was disconnected,
removed, or replaced, ensure secondary door homing in accordance with Paragraph 7.1.2 is accomplished while
performing secondary door functional checkout.
5.8.1.4.1 EMA Absolute/Incremental Encoder Buss Adapter Card Replacement. Replacement of an encoder buss
card is required if damage to circuit board or connector, corrosion, burning, or discoloration is found during encoder
replacement. Replace encoder buss card as follows:
a. If not previously accomplished, prepare for encoded maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.1.4, steps a
through c.
b. Perform secondary access system shutdown in accordance with Table 5-1.
c. Prepare encoder for buss adapter card (Figure 5-23, 22) replacement in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.1.4, steps d
through j.
d. On encoder connector (16) requiring repair, loosen outer conduit cable nut to permit removal of cable from
connector.
e. On faulty buss adapter card (22), remove and tag wiring to buss adapter terminal board (23).
f. Carefully pull buss adapter wiring from connector.
g. Obtain replacement encoder connector and buss adapter removed in Paragraph 5.8.1.4 and carefully slide encoder
cable wiring into connector. Tighten conduit cable nut.
5-92
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
h. On replacement buss adapter terminal board, install wiring removed and tagged in step e.
i. Reinstall buss adapter connector on encoder body (19) in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.1.4, steps s and t.
j. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
k. Complete encoder buss adapter card replacement in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.1.4, steps u and v.
5.8.1.5 EMA Gearbox Safety Pin Replacement. The following procedure is used to replace the EMA gearbox safety
pin.
a. If required, jog or manually raise secondary door to facilitate maintenance.
Performing maintenance under an insecure secondary door is hazardous. Ensure secondary

door shoring is installed prior to performing maintenance. Failure to comply could result in
b. Install secondary door shoring per Paragraph 5.7.1.1, steps e through h as required.
c. Locate faulty EMA safety pin assemby (Figure 5-22, 27) remove the 4 screws securing the detent shaft to the
EMA assembly.
d. Carefully remove EMA safety pin detent shaft (Figure 5-20, 3) taking care not to damage the fiber optic cables.
e. Remove the safety pin by removing the safety pin handle.
Excessive grease can migrate to top of safety pin housing and block fiber optic cables,
resulting in loss of safety pin status indications.
f. Lightly grease lower portion of replacement safety pin with general purpose grease (Table 2-2) sparingly, to avoid
plugging the fiber optic cables.
g. Install replacement safety pin in housing (Figure 5-20, 3).
h. Reinstall safety pin handle.
i. Replace safety pin housing ensuring the spring is placed over the lower half of pin and reinstall screws removed
in step c. Torque screws to 185 (±5) inch-pounds.
j. Ensure proper operation of the safety pin per T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10 by performing procedures to engage and
disengage safety pin.
k. Ensure safety pin is properly engaged per T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10.
l. Remove secondary door shoring.
m. If all maintenance is complete, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10.
5.8.2 Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Assembly. The secondary door J-box houses the lock bolt drive, connector
J1, and terminal board TB1 and interfaces with the secondary door through cable W1. The lock bolt drive is replaced in
accordance with Paragraph 5.8.2.1. Additional repairable components include connector J1, terminal board TB1, and TB1 fuse
replacement which are repaired or replaced in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.2.2, schematic diagrams in FO-7, and Figure
5-24.
5.8.2.1 Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Lock Bolt Drive M2 Replacement.
a. Perform secondary access system shutdown in accordance with Table 5-1.
b. On secondary door J-box (Figure 5-24, 2) (URD 10499), loosen eight J-box cover captive fasteners (1) and slide
clamps to open J-box.
Change 10 5-93
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Electrical power could be present. Ensure green LED on motor drive assembly is
extinguished before performing maintenance. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury.
c. On lock bolt drive M2 (5), verify green LED is extinguished.
d. Remove two mount screws (6) on back panel and slide out lock bolt drive M2.
e. On faulty lock bolt drive M2, disconnect and tag all wiring as follows:
Wire From Terminal

34 B-
33 B+
32 A-
31 A+
30 and 30 (jumper) V-
26 and 26 (Jumper) V+
26 (Jumper) OUT3+
21 OUT3-
30 (Jumper) COM
20 JOG CCW
19 JOG CW
f. On faulty lock bolt drive M2, remove four mounting screws.
g. Carefully remove faulty lock bolt drive assembly by pulling from standoffs.
NOTE
If replacement drive jumper block is installed, perform step h; otherwise, proceed to step i.
h. On replacement lock bolt drive, locate jumper block and verify a jumper is installed on pins 7 and 8. If required,
remove jumper from faulty lock bolt drive and install on replacement.
i. Carefully position replacement lock bolt drive M2 assembly in secondary door J-box, press onto standoffs, and
reinstall four mounting screws.
5-94 Change 6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
j. On replacement lock bolt drive M2, connect wiring as follows:
Wire To Terminal
19 JOG CW
20 JOG CCW
30 (Jumper) COM
21 OUT3-
26 (Jumper) OUT3+
26 and 26 (Jumper) V+
30 and 30 (jumper) V-
31 A+
32 A-
33 B+
34 B-
k. Install replacement lock bolt drive on back panel inside J-box enclosure using two screws.
l. **HCP** Inspect secondary door J-box (URD 10499) RFI gasket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O.
21M-LGM30F-112.
m. Close secondary door J-box cover slide clamps in place and tighten eight J-box cover captive fasteners.
n. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
o. Perform secondary door electromechanical assembly functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-4.
5.8.2.2 Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Component Replacement.
a. Prepare secondary door J-box (Figure 5-24, 2) (URD 10499) for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph
5.8.2.1, steps a through c.
b. Locate faulty component(s) and using schematic diagrams in FO-7 and Figure 5-24, repair or replace compo-
nent(s), as required.
Change 6 5-94.1/(5-94.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
c. Perform secondary door J-box (URD 10499) post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.2.1, steps l
through o.
5.8.3 Motor Drive Cabinet (URD 10496). The MDC consists of an EMI/RFI shielded cabinet. Repairable components
are detailed in Figure 5-25 and Figure 5-26. Identification of MDC circuit breakers, relays and diodes can be found in Table
5-5 and Table 5-6. When opening the MDC, preparation for maintenance procedure shall be performed in accordance with
Paragraph 5.8.3.1. Upon completion of cabinet maintenance, perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph
5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.1 Motor Drive Cabinet Preparation For Maintenance. The following procedure shall be accomplished whenever
the motor drive cabinet is opened.
b. On MDC cabinet, remove belly bands (Figure 5-27) to facilitate access to MDC enclosure.
Hazardous current could be present. MDC cabinet contains capacitors that must discharge
prior to performing maintenance. Do not open MDC until a minimum of 15 minutes has
passed between MDC power removal and opening of MDC. Failure to comply can result in
c. Open MDC enclosure by loosing and sliding eight captive fasteners (Figure 5-25, 2) open. Swing door panel open
on the hinges to permit access to MDC components.
Electrical shock hazard exists. Power filters could hold high charge and shall be discharged
before performing maintenance within the MDC. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury or death.
d. In top of MDC enclosure, locate two power filters (Figure 5-26, 35) and using multimeter, check each for pres-
ence of Vac.
e. Using multimeter set for Vdc, check that power filter terminals to ground indicates less than 1 Vdc. If required,
discharge filters to ground using multimeter or using a 10k ohm/5-watt resistor jumper wire until meter indicates
less than 1 Vdc.
f. Using multimeter set for Vdc, on MDC disconnect switch (DISC1) enclosure, discharge capacitor filters FL3
through FL7 (Figure 5-28, 6) using a 10k ohm ⁄ 5-watt resistor jumper wire until meter indicates less than 1 Vdc.
Check that capacitor filters to ground indicates less than 1 Vdc.
g. Proceed to MDC maintenance being performed.
5.8.3.2 Motor Drive Cabinet Post-Maintenance. The following procedure shall be accomplished whenever motor drive
cabinet has been opened.
a. Verify that interior of MDC enclosure is free of all tools and equipment.
b. **HCP** On inside of motor drive cabinet door, inspect RFI (EMI) gasket and mating surface in accordance
with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
c. **HCP** Swing hinged MDC enclosure door closed ensuring RFI ⁄ EMI gasket and mating surface are in correct
position and clear corrosion.
d. **HCP** Secure MDC enclosure door with eight fastener clamps (Figure 5-25) and torque captive fasteners to
d1. If not previously accomplished, install seven plastic squares (Table 2-2) using adhesive squares (Table 2-2) in po-
sitions indicated in Figure 5-27.
e. **HCP** On MDC cabinet, reinstall cabinet belly bands in accordance with Figure 5-27.
f. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
g. Perform secondary door functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
Change 11 5-95
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.8.3.3 Motor Disconnect Switch (DISC1) Replacement.

a. Perform MDC preparation for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.1.
b. Locate motor disconnect switch (DISC1) (Figure 5-25, 8) on lower right side of MDC.
NOTE
Disconnect switch handle is mounted on disconnect cover panel. Unless damaged, switch
handle shall be left in place and reinstalled on replacement disconnect switch.
c. On exterior of MDC, remove 32 allen cap screws (Figure 5-28, 2) and washers (3) securing motor disconnect
cover panel. Carefully pull motor disconnect switch outer cover plate (1) outward and remove panel and EMI
gasket (4). Retain hardware for reinstallation.
d. Inside motor disconnect switch (DISC1) enclosure, disconnect and tag wiring from the following terminals:
(1) Terminal L1
(2) Terminal L2
(3) Terminal L3
(4) Terminal PE (2 each)
(5) Terminal T1
(6) Terminal T2
(7) Terminal T3
(8) Terminal N (2 each)
e. Inside motor disconnect switch (DISC1) enclosure, remove four disconnect switch mounting screws (12), and re-
move faulty motor disconnect switch (11). Retain hardware for reinstallation.
f. Using four mounting screws, install new disconnect switch assembly inside motor disconnect switch (DISC1) en-
closure.
g. On replacement disconnect switch assembly, connect terminal wiring as follows:
Wire From Terminal

U (Black) L1
V (Black) L2
W (Black) L3
G (Green) PE (Right Side)
26-4 PE (Left Side)
23-4 T1
24-4 T2
25-4 T3
88 (Blue) N (Right Side)
89 (Blue) N (Left Side)
5-96 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
If disconnect switch handle is damaged and requires replacement, proceed to step h;
otherwise, proceed to step l.
h. Remove faulty disconnect switch handle (5) from disconnect switch cover plate.
i. Obtain replacement disconnect switch handle. Measure length of replacement disconnect switch handle and mark
at 3.25 (±0.125) inches.
j. Cut disconnect switch handle shaft to 3.25 (±0.125) inches as marked in previous step i and carefully remove any
sharp or rough edges from replacement handle.
k. Install replacement disconnect switch handle in disconnect switch cover plate.
l. **HCP** Inspect motor disconnect switch DISC1 EMI gasket and MDC enclosure gasket/mating surface in ac-
cordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
m. **HCP** On outside of MDC, aligning disconnect switch handle, install motor disconnect switch DISC1 cover
plate and EMI gasket using 32 allen cap screws and washers. Torque screws to 5 (±1) inch-pounds.
n. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.3.1 MDC Motor Disconnect Switch (DISC1) Capacitor Filters FL3 Through FL7 Replacement.
a. Perform preparation for motor disconnect switch (DISC1) capacitor filter maintenance in accordance with Para-
graph 5.8.3.3, steps a through c.
b. Inside motor disconnect switch (DISC1) enclosure, disconnect and tag wiring from faulty capacitor filter (Figure
5-28, 6).
c. In interior of MDC enclosure, disconnect and tag wiring from faulty capacitor filter.
d. Remove nut and star washer securing faulty capacitor filter to motor disconnect switch enclosure. Remove and
discard faulty filter.
e. Install replacement capacitor filter using nut and star washer.
f. Using multimeter set for resistance, check for continuity between two terminals of replacement capacitor filter.
g. Using multimeter set for resistance, check for continuity between capacitor filter terminal and ground. Resistance
shall be greater than 1M ohm.
h. Reconnect wiring to replacement capacitor filter removed in step b.
i. Complete installation of replacement capacitor filter in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.3, steps l through n.
5.8.3.4 MDC Dual Diode D3 Replacement. The MDC contains a dual diode D3 located on the top left of MDC. The
following procedure shall be performed for replacement of dual diode D3:
b. Locate faulty dual diode D3 (Figure 5-26, 15) in upper left portion of MDC enclosure.
c. On faulty dual diode D3, disconnect and tag wire leads from terminals 1, 2, and 3.
d. Remove two dual diode mounting screws; remove faulty dual diode D3; and retain screws for reinstallation of
replacement dual diode D3.
e. Position replacement dual diode D3 in cabinet and reinstall using two mounting screws removed in step d.
f. On replacement dual diode D3, connect terminal wiring as follows:
Wire To Terminal
2 1
42 2
43 3
g. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5-97
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.8.3.5 MDC Relay K1, K2, or Diode D1, D2 Replacement. The MDC contains two relays, K1 and K2, located in the
top of the MDC enclosure providing voltage for actuating the actuator locking bar solenoid. Each relay is fitted with a diode,
D1 and D2. Perform the following procedure for the replacement of relays K1, K2, or diodes D1 or D2:
b. Locate faulty MDC relay K1 (Figure 5-26, 16) or relay K2 (17) in upper portion of MDC enclosure.
c. If diode only requires replacement, loosen terminals K1A1 and K1A2 for diode D1 or K2A1 and K2A2 for diode
D2, and pull faulty diode from relay then proceed to step g.
d. On faulty relay, loosen terminal screws and remove and tag all terminal wiring and diode. Unless faulty, retain
diode for reinstallation on replacement relay.
e. On faulty relay, remove two relay mounting screws and pull relay outward and away from back of MDC enclo-
sure. Retain screws for reinstallation of replacement relay.
f. Align replacement relay in back of MDC enclosure and install two mounting screws removed in step e. Tighten
as required.
g. If only diode D1 or D2 is replaced, snap replacement diode onto contactor.
h. On replacement diode or relay and diode, connect wiring and/or diode, as follows:
For K1 and ⁄ or D1 For K2 and ⁄ or D2

Wire To Terminal Wire To Terminal
44 K1A1 45 K2A1
Diode D1 + K1A1 Diode D2 + K2A1
1 K1A2 1 K2A2
Diode D1 - K1A2 Diode D2 - K2A2
41 K1A13 40 K2A13
42 K1A14 43 K2A14
i. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.6 MDC Relay K3, K6 Replacement. MDC contains two relays, K3 and K6, located in the top area of the MDC
enclosure. Both K3 and K6 relays are fitted with a varistor module. Perform the following procedure for replacement of K3
and/or K6 relay(s):
b. Locate faulty MDC relay K3 (Figure 5-26, 18) or relay K6 (25) in upper portion of MDC enclosure.
c. If only relay varistor requires replacement, loosen terminals K3A1 and K3A2 for varistor mounted on relay K3,
or K6A1 and K6A2 for varistor mounted on relay K6. Remove faulty varistor, then proceed to step g.
d. On faulty relay, loosen relay terminal screws and remove and tag all wires connected to the relay.
e. Remove varistor module (19) from A1 and A2 terminals of the relay by pulling upward and retain for reinstalla-
tion.
f. On faulty relay, remove two relay mounting screws from top and bottom of the relay and pull relay outward and
away from back of MDC enclosure. Retain screws for reinstallation of replacement relay.
g. Align replacement relay in back of MDC enclosure and install two mounting screws removed in step f. Tighten as
required.
h. If only varistor required replacement, snap replacement varistor onto contactor. Verify that terminal wiring is con-
nected as shown in step i, and tighten varistor, then proceed to step j.
5-98
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
i. On replacement relay, connect wiring and varistor module, as follows:
For K3 Relay For K6 Relay

1 K3A1 28 K6A1
62 K3A2 29 K6A2
Varistor K3A1 Varistor K6A1
Varistor K3A2 Varistor K6A2
37 K3-13 27 K6-13
63 (Jumper) K3-14 26 K6-14
63 (Jumper) K3-24 50L1 K6-23
64 (Jumper) K3-23 46L1 K6-24
64 (Jumper) K3-33 48L3 K6-33
65 (Jumper) K3-34 49L3 K6-34
65 (Jumper) K3-44
30 K3-43
j. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.7 MDC Relay K4/K5 Assembly Replacement. The MDC contains a primary K5 and an auxiliary K4 power
contactor relay. Relay K5 is activated when primary power from [1][3][5] the LDB panel [T9] switchboard SWBD-3< is
present in the MDC, and relay K4 is activated when the MDC is powered from the secondary access system auxiliary
generator topside at the LF. A mechanical interlock situated between the K4 and K5 relays ensures that only one power
contactor relay will be active, and each relay is fitted with an auxiliary contact module and an RC module. The K4 and K5
relays, mechanical interlock, and auxiliary contacts are replaced as an assembly, as follows:
b. Locate faulty MDC relay K4 ⁄ K5 (Figure 5-26, 21, 23) assembly in upper portion of MDC enclosure.
c. If only K4 or K5 RC module requires replacement, loosen terminals K4A1 and K4A2 for RC module on relay
K4, or K5A1 and K5A2 for RC module on relay K5. Remove faulty RC module and proceed to step i.
d. On faulty relay assembly, loosen contactor terminal screws and remove and tag all wires.
e. Remove RC module (22) from A1 and A2 terminals and retain for installation into replacement contactor.
f. On faulty relay assembly, disconnect and tag wiring from auxiliary contact modules (20) terminal screws.
g. Remove four screws securing relay assembly to back of MDC enclosure and pull relay assembly outward as a
unit.
h. Align replacement K4 ⁄ K5 relay assembly in MDC enclosure, and install four mounting screws.
i. Install RC module on A1 and A2 terminals of both relays K4 and ⁄ or K5. If only RC module required replace-
ment, proceed to step k.
Change 4 5-99
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Rewiring of terminals may be installed in any order to facilitate ease of maintenance.
j. On replacement relay, connect wiring, auxiliary contact module, and RC module, as follows:
For K4 Relay RC Module For K5 Relay RC Module

Contact To Terminal Contact To Terminal
RC Module K4A1 RC Module K5A1
RC Module K4A2 RC Module K5A2
Auxiliary Contact Module Auxiliary Contact Module
49L3 K4SA1 46L1 K5SA1
1L3 K4SA2 2L1 K5SA2
24 K4SA3 22 K5SA3
25 K4SA4 23 K5SA4
K4 Relay K5 Relay
2L1 K4L1 1L1 and 1L1 (Jumper) K5L1
2L2 K4L2 1L2 K5L2
2L3 and 2L3 (Jumper) K4L3 1L3 (2 wires) K5L3
47L1 K4T1 47L1 K5T1
47L2 K4T2 47L2 K5T2
47L3 K4T3 47L3 K5T3
2L3 (Jumper) K4A1 1L1 (Jumper) K5A1
50L1 K4A2 48L3 K5A2
k. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.8 MDC CB1 Through CB8 Replacement. MDC contains eight circuit breakers located on DIN rails in upper
portion of cabinet. CB1 through CB7 are single-phase circuit breakers mounted side-by-side on a single DIN rail. CB8 is a
three-phase circuit breaker mounted on a second DIN rail in the upper right corner of the MDC. The following procedure shall
be used to replace CB1 through CB8:
b. Locate faulty circuit breaker (Figure 5-26, 26, or 28 through 34). Refer to Table 5-5 for circuit breaker type and
location.
c. Set faulty circuit breaker to OFF.
d. On faulty circuit breaker, loosen upper and lower terminal screws and disconnect and tag wiring to facilitate rein-
stallation.
e. At the bottom center of faulty circuit breaker, use a flathead screwdriver or equivalent inserted into circuit breaker
locking tab and push locking tab downward.
f. Lift circuit breaker upward and pull outward to unsnap from DIN rail (27). If required, loosen one or both DIN
rail end anchor screws (36) and slide end anchor(s) to loosen circuit breaker assembly on rail.
5-100
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
g. Position replacement circuit breaker over DIN rail. Press downward till circuit breaker snaps securely into place
on DIN rail. If end anchors were loosened, slide back into position and tighten screws, as required.
h. On replacement circuit breaker, loosen upper and lower terminal screws and reinstall wiring removed in step d.
i. Verify replacement circuit breaker is set to ON.
j. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.9 MDC Motor Drive (M1) Replacement. MDC contains a motor drive M1 module located in the center area of
MDC. Perform the following procedure for replacement of motor drive M1:
b. Locate faulty motor drive M1 (Figure 5-26, 13) in center of MDC enclosure.
c. On faulty motor drive door (Figure 5-29, 3), loosen three captive screws (4) and open door.
d. Remove faulty motor drive access panel (8).
e. On bottom of faulty motor drive M1 (1), remove eight screws (11) retaining the bottom plate (10).
f. On motor drive bottom plate loosen conduits, as required, to allow removal of motor drive wiring.
NOTE
Wiring and connectors may be removed or replaced in any sequence to facilitate ease of
maintenance.
g. In motor drive enclosure, disconnect and tag the following terminals:
Wire From Terminal

59L1 L1/91
59L2 L2/92
59L3 L3/93
60 -R/81
61 +R/82
U U/96
V V/97
W W/98
G (2 each) Ground
33 +DC
32 -DC
h. On upper left side of motor drive, disconnect interface cable (9) from serial port.
NOTE
When removing encoder cables and clamps, note position of clamps on cable braided
shielding to facilitate ease of reinstallation.
i. On left side of motor drive, disconnect and remove encoder cable clamps. Retain clamps for reinstallation on re-
placement motor drive.
5-101
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
j. On right side of motor drive, disconnect and tag 24V power/brake relay wiring as follows:
Wire From Terminal

5 01
62 02
1 35
38 36
k. On left side of motor drive, disconnect and tag all connectors and wires.
l. Carefully pull disconnected cables, wiring, and bottom plate as a unit from bottom of motor drive and position to
permit replacement.
m. Cut wire ties and remove cable clamps, as required, to facilitate cable removal.
n. Carefully maneuver disconnected connectors and wiring from left side of motor drive down through conduit pen-
etrations (12). If required, wiring may tagged and removed from connectors, and reinstalled when routed in re-
placement motor drive.
NOTE
• Motor drive M1 weights 120 pounds.
• If motor drive cabinet lifting fixture is used, perform steps o and p; otherwise, proceed to
step q.
o. If motor drive cabinet lifting fixture is used, install in accordance with Figure 5-30.
p. If motor drive cabinet lifting fixture is used, attach sling to two lifting eyes (Figure 5-29, 2) and take up slack
with chain hoist.
NOTE
When loosening bottom motor drive mounting hardware, bolts shall be backed out just
enough to provide pivot points while removing motor drive. When top mounting hardware
is removed, motor drive shall be pulled outward with weight resting on the two bottom
mounting studs, then lifted from inside MDC enclosure.
q. With all cables and wiring removed from faulty motor drive, loosen bottom two motor drive cabinet mount bolts
(6).
r. While holding motor drive against MDC enclosure back wall, at top of motor drive, remove two bolts, and
washers (7). Retain hardware for reinstallation.
NOTE
If motor drive cabinet lifting fixture is used, perform step s; otherwise, proceed to step t.
s. Using chain hoist, lift motor drive cabinet and while pivoting assembly forward, remove motor drive from mount-
ing studs. Carefully lower motor drive from cabinet and proceed to step v.
t. Carefully pivot motor drive on bottom mount studs, lift upwards, and remove motor drive from MDC enclosure.
u. On replacement motor drive, remove left access panel (8) cover and retain for reinstallation.
v. On replacement motor drive, remove eight screws (11) retaining the bottom plate (10) and remove bottom plate.
NOTE
If motor drive cabinet lifting fixture is used, perform steps w through y; otherwise, proceed
to step z.
w. If motor drive cabinet lifting fixture is used, attach sling to two lifting eyes on replacement motor drive and care-
fully lift and position assembly in MDC enclosure.
5-102
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
x. Reinstall four motor drive mounting washers, and bolts and tighten.
y. Remove and stow MDC lifting fixture and chain hoist. Proceed to step ab.
z. Carefully lift replacement motor drive and lower onto bottom two mount bolts. Hold assembly in place until
mounting hardware is installed.
aa. While holding motor drive against enclosure wall, reinstall four motor drive mounting washers and bolts and
tighten.
ab. On replacement motor drive door (3), loosen three captive screws (4) and open door.
ac. On right bottom of replacement motor drive, routing wiring and cables upward, reinstall bottom plate using eight
screws.
ad. On left bottom of replacement motor drive, carefully thread connectors and cabling removed from left side of
motor drive through conduit penetrations.
Encoder operation could be impaired. When reinstalling encoder cables, braided cable
shielding shall be properly positioned beneath the cable clamps to ensure adequate grounding
of cables. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
ae. On left side of motor drive, install encoder cables in cable clamps and tighten clamps so that cable braided
shielding is grounded beneath clamp.
af. Connect all wiring and connectors removed in step k.
ag. Connect 24V power/brake relay as follows:

5 01 1 35
62 02 38 36
ah. On right side of motor drive, connect following terminals:
Wire To Terminal
59L1 L1 ⁄ 91
59L2 L2 ⁄ 92
59L3 L3 ⁄ 93
60 -R/81
61 +R ⁄ 82
U U ⁄ 96
V V ⁄ 97
W W ⁄ 98
G (2 each) Ground
33 +DC
32 -DC
Change 4 5-103
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ai. On upper left side of motor drive, connect interface cable (9) to serial port.
aj. Reinstall all cable clamps and wire ties, as required.
ak. Reinstall left side access panel (8).
al. Close drive door (3) and refasten three captive screws (4).
Damage to secondary access system could occur. When performing MDC post-maintenance
tasks, ensure secondary door homing procedure is accomplished in conjunction with
secondary door functional checkout. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
am. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2. Ensure secondary door homing procedure
is accomplished in accordance with Paragraph 7.1.2 in conjunction with secondary door functional checkout
(Table 4-1) when performing MDC post-maintenance.
5.8.3.10 MDC Power Supply PS1, PS2 Replacement. MDC contains two 24-Vdc power supplies PS1 and PS2
located within MDC on the right side of the cabinet. The following procedure shall be used for replacement of PS1 and ⁄ or
PS2 power supply:
b. Locate faulty MDC power supply PS1 (Figure 5-26, 2) or power supply PS2 (3) on the right side of MDC enclo-
sure above power supply PS3 (4).
c. On faulty power supply, tag and remove wiring from L1, L3, and ground terminals.
d. On faulty power supply, tag and remove wiring from (+) and (-) terminals.
e. On faulty power supply, remove four mounting screws on either side of power supply and retain for reinstallation
on replacement power supply. Carefully remove faulty power supply from MDC.
NOTE
Power supply requires two mounting brackets to be properly mounted in the MDC. Mounting
hardware from the faulty power supply shall be removed and transferred to replacement
power supply.
f. On rear of faulty power supply, carefully remove screw and washer securing power supply mounting bracket.
Remove and retain mounting bracket and all hardware for reinstallation onto the replacement power supply.
g. Repeat step f for second mounting bracket and discard faulty power supply.
NOTE
Replacement power supply received through the supply system is equipped with two DIN
rail mounting brackets installed. The DIN rail mounting brackets are not used in this
configuration and shall be removed and discarded.
h. On rear of replacement power supply, remove two screws securing DIN rail mounting brackets. Remove and dis-
card DIN rail mounting brackets.
i. On rear of replacement power supply, carefully align and install power supply mounting brackets using hardware
removed and retained in steps f and g.
j. Align replacement power supply in MDC enclosure and reinstall using four mounting screws removed in step e.
k. On replacement power supply, set FUSE MODE ⁄ CONTINUOUS MODE switch to CONTINUOUS MODE
(down) position.
l. On replacement power supply, set SINGLE USE MODE ⁄ PARALLEL USE MODE switch to SINGLE USE
MODE (up) position.
5-104
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
m. On replacement power supply, connect wiring to terminals as follows:
For PS1 For PS2

Ground (green) GND Ground (green) GND
33 L1 33 L1
32 L3 32 L3
34 + 35 (three) +
35 - 31 (three) -
n. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.11 MDC Power Supply PS3 Replacement.. The 24-Vdc power supply PS3 is located within the MDC on the
right side of cabinet. Perform the following procedure for replacement of the PS3 power supply:
b. Locate faulty MDC power supply PS3 (Figure 5-26, 4) on the right side of MDC enclosure above ground distri-
bution block (5).
c. On faulty power supply PS3, tag and remove wiring from L1, L3, and ground terminals.
d. On faulty power supply PS3, tag and remove wiring from (+) and (-) terminals.
e. On faulty power supply PS3, remove four mounting screws and retain for reinstallation on replacement power
supply. Carefully remove faulty PS3 from MDC.
NOTE
Power supply PS3 requires a mounting and spacer plate to be properly mounted in the MDC.
Mounting hardware from the faulty power supply shall be removed and transferred to
replacement PS3.
f. On rear of faulty power supply PS3, carefully remove two screws securing mounting and spacer plates. Retain all
hardware for reinstallation onto the replacement power supply. Discard faulty power supply.
NOTE
Replacement power supply PS3 received through the supply system is equipped with two
DIN rail mounting brackets installed. The DIN rail mounting brackets are not used in this
configuration and shall be removed and discarded.
g. On rear of replacement power supply PS3, remove two screws securing DIN rail mounting brackets. Remove and
discard DIN rail mounting brackets.
h. On rear of replacement power supply PS3, carefully align and install power supply spacer and mounting plates
using two screws removed in step f.
i. Align replacement power supply PS3 in MDC and reinstall using four mounting screws removed in step e.
5-105
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
j. On replacement power supply PS3, connect wiring to terminals as follows:
Wire To Terminal
Ground (green) GND
33 L1
32 L3
36 (four) +
1 (three) -
k. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.12 MDC Current Limit Control CL1 Replacement. The MDC contains a current limit control CL1 and three
current transformers, CT1, CT2, and CT3, located in the bottom area of MDC. Whenever current limit control CL1 or one
or more of the current transformers CT1, CT2, and ⁄ or CT3 are faulty, all four components shall be replaced. Replace current
limit control CL1 and current transformers CT1, CT2, and CT3, as follows:
b. Locate faulty current limit control CL1 (Figure 5-26, 12) in bottom left area of MDC enclosure and open front
panel.
NOTE
All three current transformers (CT1, CT2, and CT3) shall be removed in step c. Current
transformers CT1, CT2, and CT3 may be removed in any sequence in order to facilitate ease
of maintenance.
c. On faulty current limit control CL1 (12), loosen two screws securing hinged door and open door to access CL1
wiring.
d. On faulty current limit control CL1, tag and remove wires from terminals X1, X2, and X3.
e. On faulty current limit control CL1, tag and remove wires from terminals 31 through 36.
f. On faulty current limit control CL1, tag and remove wires from terminals L1, L2, and L3.
NOTE
Wiring looped through each current transformer provides feedback from the current
transformer (CT1, CT2, CT3) to the current limit control CL1 and is retained in place by wire
ties. Carefully note position of wiring and wiring within the MDC to facilitate reinstallation.
g. On current transformers CT1 (7), CT2 (8), and CT3 (9), remove wire ties securing current transformer wiring.
h. On current transformers CT1, CT2, and CT3, unloop and remove wiring from all three transformers.
i. On current transformers CT1, CT2, and CT3, tag and remove wiring from terminals X1 and H1 from each current
transformer.
j. On current transformers CT1, CT2, and CT3, remove twelve screws securing the three current transformers in the
MDC enclosure and remove all transformers.
5-106
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Early production models may have had some current transformers installed in a different
configuration. When performing maintenance or installing new transformers, ensure wiring
is installed in accordance with steps k through m.
k. Position replacement current transformers (CT1, CT2, CT3) with X1 terminals at top in MDC enclosure back
panel and secure using twelve screws.
Low current flow from current transformers CT1, CT2, or CT3 could result in low ESS
charge rate. High current flow could damage the current limit control CL1 and/or circuit
breakers. Ensure wires between current limit control CL1 and current transformers CT1,
CT2, and CT3 are looped twice through each of the current transformers and secured in place
with wire ties. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
When looping current transformer wiring, ensure sufficient wiring is available for the
reinstallation of wire leads on current transformer terminals.
l. On current transformers (CT1, CT2, CT3), carefully position wires removed in step h, so that wire leads can be
reinstalled on current limit control CL1 terminals L1, L2., and L3. Pass wiring twice through current transformer
body. Once properly looped, secure each wire in position with wire ties.
m. On current transformers (CT1, CT2, CT3) terminals, reinstall terminal wiring as follows:
Wire To Terminal
CT1
52 X1
53 H1
CT2
54 X1
55 H1
CT3
56 X1
57 H1
n. On faulty current limit control CL1, remove four current limit control CL1 mounting screws and carefully remove
faulty CL1 from MDC enclosure back panel. Retain screws for reinstallation of replacement CL1.
o. Carefully position replacement current limit control CL1 in MDC back panel and secure using four mounting
screws.
Change 9 5-107
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
p. In replacement current limit control CL1, connect wiring to terminals as follows:
Wire To Terminal
52 31
53 32
54 33
55 34
56 35
57 36
58X1 X1
58X2 X2
58X3 X3
51L1 L1
51L2 L2
51L3 L3
q. Using a multimeter set for resistance, check three fuses in replacement current limit control CL1 for continuity. If
any fuse reads open, replace fuse, as required.
r. On replacement current limit control CL1 (12), close hinged access door and turn two captive screws clockwise
until each locks into place.
s. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.13 MDC Current Transformer CT1, CT2, CT3 Replacement. The MDC contains three current transformers,
CT1, CT2, and CT3 and a current limit control CL1 that are located in the bottom area of MDC. Whenever one or more of
the current transformers CT1, CT2, and/or CT3 or the current limit control CL1 are faulty, all four components shall be
replaced in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.12.
5.8.3.14 MDC Transformer T1 Replacement.
b. Remove regen resistor R1 in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.15.
c. In MDC, locate faulty transformer T1 (Figure 5-26, 10) in bottom right corner of enclosure.
d. On faulty transformer T1 terminal block (Figure 5-31, 3), disconnect and tag wiring from the following terminals:
Transformer T1
Wire From Terminal
Ground (green) X0
59L3 X3
59L2 X2
59L1 X1
58X3 H3
58X2 H2
58X1 H1
5-108 Change 8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
e. At base of faulty transformer T1 (4), remove five mount bolts (6) and washers (7). Retain hardware for
reinstallation.
NOTE
Transformer weighs 190 pounds.
f. Install motor drive cabinet lifting fixture in accordance with Figure 5-30.
g. Using chain hoist, lift and remove transformer from MDC enclosure.
h. Remove lifting sling from faulty transformer T1.
i. On bottom of faulty transformer T1, remove four mount plate bolts (Figure 5-31, 5) and washers (8). Remove
mount for reinstallation on replacement transformer.
j. On top faulty transformer T1, remove screws (14) securing T1 terminal block (3) and DIN rail (13). Remove ter-
minal block and DIN rail for reinstallation on replacement transformer.
k. On bottom of replacement transformer T1, install T1 mount plate (9) using bolts and washers.
l. On top replacement transformer T1, install T1 terminal block and DIN rail using screws and washers.
m. Attach sling to replacement transformer T1 in accordance with Figure 5-30. Using chain hoist, lift and set trans-
former in MDC enclosure.
n. Remove lifting sling from replacement transformer T1.
o. Position replacement transformer T1 in bottom of MDC enclosure. Install five mount bolts and washers and
tighten transformer to enclosure floor.
p. On top of replacement transformer T1, connect terminal block wiring, as follows:
Transformer T1
Wire To Terminal
58X1 H1
58X2 H2
58X3 H3
59L1 X1
59L2 X2
59X3 X3
Ground (Green) X0
q. Reinstall regen resistor R1 in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.15.
r. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.15 MDC Regen Resistor R1 Replacement. The regen resistor R1 (Figure 5-26, 11) is located in the bottom left
corner inside the MDC enclosure. Perform MDC regen resistor R1 replacement as follows:
b. In MDC, locate faulty regen resistor R1 (Figure 5-26, 11) in bottom left corner of enclosure.
c. On left side of MDC enclosure, loosen large conduit jamnut above regen resistor R1.
d. In MDC enclosure, at base of regen resistor R1, remove four mount bolts (Figure 5-31, 11) and washers (12)
securing the resistor assembly on MDC enclosure floor.
e. On regen resistor R1 case, disconnect green ground wire.
f. Disconnect four cable clamps securing wire bundle to case of transformer T1.
g. Carefully lift regen resistor R1 (1) and remove four screws (2), washers, and nuts securing the resistor assembly
front cover. Remove front cover.
Change 8 5-109
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
h. In regen resistor R1 enclosure, disconnect and tag wiring from terminal 1 and terminal 2. Reposition wiring, as
required, to facilitate resistor replacement.
NOTE
Note position of regen resistor R1 wiring to facilitate ease of reinstallation.
i. Loosen regen resistor R1 cord grip (16) and carefully pull resistor wiring from resistor assembly. Position wiring,
as required, to facilitate resistor replacement.
j. On replacement regen resistor R1, remove four screws (2), washers, and nuts securing the resistor assembly front
cover. Remove front cover.
k. Position replacement regen resistor R1 in MDC enclosure to facilitate reinstallation of resistor wiring.
l. Loosen cord grip on replacement regen resistor R1, and carefully thread resistor wiring into resistor assembly.
Ensure wiring is positioned to facilitate installation on resistor terminals, then tighten cord grip.
m. Connect regen resistor R1 wiring as follows:
Regen Resistor R1
Wire To Terminal
60 1
61 2
n. Install front cover on regen resistor R1, using four screws (2), washers, and nuts.
o. Position replacement regen resistor R1 in bottom of MDC enclosure and using four mount bolts and washers (12),
secure the resistor assembly on MDC enclosure floor.
p. On regen resistor R1 case, connect green ground wire.
q. On transformer T1, reinstall cable clamps securing wiring bundle to case.
r. On left side of MDC enclosure, tighten large conduit jamnut above regen resistor R1.
5.8.3.16 MDC High Current Filters FL1, FL2 Replacement. There are two high current filters, FL1 and FL2, located
in the top compartment of the MDC enclosure. Filter FL1 provides circuit protection for 208-Vac, three-phase auxiliary power
inputs to the MDC from the topside auxiliary generator. Filter FL2 provides circuit protection for 208-Vac, three-phase
primary power inputs to the MDC from [1][3][5] the LDB panel [T9] switchboard SWBD-3<. Perform MDC high current
filter FL1 or FL2 replacement as follows:
b. In MDC, locate faulty high current filter FL1 (Figure 5-32, 1) or filter FL2 (2) in upper area of enclosure.
c. On front of faulty filter, tag and disconnect cables from terminal lugs L1, L2, and L3.
d. On top of MDC, while holding filter assembly in MDC enclosure, carefully remove 32 screws (4) and washers
(5) retaining filter assembly. Lower assembly to gain access to rear terminal wiring.
e. Lower assembly to gain access to rear terminal wiring and disconnect and tag cables from rear filter terminal lugs
A, B, C, and GND.
f. Carefully lower faulty filter assembly and remove and retain EMI gasket (15).
g. On front of faulty filter assembly, remove the four nuts (12) and washers (13) that retain the filter in the enclo-
sure.
h. Remove two allen bolts and washers securing filter to filter enclosure.
i. Carefully lift filter from filter enclosure and remove EMI gasket. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
j. **HCP** Inspect EMI gasket and matting surface in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
k. Align replacement filter and EMI gasket with the four mounting holes in the filter enclosure and install four
washers (13) and nuts (12) that retain the filter in filter enclosure.
l. Install two allen bolts and washers securing filter to filter enclosure.
5-110 Change 3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
m. **HCP** Inspect filter assembly EMI gasket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
Damage to EMI gasket could occur. Use care while handling filter enclosure and routing
input cables to ensure EMI gasket is not damaged before final installation of enclosure.
n. **HCP** Place EMI gasket in position on top of filter assembly and carefully hold in place while routing wiring
to rear of replacement filter.
o. Connect wiring to rear terminal lugs of replacement filter as follows:
Filter FL1 Filter FL2

Black A Black A
Red B Red B
White C Blue C
Green GND Green GND
p. **HCP** Carefully lift filter assembly enclosure and EMI gasket upward, aligning enclosure with screw holes in
top of MDC.
q. **HCP** Install 32 screws (4) and washers (5) securing EMI gasket and filter assembly in top of MDC enclo-
sure. Torque screws to 5 (±1) inch-pounds.
r. Connect wiring to front terminal lugs of replacement filter as follows:
Filter FL1 Filter FL2

2L1 L1 1L1 L1
2L2 L2 1L2 L2
2L3 L3 1L3 L3
Ground GND Ground GND
5.8.3.17 MDC EMI Filter FN1, FN2, FN3 Replacement. There are three EMI filters, FN1 through FN3, located below
the ventilation panel on the left side of the MDC cabinet enclosure that filter signal inputs to MDC subcomponents. The
following procedure shall be used to remove and replace the EMI filter assemblies, EMI gasket, filter ribbon cables, CCA side
A, or CCA side B, and ⁄ or individual bent, broken, or damaged filters:
b. Locate defective filter and on outside of cabinet, remove 18 screws (Figure 5-33, 1) and washers (2) securing
filter enclosure (16). Retain hardware for reinstallation.
c. On back of faulty EMI filter enclosure, disconnect ribbon cable(s) from filter FN (x) (FN1 (5), FN2 (3), or FN3
(4)), side A CCA J1.
d. On outside of MDC, locate 18 screws (1) and washers (2) securing filter FN(x) enclosure in MDC enclosure.
Remove screws and washers and retain hardware for reinstallation.
e. Carefully lift filter FN(x) enclosure and disconnect ribbon cable from side B CCA J2.
f. If installed, remove screw and washer securing green ground wire inside FN(x) enclosure.
g. Carefully remove EMI gasket from EMI filter enclosure and retain gasket for reinstallation.
5-111
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
h. On EMI filter enclosure, carefully remove four screws (13), washers (14), and nuts securing side A and B CCAs
to enclosure. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
Damage to filter CCAs or EMI filters could occur. Filter CCA side A and side B pins are
securely pressed into the thirty individual EMI filters. While removing and replacing CCA,
use care to gently rock CCA while lifting or pressing straight upward or downward onto EMI
filters. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
i. On outside of EMI filter enclosure, slowly and carefully lift side A CCA straight upwards separating CCA from
EMI filters. If CCA requires replacement, discard, otherwise, retain for reinstallation.
j. On inside of EMI filter enclosure, slowly and carefully lift side B CCA straight upwards separating CCA from
EMI filters. If CCA requires replacement, discard, otherwise, retain for reinstallation.
k. If one or more EMI filters require replacement, carefully remove nut from filter being replaced and remove defec-
tive filter. Repeat step until all defective filters have been removed. If filter replacement is not required, proceed
to step n.
l. Remove nut from replacement EMI filter then carefully insert replacement filter into enclosure cutouts and loosely
secure with nut. Repeat step until all defective filters have been replaced.
m. **HCP** Torque each EMI filter nut removed and replaced to 32 (±0.2) inch-ounces.
n. Inspect side B CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
o. Carefully install side B CCA on standoffs on inside of EMI filter enclosure by pressing CCA downward onto 30
EMI filters.
p. Inspect side A CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
q. Carefully install side A CCA on standoffs on outside of EMI filter enclosure by pressing CCA downward onto 30
EMI filters.
r. Lightly apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to each of the four CCA mount screws (Figure 5-33, 13).
s. On EMI filter enclosure, install and tighten four screws (13), washers (14), and nuts securing side A and B CCAs
into enclosure.
t. **HCP** Inspect EMI filter enclosure EMI gasket in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
u. Place EMI filter enclosure with EMI gasket in place on enclosure, then install ribbon cable connector on side B
CCA J2.
v. If installed, reinstall green ground wire using screw and washer removed in step f inside FN(x) enclosure.
w. While ensuring EMI gasket is properly fitted, Carefully align EMI filter enclosure (16) and EMI gasket (11) in-
side MDC enclosure, then on outside of MDC start 18 screws (1) and washers (2).
x. **HCP** Verify that EMI gasket is properly aligned with EMI filter enclosure, then tighten 18 enclosure screws.
y. On back of EMI filter enclosure (16), connect ribbon cable(s) to FN(x) side A CCA J1
z. Perform MDC post maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.3.18 MDC Local Control Panel Replacement. The MDC LCP is located on the front door panel of the MDC and
interfaces with the motor drive M1 via a serial cable. Replacement of the LCP, EMI gasket, serial input filter FN4, or serial
interface cable shall be performed as follows:
b. On inside of MDC door, disconnect serial interface cable (Figure 5-34, 5) from outside of LCP enclosure (1).
c. On outside of MDC, while holding LCP enclosure, remove 28 screws (10) and washers (9) securing LCP enclo-
sure assembly to MDC front door (8) panel. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
5-112
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
d. On inside of MDC door, carefully pull LCP enclosure outward and disconnect LCP serial interface cable from
serial port (4) on rear of LCP.
e. Carefully remove LCP enclosure and enclosure EMI gasket (3) and retain for reinstallation.
f. Inspect serial port filter FN4 (2), serial interface cable(s) (5), and serial ports for damaged, bent, burnt, or
recessed pins. Replace components, if required.
g. While holding LCP (12), loosen four screws (7) on LCP mount rail (6) and slide mount rail from assembly.
Retain mount rail for reinstallation.
h. On front on MDC door panel, carefully lift LCP and LCP rubber gasket (11) from MDC door.
i. Install MDC front door LCP rubber gasket on rear of replacement LCP.
j. On front on MDC door panel, carefully insert LCP into MDC door. When properly aligned, slide mount rail over
rear rails.
k. On rear of MDC door with LCP mount rail in place, torque four mount rail retaining screws to 5 (±1) inch-
pounds.
l. **HCP** Inspect LCP enclosure EMI gasket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
m. While holding LCP enclosure in place on enclosure mounting surface, raise enclosure and reconnect serial inter-
face cable to rear of LCP. Tighten cable, as required.
n. **HCP** On rear of MDC door, position LCP enclosure and EMI gasket on inside of MDC door panel and,
while holding enclosure and gasket in place, on front of MDC door, install 28 screws (10) and washers. Ensure
EMI gasket is properly installed and torque 28 screws to 5 (±1) inch-pounds.
o. On outside of LCP enclosure, connect motor drive M1 serial interface cable to LCP enclosure serial interface port
(5). Tighten cable screws.
p. Perform MDC post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.2.
5.8.4 Energy Storage System (URD 10497). The ESS contains a Flywheel Power System (FPS) providing 650 Vdc
(nominal) to the MDC. ESS maintenance is limited to replacement of the ESS and installation and/or replacement of the ESS
CPD on the front cabinet door. Whenever performing any maintenance on the ESS, perform ESS preparation for maintenance
procedures in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.1. Upon completion of ESS maintenance, perform ESS post-maintenance in
accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.2.
5.8.4.1 ESS Preparation For Maintenance. Whenever performing maintenance on the ESS, perform ESS preparation
for maintenance as follows:
b. On ESS cabinet, remove belly bands (Figure 5-27) to facilitate access to ESS cabinet door.
Hazardous current could be present. ESS cabinet contains capacitors that must discharge
prior to performing maintenance. Do not open ESS until a minimum of 15 minutes has
passed between ESS power removal and opening of ESS. Failure to comply could result in
c. Open ESS enclosure by loosing and sliding eleven captive fasteners (Figure 5-35, 3) open. Swing ESS cabinet
door (2) open on the hinges to permit access to ESS components.
before performing maintenance within the ESS. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury or death.
d. In top of ESS enclosure, locate two power filters and using multimeter, check each for presence of Vac.
5-113
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
e. Using multimeter set for Vdc, check that power filter terminals to ground indicates less than 1 Vdc. If required,
discharge filters to ground using multimeter or a 10k ohm/5-watt resistor jumper wire until meter indicates less
than 1 Vac.
f. In ESS enclosure, set main bus circuit breaker (11) to OFF.
g. In ESS enclosure, inspect interior surfaces for evidence of coolant leakage. If required, clean spills in accordance
with safety summary, Paratherm Cleanup criteria.
h. In bottom of ESS enclosure, inspect floor around and below ESS FPS for leakage of coolant. If present, clean in
accordance with step g, as required.
i. Proceed to maintenance being accomplished.
5.8.4.2 ESS Post-Maintenance. Upon completion of ESS maintenance, perform ESS post-maintenance as follows:
a. In ESS enclosure, inspect interior surfaces for evidence of coolant leakage. If any leakage is noted, notify MMOC
and proceed as directed.
b. In bottom of ESS enclosure, inspect floor around and below ESS FPS for leakage of coolant. If any leakage is
noted, notify MMOC and proceed as directed.
c. In ESS enclosure, set main bus circuit breaker (Figure 5-35, 11) to ON.
d. **HCP** Inspect ESS cabinet door (2) EMI gasket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-
112.
e. **HCP** Carefully close ESS cabinet door (2), slide eleven captive fasteners (3) closed, and torque captive
fasteners to 200 (±20) inch pounds.
e1. If not previously accomplished, install six plastic squares (Table 2-2) using adhesive squares (Table 2-2) in posi-
tions indicated in Figure 5-27.
f. **HCP** On ESS cabinet, reinstall cabinet belly bands in accordance with Figure 5-27.
g. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
5.8.4.3 Energy Storage System Replacement. The ESS (URD 10497) is replaced as a unit per the following
procedure:
• Damage to ESS FPS could occur. If ESS has been exposed to temperatures of 0 °F or
below, ensure ESS is maintained within a temperature-controlled environment for a
minimum of 2 hours prior to performing secondary access system startup allowing
paratherm coolant to stabilize. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
• Caster assemblies are not designed to withstand the weight of the ESS and pressures
generated from securing ESS to vehicle for transportation. Do not transport ESS cabinet
with caster assemblies installed. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
a. Perform ESS preparation for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.1.
b. Lower hinged platform shoring (Table 2-1) to lower level equipment room and pallet jack to upper level equip-
ment room.
c. Set up shoring by securing shoring posts (Figure 5-36, 8 and 9) to shoring cross beam (14) using four bolts (12)
and washers (13) per post.
d. Position shoring in accordance with Figure 5-36, and adjust shoring height by rotating shoring adjustment screws
(15) as required to support hinged platforms (2). Hinged platforms should be level with LER floor and each other.
5-114 Change 11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Ensure temporary egress ladder is available and could be installed quickly if an emergency
occurred (Paragraph 5.6.2).
e. Remove folding ladder with brackets in accordance with Paragraph 5.6.1.
f. Remove telescoping ladder, ladder upper mounting bracket, and ladder mounting lower left, right mounting brack-
ets (Paragraph 5.6.3.1) from access shaft and secondary door.
g. Remove copper and steel rub bars (Figure 5-37). Note location each rub bar is removed from to ease
reinstallation.
NOTE
The ESS CPD is temperature sensitive and shall be removed and maintained in a temperature
controlled environment when removing ESS.
h. Remove ESS CPD in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.4 to facilitate ESS replacement.
i. Disconnect filter enclosure FL1 wiring as follows:
Wiring damage could occur. Do not allow filter to hang from wires. Failure to comply could
result in equipment damage.
(1) Remove capscrews and flat washers attaching filter enclosure FL1 to side of ESS cabinet.
(2) If required, remove cover from conduit access port and carefully feed excess wiring in to ESS.
(3) Tag and remove wires from the inside of filter enclosure FL1.
(4) Disconnect filter enclosure FL1 conduit from ESS by removing jamnut that secures conduit to cabinet and carefully
pulling conduit away from ESS. Retain jamnut for installation of replacement ESS.
(5) Reattach filter enclosure FL1 with EMI gasket to side of ESS cabinet with capscrews and flat washers.
(6) Reattach any removed or loosened clamps.
j. Disconnect main buss circuit breaker wiring as follows:
(1) Disconnect cables 146-1 and L3+ from positive post and cables 147-1 and L1- from negative post of main buss
circuit breaker.
(2) Remove cable clamps as required to allow removal of cables 146-1 and 147-1.
(3) Remove conduit clamp from LER wall bracket.
(4) Disconnect cable conduit from ESS by loosening jamnut that secures the conduit to cabinet and carefully pulling
cable conduit away from ESS. Retain jamnut for installation of replacement ESS.
(5) Reattach any removed or loosened clamps in the ESS.
k. Disconnect filter assembly FN1 wiring as follows:
(1) Remove capscrews and flat washers attaching filter assembly FN1 to ESS.
Change 7 5-115
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
(2) Carefully disconnect ribbon connectors P1 and P2 from filter assembly FN1 connector J2.
(3) Verify all wires are clearly labeled. If not, label wires to ease installation.
(4) If ribbon connectors P1 and P2 wire socket numbers are not labeled, compare connector wiring to schematic and
note proper connector orientation before removing wires to ensure connectors are not installed backwards.
(5) Disconnect wires from ribbon connectors P1 and P2 by pressing on ribbon connector wire release with a small
screwdriver. Save ribbon connector for installation on replacement ESS.
(6) Remove conduit clamp from LER wall bracket.
(7) Disconnect filter assembly FN1 conduit from ESS by loosening jamnut that secures conduit to cabinet and carefully
pulling conduit away from ESS. Retain jamnut for installation of replacement ESS.
(8) Reattach filter assembly FN1 and EMI gasket to ESS using capscrews and flat washers.
l. Ensure lifting eyebolts on top of ESS are fully seated and cannot be turned by hand.
m. Remove mounting bolts (Figure 5-35, 8), lockwashers (7), and flat washers (6) securing ESS to floor and wall
brackets and retain hardware for reinstallation.
Tipping hazard exists. ESS weighs approximately 2500 pounds and could become unstable
during hoisting or when rolled across LER floor. Care shall be taken to prevent tipping.
Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
n. Position pallet jack (Table 2-1) under ESS so the tines are centered between the ESS mount rails (Figure 5-35, 5)
and the jack is pushed under the ESS until the tines contact the outer LER wall.
NOTE
Marking a reference line on the pallet jack tines to show the edge of the ESS helps position
the ESS on the tines during installation and provides maximum clearance for maneuvering
around mount rails.
o. Raise pallet jack so ESS clears mount rails.
p. Move ESS away from mount rails and install two caster assemblies (Table 2-1) to ESS using eight ESS mounting
bolts.
q. Lower pallet jack to allow ESS to stand on LER floor and set pallet jack aside.
Hinged platform hinges and holes in floor could cause ESS to tip. Care shall be taken to avoid
obstacles during ESS movement. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
• Several technicians may be required to move the ESS across the LER floor.
• The ESS, with caster assemblies and eyebolts installed, is tall enough to contact the
lowest portion of the LER monorail.
r. Carefully maneuver ESS to top of secondary door.
s. Attach lifting sling (Table 2-1) to ESS lifting eyebolts and attach tag line as required.
NOTE
Lens on access shaft light protrudes into access shaft. Raise ESS in a manner to prevent
contact with light.
t. Take up slack in hoisting cable with crane and align cable with centerline of access shaft by positioning boom of
crane.
u. Carefully lift ESS from LER and position on 6- by 6-inch timbers (Table 2-2).
5-116 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Caster assemblies are not designed to withstand the weight of the ESS and pressures
generated from securing ESS to vehicle for transportation. Do not transport ESS cabinet with
caster assemblies installed. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
v. Remove caster assemblies from ESS and install on replacement ESS. Install eight bolts securing caster assemblies
to ESS.
w. Ensure lifting eyebolts on top of replacement ESS are fully seated and cannot be turned by hand.
x. Attach lifting sling to ESS lifting eyebolts and attach tag line as required.
Change 7 5-116.1/(5-116.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
y. Carefully lower ESS down PAH.

z. Disconnect lifting sling and tag line from ESS.
aa. Carefully move ESS across LER floor.
ab. **HCP** Inspect electrodag surfaces on ESS wall mounting brackets in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-
112.
ac. Inspect ESS floor bracket bonding surfaces and clean of all foreign matter, using a clean cloth, MIL-PRF-680,
Type III and corrosion resistant steel wool (Table 2-2).
NOTE
Install pallet jack so ESS lines up with reference line previously drawn on tines.
ad. Position pallet jack (Table 2-1) under ESS and raise jack to take up ESS weight.
ae. Remove eight bolts securing caster assemblies to ESS and remove caster assemblies. Retain bolts for mounting
ESS.
af. Raise pallet jack enough for ESS to clear floor mounting brackets and maneuver pallet jack between floor mount-
ing brackets.
ag. **HCP** Install mounting bolts (Figure 5-35, 8), lockwashers (7), and flat washers (6) through mount rail (5)
into ESS. After twelve mounting bolts are started, lower ESS on to mount rail and remove pallet jack.
ah. **HCP** Install mounting bolts through wall mounting brackets into ESS and torque 24 mounting bolts to 200
(±10) foot-pounds.
ai. **HCP** Using bonding meter (Table 2-1), measure bonding resistance between chassis and structure. Resistance
shall be 1 milliohm or less. If not, clean bonding surfaces in accordance with step ac, as required.
aj. Connect filter assembly FN1 conduit to ESS as follows:
(1) Remove filter assembly FN1 from ESS by removing capscrews and flat washers.
(2) Route conduit through hole in side of ESS cabinet and route wiring through jamnut. Install and tighten jamnut
securely to conduit connector.
(3) Install wires to ribbon connectors P1 and P2.
(4) **HCP** Inspect EMI gasket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
NOTE
Route ribbon connectors through the EMI gasket prior to connecting the ribbon cables to the
filter assembly.
(5) Connect ribbon connectors P1 and P2 to filter assembly FN1 connector J2. Ensure connectors are fully seated.
5-117
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Wire pinching hazard exists. Care shall be taken to prevent wires from becoming pinched
between the filter and the ESS cabinet while securing the filter. Failure to comply could result
(6) **HCP** Attach filter assembly FN1 (19) to ESS with capscrews and flat washers. Torque capscrews to 5 (±1)
inch-pounds.
(7) If disconnected, connect ribbon connectors P1 and P2 to filter assembly FN1 connector J1.
(8) Reattach conduit clamp with flat washer, lockwasher, and nut and torque nut to 85 (±5) inch-pounds.
ak. Connect cables to main buss circuit breaker (Figure 5-35, 11) as follows:
(1) Ensure main buss circuit breaker is set to OFF.
(2) Route cables 146-1 and 147-1 conduit through hole in side of ESS cabinet and through jamnut. Install and tighten
jamnut securely to conduit connector.
(3) Route cables through cable clamp.
(4) Connect cables 146-1 and L3+ to main buss circuit breaker positive post and cables 147-1 and L1- to negative post
of main buss circuit breaker.
(5) Tighten cable clamp.
(6) Reattach conduit clamp with flat washer, lockwasher, and nut and torque nut to 85 (±5) inch-pounds.
al. Connect filter enclosure FL1 wiring as follows:
(1) Remove capscrews and flat washers attaching filter enclosure FL1 to ESS. Remove wire clamps as required.
(2) Route conduit through hole in side of ESS cabinet and route wiring through jamnut. Install and tighten jamnut
securely to conduit connector.
(3) **HCP** Inspect EMI gasket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
NOTE
• Route wires through the EMI gasket prior to connecting wires to the filter enclosure FL1.
• The same color wires connect to each side of the same filter (i.e. white to white and black
to black).
(4) Attach wires to filter enclosure FL1 terminals.
(5) If required, pull excess wire back into conduit and reinstall cover on conduit access port.
Wire pinching hazard exists. Care shall be taken to prevent wires from becoming pinched
between the filter and the ESS cabinet while securing the filter. Failure to comply could result
(6) **HCP** Attach filter enclosure FL1 to ESS with capscrews and flat washers. Torque screws to 5 (±1) inch-pounds.
(7) If required, reattach wire clamp.
5-118
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
am. Install ESS CPD in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.4.

an. Perform ESS post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.2.
ao. **HCP** Install copper and steel rub bars (Figure 5-37).
ap. Reinstall ladder lower left and right mounting brackets (Paragraph 5.6.3.1), ladder upper mounting bracket (Para-
graph 5.6.3.1), folding ladder (Paragraph 5.6.1) and telescoping ladder (Paragraph 5.6.3.1) in access shaft.
aq. Remove hinged platform shoring and pallet jack.
5.8.4.4 ESS Control Panel Display Installation or Replacement. The ESS CPD is temperature sensitive and shall be
removed from ESS cabinet and maintained in a temperature-controlled environment whenever cabinet is transported or stored.
Installation or replacement of the ESS CPD is performed as follows:
a. Perform CPD removal as follows:
(1) If not previously accomplished, perform ESS preparation for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.1.
(2) On back of ESS cabinet door (Figure 5-38, 3), disconnect ESS display serial interface cable from the rear of the
CPD enclosure (1).
(3) While holding ESS display enclosure on back of ESS cabinet door, remove 28 screws (5) and washers (4) securing
CPD enclosure to rear of ESS door. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
(4) Carefully pull CPD enclosure away from ESS cabinet door and disconnect serial cable (7) from connector (9) inside
enclosure. Remove enclosure and EMI gasket (2) and retain for reinstallation.
(5) While holding control panel display (6) on front of ESS cabinet door, loosen and remove six clamps (8) securing
CPD. Slide CPD from cabinet door.
(6) If serial cable is to be reused, remove cable from rear of CPD and retain for reinstallation.
b. Perform CPD installation as follows:
(1) Carefully insert replacement control panel display through ESS front door.
(2) Inside ESS front door, install six clamps to secure control panel display.
(3) Install CPD side of serial cable on rear control panel display connector.
(4) **HCP** Inspect CPD EMI gasket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
(5) Place CPD EMI gasket (2) on CPD enclosure and install free end of CPD serial cable on connector inside CPD
enclosure.
(6) **HCP** On rear of ESS door, position CPD enclosure and EMI gasket on inside of ESS door panel, and while
holding enclosure and gasket in place, on front of ESS door, install 28 screws and washers. Ensure EMI gasket is
properly installed and torque 28 screws to 5 (±1) inch-pounds.
(7) Perform ESS post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.4.2.
Change 4 5-119
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-22. Electromechanical Actuator Assembly
5-120
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-23. Absolute and Incremental Encoders
5-121
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-24. Secondary Door Junction Box (URD 10499)
5-122
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-25. Motor Drive Cabinet (MDC) (URD 10496)
5-123
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-26. MDC Component Location (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-124
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-26. MDC Component Location (Sheet 2)
5-125
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-27. MDC and ESS Belly Bands (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-126 Change 11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-27. MDC and ESS Belly Bands (Sheet 2)
Change 11 5-126.1/(5-126.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-28. MDC Motor Disconnect Switch (DISC1)
5-127
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-29. MDC Motor Drive (M1)
5-128
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-30. MDC Lifting Fixture Installation
5-129
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-31. MDC Enclosure Floor
5-130
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-32. MDC High Current Filters FL1 and FL2
5-131
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-33. MDC EMI Filter FN1, FN2, FN3
5-132
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-34. MDC Local Control Panel
5-133
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-35. Energy Storage System (URD 10497)
5-134
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-36. Hinged Platform Shoring (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-135
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-36. Hinged Platform Shoring (Sheet 2)
5-136
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-37. Secondary Door Locking Ring
5-137
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-38. ESS Control Panel Display
5-138
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-5. MDC Circuit Breaker Identification
Circuit Figure 5-26 Part Number Type Function

Breaker Reference
CB1 34 1492-CB1G070 7 Amp EMA brake voltage.

CB2 33 1492-CB1G100 10 Amp Motor drive external 24VDC.
CB3 32 1492-CB1G070 7 Amp SDCA 24VDC and brake enable.
CB4 31 1492-CB1G050 5 Amp J-Box +24VDC.
CB5 30 1492-CB1G040 4 Amp Lock bolt drive power.
CB6 29 1492-CB1G040 4 Amp Actuator locking bar (T-Handle) hold
voltage.
CB7 28 1492-CB1G100 10 Amp Actuator locking bar (T-Handle) pull
voltage.
CB8 26 1492-CB3G300 30 Amp Main AC power breaker.
Table 5-6. MDC Relay and Diode Identification
MDC Component Figure 5-26 Function

Reference
K1 Relay 16 Actuator locking bar (T-Handle) pull relay.

K2 Relay 17 Actuator locking bar (T-Handle) hold relay.
K3 Relay 18 EMA brake.
K4 Contactor (Relay) 21 120 ⁄ 208 Vac auxiliary power contactor.
K5 Contactor (Relay) 23 120 ⁄ 208 Vac primary power contactor.
K6 Relay 25 120 ⁄ 208V enable relay.
Diode D1 N/A Suppressor diode for K1 (located on K1).
Diode D2 N/A Suppressor diode for K2 (located on K2).
Diode D3 15 Provides isolation for retract actuator locking bar (T-Handle)
voltages.
5-139
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.9 WIRING AND CONTROL SET.

5.9.1 Secondary Door Control Assembly. The onsite repair of the SDCA (URD 10494) (Figure 5-39) consists of
replacement of front, swing-out, and back panel assembly subcomponents, circuit card assemblies (CCAs), delay timers, and
EMI filters. When performing repair of SDCA subcomponents, removal or rerouting of additional cables, connectors, wire
clamps, wire ties, or wiring may be accomplished as required to facilitate ease of maintenance. If required, ensure any
additional assemblies removed are properly tagged for ease of reinstallation. When required by repair procedures, perform
SDCA preparation for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.1 and SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with
Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.1 **ESD** SDCA Preparation for Maintenance.. SDCA preparation for maintenance shall be performed when
directed by procedure when performing maintenance on components of the SDCA front, swing-out, and/or back panel.
b. Loosen nine captive fasteners (Figure 5-39, 7) securing SDCA front panel assembly (1) and open panel to facili-
tate maintenance.
c. (Deleted)
Electrical hazard could be present. Before performing maintenance within the SDCA, verify
that power has been removed using the following swing-out panel test points. Failure to
d. Using multimeter (Table 2-1), check the following SDCA swing-out panel test points (Figure 4-2, 22 through 35):
TP+ TP- Normal Indication

2 1 0.5 Vdc
3 1 0.5 Vdc
4 1 0.5 Vdc
5 1 0.5 Vdc
6 1 0.5 Vdc
13 14 Less than 1 Vac
NOTE
If maintenance is to be performed on the SDCA front panel only, proceed to step f; otherwise,
perform step e.
e. Loosen two captive screws (Figure 5-39, 11) securing SDCA swing-out panel assembly and open swing-out panel
assembly (2) to facilitate maintenance.
f. Proceed to SDCA repair paragraph, as required.
5-140 Change 8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.9.1.2 **ESD** SDCA Post-Maintenance. SDCA post-maintenance shall be performed upon completion of SDCA
component maintenance in the SDCA front, swing-out, and/or back panel.
NOTE
If maintenance was performed in the SDCA back panel, proceed to step a; if maintenance
was performed on the rear of the SDCA swing-out panel, proceed to step c; if maintenance
was performed in an open SDCA front panel, proceed to step d.
a. **NSP** If SDCA back panel assembly (Figure 5-39, 8) maintenance was performed, visually inspect SDCA
delay timers (9) in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.3.
b. Visually inspect interior of the SDCA back panel assembly (Figure 5-39, 8). Ensure all components, wiring,
clamps, and cable connections are installed, routed, and seated.
Damage to CCA and/or cables could occur. Before closing the SDCA swing-out panel,
ensure all wiring, cables, and clamps on the rear of the SDCA swing-out panel and within the
SDCA back panel are positioned to prevent pinching of wires or damage to components
when swing-out panel is closed. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
c. Ensure all SDCA back panel wiring, cables, and clamps are positioned to prevent damage when swing-out panel
assembly (2) is closed and secured.
d. Close SDCA swing-out panel assembly and secure with two captive screws (11).
e. **HCP** On SDCA front panel assembly (1), inspect SDCA RFI gasket in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-
112.
f. Close SDCA front panel assembly and secure with nine captive fasteners (Figure 5-38, 7).
g. If not previously accomplished, perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
h. If not previously accomplished, perform secondary access system functional checkout in accordance with Table
4-1.
**NSP** Secondary access system lockout could occur. Whenever performing maintenance
on the controller interconnect CCA (A3A5), timer control CCAs (A3A1 through A3A4),
and/or delay timer relays (DT1 through DT5), secondary access system timer functional
checkout (Table 4-2) is required. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
If maintenance was performed on the controller interconnect CCA (A3A5), timer control
CCAs (A3A1 through A3A4), and/or delay timer relays (DT1 through DT5) in the SDCA
back panel assembly, perform step i; otherwise return to maintenance being accomplished.
i. **NSP** Perform secondary access system timer functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-2.
Change 4 5-141
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.9.1.3 SDCA Front Panel Assembly (A1). Repair of the SDCA front panel assembly consists of replacement of LED
indicators, toggle switches, and piezoelectric alarm on the front of panel assembly, and replacement of EMI filters, and LED
CCA (A1A1) on the rear of panel assembly.
5.9.1.3.1 SDCA Front Panel (URD 10494A1) Indicator Bulb Replacement. The SDCA front panel houses one red,
five green, and eight yellow indicator bulbs. Front panel indicator bulbs (Table 2-2) may be replaced with power applied to
the secondary access system. Bulbs are replaceable by unscrewing colored bulb lens, replacing bulb, and replacing bulb lens.
Momentarily setting the SDCA front panel lamp test switch to LAMP TEST, may be accomplished at the discretion of the team
chief before or after bulb replacement to verify indicator operation.
5.9.1.3.2 **ESD** SDCA Front Panel Enclosure Removal. The SDCA front panel enclosure requires removal
whenever SDCA front panel controls or indicators require replacement, LED CCA (A1A1) is replaced, or when repairing EMI
filter EF6 A CCA or filter EF6 B CCA, or cabling. Remove the SDCA front panel enclosure as follows:
NOTE
If SDCA front panel enclosure is removed for trouble analysis of switches or alarm, check
associated filter prior to re-installing enclosure.
a. Perform SDCA preparation for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.1.
b. On rear of SDCA front panel door (Figure 5-40, 1), disconnect cable W9P2 (19) from connector J1 on filter EF6
A CCA (20) on rear of front panel enclosure (10).
c. On rear of SDCA front panel door, disconnect cable W11P2 (16) from connector J2 on filter EF6 B CCA (11) on
rear of front panel enclosure.
Damage to RFI gasket, internal cables, or EMI filter EF6 could occur. There is a RFI gasket
between the front enclosure and the rear of front door, and internal cables within the front
door enclosure that run from the EF6 A and B cards to CCA A1A1. Ensure front door
enclosure is held in place when last of 42 screws securing enclosure are removed. Failure to
d. While holding SDCA front panel enclosure on rear of SDCA front door panel, remove 42 screws (2) and washers
(3) securing enclosure. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
e. While holding SDCA front panel enclosure, carefully separate enclosure and RFI gasket from rear of front panel
and slide RFI gasket from between enclosure and rear of front door panel. Retain gasket for reinstallation.
f. While holding SDCA front panel enclosure, carefully disconnect cable W29P2 from filter EF6 B CCA inside
enclosure.
g. While holding SDCA front panel enclosure, carefully disconnect cable W30P2 from filter EF6 A CCA inside
enclosure.
h. Remove front panel enclosure and retain for reinstallation.
i. Proceed to front panel maintenance paragraph being performed.
5.9.1.3.3 **ESD** SDCA Front Panel Enclosure Reinstallation. The SDCA front panel enclosure is reinstalled as
follows:
a. If not previously accomplished, perform SDCA preparation for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.1.
b. **HCP** On rear of SDCA front door panel (Figure 5-40, 1), inspect SDCA front panel enclosure (10) RFI gas-
ket and mating surfaces in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
c. On rear of SDCA front door panel, inspect LED Circuit Card Assembly (CCA) (URD 10494A1A1) (Figure 5-41,
14). Verify that CCA (A1A1) is properly installed and cables are installed on jacks J1 through J4. If required,
connect cabling in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.5.
d. While holding front panel enclosure (Figure 5-40, 10), connect cable W29P2 to filter EF6 B CCA (11) J2 inside
enclosure.
e. While holding front panel enclosure, connect cable W30P2 to filter EF6 A CCA (20) J1 inside enclosure.
5-142
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
f. While holding front panel enclosure (10), carefully insert RFI gasket between mating surface of enclosure and
mating surface on the rear of SDCA front panel. From outside of front door panel, start one or more of 42 wash-
ers (3) and screws (2) to hold gasket and enclosure in place.
g. **HCP** While ensuring RFI gasket is properly aligned, install and torque 42 washers and screws securing front
panel enclosure to 5 (±1) inch-pounds.
h. Connect cable W9P2 (19) to connector J1 on filter EF6 A CCA (20) on rear of front panel enclosure.
i. Connect cable W11P2 (16) to connector J2 on filter EF6 B CCA (11) on rear of front panel enclosure (10).
j. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.3.4 **ESD** SDCA Front Panel EMI Filters EF6 A CCA and EF6 B CCA Repair or Replacement. The SDCA
front panel enclosure contains EMI filter EF6 A CCA (Figure 5-40, 20) and EF6 B CCA (11). Repair or replacement of EMI
filter EF6 A, or EF6 B CCA is accomplished in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.5.8.2.
5.9.1.3.5 **ESD** SDCA LED (URD 10494A1A1) CCA Replacement. The LED CCA is located in the SDCA front
panel and is an interface for the front panel controls and indicators. Whenever performing maintenance on the front panel
controls and indicators, with the exception of indicator bulb replacement, or when replacing the LED CCA, the SDCA front
panel enclosure shall be removed in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.2. When removal of the LED CCA is required for
repair of SDCA front panel controls or indicators, or replacing the LED CCA, proceed as follows:
a. Perform front panel enclosure removal in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.2.
Damage to cables and/or connectors could occur. Care shall be used when disconnecting
CCA cables and whenever moving cables to facilitate CCA removal. Failure to comply could
NOTE
Four cable plugs P1 through P4 are connected to two cable jacks, J3 and J4, on the top of
LED CCA. When disconnecting cable plugs P1 through P4 from J3 and J4, note the position
of each for ease of reinstallation.
b. At the top of LED CCA A1A1 (Figure 5-41, 14), disconnect cable W32P2 (12) from A1A1 J3 (20).
c. At the side of LED CCA A1A1, disconnect cable W31P1 (13) from A1A1 J3 (19).
d. At the top of LED CCA A1A1, disconnect cable W33P3 (16) from A1A1 J4 (17).
e. At the top of LED CCA A1A1, disconnect cable W34P4 (15) from A1A1 J4 (18).
f. Remove four nuts (9) and washers securing LED CCA A1A1 to the front panel assembly and retain for reinstalla-
tion of replacement CCA.
g. Remove LED CCA A1A1 from SDCA front panel (1) assembly.
h. Disconnect cable W29P1 (8) from connector A1A1 J1.
i. Disconnect cable W30P1 (7) from connector A1A1 J2.
j. If CCA standoffs were removed, re-install using threadlocker (Table 2-2) and torque to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
NOTE
Retain antistatic packaging for repackaging/return of component removed.
k. Remove replacement component from antistatic packaging and install in SDCA front panel assembly. Ensure LED
CCA connectors J3 and J4 are facing the top of SDCA front panel assembly.
l. Reinstall four nuts (9) and washers securing LED CCA A1A1 on rear of front panel. Torque nuts to 4.5 (±0.5)
inch-pounds.
m. Connect cable W30P1 to connector A1A1 J2.
n. Connect cable W29P1 to connector A1A1 J1.
5-143
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Damage to CCA could occur. Care shall be used when handling CCA whenever moving
cables to facilitate CCA replacement. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
o. At the side of LED CCA A1A1, connect cable W33P3 to connector A1A1 J4 (17).
p. At the side of LED CCA A1A1, connect cable W34P4 to connector A1A1 J4 (18).
q. At the top of LED CCA A1A1, connect cable W31P1 to connector A1A1 J3 (19).
r. At the top of LED CCA A1A1, connect cable W32P2 to connector A1A1 J3 (20).
s. Reinstall front panel enclosure (Figure 5-40, 10) in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.3.
5.9.1.3.6 **ESD** SDCA Front Panel Toggle Switch Replacement. The front panel of SDCA contains seven toggle
switches, SW1 through SW7. The following procedure shall be used to replace switches SW1 through SW7, as required:
a. Perform front panel enclosure removal in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.2.
b. Locate faulty switch SW1 through SW7 (Figure 5-41), as required, on rear of SDCA front panel (1).
NOTE
The LED CCA A1A1 may be removed for ease of switch replacement. If switch can be
replaced without removal of the LED CCA, proceed to step d.
c. If required, remove LED CCA A1A1 (14) in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.5, steps b through g, to facilitate
switch replacement.
d. On rear of SDCA front panel (Figure 5-41, 1), disconnect and tag wiring on rear of faulty switch.
e. On SDCA front panel, lift switch guard, if installed, and unscrew switch retaining nut. Remove nut, switch guard,
and washer. Retail switch guard for installation on replacement switch.
f. Remove faulty switch through rear of SDCA front panel.
g. Remove retaining nut and lock ring from faulty switch and install on replacement switch, as required.
h. From rear of SDCA front panel, insert replacement switch through panel.
i. Install switch guard, washer, and retain nut on front of SDCA front panel. Tighten switch in panel.
j. Connect switch wiring removed and tagged in step d.
NOTE
If LED CCA A1A1 was removed for ease of switch replacement, proceed to step k;
otherwise, proceed to step l.
k. Reinstall SDCA LED CCA A1A1 (14) in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.5, steps l through r.
l. Reinstall front panel enclosure in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.3.
5.9.1.3.7 **ESD** SDCA Front Panel Piezoelectric Alarm (SP1) Replacement. The SDCA front panel contains a
piezoelectric alarm (SP1). Replace SP1 as follows:
a. Perform SDCA front panel enclosure removal in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.2.
b. Locate faulty piezoelectric alarm SP1 (Figure 5-41) on the rear of SDCA front panel (1) assembly.
c. On back side of SDCA front panel, disconnect and tag wires on the rear of faulty piezoelectric alarm SP1.
d. Unscrew and remove knurled retaining nut and gasket on rear of faulty piezoelectric alarm SP1.
e. Carefully remove faulty piezoelectric alarm SP1 from SDCA front panel.
f. Remove knurled retaining nut from replacement piezoelectric alarm SP1 and retain for installation.
g. Install replacement piezoelectric alarm SP1 through the front of SDCA front panel.
5-144
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
h. Install knurled retaining nut on rear of piezoelectric alarm SP1. Tighten knurled retaining nut to properly seat gas-
ket and secure alarm to front panel.
i. On back side of SDCA front panel, reconnect piezoelectric alarm SP1 wiring removed in step c.
j. Reinstall front panel enclosure in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.3.
5.9.1.4 SDCA Swing-Out Panel Assembly (A2). Repair of SDCA swing-out panel consists of replacement of the key
pad assembly and cable on the front of the panel assembly and replacement of CCAs A2A1, A2A2, and A2A3, and fuses F1
and F2 on CCA A2A3 on rear of panel assembly.
5.9.1.4.1 **ESD** SDCA Swing-Out Panel CCA, Primary Control (A2A1) and Keypad Replacement. The primary
control CCA (A2A1) is located on the bottom inside of the SDCA swing-out panel. The primary control CCA interfaces with
the swing-out panel keypad. To replace the primary control CCA, the SDCA keypad, or the keypad ribbon cable, perform the
following:
b. Locate faulty primary control CCA A2A1 (Figure 5-42, 22) on the reverse of SDCA swing-out panel (11)
assembly.
Damage to cables could occur. Care shall be used when connecting or disconnecting CCA
cables and whenever moving cables to facilitate CCA removal. Failure to comply could result
c. On faulty primary control CCA, disconnect cables from J2 and J7 through J14.
d. Remove cable clamp at the bottom of the faulty primary control CCA A2A1 (22) to facilitate ease of cable
removal.
e. Remove nine remaining nuts (23) and washers securing faulty primary control CCA A2A1 (22) to the swing-out
panel (11) assembly and retain for reinstallation of replacement CCA.
• Damage to cables and/or connectors could occur. A ribbon cable is connected between
jack J5 on the reverse of the primary control CCA and terminates on the back of SDCA
swing-out panel keypad. Care shall be used when removing primary control CCA and
exposing keypad ribbon cable. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
• Damage to LEDs or CCA could occur. LEDs mounted on swing-out panel CCAs are
seated in indicator cutouts on the front of swing-out panel assembly. When removing or
replacing swing-out panel CCAs, ensure CCA LEDs are carefully pulled free on removal
and properly aligned with indicator cutouts when reinstalled. Failure to comply could
f. Carefully remove faulty primary control CCA A2A1 to expose keypad ribbon cable on reverse of CCA.
g. Carefully lift faulty primary control CCA A2A1 and disconnect keypad ribbon cable W5 (19A) from primary con-
trol CCA A2A1 J5 and remove.
NOTE
If SDCA swing-out panel keypad or keypad ribbon cable requires replacement, proceed to
step h; otherwise, proceed to step m.
h. On front of SDCA swing-out panel, carefully remove nuts and washers on reverse of panel, securing keypad to
face of swing-out panel.
i. Carefully remove keypad and ribbon cable from the front of the SDCA swing-out panel.
Change 4 5-145
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
j. Inspect keypad ribbon cable for pinched or broken wires, or damaged connectors, and install on rear of replace-
ment keypad. If required, replace ribbon cable.
k. On front of SDCA swing-out panel, position replacement keypad and gasket on swing-out panel, and install two
screws, two washers, and two nuts removed in step h.
l. Install ribbon cable on keypad with gray strand down.
m. If CCA standoffs were removed, re-install using threadlocker (Table 2-2) and torque to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
n. On replacement primary control CCA A2A1, locate option switch SW2 (DETAIL A) in upper right quadrant of
CCA and ensure OPTION switches are set as follows:
(1) OPTION 1 to OFF.
(2) OPTION 2 to ON.
(3) OPTION 3 to ON.
(4) OPTION 4 to ON.
Incorrect alignment of ribbon cable with connector J5 could result in keypad malfunction.
When installing keypad ribbon cable, ensure the top pin on primary control CCA A2A1 J5
and top pin on ribbon cable are aligned. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
o. On replacement primary control CCA A2A1, carefully align top pin on primary control CCA A2A1 J5 and top
pin on ribbon cable and connect CCA to keypad.
NOTE
Ten nuts retain the primary control CCA to the rear of the swing-out panel. When reinstalling
CCA, the bottom left nut is also used to secure the cable clamp removed in step d and may
be left off to facilitate connection of CCA cabling.
p. Carefully position replacement primary control CCA A2A1 on standoffs, and install nine nuts and washers secur-
ing CCA to rear of the swing-out panel. Torque nuts to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
q. On replacement primary control CCA A2A1 (22), connect cables as follows:
Cable To CCA A2A1

W14P2 (21) J8
W12P2 (20) J13
W17P2 (19) J12
W18P2 (18) J11
W13P2 (17) J9
W23P2 (16) J2
W19P2 (15) J10
W16P2 (14) J7
W27P1 (13) J14
r. If not previously accomplished, install cable clamp and nut removed in step d.
s. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5-146 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.9.1.4.2 **ESD** SDCA Swing-Out Panel CCA, 24V Driver (A2A2) Replacement.
b. Locate faulty 24V driver CCA A2A2 (Figure 5-42, 1) on the reverse of SDCA swing-out panel (11).
Damage to cables could occur. Care shall be used when disconnecting CCA cables and
whenever moving cables to facilitate CCA removal. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
c. On faulty 24V driver CCA A2A2, disconnect cables J1 through J3.
d. Remove four nuts (2) and washers securing faulty 24V driver CCA A2A2 to the swing-out panel assembly and
retain for reinstallation of replacement CCA.
Damage to LEDs or CCA could occur. LEDs mounted on swing-out panel CCAs are seated
in indicator cutouts on the front of swing-out panel assembly. When removing or replacing
swing-out panel CCAs ensure CCA LEDs are carefully pulled free on removal and properly
aligned with indicator cutouts when reinstalled. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
e. Remove faulty 24V driver CCA A2A2 from SDCA swing-out panel assembly.
NOTE
f. Remove replacement component from antistatic packaging and carefully position in SDCA swing-out panel.
g. On replacement 24V driver CCA A2A2, reinstall four nuts and washers removed in step d. Torque nuts to 4.5
(±0.5) inch-pounds.
Damage to cables could occur. Care shall be used when connecting CCA cables and
whenever moving cables to facilitate CCA replacement. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
h. On replacement 24V driver CCA A2A2, connect cable W21P2 (3) to A2A2 J1.
i. On replacement 24V driver CCA A2A2, connect cable W28P2 (4) to A2A2 J2.
j. On replacement 24V driver CCA A2A2, connect cable W22P2 (5) to A2A2 J3.
k. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5-147
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.9.1.4.3 **ESD** SDCA Swing-Out Panel CCA Power Command (A2A3) Replacement. The power command
CCA A2A3 (Figure 5-42, 6) is located in the upper right of the rear of the SDCA swing-out panel (11). There are two fuses,
F1 and F2, located on the power command CCA A2A3 and if required by procedure, fuse replacement may be accomplished
separately in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.4.3.1. Replace the power command CCA as follows:
NOTE
Power command CCA A2A3 pushbutton switch covers may be tightly pressed onto CCA
switches and difficult to remove. Apply even pressure on switch cover and pull straight
outward to remove.
b. On front of SDCA swing-out panel (Figure 5-42, 11), on power command CCA A2A3 (6) controls and indicator
panel (Figure 4-2, detail A) remove PAH LIGHTS (11), SEC. PIN COIL - COIL 1 TEST (13), SEC. PIN COIL -
COIL 2 TEST (15), ESS ON (20), and ESS OFF (21) green pushbutton switch covers by pulling outward. Retain
switch covers for reinstallation.
c. On rear of SDCA swing-out panel (Figure 5-42, 11), remove four nuts securing acrylic panel protecting power
command A2A3 CCA and retain hardware for reinstallation.
Damage to connectors could occur. Care shall be used when disconnecting CCA cables and
whenever moving cables to facilitate CCA removal. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
d. On faulty power command CCA A2A3 (6), disconnect cable jacks J1 and J2.
e. Remove four standoffs and washers securing faulty power command CCA A2A3 to the swing-out panel assembly
and retain for reinstallation of replacement CCA.
Damage to LEDs or CCA could occur. LEDs mounted on swing-out panel CCAs are seated
in indicator cutouts on the front of swing-out panel assembly. When removing or replacing
swing-out panel CCAs, ensure CCA LEDs are carefully pulled free on removal and properly
aligned with indicator cutouts when reinstalled. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
f. Remove faulty power command CCA A2A3 from SDCA swing-out panel assembly.
NOTE
g. Remove replacement component from antistatic packaging and locate fuse holders F1 and F2 on replacement
power command CCA A2A3 (6).
h. If required, install fuses (Table 2-2) in fuse holders F1 and F2 on replacement power command CCA A2A3
(Figure 5-42, 6).
i. Carefully position replacement power command CCA A2A3 in SDCA swing-out panel and reinstall four standoffs
and washers removed in step e. Torque to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
Damage to connectors could occur. Care shall be used when connecting CCA cables and
whenever moving cables to facilitate CCA replacement. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
j. On replacement power command CCA A2A3, connect cable W26P1 (7) to A2A3 J1.
5-148
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
k. On replacement power command CCA A2A3, connect cable W25P2 (10) to A2A3 J2.
l. On rear of SDCA swing-out panel, reinstall acrylic protective panel using four nuts removed in step c. Torque
nuts to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
m. On front of SDCA swing-out panel, on power command CCA A2A3 controls and indicator panel (Figure 4-2,
detail A) install PAH LIGHTS (11), SEC. PIN COIL - COIL 1 TEST (13), SEC. PIN COIL - COIL 2 TEST (15),
ESS ON (20), and ESS OFF (21) green pushbuttons switch covers onto switches. Press pushbutton switch covers
firmly to properly seat on control and indicator panel and test for smooth operation of switch.
n. On front of SDCA swing-out panel, on power command CCA A2A3 controls and indicator panel (Figure 4-2,
detail A) verify that all toggle switches are in the OFF (down) position.
o. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.4.3.1 **ESD** SDCA CCA, Power Command (A2A3) Fuse F1, F2 Replacement. The SDCA power command
CCA A2A3 (Figure 5-42, 6) contains two fuses, F1 and F2. The following procedure shall be accomplished to replace fuse
F1 and/or F2.
a. If not previously accomplished, perform SDCA preparation for maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.1.
b. If required, on rear of SDCA swing-out panel (Figure 5-42, 11), remove four nuts securing acrylic panel protect-
ing power command A2A3 CCA and retain for reinstallation.
c. On power command CCA A2A3 (6), locate fuse F1 or F2 requiring replacement.
d. On power command CCA A2A3, open fuse holder(s) and remove and replace fuse(s), as required. Close fuse
holder.
e. If required, repeat steps c and d for second fuse.
f. On rear of SDCA swing-out panel, reinstall acrylic protective panel using four nuts removed in step b. Torque
nuts to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
g. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.5 SDCA Back Panel Assembly (A3). Repair of the SDCA back panel consists of replacement of the CCAs A3A1,
A3A2, A3A3, A3A4 and A3A5, fuse F1 on CCAs A3A1 through A3A4, delay timer relays DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4, and DT5,
diodes located on terminal boards TB2, TB3, and TB4, power supplies PS1, PS2, and PS3, relay K1, and associated wiring
and cables, located within panel assembly. EMI filter enclosures are also located within SDCA back panel.
5.9.1.5.1 **ESD** SDCA Back Panel, Timer Control CCA (A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, A3A4) Replacement. There are
four timer control CCAs, A3A1 through A3A4, located on the controller interconnect CCA A3A5 in the SDCA back panel
assembly, (Figure 5-43). Refer to Table 5-7 to associate timer control CCAs A3A1 through A3A4 to specific delay timer relay
circuit. Perform timer control CCA A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and/or A3A4 removal or replacement as follows:
b. Locate faulty timer control CCA on controller interconnect CCA A3A5 (Figure 5-44, 20).
Damage to connectors could occur. Use care when disconnecting CCA cables and whenever
moving cables to facilitate CCA removal. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
NOTE
Removal of wire clamps may be necessary to remove CCAs A3A1, A3A3, and A3A4. When
removing cables, clamps, or components, tag as required facilitating ease of reinstallation.
c. Remove and tag wire clamps, cabling, or components as required to facilitate removal of timer control CCA to be
replaced.
Change 4 5-149
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
d. Remove cables on controller interconnect CCA A3A5 for the timer control CCA to be removed as follows:
CCAs Cables
A3A1, A3A3 W28P1 from A3A5 J22
W22P1 from A3A5 J23
W21P1 from A3A5 J29
W25P1 from A3A5 J28
W20P3 from A3A5 J21
W09P1 from A3A5 J11
W11P1 from A3A5 J12
W12P1 from A3A5 J13
W17P1 from A3A5 J18
W18P1 from A3A5 J19
A3A4 W07P3 from A3A5 J6
e. If necessary, remove acrylic cover from CCAs A3A1 and A3A3 by removing nuts or standoffs and washers.
f. On faulty timer control CCA carefully remove the respective cable as follows:
CCAs Cables
g. On faulty timer control CCA, loosen and remove four mounting nuts, washers and if necessary, standoffs.
h. Carefully remove faulty timer control CCA from controller interconnect CCA A3A5.
NOTE
Retain antistatic packaging for repackaging/return of component disconnected.
i. Remove replacement timer control CCA from antistatic packaging.
j. On replacement timer control CCA, open fuse F1 (19) holder and visually inspect fuse. If required, install
replacement fuse (Table 2-2) in fuse holder. Close fuse holder.
k. Carefully position replacement timer control CCA on controller interconnect CCA A3A5 with standoffs, if
necessary. Torque standoffs to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
l. On replacement timer control CCA, connect cables removed in step f.
m. On controller interconnect CCA A3A5, connect cables removed in step d.
NOTE
Standoffs are installed over CCAs A3A1 and A3A3 to facilitate placement of acrylic cover
and cable clamps.
n. If removed, install standoffs and acrylic cover over CCAs A3A1 and A3A3. Torque standoffs to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-
pounds.
5-150
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
o. On replacement timer control CCA, install mounting nuts and washers. Torque nuts to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
p. If removed, position cable clamps (Figure 5-43, 10) and tighten mounting nuts (9). Torque nuts to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-
pounds.
Secondary access system lockout could occur. The installation of the timer control CCAs
A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4, and associated wiring are critical to operation of the
secondary access system. Whenever completing timer control CCA maintenance, visually
inspect all timer control CCA wiring to ensure than none has been damaged or that
connectors have not been loosened. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
q. **NSP** On timer control CCAs, A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, A3A4, verify that cables installed between the timer con-
trol CCAs J1, and the controller interconnect CCA A3A5 connector jacks J2, J3, J7, and J16, are undamaged,
properly routed, and connected.
Secondary access system lockout could occur. The delay timer relays, DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4,
and DT5, and associated wiring are critical to operation of the secondary access system.
Whenever completing maintenance in the vicinity of the delay timer relays, visually inspect
relays and wiring to ensure that none have been damaged or loosened. Failure to comply
could result in equipment damage.
r. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.5.1.1 **ESD** SDCA Timer Control CCA, Fuse F1 Replacement. The SDCA back panel contains four timer
control CCAs, A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4, and each timer control CCA is equipped with a fuse F1. The following
procedure shall be used to replace the F1 fuse in any of the four CCAs:
b. Locate faulty timer control CCA (A3A1 through A3A4) (Figure 5-44, 17, 18, 27, or 28) requiring fuse F1
replacement.
c. On timer control CCA, open fuse F1 (19) holder and remove and replace fuse, as required. Close fuse F1 holder.
d. If required, repeat steps b and c for any additional timer control CCA fuse(s) requiring replacement.
e. Perform SDCA post maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.5.2 **ESD** SDCA CCA, Controller Interconnect (A3A5) Replacement. The SDCA controller interconnect
CCA A3A5 is located in the back panel assembly. Replacement requires the removal of the four timer control CCAs, A3A1,
A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4, which are located on the SDCA controller interconnect CCA A3A5. Perform controller interconnect
CCA A3A5 replacement as follows:
b. Locate faulty controller interconnect CCA A3A5 (Figure 5-44, 20) in the SDCA back panel assembly (1).
NOTE
When removing cables, clamps, or components, tag as required to facilitate ease of
reinstallation.
c. Remove four timer control CCAs (A3A1 through A3A4) in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.5.1, steps b through
h.
Change 4 5-151
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Damage to connectors could occur. Use care when disconnecting CCA cables and whenever
moving cables to facilitate CCA removal. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
d. On faulty controller interconnect CCA A3A5 (Figure 5-44, 20), carefully disconnect the following cables:
Cable CCA A3A5 Cable CCA A3A5

W1P2 A3A5 J1 W23P1 A3A5 J27
W8P3 A3A5 J24 W14P1 A3A5 J15
W6P1 A3A5 J5 W13P1 A3A5 J14
W5P2 A3A5 J4 W10P1 A3A5 J10
W16P1 A3A5 J17 W24P1 A3A5 J9
W19P1 A3A5 J20 W8P2 A3A5 J8
NOTE
Additional cables, clamps, or components, may be removed, if required, to facilitate ease of
CCA replacement. If required, remove components in accordance with SDCA back panel
maintenance replacement procedures and tag cables as required for reinstallation.
e. If required, remove any cables, clamps or SDCA back panel components that could interfere with interconnect
CCA replacement in accordance with appropriate SDCA back panel assembly paragraph(s).
f. On faulty controller interconnect CCA A3A5, verify that all cables have been disconnected and moved to facili-
tate CCA removal, as required.
g. On faulty controller interconnect CCA A3A5, remove sixteen timer control CCA standoffs (30) and CCA center
mounting nut and washer.
h. Carefully remove faulty controller interconnect CCA A3A5 from SDCA back panel assembly (1).
i. If CCA standoffs were removed, re-install using threadlocker (Table 2-2) and torque to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
NOTE
Retain antistatic packaging for repackaging/return of component disconnected.
j. Remove replacement controller interconnect CCA A3A5 from antistatic packaging and position in the SDCA back
panel assembly (1) for installation.
k. On replacement controller interconnect CCA A3A5, install and tighten center mounting nut and washer. Torque
nut to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
l. On replacement controller interconnect CCA A3A5, install and tighten sixteen timer control CCA washers and
standoffs. Torque standoffs to 4.5 (±0.5) inch-pounds.
5-152
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
• Secondary access system lockout could occur. The installation of the timer control CCAs,
controller interconnect CCA, and associated cabling is critical to operation of secondary
access system. Use care when installing controller interconnect CCA, timer control
CCAs, and associated wiring. Before completing installation of the controller intercon-
nect CCA A3A5, double check all cable connectors to ensure they are properly seated in
appropriate cable jacks. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
• Damage to connectors could occur. Use care when connecting CCA cables and whenever
moving cables to facilitate CCA replacement. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
m. If any additional cables, clamps, or SDCA back panel components were removed to facilitate interconnect CCA
replacement, reinstall in accordance with appropriate SDCA back panel assembly paragraph(s).
NOTE
When reconnecting controller interconnect CCA A3A5 cabling, A3A5 J26 is not used and
A3A5 J25 is not present.
n. Re-install cables removed in step d.
o. Install four timer control CCAs (A3A1 through A3A4) in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.5.1.
Secondary access system lockout could occur. The installation of the timer control CCAs,
A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4, and associated wiring are critical to operation of secondary
access system. Whenever completing timer control CCA maintenance, visually inspect all
timer control CCA wiring to ensure that none has been damaged or connectors have been
loosened. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
p. **NSP** On timer control CCAs, A3A1, A3A2, A3A3, and A3A4, verify that cables installed between the timer
control CCAs jack J1, and the controller interconnect CCA A3A5 connector jacks J2, J3, J7, and J16, are undam-
aged, properly routed, and connected.
q. Visually inspect interior of the SDCA back panel assembly. Ensure all components, wiring and cable connections
are properly installed, routed, and seated and will not interfere with the closing of the swing-out panel assembly.
r. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.5.3 **ESD** Delay Timer Relay (DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4, DT5) Replacement. There are five delay timer relays
located in the bottom of SDCA back panel assembly (Table 5-7). Delay timer relay DT1 and DT3 are components of the 64-
(±4) minute site penetration delay circuit; DT2 and DT4 are components of the 10-minute timer circuit; and DT5 is a 5-second
timer used by the SDCA operating system. The following procedure shall be used to replace delay relay timer(s) DT1, DT2,
DT3, DT4, and ⁄ or DT5:
b. In the bottom of SDCA back panel, locate delay timer relay (Figure 5-44, 21 through 25) requiring replacement.
5-153
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Secondary access system lockout could occur. The delay timer relays, DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4
and DT5, and associated wiring is critical to the operation of secondary access system. When
removing relay wiring, ensure all three terminal wires are identified and appropriately tagged
to facilitate reinstallation on replacement relay. Failure to comply could result in equipment
damage.
c. On faulty delay timer relay, carefully remove wire lugs from GND, LOAD, and (+) terminals. Ensure wire re-
moved is tagged to facilitate reinstallation.
d. On faulty delay timer relay, remove center screw (26) and carefully remove faulty relay. Retain screw for reinstal-
lation of replacement relay.
Secondary access system lockout could occur. Installation of the proper delay timer relay is
critical to operation of secondary access system. Delay timer relay part numbers are
contained in Table 5-7. Before installation of replacement relay, verify part number of
replacement relay matches Table 5-7 relay part number entry for relay being replaced. Do not
install a delay timer relay that has not been verified as appropriate to the timer circuit being
repaired. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
e. **NSP** Obtain replacement delay timer relay and verify part number is correct for timer circuit under repair in
accordance with Table 5-7. If replacement delay timer relay part number is incorrect or suspect, immediately
cease replacement operation and notify MMOC.
f. In SDCA back panel assembly (Figure 5-44, 1), install replacement delay timer relay using screw (26) removed in
step d.
Secondary access system lockout could occur. The delay timer relays, DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4
and DT5, and associated wiring are critical to the operation of secondary access system. Care
shall be used to ensure all delay timer relay wiring is properly installed on terminals. Failure
to comply could result in equipment damage.
g. **NSP** On replacement delay timer relay, carefully install wire lugs on GND, LOAD, and (+) terminals.
h. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.5.4 **ESD** SDCA Back Panel, Power Supply PS1 Replacement. Power supply PS1 provides 24 Vdc external
power to the secondary access system and is located in the in upper center area of the SDCA back panel assembly. Replace
power supply PS1 as follows:
b. Locate power supply PS1 (Figure 5-44, 11) in SDCA back panel assembly (1).
c. On faulty power supply PS1, loosen terminal screws, then remove and tag wires from terminals L1, L2 ⁄ N, (+),
and (-).
5-154
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
d. On faulty power supply PS1, remove two long mounting screws in center and two short mounting screws on left
end of power supply. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
NOTE
e. Remove replacement component from antistatic packaging.
f. On replacement power supply PS1, ensure that a jumper is installed across jumper pins S+ and (+). If required,
remove jumper from faulty power supply and jumper S+ and (+).
g. On replacement power supply PS1, ensure that a jumper is installed across jumper pins S- and (-). If required,
remove jumper from faulty power supply and jumper S- and (-).
h. Carefully position replacement power supply PS1 in SDCA back panel assembly. Install two long mounting
screws in center and two short mounting screws on left end of power supply and tighten.
i. On replacement power supply PS1, loosen terminal screws, then install wiring on terminals L1, L2 ⁄ N, (+), and
(-), as tagged in step c.
5.9.1.5.5 **ESD** SDCA Back Panel, Power Supply PS2, PS3 Replacement. Power supply PS2 and PS3 convert
24 Vdc to 12 Vdc to provide 12 Vdc power to SDCA delay relay timers and SDCA CCAs. Power supply PS2 is located in
the upper left area of the SDCA back panel assembly and power supply PS3 is located in the upper right area of the SDCA
back panel assembly. Replace power supply PS2 and/or PS3 as follows:
b. Locate faulty power supply PS2 (Figure 5-44, 4) in the upper left area of the SDCA back panel, or power supply
PS3 (13) in the upper right area of the SDCA back panel, as required.
c. Remove two screws (3) securing faulty power supply to SDCA back panel assembly (1).
d. On faulty power supply PS2 or PS3, loosen terminal screws then disconnect and tag 24 Vdc input (+) and (-)
wires.
e. On faulty power supply PS2 or PS3, loosen terminal screws then disconnect and tag 15 Vdc output (+) and (-)
wires.
NOTE
f. Remove replacement component from antistatic packaging and position for installation in SDCA back panel
assembly.
g. Reinstall two power supply mounting screws removed in step e.
h. On replacement power supply, loosen terminal screws then reconnect 15 Vdc output (+) and (-) wires removed in
step d.
i. On replacement power supply, loosen terminal screws then reconnect 24 Vdc input (+) and (-) wires removed in
step c.
5.9.1.5.6 **ESD** SDCA Back Panel, Diode D1 through D6 Replacement. There are six diodes located on terminal
boards located in the SDCA back panel assembly. Diodes D1 and D2 are located on TB3, diodes D3 and D4 are located on
TB4, and diodes D5 and D6 are located on TB2. Perform SDCA back panel assembly diode D1 through D6 replacement as
follows:
b. Locate faulty diode in back panel assembly (Figure 5-44, 1) terminal board TB2 (29), TB3 (2), or TB4 (14), as
required.
5-155
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Depending on location of the diode to be replaced, it may be necessary to remove clamps,
cables, or wiring to gain access to the component.
c. In SDCA back panel, locate diode requiring replacement in accordance with Table 5-8. If required, disconnect and
tag wiring and/or clamps to facilitate maintenance.
Damage to SDCA components could occur. When removing defective diode from terminal
board, note position and direction of component anode and cathode to facilitate reinstallation.
d. On terminal board, note position of diode anode and cathode, and remove two screws securing diode leads to ter-
minal board. Retain hardware for reinstallation and remove and discard defective diode.
e. Prepare replacement diode for installation by crimping a ring lug (RB14-8) on the end of each of the replacement
diode leads, and bend or cut leads as required to fit terminal board.
f. Using screws removed in step d, reinstall replacement diode on terminal board. Ensure anode and cathode are
positioned in accordance with Table 5-8 and Figure 9-2, as required.
g. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.5.7 **ESD** SDCA Back Panel Relay K1 Replacement. SDCA relay K1 is located in the top center area of the
SDCA back panel assembly and is associated with the PAH lighting circuit. Perform relay K1 replacement as follows:
b. Locate faulty relay K1 (Figure 5-44, 9) in the SDCA back panel assembly (1).
c. In SDCA back panel assembly, remove four screws (6), cable clamp, and washers securing acrylic cover (10)
over terminal board TB5 and relay K1. Reposition cable clamp and cable W35, as required, and remove acrylic
cover. Retain cover/hardware for reinstallation.
d. On faulty relay K1 (9), carefully disconnect and tag relay K1 wiring from terminals A1, A2, T1, and L1.
e. On faulty relay K1, remove two screws (8) and washers securing relay K1 to the SDCA back panel assembly.
Retain hardware for reinstallation.
f. Remove faulty relay K1, from back panel assembly (1).
NOTE
Replacement relay K1 is oriented with terminals T1 and A1 at the top of SDCA back panel
assembly.
g. Remove replacement relay K1 from packaging and position in the SDCA back panel assembly (1) with terminals
T1 and A1 positioned as uppermost terminals.
h. On replacement relay K1, install two screws (8) and washers and tighten relay to SDCA back panel assembly (1).
i. On replacement relay K1, connect wiring removed in step d to terminals A1, A2, T1, and L1. Tighten terminal
screws.
j. Position acrylic cover removed in step c over terminal board TB5 and relay K1. Reposition cable clamp and cable
W35 on bottom right corner of acrylic cover and using four screws (6) and washers reinstall acrylic cover and
W35 cable.
k. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5-156 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.9.1.5.8 SDCA EMI Filter Assemblies. The SDCA contains six EMI filter assemblies, EF1 through EF6. EMI filter
assemblies EF1 through EF5 (Figure 5-45) are located in the SDCA back panel positioned around the SDCA back panel
assembly, and EMI filter EF6 (Figure 5-46) is located within the SDCA front panel enclosure on the rear of the SDCA front
panel assembly. Perform replacement of EMI filters EF1 through EF5 in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.5.8.1, and
replacement of EMI filter EF6 in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.5.8.2.
5.9.1.5.8.1 **ESD** SDCA EMI Filter Assemblies EF1 Through EF5 Replacement. Perform replacement of EMI
filter assemblies EF1 through EF5 as follows:
b. Locate faulty EMI Filter EF1 through EF5 (Figure 5-43, 2 through 6), as required, in the SDCA back panel
assembly (1).
c. On back of faulty EMI filter enclosure (Figure 5-45, 1), disconnect ribbon cable(s) from EF(x) EMI side A CCA
(2) J1 (5). Reference Table 5-9 for specific cable(s)/EMI filter connectivity.
d. On outside of SDCA, locate 18 screws and washers securing EF(x) enclosure in SDCA back panel. Remove
screws and washers and retain hardware for reinstallation.
e. Carefully lift EF(x) enclosure and disconnect ribbon cable from EMI side B CCA (Figure 5-45, 10) J2 (11).
f. If installed, remove screw and washer securing green ground wire inside EF(x) enclosure.
g. Carefully remove EMI gasket from EMI filter enclosure (1) and retain gasket for reinstallation.
h. On EMI filter enclosure, carefully remove four screws (3), four washers (4), and four nuts (9) securing EMI side
A CCA (2) and EMI side B CCA to enclosure. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
securely pressed into the thirty individual EMI filters. While removing and replacing CCA,
use care to gently rock CCA while lifting or pressing straight upward or downward onto EMI
i. On outside of EMI filter enclosure, slowly and carefully lift EMI side A CCA straight upwards separating CCA
from EMI filters (8). If CCA requires replacement, discard; otherwise, retain for reinstallation.
j. On inside of EMI filter enclosure, slowly and carefully lift EMI side B CCA (10) straight upwards separating
CCA from EMI filters. If CCA requires replacement, discard; otherwise, retain for reinstallation.
k. If one or more EMI filters require replacement, carefully remove nut (7) from filter being replaced and remove
defective filter. Repeat steps k and l until all defective filters have been removed. If filter replacement is not re-
quired, proceed to step n.
l. Remove nut (7) from replacement EMI filter then carefully insert replacement filter into enclosure cutouts. Repeat
until all defective filters have been replaced, then proceed to step m.
m. **HCP** Torque each EMI filter nut (7) replaced to 32 (±0.2) inch-ounces.
n. Inspect EMI side B CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
o. Carefully install EMI side B CCA on standoffs (6) on inside of EMI filter enclosure (1) by pressing CCA down-
ward onto 30 EMI filters.
p. Inspect EMI side A CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
q. Carefully install EMI side A CCA on standoffs on outside of EMI filter enclosure by pressing CCA downward
onto 30 EMI filters.
r. Lightly apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to each of the four CCA mount screws (Figure 5-45, 3).
s. On EMI filter enclosure, install and tighten four screws, four washers (4), and four nuts (9) securing EMI side A
CCA (2) and EMI side B CCA (10) into enclosure.
t. **HCP** Inspect EMI filter enclosure (1) EMI gasket in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
Change 4 5-157
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
u. Place EMI filter enclosure with EMI gasket in place on enclosure, then install ribbon cable connector on EMI
side B CCA J2 (11).
v. If installed, reinstall green ground wire using screw and washer removed in step f inside EF(x) enclosure.
w. While ensuring EMI gasket is properly fitted, carefully align EMI filter enclosure and EMI gasket inside SDCA
back panel, then on outside of SDCA start 18 screws and washers removed in step d.
x. **HCP** Verify that EMI gasket is properly aligned with EMI filter enclosure, then tighten 18 enclosure screws.
y. On back of EMI filter enclosure, connect ribbon cable(s) to EF(x) EMI side A CCA J1 (5). Reference Table 5-9
for specific cable(s)/EMI filter connectivity.
z. Perform SDCA post-maintenance in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.2.
5.9.1.5.8.2 **ESD** SDCA EMI Filter Assembly EF6 Replacement. Perform replacement of EMI filter assembly EF6
as follows:
a. Perform SDCA front panel enclosure removal in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.2.
NOTE
EMI filter EF6 consists of four filter CCAs, two side As and two side Bs. For purposes of
identification in this procedure, EF6 A is identified as the filter assembly marked A, with the
side A CCA on the rear of front panel enclosure. EF6 B is identified as the filter assembly
marked B, with the side B CCA on the rear of front panel enclosure.
b. Locate faulty EMI Filter EF6 A and/or B (Figure 5-46, 2 or 5), as required, on rear of SDCA front panel enclo-
sure (1).
c. On rear of front panel enclosure, carefully remove four screws and washers (4), and nuts securing side A and B
CCAs to enclosure. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
securely pressed into the 24 individual EMI filters. While removing and replacing CCA, use
care to gently rock CCA while lifting or pressing straight upward or downward onto EMI
d. On rear of front panel enclosure, slowly and carefully lift side A CCA for EF6 A (2) or side B CCA for EF6 B
(5), as required, straight upwards separating CCA from EMI filters (7). If CCA requires replacement, discard;
otherwise, retain for reinstallation.
e. On front panel enclosure, slowly and carefully lift side B CCA for EF6 A, or side A for EF6 B, as required,
straight upwards separating CCA from EMI filters. If CCA requires replacement, discard; otherwise, retain for
reinstallation.
f. If both EF6 A and B require repair, repeat steps c through e for second assembly; otherwise, continue procedure.
g. If one or more EMI filters require replacement, carefully remove nut (8) from filter being replaced and remove
defective filter. If filter replacement is not required, proceed to step j.
h. Remove nut from replacement EMI filter then carefully insert replacement filter into enclosure cutouts.
i. **HCP** Install and torque each EMI filter nut replaced to 32 (±0.2) inch-ounces.
NOTE
If repairing EF6 A and B, perform step j through end of procedure. If repairing only EF6 A,
perform steps j through o, then proceed to step v. If repairing only EF6 B, proceed to step
p.
j. Inspect EF6 A side B CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
k. Carefully install EF6 A side B CCA on inside of front panel enclosure by pressing CCA downward onto 24 EMI
filters.
5-158
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
l. Inspect EF6 A side A CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
m. Carefully install EF6 A side A CCA on outside of front panel enclosure by pressing CCA downward onto 24 EMI
filters.
n. Lightly apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to each of the four CCA mount screws.
o. Tighten four screws and washers (Figure 5-46, 4), and nuts securing side A and B CCAs into enclosure.
p. Inspect EF6 B side A CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
q. Carefully install EF6 B side A CCA on inside of front panel enclosure by pressing CCA downward onto 24 EMI
filters.
r. Inspect EF6 B side B CCA for bent, broken, or burnt pins. If damage is noted, replace CCA.
s. Carefully install EF6 side B CCA on outside of front panel enclosure by pressing CCA downward onto 24 EMI
filters.
t. Lightly apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to each of the four CCA mount screws.
u. On EMI filter enclosure, tighten four screws and washers (Figure 5-46, 4), and four nuts securing side A and B
CCAs into enclosure.
v. Perform SDCA front panel enclosure reinstallation in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.3.3.
5.9.1.6 Secondary Door Electrical Surge Arrestor Assembly (URD 10493). Electrical Surge Arrestor (ESA)
protection for the secondary access system is provided by fourteen ESA modules within the secondary door ESA assembly
located on the wall in LER-1. There are two types of ESA modules located within the secondary door ESA assembly. ESA
modules A1 and A2 are replaced in accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.6.1, and ESA modules A3 through A14 are replaced in
accordance with Paragraph 5.9.1.6.2.
5.9.1.6.1 Secondary Door ESA Modules (URD 10493) A1 and A2 Replacement. Secondary door ESA modules A1
and A2 are located in the top left area within the ESA assembly. Replace ESA modules A1 and/or A2 as follows:
b. On ESA assembly (Figure 5-47, 1), loosen six screws and slide six fasteners outward. Open assembly door.
Electrical shock hazard exists. ESA modules could hold high charge and shall be discharged
before performing maintenance within the ESA assembly. Failure to comply could result in
c. In ESA assembly cabinet, locate ESA A1 module (5) or ESA A2 module (6) requiring replacement, as required.
Using multimeter, check for presence of Vac.
d. Using multimeter set for Vdc, check that ESA module terminals to ground indicates less than 1 Vdc. If required,
discharge filters to ground using multimeter or using a 10k ohm/5-watt resistor jumper wire until meter indicates
less than 1 Vac.
e. On ESA A1 module or ESA A2 module, disconnect and tag wiring from terminals.
f. On ESA A1 module or ESA A2 module, disconnect and remove ground strap.
g. On ESA A1 module or ESA A2 module, remove four mounting screws (4) and carefully lift module from ESA
assembly.
ESA modules A1 and A2 plastic feet are easily damaged. Do not over tighten mounting
screws when installing ESA module. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
h. Carefully insert replacement ESA A1 module or ESA A2 module, as required, into ESA assembly.
i. Using four mounting screws (4) removed in step g, install ESA module in assembly.
5-159
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
ESA module circuit board could be damaged if grounding stud is allowed to turn. Carefully
install grounding wire and tighten nut on the grounding strap. Failure to comply may result
j. On replacement ESA module, carefully reinstall ground strap to case ground wire removed in step f.
k. On ESA A1 module or ESA A2 module, connect wiring to terminals removed in step e.
l. **HCP** Inspect ESA assembly cabinet door EMI gasket and gasket mating surface in accordance with T.O.
21M-LGM30F-112.
m. **HCP** Close ESA assembly cabinet door and secure by sliding six fasteners closed and torquing six screws to
o. Perform secondary access system functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
5.9.1.6.2 Secondary Door ESA Modules (URD 10493) A3 through A14 Replacement. Secondary door ESA
modules A1 and A2 are labeled within the ESA assembly. Replace ESA modules A3 through A14 as follows:
b. On ESA assembly (Figure 5-47, 1), loosen six screws and slide six fasteners outward. Open assembly door.
Electrical shock hazard exists. ESA modules could hold high charge and shall be discharged
before performing maintenance within the ESA assembly. Failure to comply could result in
c. In ESA assembly cabinet, locate ESA A3 through A14 modules (7) requiring replacement, as required. Using
multimeter, check for presence of Vac.
d. Using multimeter set for Vdc, check that ESA module terminals to ground indicates less than 1 Vdc. If required,
discharge filters to ground using multimeter or using a 10k ohm ⁄ 5-watt resistor jumper wire until meter indicates
less than 1 Vdc.
e. On ESA module requiring replacement, disconnect and tag wiring from terminals (8) L1 and L2.
f. On ESA module requiring replacement, disconnect and tag wiring from terminals E1 and E2.
g. On ESA module requiring replacement, loosen center mounting screw (10) until it is free of floating fastener, then
remove faulty ESA module.
NOTE
If replacement ESA module is procured with a DIN rail (14) and screw (13) installed,
perform steps h and i; otherwise, proceed to step j.
h. On replacement ESA module, remove and discard DIN rail on rear of module, if installed.
i. On replacement ESA module, remove and discard screw (13) on rear of module, if installed.
j. **HCP** Carefully insert replacement ESA module into ESA assembly. Apply threadlocker (Table 2-2) to the
lower 1 ⁄ 8 inch and tighten center mounting screw (10).
k. On replacement ESA module, connect wiring to terminals E1 and E2, as required.
l. On replacement ESA module, connect wiring to terminals L1 and L2, as required.
m. **HCP** Inspect ESA assembly cabinet door EMI gasket and gasket mating surface in accordance with T.O.
21M-LGM30F-112.
5-160
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
n. **HCP** Close ESA assembly cabinet door and secure by sliding six fasteners closed and torquing six screws to
o. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
p. Perform secondary access system functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
5.9.1.7 Filter J-Box Assembly (URD 10498) Power Filter Replacement. The filter J-box assembly is located on the
wall in LER-1 and contains a terminal board and a high current power filter. Replace power filter as follows:
b. On filter J-box (Figure 5-48, 1) assembly, loosen six screws and slide six fasteners outward. Open J-box door (8).
before performing maintenance within the filter J-box assembly. Failure to comply could
result in personnel injury or death.
c. In filter J-box assembly enclosure, locate power filter (16). Using multimeter, check each terminal for presence of
Vac.
d. Using multimeter set for Vdc, check that power filter terminal lugs (17) to ground stud (6) indicates less than 1
Vdc. If required, discharge filters to ground using multimeter or using a 10k ohm/5-watt resistor jumper wire until
meter indicates less than 1 Vac.
e. On bottom of power filter, disconnect and tag wires from two terminal lugs. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
f. Remove four screws (14), lockwashers (13), and washers (12) securing terminal board TB1 (15) bracket to rear of
back panel (4), then move terminal board to facilitate filter removal. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
g. On top of filter J-box, carefully remove 16 screws (2) and washers (3) from filter enclosure (19). Retain hardware
for reinstallation.
h. Remove six screws (11), lockwashers (10), and washers (9) securing power filter and ground to J-box back panel.
Retain hardware for reinstallation.
i. (Deleted)
j. Carefully remove the EMI gasket (20) from the top of filter enclosure. Retain for reinstallation.
k. Remove power filter and filter enclosure from filter J-box.
l. Remove four nuts (23), lockwashers (22), and washers (21) and separate faulty power filter and EMI gasket (18)
from filter enclosure. Retain hardware for reinstallation.
m. **HCP** Inspect EMI gasket (18) removed from between filter enclosure and power filter, and mating surface of
gasket in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
n. **HCP** Using four washers (21), lockwashers (22), and nuts (23), carefully install EMI gasket (18) and filter
enclosure on replacement power filter. Torque bolts to 36.5 (±3.5) inch-pounds.
o. Tip power filter in filter enclosure then connect wires to two upper filter terminal lugs and ground using hardware
removed in step h.
p. **HCP** Inspect EMI gasket removed from top of filter enclosure and mating surface of gasket in accordance
with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
q. **HCP** Carefully install filter enclosure and EMI gasket (20) using 16 screws (2) and washers (3) removed in
step g. Torque bolts to 5 (±1) inch-pounds.
r. Install six screws (11), lockwashers (10), and washers (9) to secure power filter and ground wire to J-box back
panel.
s. On bottom of power filter, connect wires from two terminal lugs using hardware removed in step e.
Change 4 5-161
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
t. Position terminal board TB1 (15) bracket in filter enclosure. Using four screws (14), lockwashers (13), and wash-
ers (12), install terminal board TB1. Check terminal board TB1 wiring and tighten, if required.
u. **HCP** Inspect filter J-box EMI gasket (7) and mating surface in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30F-112.
v. **HCP** Carefully close filter J-box door (8) and slide six fasteners inward, then torque six screws to 80 (±10)
inch-pounds.
w. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
x. Perform secondary access system functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
5.9.1.8 Electromechanical Actuator Wall Alarm (URD 10491) Replacement. The Electromechanical Actuator
(EMA) wall alarm (URD 10491) is located on the wall of LER-1 above the PAS LER-1 entryway and is housed in secondary
door alarm J-box assembly (URD 10492). The EMA wall alarm is a multifunction alarm that requires the reconfiguration of
factory settings in order to function properly in secondary access system. Replacement of EMA wall alarm consists of removal
of faulty alarm, setup of replacement alarm, and installation of replacement component. The following procedure shall be
performed to replace and configure EMA wall alarm.
Fall hazard is present. Ensure LER work platform set is installed prior to performing
maintenance on the EMA wall alarm. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
b. Install LER work platform set in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-11-( ).
c. On faulty EMA wall alarm (Figure 5-49, 4), remove four screw covers (6) and retain for reinstallation.
d. On faulty EMA wall alarm, remove four screws (5) securing the alarm unit in secondary door J-box and retain
hardware for installation of replacement component.
e. Carefully remove faulty EMA wall alarm from secondary door alarm J-box (1), exposing wiring to alarm.
f. On faulty EMA wall alarm, disconnect and tag wiring to the AUD terminals (+) and (-) on rear of alarm.
g. Remove and discard faulty EMA wall alarm.
Incorrect EMA wall alarm configuration could result in improper or inaudible secondary door
movement alarms. Ensure all switch and jumper positions are properly configured before
completing installation of the alarm. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury, death,
or equipment damage.
h. On rear of replacement EMA wall alarm, locate 12/24-Vdc jumper block DP1 (11). Verify jumper (13) is installed
on jumper block DP1, setting EMA wall alarm for 24 Vdc operation. If required, remove and replace jumper (13)
to ensure 24 Vdc operation.
i. On rear of replacement EMA wall alarm, locate DIP switch S1 (10) containing position switches POS1, POS2,
POS3, and POS4. Configure position switches, as follows:
(1) Set position switch POS1 to OFF (down position).
(2) If required, set position switch POS2 to ON (up position).
j. On rear of replacement EMA wall alarm, reinstall AUD terminals (-) and (+) wiring removed in step f.
k. Reinstall replacement EMA wall alarm in secondary door alarm J-box (1) using four screws (5) removed in step
d.
5-162 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
l. Reinstall EMA wall alarm screw covers removed in step c.

m. Remove LER work platform set in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-11-( ).
o. Perform secondary door functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
5.9.1.9 EMA Activation Switch(es) (URD 11402, 11403, and 11404) Replacement. There are three EMA activation
switches located in LER-1 and LER-2. Reference schematic diagram ([1]FO-1 [3]FO-2 [5]FO-3)< for appropriate Wing
configuration for specific location and wiring. In order to replace an EMA activation switch, perform the following:
b. Repair or replace EMA activation switch(es) (URD 11403, 11404, 11405) in accordance with schematic diagram
([1]FO-1 [3]FO-2 [5]FO-3)< and Figure 5-50.
c. **NSP** Inspect the interior and exterior of the EMA switch assembly to verify that no visual evidence of dam-
age, tampering, unauthorized components, or devices is noted. Verify the EMA Switch wiring is in accordance
with schematic diagram ([1]FO-1 [3]FO-2 [5]FO-3)<. If any discrepancies are noted, immediately notify MMOC
and proceed as directed.
d. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
e. Perform secondary access system functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
5.9.1.10 EMA Jog Switch (URD 10495) Replacement. An EMA jog switch is located in LER-2. Reference schematic
diagram ([1]FO-1 [3]FO-2 [5]FO-3)< for appropriate wing configuration for specific location and wiring. In order to replace
an EMA jog switch, perform the following:
b. Repair or replace EMA jog switch (URD 10495) in accordance with schematic diagram ([1]FO-1 [3]FO-2 [5]FO-
3)< and Figure 5-51.
c. Perform secondary access system startup in accordance with Table 5-2.
d. Perform secondary access system functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-1.
Change 1 5-163
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-39. Secondary Door Control Assembly (URD 10494) Components
5-164
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-40. SDCA Front Panel (URD 10494A1) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-165
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-40. SDCA Front Panel (URD 10494A1) (Sheet 2)
5-166
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-41. SDCA Front Panel Component Location (Rear View)
Change 4 5-167
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-42. SDCA Swing-Out Panel (URD 10494A2) Component Location
5-168 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-43. SDCA Back Panel (URD 10494A3) Typical
Change 10 5-169
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-44. SDCA Back Panel Component Location
5-170 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-45. SDCA EMI Filters EF1 through EF5 (Typical)
Change 10 5-171
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-46. SDCA EMI Filter EF6
5-172
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-47. Secondary Door ESA Assembly (URD 10493)
5-173
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-48. Filter J-Box Assembly (URD 10498)
5-174 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-49. Secondary Door Wall Alarm (URD 10491) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-175
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-49. Secondary Door Wall Alarm (URD 10491) (Sheet 2)
5-176
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-50. EMA Activation Switch(es) (URD 11402, 11403, 11404)
Change 1 5-177
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-51. EMA Jog Switch (URD 10495)
5-178
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-7. **NSP** SDCA Delay Timer Relay Identification
Delay Timer Relay Part Number Timer Type SDCA CCA Relay Terminal Wiring Identification
Timer Relay Control A3A5 Cable
CCA
DT1 A3A1 12D64MST1A 64 Minute W10 LOAD: 1A-BLU-16

W10 +: 2A-RED-16
W10 GND: 3A-BLK-16
DT2 A3A3 12D10MST2 10 Minute W10 LOAD: 4A-BLU-16

W10 +: 5A-RED-16
W10 GND: 6A-BLK-16
DT3 A3A2 12D64MST1A 64 Minute W10 LOAD: 7A-BLU-16

W10 +: 8A-RED-16
W10 GND: 9A-BLK-16
DT4 A3A4 12D10MST2 10 Minute W10 LOAD: 10A-BLU-16

W10 +: 11A-RED-16
W10 GND: 12A-BLK-16
DT5 24D5SST1A 5 Second W10 LOAD: 13A-BLU-16

W10 +: 14A-RED-16
W10 GND: 15A-BLK-16
SDCA back panel timer control CCA associated with timer circuit
Delay timer relay DT5 interfaces with the 24V driver CCA A2A2 via the controller interconnect CCA
A3A5
5-179
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-8. SDCA Back Panel Diode Location
SDCA Diode Terminal Board Anode (+) Terminal Cathode (-) Terminal
D1 TB3 TB3-1 TB3-2

D2 TB3 TB3-2 TB3-3
D3 TB4 TB4-1 TB4-2
D4 TB4 TB4-2 TB4-3
D5 TB2 TB2-2 TB2-3
D6 TB2 TB2-9 TB2-8
Reference SDCA back panel (URD 10494A3) Terminal Board Schematics (Figure 9-2)
5-180
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 5-9. SDCA EMI Filter Connectivity
EMI Filter SDCA System Location Cable Filter Terminal

Interface
EF1 ESS Figure 5-43, 4 W7P1 EF1 J1

(Pins 1-15)
W7P2 EF1 J1
(Pins 16-30)
EF2 MDC Figure 5-43, 5 W8P1 and TB1 pins EF2 J1

3, 4 (Pins 1-15)
W24P2 EF2 J1
(Pins 16-30)
EF3 MDC/J-Box Figure 5-43, 6 W20P1 EF3 J1

(Pins 1-15)
W20P2 EF3 J1
(Pins 16-30)
EF4 Wall Alarm/ Figure 5-43, 3 W1P1 EF4 J1

LER Wall (Pins 1-15)
Switches
N/A EF4 J1
(Pins 16-30)
EF5 SARC/ Figure 5-43, 2 W5P1 EF5 J1

ESA (Pins 1-15)
W6P2 EF5 J1
(Pins 16-30)
EF6 SDCA Figure 5-46, 3 W9P2 EF6 Filter A

(Filter A) Switches/Indicators J1
EF6 Figure 5-46, 6 W11P2 EF6 Filter B
(Filter B) J2
5-181
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
5.10 GUIDE RAILS.

5.10.1 Guide Rail Replacement.
NOTE
Rails were originally aligned relative to the exact geometric centerline of the access shaft
with special tools. To help maintain rails in original positions, remove only one rail at a time
so the opposite rail can serve as a realignment reference if needed.
a. Replace defective rail as shown in Figure 5-52. Mark shims (5) or tape shims to wall as they are removed to as-
sist in reinstalling shims in original locations. After installation, torque screws (6) to 265 (±25) inch-pounds and
torque nuts (4) to 460 (±20) inch-pounds.
b. If guide rail (1) or mounts (2) have suffered severe damage or original shimming is lost, check and, if necessary,
realign rails as follows:
(1) With secondary door in lowered position, measure and record distance between rails at each mount elevation above
secondary door. Distance between rails must be 37.60 to 37.80 inches. Measurement can be made by using a locally
fabricated go/no-go gauge (Figure 2-5).
NOTE
Do not use plumb line to check rail straightness because shaft centerline is not necessarily
vertical. Rail straightness can be checked by rigging a taut wire or string along length of rail.
(2) Check straightness of rails at each mount location. Rails must be straight within 0.03 inch.
(3) Use data obtained in steps (1) and (2) to determine areas of misalignment. Shim rails as required using the
straightest rail as the initial guide.
(4) Ensure temporary egress ladder is available and could be installed quickly if an emergency occurred. (Refer to
Paragraph 5.6.2.)
operable flashlight are located in the Launcher Equipment Room (LER). The emergency
breathing apparatus shall be configured for immediate use with cylinder valve open and
breathing hose/tube connected to the regulator. Comply with applicable emergency breathing
apparatus T.O. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
(5) Check that personnel in LERs have emergency breathing apparatus configured for immediate use for each person
5-182
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Loss of communication with personnel in LER could be hazardous. At least one person
outside LER shall be in communication with personnel in LER while secondary door is
raised. If communication is interrupted for more than 3 minutes for any reason, secondary
door shall be lowered. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
(6) Ensure personnel in LER are in communication with outside personnel. If communication is lost, topside personnel
shall set ringer unit of LSB telephone switch to IN position so that communication can be reestablished through
Missile Combat Crew Commander (MCCC). Do not exceed 3 minutes in a planned break in communications.
(7) If communication between personnel inside LER and personnel outside LER is lost for more than 3 minutes,
immediately clear the personnel access shaft.
(8) Raise secondary door 4 to 5 feet and check alignment of lower end of rails.
(9) After aligning rails, raise secondary door, verify clearance between top edge of door, and rub bars on shaft wall
above locking ring (Figure 5-37).
c. Perform procedures in Paragraph 6.1.4 to lubricate guide rails.
5-183
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 5-52. Secondary Door Guide Rail
5-184
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 6
SERVICING
6.1 SERVICING.
General servicing and cleaning data are contained in Table 6-1 and lubrication data in Figure 6-1 and Table 6-2.
6.1.1 Lubricating Primary Door Lock Bolt and Threaded Shaft.
a. Ensure secondary door is in fully-raised position.
b. Using wrench, rotate bronze thrust nut (Figure 5-1, 6) to extend lock bolt (1) as far as possible into access shaft.
NOTE
Lock bolt weighs approximately 70 pounds.
c. Remove lock bolt and threaded shaft by way of the access shaft. If lock bolt sling (Figure 2-3) is available, sling
may be used to remove lock bolt per following steps (1) through (5).
(1) Position hoist hook approximately 1 foot above lock bolt.
(2) Form slip loops on both legs of lock bolt sling and place both slip loops around lock bolt. Attach upper end of sling
to hoist hook.
(3) With one leg of sling left wrapped around outboard end of lock bolt, slide other leg of sling toward rear of lock bolt
while carefully pulling lock bolt outward.
(4) As lock bolt clears bushing, take up slack with hoist and remove lock bolt and threaded shaft from access shaft.
(5) If lock bolt will not slide outward, check that threaded shaft is clear. If threaded shaft is clear, perform steps (a)
through (e). If threaded shaft is not clear, rotate thrust nut to extend and clear threaded shaft. Reattempt to perform
step (3). If lock bolt still will not slide outward, proceed as follows:
(a) Insert 12-inch threaded shaft with square head through star wrench.
(b) Thread shaft into back of thrust nut until bottomed.
(c) Place 12-inch adjustable wrench over square head of shaft to prevent shaft from turning.
(d) Turn star wrench to push lock bolt free of brass sleeve.
(e) Perform step (3).
d. Completely strip all grease, dirt, and lubricant from lock bolt. Clean all grease and dirt from surfaces of threaded
shaft, bronze bushing, accessible areas of thrust nut, and in lock bolt recess behind bronze bushing. Clean by wip-
ing with MIL-PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2). Wipe dry with clean cloth or air dry.
e. If threads on threaded shaft are damaged and causing thrust nut to bind, clean threads with a hand file or replace
threaded shaft and/or thrust nut, as required.
6-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Air dry lubricant is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear
f. Completely coat lock bolt surface with air dry lubricant. Spray air dry lubricant only on those areas of threaded
shaft where lubricant has worn off to bare metal. Excessive lubricant buildup will cause difficult lock bolt
operation. Spray air dry lubricant per manufacturer’s recommendations and allow to air dry until lubricant does
not come off when lightly rubbed with hand.
g. Install lock bolt assembly in recess and rotate thrust nut to fully retract lock bolt.
h. If lock bolt binds after lubrication, alignment may be required. Align bolt as follows:
(1) Extend lock bolt approximately 3 inches into access shaft.
(2) Loosen six retainer screws one to two turns.
(3) Retract lock bolt fully and retighten retainer screws in a crisscross pattern.
(4) Extend and retract lock bolt to check for freedom of movement (nonbinding).
6.1.2 Clean and Lubricate Secondary Door Emergency Shaft Hole and Adapter.
a. On Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) front panel, momentarily set MODE switch (Figure 4-1, 10) to
MAINTENANCE position. On SDCA front panel, yellow MAINTENANCE indicator (9) illuminates and 10-
second intermittent audible alarm signals change of mode.
b. Using EMA jog switch, as required, position secondary door to facilitate maintenance.

NOTE
d. Beneath secondary door, position rags, as required, to facilitate cleanup of excess lubricants or debris following
completion of procedure.
e. On secondary door (Figure 5-17), open hinged cover plate over emergency drive shaft hole.
f. Screw a 1/2-inch machine screw (Table 2-1) into threaded hole in emergency drive shaft hole adapter.
g. Using machine screw as a lifting handle, remove emergency drive shaft hole adapter from emergency drive shaft
hole.
6-2
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
• MIL-PRF-680, Type III is combustible and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources.
Wear approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to
• Silicone spray lubricant is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources.
Wear approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to
h. Using a nylon or steel circular brush, run it up and down the emergency drive shaft hole and clean with MIL-
PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2). Dry with clean cheesecloth. Lubricate with silicone spray (Table 2-2).
i. Clean emergency drive shaft adapter of corrosion, as required, using 280-grit silicon oxide sandpaper (Table 2-2)
and lubricate with silicone grease.
j. Install emergency drive shaft adapter.
k. Close and tighten hinged cover plate.
l. Cleanup debris and lubricant from beneath secondary door, as required.
m. On EMA gearbox assembly, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
n. If secondary door was jogged to facilitate maintenance, lower secondary door to fully-lowered position, as
required.
6.1.3 Clean and Lubricate EMA Ballscrew.
a. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE switch (Figure 4-1, 10) to MAINTENANCE position. On SDCA
front panel, yellow MAINTENANCE indicator (9) illuminates and 10-second intermittent audible alarm signals
change of mode.
NOTE
b. Using EMA jog switch, as required, position secondary door to facilitate maintenance.
Secondary door movement is extremely hazardous. Whenever performing maintenance

under the secondary door, the secondary door shall be shored or EMA gearbox safety pin
shall be engaged. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
d. Using clean rags and MIL-PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2), clean EMA ballscrew, as required.
6-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
e. Using general purpose grease (Table 2-2), lubricate EMA ballscrew, as required.
f. On EMA gearbox assembly, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
g. Repeat steps a through e, as required, to clean and lubricate ballscrew.
h. On completion of maintenance, use EMA jog switch and lower secondary door to the fully lowered position, as
required.
6.1.4 Clean and Lubricate Secondary Door Guide Rails.
a. Clean all grease and dirt from secondary door guide rails using MIL-PRF-680, Type III (Table 2-2).
Air dry lubricant is flammable and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear
b. Completely coat guide rails with air dry lubricant (Table 2-2). Apply air dry lubricant and allow to dry until air
dry lubricant does not come off when lightly rubbed with hand.
c. On SDCA front panel, momentarily set MODE switch (Figure 4-1, 10) to MAINTENANCE position. On SDCA
front panel, yellow MAINTENANCE indicator (9) illuminates and 10-second intermittent audible alarm signals
change of mode.
d. Using EMA jog switch, jog secondary door to expose guide rails previously concealed by door.

NOTE
e. On EMA gearbox, engage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
f. Repeat steps a and b for newly exposed guide rails.
g. On EMA gearbox, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
h. Using EMA jog switch, jog secondary door to fully-lowered position.
6-4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 6-1. Lubrication Data
6-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 6-1. Cleaning Data
Component Cleaning Agent Procedure
Wear approved eye and hand protection, and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to
EMA MIL-PRF-680, Type III a. Remove any heavy dirt or grease deposits with a stiff
brush or cloth moistened with MIL-PRF-680, Type III
(Table 2-2). Do not allow solvent to dry on part. Wipe
dry with lint-free cloth.
b. Remove light deposits of oil from motor, gear housing,
and manual drive guide with cloth.
EMA Ballscrew MIL-PRF-680, Type III Using a clean cloth remove any debris, as required.
Electrical Controls Remove excess accumulation of dirt and oil deposits from elec-
trical controls with soft brush or wiping cloth.
6-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 6-2. Lubrication
Step Nomenclature Service Required Lubricant

(Figure
6-1)
General purpose grease (MIL-PRF-23827) is toxic and hazardous. Wear approved eye protection and
avoid skin contact. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
1 Vault door locking bolts Apply thick coat of grease to extended bolts MIL-PRF-23827
and work bolts in and out to coat bores in door.
2 Primary door lock bolt and Refer to Paragraph 6.1.1. MIL-L-23398
threaded shaft
• MIL-PRF-680, Type III is combustible and hazardous. Do not use near ignition sources. Wear
approved eye and hand protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in
personnel injury.
• Molybdenum disulfide lubricant (MIL-G-21164) toxic and hazardous. Use in a well- ventilated area.
Wear approved eye protection and avoid skin contact. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury.
3 Primary door hinges Using a clean cloth and MIL- PRF-680, Type MIL-G-21164
III, clean hinge as required. Apply lubricant to
exposed parts of hinge shaft, washers, and
bushings.
4 Actuator clevis pins Refer to Paragraph 5.5.2, remove, clean as MIL-G-21164
required, lubricate, and install clevis pins.
5 Secondary door guide rails Refer to Paragraph 6.1.4 for cleaning and lubri- MIL-L-23398
cation procedures.
6 Secondary door lock bolts Refer to Paragraph 5.7.1.12, remove lock bolts, MIL-PRF-23827
apply grease, and reinstall lock bolts.
7 EMA ballscrew Refer to Paragraph 6.1.3 to apply grease, if MIL-PRF-23827
required.
6-7/(6-8 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 7
ADJUSTMENTS
7.1 ADJUSTMENTS.
7.1.1 Secondary Door Lock Bolt Sensitive Switch LS1, LS2. There are three sensitive switches in the secondary door
which are components of the Secondary Door Electromechanical Assembly (SDEA). Sensitive switch SW1 is a nonadjustable
component of the security pin assembly, and lock bolt sensitive switches LS1 (lock bolts extended) and LS2 (lock bolts
retracted) are adjustable. Sensitive switch LS1 is closed and LS2 is open when the secondary door lock bolts are extended and
sensitive switch LS2 is closed and LS1 is open when the secondary door lock bolts are retracted. Perform adjustment of
sensitive switches LS1 and LS2 as follows:
a. Using Electromechanical Actuator (EMA) jog switch, position secondary door to facilitate maintenance.

NOTE
b. On EMA gearbox, engage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
c. On bottom of secondary door, remove secondary door cables and cable track as follows:
(1) Disconnect both secondary door cables from secondary door connectors J2 and J7.
(2) While supporting the weight of cables/cable track, on secondary door cable track (Figure 5-18, 6), remove screws
(9) securing cable track to bottom of secondary door.
(3) Lower cables and cable track and position to facilitate secondary door maintenance.
d. On bottom of secondary door, remove both bottom cover plates.
e. In secondary door, disconnect linear actuator (Figure 5-17, 65) from lock bolt drive mount (63).
f. In secondary door, disconnect the lock bolt connecting links (19) from lock bolts (23) as required. Move
connecting links as required to facilitate adjustment.
g. Connect secondary door J2 test plug (Figure 2-6) to secondary door connector J2.
NOTE
When adjusting the lock bolt sensitive switches LS1 and LS2 in the following steps, a
combination of moving the switch body and slightly bending the switch arm may be used to
obtain acceptable operation.
h. Using lock bolt handcrank and a multimeter, manually extend and retract lock bolts while monitoring between test
points J and E (Figure 2-6). Multimeter should read continuity when lock bolts are fully extended, and open when
lock bolts begin to retract. If required, adjust lock bolt sensitive switch LS1 in accordance with step i; otherwise,
proceed to step k.
i. Ensure lock bolts are fully extended, then loosen two screws attaching sensitive switch LS1 (Figure 5-17, 46) to
bracket and move switch until multimeter reads continuity between test points J and E. Tighten sensitive switch.
j. Using lock bolt handcrank and a multimeter, repeat steps h and i, as required. If switch cannot be adjusted prop-
erly replace in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.13.
Change 8 7-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
k. Using lock bolt handcrank and a multimeter, manually extend and retract lock bolts while monitoring between test
points H and E (Figure 2-6). Multimeter should read continuity when lock bolts are fully retracted, and open
when lock bolts begin to extend. If required, adjust lock bolt sensitive switch LS2 in accordance with step l, oth-
erwise proceed to step n.
l. Ensure lock bolts are fully retracted, then loosen two screws attaching sensitive switch LS2 (Figure 5-17, 47) to
bracket and move switch until multimeter reads continuity between test points H and E. Tighten sensitive switch.
m. Using lock bolt handcrank and a multimeter, repeat steps k and l, as required. If switch cannot be adjusted prop-
erly, replace in accordance with Paragraph 5.7.1.13.
n. Repeat steps h and k three times. If normal indications are received, proceed to step o; otherwise, return to steps
h or k, as required, to readjust sensitive switch.
o. In secondary door, reinstall linear actuator (Figure 5-17, 65) to lock bolt drive mount (63), using retaining bolt
(64).
p. Disconnect secondary door J2 test plug (Figure 2-6) from secondary door connector J2.
q. Perform secondary door electromechanical assembly functional checkout in accordance with Table 4-4 proceeding
from step 8.
7.1.2 Secondary Door Homing. Secondary door homing is performed to set the upper and lower limits of travel of the
secondary door. The upper limit of secondary door travel is set when the secondary door is jogged into the fully-raised
position, the smooth extension and retraction of lock bolts into the Personnel Access Shaft (PAS) locking ring is established,
and a home command is issued from the Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) swing-out panel. The home position, or
upper limit of secondary door travel, is maintained in the Motor Drive Cabinet (MDC) using an input from absolute encoder
located on the EMA gearbox. The home position and status from encoders is then used by the motor drive to calculate the
secondary door lower limit of travel at approximately 143 inches. Secondary door homing shall only be performed following
the removal or replacement of the secondary door, EMA, and/or absolute encoder when a faulty MDC motor drive (URD
10496M1) is replaced, or when directed by secondary access system troubleshooting. Secondary door homing shall be
performed in accordance with Table 7-1.
7.1.2.1 Secondary Door Adjustment. Secondary door adjustment is performed in conjunction with secondary door
homing (Table 7-1) when secondary door and LER-1 floor are found to be misaligned. This adjustment allows the secondary
door lower position to be offset during the homing procedure to a maximum of 3.75 inches off the normal home position of
143 inches. Alignment of secondary door with LER-1 floor is accomplished using the MDC LCP (Figure 4-4). When directed
by procedure, perform secondary door adjustment as follows:
a. If secondary door and LER-1 floor are out of alignment, measure the distance in inches between top of LER-1
floor surface and top of secondary door. Calculate lower limit offset required to either raise or lower the second-
ary door to the nearest 100th of an inch, then drop decimal point. Record new offset measurement number (see
inset below).
Example Measurement Equals Offset Measurement
1-1/4 inch 1.25 125

1/2 inch 0.50 50
Damage to the secondary access system could occur. When changing parameters using the
MDC LCP, use care to ensure that only the specific parameters listed in this procedure are
altered. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
b. Using MDC LCP in accordance with Paragraph 4.2.5.1, press MENU (Figure 4-4, 6) key.
7-2 Change 8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
c. Using LCP keypad (LEFT ARROW) (16) and/or (RIGHT ARROW) (10) key(s) as required, scroll through main
menu screen options until LCP display readout (1) 7... APPLICATION menu option is displayed (see inset be-
low).
Change 8 7-2.1/(7-2.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
d. Using the LCP keypad + (9) and - (11) keys, scroll through the 7.. APPLICATION menu screen options until the
712 LOWER OFFSET screen is displayed (see inset below).
NOTE
The nine digit number represented by nine zeroes below 712 LOWER OFFSET on the LCP
screen inset indicates the current lower limit offset after SAS has been homed. A normal
indication will read between 000000000 and 000000375.
e. On LCP keypad, press CHANGE DATA (17) key. Current secondary door lower limit parameter is displayed with
cursor flashing beneath one of the parameter digits.
NOTE
Offset can not be adjusted below 000000000 or above 000000375. If a number that is greater
than 000000375 is entered, lower offset will default back to 000000375.
f. Using offset measurement recorded in step a and current lower offset number displayed (nine digit number be-
neath 712 LOWER OFFSET on LCP display), calculate number to be entered to correct secondary door align-
ment using formula below:
Raise Secondary Door Lower Secondary Door
If LCP lower offset If LCP lower offset

display = 000000202 display = 000000202
To raise door by To lower door by
1 1/4 inch (1.25) inch -125 1 1/4 (1.25) inch +125
New offset number New offset number
to enter = 000000077 to enter = 000000327
g. Move flashing cursor beneath lower limit offset digit to be changed by pressing the LCP keypad (LEFT ARROW)
(16) and/or (RIGHT ARROW) (10) key(s) until correct digit is selected, then enter new offset number determined
above one digit at a time by pressing LCP keypad + (9) and/or - (11) key(s) until new digit value is displayed.
Repeat step until all new values have been entered.
h. With new nine digit lower limit value displayed, on LCP keypad press OK (8) key.
i. On LCP keypad, press DISPLAY/STATUS (18) key.
Change 4 7-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Movement of secondary door is extremely hazardous. Ensure PAS is clear of personnel,

tools, and equipment prior to initiating secondary door movement. Failure to comply could
result in personnel injury, death, or equipment damage.
j. Ensure PAS is clear of personnel, tools, and equipment.
k. Proceed to Table 7-1, step 27.
7.1.3 EMA Brake Adjustment. Linkage on the EMA brake is adjustable as follows:

NOTE
a. On EMA gearbox, engage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
b. Remove two upper and two lower brake shield bolts (Figure 5-22, 3) and remove brake shield (1).
c. Holding EMA manual brake release rod in down position, turn assembly upper turnbuckle until slack is removed
from linkage assembly and brake locks and unlocks smoothly.
d. Ensure all tools and equipment are clear of area beneath secondary door.
e. On EMA gearbox, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
f. Using EMA jog switch, jog secondary door up and down while monitoring brake operation. If brake fails to stop
secondary door movement when EMA jog switch is released, return to step a and readjust brake as required; oth-
erwise, proceed to step g.
g. Repeat step f three times. If EMA brake fails to operate, return to step a and repeat adjustment.
h. On EMA brake, reinstall two upper and two lower brake shield bolts removed in step b.
7.1.4 Actuator Locking Bar Switch Adjustment (PN BA22888A). The following procedures provide instructions for
the adjustment of the actuator locking bar limit switches SW1 and SW2. For erroneous indications on SW1 indicator, proceed
to Paragraph 7.1.4.1 and for erroneous indications on SW2 indicator, proceed to Paragraph 7.1.4.2. Refer to Figure 7-1 for
component locations.
7.1.4.1 Engaged Switch (SW1) Adjustment.
NOTE
The lock bolt links located along the PAH wall must be removed if the B-Plug is installed
in order to allow full movement of the mechanism to the locked position.
a. Open the SDCA outer door to gain access to the secondary door swing-out panel.
b. Extend the lock bolts to the locked position to engage the actuator locking bar.
c. Loosen the two socket head cap screws that retain switch SW1 in position.
d. Monitor the T-HANDLE ENGAGED indication on the SDCA swing-out panel.
e. Slide switch SW1 until the T-HANDLE ENGAGED indication is illuminated on the SDCA and note the position.
f. Continue sliding the switch SW1 in the same direction approximately 1 ⁄ 8 inch and tighten the two socket head
cap screws loosened in step c.
g. Cycle the lock bolts and monitor the T-HANDLE ENGAGED indication on the SDCA swing-out panel.
T-HANDLE ENGAGED indicator should extinguish when the lock bolts are retracted and illuminated when the
lock bolts are extended. If abnormal indications occur, repeat steps b through g.
7-4 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
h. Return to original procedure and proceed as directed.

7.1.4.2 Retracted Switch (SW2) Adjustment.
NOTE
The T-HANDLE RETRACTED indication will not be present unless the ALB solenoid is
energized or if the T-handle is fully rotated. The indication will be lost while the locking bar
rests de-energized on the B-Plug hub.
a. Open the SDCA outer door to gain access to the secondary door swing-out panel.
b. Loosen the two socket head cap screws that retain switch SW2 in position.
c. Monitor the T-HANDLE RETRACTED indication on the SDCA swing-out panel while performing this adjust-
ment.
d. Manually retract the locking bar until it is even with the ALB housing.
e. Slide switch SW2 until the T-HANDLE RETRACTED indication is illuminated on the SDCA and note the posi-
tion.
f. Continue sliding the switch SW2 in the same direction approximately 1/8 inch and tighten the two socket head
cap screws loosened in step b.
g. Cycle the lock bolts and monitor the T-HANDLE RETRACTED indication on the SDCA swing-out panel. During
the retract sequence, the T-HANDLE RETRACTED indicator should illuminate during the lock bolt retraction and
then extinguish about 2 seconds later. During the extend sequence, the T-HANDLE RETRACTED indicator
should remain extinguished. If abnormal indications occur, repeat steps b through g.
h. Return to original procedure and proceed as directed.
Change 4 7-4.1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 7-1. Actuator Locking Bar Component Location
7-4.2 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 7-1. Secondary Door Homing
Step Procedure Observation Corrective Action
1 In upper PAS, verify that walls Scribe upper PAS wall. 1. Measure from top of
have been scribed where the top secondary door lock bolts to
of secondary door rests in the top of secondary door.
fully-raised position.
2. Measure the same distance
up from the top of the
secondary door locking ring
opening and scribe mark on
PAS wall.
2. Ensure all maintenance is
complete and EMA shoring is
removed.
Fire or Environmental Control System (ECS) shutdown could present a hazardous condition.
Secondary door shall not be raised until it is verified that an emergency breathing apparatus for each
person and an operable flashlight are located in the Launcher Equipment Rooms (LERs). The emer-
gency breathing apparatus shall be configured for immediate use with cylinder valve open and
breathing hose/tube connected to the regulator. Comply with applicable emergency breathing apparatus
T.O. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or death.
3. Ensure personnel in LERs have

emergency breathing apparatus
configured for immediate use for
each person and an operable
flashlight.
7-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 7-1. Secondary Door Homing - Continued
Loss of communication with personnel in LERs could be hazardous. At least one person outside LER
shall be in communication with personnel in LER while secondary door is raised. If communication is
interrupted for more than 3 minutes for any reason, secondary door shall be lowered. Failure to comply
4. Ensure personnel in LER are in If communications between

communication with outside personnel inside LER and personnel
personnel. If communications are outside LER are lost for more than
lost, topside personnel shall set 3 minutes while secondary door is
ringer unit of Launcher Support closed, immediately lower
Building (LSB) telephone switch secondary door.
to IN position so that communi-
cations can be reestablished
through Missile Combat Crew
Commander (MCCC). Do not
exceed 3 minutes in a planned
break in communications.
Movement of secondary door is extremely hazardous. Ensure personnel access shaft is clear of
personnel, tools, and equipment prior to initiating secondary door movement. Failure to comply could
result in personnel injury, death, or equipment damage.
5. Notify topside personnel that

secondary door shall be jogged
and homed.
6. Ensure PAS is clear of all
personnel, tools, and equipment.
7. In LER-2, ensure area beneath
the secondary door is clear of all
7-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Over travel of secondary door is possible during homing. Do not perform secondary door RAISE or
LOWER command(s) until homing procedure is complete. All secondary door movements shall be
accomplished with secondary access system set to MAINTENANCE mode, using JOG UP, JOG
DOWN commands, as required. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury, death, or equipment
damage.
8. Disengage EMA gearbox safety

pin in accordance with T.O.
21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
tarily set RESET/AUD CANCEL
switch (Figure 4-1, 17) to
RESET.
carefully open SDCA front panel
to gain access to the swing-out
panel controls and indicators.
11. Jog the secondary door to the Secondary door moves upward. Perform SAS functional checkout in
fully raised position as indicated accordance with Table 4-1.
by scribe mark in upper PAS.
12. On SDCA front panel, ensure NO-GO indicator is extinguished a. On SDCA front panel,
NO-GO (Figure 4-1, 6) and and audible alarm is off. momentarily set
AUDIBLE ALARM (18) indica- RESET/AUD CANCEL (17)
tors are off. switch to RESET, then to
AUD CANCEL.
b. If NO-GO fails to reset,
perform trouble analysis in
accordance with Table 4-17.
7-7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
13. On SDCA front panel, momen- On SDCA front panel: a. Jog secondary door to the
tarily set LOCK BOLTS fully-lowered position.
EXT. ⁄ RET. (26) switch to RET.
LOCK BOLTS b. Perform Secondary Door
EXTENDED (Figure 4-1, Electromechanical Assembly
24) indicator is (SDEA) function checkout in
extinguished. accordance with Table 4-4.
LOCK BOLTS
cator is illuminated.
SECURITY PIN
SECURE (20) indicator is
extinguished.
NOTE
The T-HANDLE RETRACTED indicator should illuminate during the lock bolt retract sequence and
then extinguish approximately 2 seconds later.
On SDCA swing-out panel:

T-HANDLE RETRACTED
(Figure 4-2, 74) indicator is
extinguished.
T-HANDLE ENGAGE
extinguished.
14. Using jog switch, slightly raise
or lower secondary door to
facilitate lock bolt extension.
15. On SDCA front panel, On SDCA front panel: a. Jog secondary door to the
momentarily set OFF ⁄ LOWER fully-lowered position.
(Figure 4-1, 13) switch to OFF.
SECURITY PIN TIMER b. Perform Secondary Access
(22) indicator is System (SAS) functional
extinguished. checkout in accordance with
Table 4-1.
7-8 Change 10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
16. On SDCA front panel, momen- Secondary door lock bolts a. If lock bolts failed to extend
tarily set LOCK BOLTS smoothly extend into PAS locking into lock ring, repeat
EXT. ⁄ RET. (Figure 4-1, 26) ring. procedures beginning at step
switch to EXT. 12.
On SDCA front panel: b. If lock bolts extended but
SDCA indicators failed to
LOCK BOLTS correctly respond, perform
RETRACTED (25) SAS functional checkout in
indicator is extinguished. accordance with Table 4-1.
LOCK BOLTS
EXTENDED indicator (24)
is illuminated.
Change 10 7-8.1/(7-8.2 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
16. - Cont SECURITY PIN

RETRACTED (23)
illuminated.
On SDCA swing-out panel:
T-HANDLE RETRACTED
extinguished.
T-HANDLE ENGAGED
(75) indicator is
illuminated.
17. Ensure lock bolts have smoothly Repeat step 13, step 15, and step
extended into locking ring at 16.
least two consecutive times
before proceeding with next step.
NOTE
Ensure lock bolts are in the extended position prior to performing step 18.
18. On SDCA swing-out panel, using On SDCA swing-out panel: a. Repeat step 18, if fault
the tip of a pen or other nonme- recurs, proceed to Corrective
tallic tool fitting HOME (Figure Action b.
4-2, 3) switch indent firmly press
HOME switch for a minimum of While HOME switch is b. If any SDCA Fault or
1 second, then release. pressed: NO-GO occurs, perform
trouble analysis in accor-
HOME (44) indicator is dance with Table 4-16 or
illuminated. Table 4-17, as required;
HOMED (2) indicator is otherwise, proceed to
extinguished. Corrective Action c.
7-9
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
18. - Cont After 2 seconds: c. If HOME (44) indicator

failed to illuminate, proceed
HOMED (2) indicator is to step (1), otherwise,
illuminated. proceed to Corrective Action
d.
FULL UP (68) indicator is (1) Replace faulty SDCA
illuminated. power command
Circuit Card
Assembly (CCA)
A2A3 in accordance
with Paragraph
5.9.1.4.3 and repeat
secondary door
homing in accordance
with Table 7-1. If
fault recurs, proceed
to step (2).
24V driver CCA
A2A2 in accordance
with Paragraph
5.9.1.4.2 and repeat
secondary door
with Table 7-1.
d. If HOME (Figure 4-2, 44)
indicator is illuminated, but
HOMED (2) indicator does
not extinguish for approxi-
mately 2 seconds, or if FILL
UP (68) indicator remains
extinguished, proceed to step
(1).
(1) Replace faulty MDC
M1 motor drive M1
in accordance with
Paragraph 5.8.3.9 and
repeat secondary door
with Table 7-1.
7-10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
19. Using procedure in Paragraph MDC LCP reads as follows: a. Repeat step 18, if fault
4.2.5.1, go to MDC Local recurs, proceed to Corrective
Control Panel (LCP) menu Action b.
option 731, absolute encoder 731 ABSOLUTE POS
position, and ensure it is set at
zero.
b. Replace faulty EMA absolute
encoder in accordance with
Paragraph 5.8.1.4 and repeat
secondary door homing in
accordance with Table 7-1. If
fault recurs proceed to
Corrective Action c.
c. Replace faulty MDC motor
drive M1 in accordance with
20. Using procedure in Paragraph MDC LCP reads as follows: a. Repeat step 18, if fault
4.2.5.1, go to MDC LCP menu recurs, proceed to Corrective
option 730, incremental encoder Action b.
position, and ensure it is set to 730 INCREMENTAL POS
zero.
b. Replace faulty EMA incre-
mental encoder in accor-
dance with Paragraph 5.8.1.4
and repeat secondary door
homing in accordance with
Table 7-1. If fault recurs
proceed to Corrective Action
c.
c. Replace faulty MDC motor
drive M1 in accordance with
21. Carefully close SDCA front
panel.
7-11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Rapid movement of the secondary door and telescoping ladder are extremely hazardous. Unless hostile
action is imminent, ensure PAS is clear of all personnel, tools, and equipment before commanding a
secondary door RAISE or LOWER command. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury or
death.
22. Notify topside personnel that

secondary access system status
and ensure PAS remains clear of
23. On SDCA front panel, verify. NO-GO (Figure 4-1, 6) indicator On SDCA front panel, momentarily
is extinguished. set RESET ⁄ AUD CANCEL (17)
switch to RESET.
24. On SDCA front panel, momen- Green OPERATION (11) indicator
tarily set MODE (10) switch to illuminates.
OPERATION.
25. On SDCA front panel, momen- On SDCA front panel: a. On SDCA front panel,
tarily set OFF/LOWER (13) momentarily set MODE (10)
switch to LOWER. SECURITY PIN switch to MAINTENANCE,
RETRACTED (23) indi- then proceed to Corrective
cator is illuminated. Action b.
LOCK BOLTS b. Jog secondary door to the
RETRACTED (25) indi- fully-lowered position, then
cator is illuminated. perform SAS functional
checkout in accordance with
SECURE (20) indicator is Table 4-1.
extinguished.
Three-second audible alarm
sounds followed by a
steady alarm tone and
secondary door movement.
DOWN MOTION (8) indi-
Secondary door lowers.
DOWN MOTION (8) indi-
cator is extinguished.
When secondary door is
lowered,
ACCESS/EGRESS (21)
7-12
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Tripping hazard could be present. Ensure secondary door and LER-1 are aligned to provide a smooth
transition between surfaces. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
26. Inspect secondary door alignment The top of the secondary door and Paragraph 7.1.2.1 may be repeated,
with LER-1 floor. If secondary LER-1 floor are aligned to provide as required, until best possible tran-
door alignment could present a a smooth transition between sition between surfaces is achieved.
tripping hazard, perform surfaces.
secondary door adjustment in
accordance with Paragraph
7.1.2.1, otherwise, proceed to
next step.
NOTE
Steps 27 and 28 are required when performing SDCA Fault 026 or NO-GO 017 trouble analysis
only. If not performing trouble analysis on SDCA Fault 026 or NO-GO 017, proceed to step 29.
27. On SDCA front panel, momen- Secondary door raises to upper If abnormal indication occurs,
tarily set RAISE (14) switch to position and lock bolts extend. perform trouble analysis in accor-
RAISE. dance with Table 4-16 Fault 026
fault flow.
illuminated.
FAULT (5) and NO-GO (6)
indicators are extinguished.
28. If step 27 was successfully
accomplished, reaccomplish step
25, then proceed to step 29.
29. Return to maintenance being
accomplished.
7-13/(7-14 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 8
CHANGING LOCK COMBINATIONS
8.1 CHANGING LOCK COMBINATIONS.

8.1.1 Changing Security Pit Vault Door Lock Combination.
Electrical cable on security pit vault door shall not be stretched any more than necessary
when moving door. Vault door shall not be set down on cable or cable connector. Failure to
NOTE
The Security pit vault door weighs 166 pounds.
a. If necessary, set vault door on its side.
b. Turn bolt operating handle to extend vault door lock bolts.
NOTE
Step c requires dialing of the old combination by adding 8 digits to each number of the
combination. For example, if the old combination is 50-95-16, step c requires that the
numbers 58-3-24 be dialed.
c. Dial old combination as follows:
(1) Rotate dial counterclockwise four complete revolutions. After fourth revolution, continue turning dial counter-
clockwise until the first number, plus 8, is aligned with index mark on dial ring.
(2) Rotate dial clockwise two complete revolutions. After second revolution, continue clockwise until second number,
plus 8, is aligned with index mark.
(3) Rotate dial counterclockwise one complete revolution. After one revolution, continue counterclockwise until the
third number, plus 8, is aligned with index mark. Leave dial on this number.
d. Insert combination change key (Figure 8-1) into hole in cover. Ensure key bottoms in hole and guide on key is
inside cover. Turn key counterclockwise one-quarter turn until it stops. If change key was successfully inserted
with one-quarter turn, go to step e. If change key cannot be inserted, repeat step c. If change key cannot be in-
stalled after repeating step c, perform the following:
(1) Remove bottom cover (Figure 5-3, 23) by unscrewing four captive bolts (24).
(2) Remove two screws (Figure 5-4, 31) and wheel case cover (30) from wheel case (13).
(3) Rotate drop release plate (34) counterclockwise to gain access to wheel pack assemblies (20, 23).
(4) Line up change keyholes of wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) with change keyhole on bottom of wheel case.
(5) Rotate drop release plate clockwise to original position in step (3) and ensure it does not interfere with wheel case
cover.
(6) Ensure drop lever screw (Figure 5-4, 33) is tight.
(7) Install lock cover with two screws.
(8) Position gasket (Figure 5-3, 25, 26) on bottom cover (23).
(9) Install four captive bolts (24), fastening bottom cover to vault door.
(10) Insert combination change key into hole in cover. Ensure key bottoms in hole and guide on key is inside cover. Turn
key counterclockwise one-quarter turn until it stops.
8-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
• New combination shall be dialed accurately. If combination numbers are not aligned
exactly with index mark on dial ring, lockout will occur. If it is known that combination
numbers have not been exactly aligned with the index mark, abandon the attempt and start
over. Failure to comply could result in A-vault lockout.
• The new combination shall have numbers that are at least 8 digits apart. The third number
of the new combination shall be between 15 and 85. Failure to comply could result in an
insecurable A-vault
NOTE
Step e requires setting of new combination by adding 8 digits to each of the new
combination. For example, if the new combination is 10-20-30, step e requires that the
numbers 18-28-38 be dialed.
e. Dial new combination as follows:
f. Rotate combination change key clockwise one-quarter turn and remove key.
NOTE
In the following steps, the new combination without 8 digits added is verified.
g. Verify combination as follows:
clockwise until the first number is aligned with index mark on dial ring.
(2) Rotate dial clockwise two complete revolutions. After second revolution, continue clockwise until second number
is aligned with index mark.
third number is aligned with index mark. Next, rotate dial slowly clockwise past zero verifying the dial stops in the
vicinity of 90. Turn bolt operating handle to retract and extend lock bolts.
h. **NSP** Rotate dial counterclockwise at least four complete revolutions, stopping on the third number of the
new combination.
NOTE
If lock is found to be defective in step i, replace combination lock per Paragraph 5.2.2.2.
i. **NSP** Slowly rotate the dial clockwise, at least one revolution. If the dial binds or cannot be rotated at least
one complete revolution, notify Missile Maintenance Operations Center (MMOC).
j. Repeat step g two more times to verify combination.
k. [0] After verifying new combination three times, report to MMOC that combination has been changed and
verified.
8-2
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
8.1.2 Changing Secondary Door Lock Combination.

a. On Secondary Door Control Assembly (SDCA) front panel, set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to the MAINTE-
NANCE position. On SDCA front panel, green OPERATION (11) indicator extinguishes, yellow MAINTE-
NANCE (9) indicator illuminates, and 10-second intermittent audible alarm signals change of mode.
b. Using SDCA or LER-2 Electromechanical Actuator (EMA) jog switch, raise secondary door to facilitate
secondary door combination lock maintenance.
Performing maintenance under an insecure secondary door is hazardous. Ensure EMA

gearbox safety pin is engaged and system enters enhanced maintenance mode prior to
performing maintenance under the secondary door. Failure to comply could result in
NOTE
d. Open cover plate at bottom of door by loosening captive bolt and swinging cover aside.
e. Verify which of the two combination locks is unlocked by attempting to turn dial clockwise. If the lock is un-
locked, dial will not turn, or will turn slightly and a definite stop will be reached. In this procedure, the lock
which is now unlocked is referred to as lock number 1.
NOTE
• It is impossible to completely unlock both locks at the same time. Later in this procedure
when lock number 2 is fully unlocked, lock number 1 will be forced toward the locked
position.
• Step f requires dialing of the old combination by adding 8 digits to each number of the
combination. For example, if the old combination is 20-45-22, step f requires the numbers
28-53-30 be dialed.
f. Dial old combination on lock number 2 as follows:
g. Insert combination change key into hole in cover of combination lock number 2. Ensure key bottoms in hole and
guide on key is inside cover. Turn key counterclockwise one-quarter turn until it stops. If change key was suc-
cessfully inserted with one-quarter turn, go to step h. If change key cannot be inserted, repeat step f. If change
key still cannot be installed after repeating step f, perform the following:
(1) Remove two screws (Figure 5-4, 31) and wheel case cover (30) from wheel case (13).
(2) Rotate drop release plate (34) counterclockwise to gain access to wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) (20, 23).
(3) Line up change keyholes of wheel pack assemblies (tumblers) with change keyhole on bottom of wheel case.
(4) Rotate drop release plate clockwise to original position and ensure it does not interfere with wheel case cover.
Change 2 8-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
(5) Ensure drop lever screw (33) is tight.

(6) Install lock cover with two screws.
(7) Insert combination change key into hole in cover. ensure key bottoms in hole and that guide on key is inside cover.
Turn key counterclockwise one-quarter turn until it stops.
• New combination shall be dialed accurately. If combination numbers are not aligned
exactly with index mark on dial ring, lockout of lock number 2 will occur. If it is known
that combination numbers have not been exactly aligned with the index mark, abandon
the attempt and start over. Failure to comply could result in possible secondary door
lockout.
• The new combination shall have numbers that are at least 8 digits apart. The third number
of the new combination shall be between 15 and 85. Failure to comply could result in a
secondary door lockout.
NOTE
Step h requires setting of new combination by adding 8 digits to each number of the new
combination. For example, if the new combination is 10-20-30, step h requires the numbers
18-28-38 to be dialed.
h. Dial new combination on lock number 2 as follows:
i. Rotate combination change key clockwise about one-quarter turn and remove key.
NOTE
In the following steps, the new combination (without 8 digits added) is verified twice by
dialing only to the point where the lock is about to unlock. When the new combination is
dialed the third time, the dial is turned all the way to the unlocked position. As the dial
unlocks, the dial on the other lock should turn counterclockwise toward the locked position.
j. Verify new combination on lock number 2 as follows:
clockwise until first number is aligned with index mark on dial ring.
(2) Rotate dial clockwise two complete revolutions. After second revolution, continue clockwise until second number
is aligned with index mark.
third number is aligned with index mark. Next, rotate dial slowly clockwise past zero until feel indicates that lock
is just about to unlock (dial will turn harder and dial on lock number 1 will begin to move counterclockwise).
k. Rotate dial on lock number 1 back to full clockwise position and then repeat step h.
l. Rotate dial on lock number 1 back to full clockwise position and again repeat step h. Then continue to turn dial
clockwise until it stops turning and verify that dial stops in vicinity of 90. As lock number 2 unlocks, dial on lock
number 1 should revolve counterclockwise toward the locked position.
8-4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
m. Repeat procedure, starting with step d, for lock number 1.

n. **NSP** For both combination locks, perform the following:
(1) **NSP** Rotate dial counterclockwise at least four complete revolutions, stopping on the third number of the
combination.
NOTE
If lock is found to be defective in step (2), replace combination lock per Paragraph 5.7.1.3.
(2) **NSP** Slowly rotate the dial clockwise, at least one revolution. If the dial binds or cannot be rotated at least one
complete revolution, notify MMOC.
Lockout could occur. Should an unresolved problem still exist with either combination lock
at this time, the secondary door must not be locked in the raised position. Notify MMOC and
proceed as directed. Failure to comply could result in a lockout.
o. After first maintenance technician verifies new operational combination in each lock three times, authenticate
combination to Missile Combat Crew Commander (MCCC). After MCCC verifies combination, MCCC authenti-
cates combination to a second maintenance technician. Second technician repeats appropriate steps to verify both
locks three times.
Bottom plate emergency drive shaft hole is critical for access to manual drive guide. Ensure
desiccant bags are clear of emergency drive shaft hole. Failure to comply could result in
forced entry.
p. Install two desiccant (Table 2-2) bags. Position desiccant bags clear of emergency drive shaft port on secondary
door bottom plate to ensure bags do not interfere with emergency drive shaft operation.
q. Reposition cover plate at bottom of secondary door and secure with captive bolt.
r. On EMA gearbox assembly, disengage EMA gearbox safety pin in accordance with T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-10-( ).
s. Using EMA jog switch, reposition secondary door to lowered fully position, as required.
t. On SDCA front panel, set MODE (Figure 4-1, 10) switch to the OPERATION position. On SDCA front panel,
yellow MAINTENANCE (9) indicator extinguishes, green OPERATION (11) indicator illuminates, and 10-second
8-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 8-1. A-Vault and Secondary Door - Inserting Combination Change Key in Lock
8-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 9
DIAGRAMS
9.1 DIAGRAMS.
Diagrams and schematics pertaining to secondary door controls, secondary access system components, and controls are
contained in related foldouts. Diagrams and schematics shall be used in conjunction with secondary access system repair and
trouble analysis.
Schematics and Diagrams

Figure Title
Figure 9-1 [1][3][5] Secondary Access System Block Diagram
Figure 9-2 SDCA Back Panel (URD 10494A3) Terminal Board Schematics
Figure 9-3 SDCA (URD 10494) Cables W1 through W34 Schematics
Figure 9-4 Secondary Door IZ Loop Cable W3005 (BA22899A) Schematic
Figure 9-5 SDEA Cable W1 (BA22929A) Schematic
Figure 9-6 Secondary Door IZ Switchloop Wiring (BA22924) Schematic
Figure 9-7 SDEA Wiring Harness (BA22830) Schematic
Figure 9-8 Actuator Locking Bar (BA22888A) Schematic
Change 4 9-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-1. [1][3][5] Secondary Access System Block Diagram
9-2 Change 4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-2. SDCA Back Panel (URD 10494A3) Terminal Board Schematics (Sheet 1 of 5)
Change 4 9-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-2. SDCA Back Panel (URD 10494A3) Terminal Board Schematics (Sheet 2)
9-4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-3. SDCA (URD 10494) Cables W1 through W35 Schematics (Sheet 1 of 20)
9-8 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-3. SDCA (URD 10494) Cables W1 through W35 Schematics (Sheet 2)
Change 7 9-9
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-10 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-12 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-13
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-14 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-15
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-16 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-17
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-18 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-19
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-20 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-21
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-22 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-23
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-24 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-25
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
9-26 Change 7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Change 7 9-27
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-4. Secondary Door IZ Loop Cable W3005 (BA22899A) Schematic
9-28
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-5. SDEA Cable W1 (BA22929A) Schematic
9-29
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-6. Secondary Door IZ Switchloop Wiring (BA22924) Schematic
9-30
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-7. SDEA Wiring Harness (BA22830) Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 4 9-31
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-7. SDEA Wiring Harness (BA22830) Schematic (Sheet 2)
9-32
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 9-8. Actuator Locking Bar (BA22888A) Schematic
Change 4 9-33/(9-34 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
CHAPTER 10
FORCED-ENTRY PROCEDURES
10.1 FORCED-ENTRY PROCEDURES.

10.1.1 Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to provide information to gain access to the Launch Facility (LF) in the
case of a security pit lockout and to provide partial, nondestructive information to gain access in case of a secondary door
lockout when all normal procedures to manipulate the components of the system have failed. Force-entry procedures include
nondestructive and break-in procedures. If entry cannot be gained by nondestructive techniques, a security pit lockout requires
a vault door break-in, and a secondary door lockout requires a launcher closure break-in. Launcher closure break-in procedures
are contained in T.O. 35M37-4-12.
10.1.2 Use of Procedures. The procedures in this chapter are to be used only after all normal and manual procedures
have failed. nondestructive procedures are to be used prior to break-in procedures and experienced personnel should be used
to operate the equipment and in particular the combination locks. Only after exhausting all possible, alternate, nondestructive
methods, should the break-in procedures be followed. The break-in procedures have been prepared to result in the least amount
of damage to components and thus permit returning the equipment to the original configuration quickly. Do not use any other
method of entering unless the necessity for gaining immediate entry outweighs the resultant damage to the components of the
system.
10.1.3 Tools. Tools required for vault door break-in are listed in Table 10-1.
10-1
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Table 10-1. Tools Required for Vault Door Forced Entry
A/N Type Designation/Model No.

Nomenclature National Stock No. Use and Application
Cobalt steel jobbers drill bit, 1 ⁄ 2 inch, NAS907, Type J Drill through vault door.
6-inches long (6 each)
Cutting oil (1 quart) Local purchase Aid drilling through vault door.
Drill template Locally fabricated (FO-8) Support magnetic drill press and
guide drills when drilling vault
door.
Extension cord (3 wire), 70-foot Local purchase Provide power at security pit from
Launcher Support Building (LSB)
or Launcher Equipment Building
(LEB).
Extra long-series, 12-inch, HSS drill bit (12 5133-00-203-6468 Drill vault door. Alternate to
each) 6-inch long steel jobbers drill.
Goggles, impact ⁄ chemical resistant Local purchase Protect eyes when drilling.
Lock bolt retractor (3 each) Locally fabricated (Figure 10-3) Retract lock bolts for bolt oper-
ating handle problem.
Long-series, 3 ⁄ 16-inch, HSS drill bit (3 each) 5133-00-236-4048 Drill vault door.
Long-shaft, 1-inch, HSS drill bit (6 each) 5133-00-233-6393 Drill vault door for bolt operating
handle problem.
Long-shaft punch Local purchase Drive drilled components free of
vault door.
Magnetic drill press Local purchase Support and feed electric drill
when drilling.
Oiler 4930-00-262-8870 Apply cutting oil.
Portable, heavy-duty electric drill (1 ⁄ 2-inch 5130-00-889-9004 Drill through vault door.
capacity)
Portable heavy-duty electric drill (1-inch 5130-00-293-0959 Drill through vault door.
capacity)
Scarfing tip Victor No. 4 Cut vault door.
10-2
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
10.2 NONDESTRUCTIVE PROCEDURES.

10.2.1 Manipulation. Ensure all normal and alternate opening procedures have been followed in applicable Technical
Orders (T.O.s).
During attempts to manipulate locks and bolts of the vault door and secondary door, do not
attempt to multiply by mechanical means the force normally available to turn the bolt
actuating handle. If the handle will not move with normal force, using excessive force will
only cause additional damage. Damage to components will not only make a break-in
mandatory, but will also result in additional and needless repairs. If the outside ambient
temperature is known to be below freezing, icing internal to the lock should be suspected of
causing either a binding dial, a binding actuating handle, or floating tumblers. No attempt
should be made to open the lock until the lock has been thawed. The portable heater provides
a quick means for thawing the lock. A locked-out A-vault that has been thawed and opened
shall not be reused until it has been thoroughly cleaned, dried, and inspected internally.
Failure to comply will result in the recurrence of the problem.
NOTE
• Maintenance personnel shall have access to the security pit vault door or secondary door
combination and, from the Missile Alert Facility (MAF) combination listing, three
combinations above and below the combination supposed to be in the lock. Also, if a
computer run is to be used, wing maintenance personnel at the Missile Support Base
(MSB) shall have access to these combinations prior to a maintenance dispatch. These
combinations will be obtained in accordance with AFSPCI 31-1101.
• If any of the vault door combinations called for are active combinations in unmanned LF,
it will be necessary to have the security escort obtain and dial these combinations in order
to comply with security requirements.
10.2.1.1 Secondary Door and A-Vault Combination Locks. When a combination lock will not operate, manipulating
the lock could eliminate the need for a break-in. If time permits, Missile Maintenance Operations Center (MMOC) should
request a combination computer listing for Electromechanical Team (EMT) to use during attempts to dial open the lock. The
computer listing duplicates steps b through p and lists the trial combinations.
Jamming of combination lock is possible. Before attempting to unlock vault door, turn bolt
operating handle as far as it will go counterclockwise. Failure to comply could result in
equipment damage.
a. For A-vault door, turn bolt operating handle counterclockwise as far as it will go, then dial combination supposed
to be in lock using normal procedures except stop after setting third number. After setting third number, turn dial
clockwise to zero and rap the top of the vault door using a 16-ounce hammer and gently tap the top of dial knob
with a plastic-faced mallet weighing not over 8 ounces before continuing dialing clockwise to retract bolt.
NOTE
• Follow a plan when performing this procedure. Haphazard attempts cause needless
repetition and omissions. A computerized lockout run may be used when performing this
procedure.
• Computerized lockout run is classified SECRET and must be controlled. After use,
immediately return lockout run to MMOC for disposal.
b. Dial combination supposed to be in lock.
c. Dial combination supposed to be in lock, using reversed dialing directions (clockwise, counterclockwise, clock-
wise). After the last digit, turn dial counterclockwise to zero and stop, allowing the lock bolt lever to engage the
lock driver, then turn clockwise to unlock as normal.
10-3
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
d. Dial combination supposed to be in lock with the following modifications:

(1) Add eight digits to each number according to the following sequence:
Trial First Number Second Number Third Number

1 +8
2 +8 +8
3 +8 +8
4 +8 +8 +8
5 +8
6 +8 +8
7 +8
(2) Subtract eight digits from each number in sequence using same pattern as in step (1).
(3) Add and then subtract 10 digits from each number in sequence using the same pattern as in step (1).
(4) Add and then subtract one-half from each number in sequence using the same pattern as in step (1).
(5) Add and then subtract one digit from each number in sequence using the same pattern as in step (1).
e. Dial combination supposed to be in lock, but change number of turns between each combination number as
follows:
Normal Turns: 4-3-2

Try: 4-4-3; 4-4-2; 4-4-1; 4-3-4; 4-3-1; 4-2-3; 4-2-2; 4-2-1; 4-1-2; 4-1-1; 4-3-3
f. Standard factory combination: 50-50-50.
g. Fifty added to each number of factory combination: 0-0-0.
h. Maintenance test combination: 25-50-25 (or other local test combinations).
i. Dial numbers of combination supposed to be in lock in different order:
Normal Order: 1-2-3

Try: 2-3-1; 3-1-2; 1-3-2; 2-1-3; 3-2-1
j. Use only two numbers of combination supposed to be in lock. After dialing second number, turn dial counter-
clockwise to zero, then clockwise to unlock.
Normal Turns: 1-2-3

Try: 2-3; 3-1; 1-3; 2-1; 3-2
NOTE
Security forces will perform steps k through m.
k. Obtain all other possible combinations available at the MAF.
l. Obtain all combinations set by strike team on day combination was set into lock.
m. Dial three combinations on the combination register above and below the combination supposed to be installed in
their entirety.
10-4
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
n. Replace digits with numbers that when viewed on a MEEDs unit or combination register, are physically similar:
Example Try
23-57-68 73-57-68
23-51-68 23-52-68
73-52-68
o. Using sequence in step d, add and subtract numbers 2 through 7, 9, 11 through 21, and 50.
p. Mix numbers of combination supposed to be in lock with numbers of combinations just above and below it on
the combination register.
Example of Combinations on Register

49-73-61 (Combination above)
16-27-38 (Installed combination)
81-29-53 (Combination below)
Try
16-27-61
16-73-38
16-73-61
49-27-38
49-73-38
and so on
q. Inform Flight Security Controller (FSC) to delete all combinations on combination register that were passed to the
maintenance team in accordance with AFSPCI 31-1101.
10.3 BREAK-IN PROCEDURES.

10.3.1 Security Pit Lockout. Method of entry into security pit depends upon cause of lockout. If lockout was caused by
sheared dial shaft, perform Paragraph 10.3.1.1 to reengage shaft. If combination lock will not unlock and release bolt operating
handle because of unknown combination or faulty lock, perform Paragraph 10.3.1.2 to disengage lock. If combination lock
can be unlocked but bolt operating handle cannot retract locking bolts, perform Paragraph 10.3.1.3. If during the performance
of operations outlined in Paragraph 10.3.1.1 and Paragraph 10.3.1.2, a problem develops (such as a broken drill bit) which
stops the procedure with no possibility of continuing, then perform Paragraph 10.3.1.4.
10.3.1.1 Sheared Dial Shaft. When a vault door dial shaft breaks off just above the scrambler, make the following
temporary repair in order to operate the lock:
a. Make a punch of 1 ⁄ 8-inch drill rod (Figure 10-1).
10-5
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Hammering on punch is hazardous. Wear approved eye protection. Failure to comply could
If both keys are driven out completely, this procedure will not work since the shaft will be
disconnected from the scrambler device.
b. Using punch, drive two keys attaching bottom of broken shaft to scrambler driver down approximately 0.15-inch
in keyways, as limited by shoulder on tool.
c. Mill broken end of dial shaft using keyway runouts as guides (Figure 10-1) and rivet finger plate in place.
d. Insert modified dial shaft in hole in vault door, placing fingers into keyways provided by driving keys part way
out.
NOTE
The combination may be 180 degrees out of position. A partial check for position is to listen
carefully for closing and opening of scramble switch as scramble number is passed or by
noting momentary change in dial turning torque as dial is turned past zero.
e. Dial combination.
f. Replace vault door.
10.3.1.2 Inoperative Combination Lock. Use this procedure when vault door combination is unknown or any time
combination lock will not release bolt operating handle. If dial cannot be rotated and all attempts to free the frozen or immobile
vault door dial shaft fail, apply force in an attempt to loosen the dial shaft prior to performing the following drilling
procedures.
NOTE
• The vault door drill template used in this procedure is to be manufactured locally
according to details given in FO-8.
• The following steps shall not be used on the secondary door.
a. Remove eight screws (Figure 10-2, 7) and lockwashers (8) and remove both lifting handles (9) from vault door.
NOTE
If serial number is unreadable or unavailable when installing the four pedestals, select holes
designated as holes A or B, whichever will center hole C directly over the dial spindle shaft.
b. Install four pedestals (6) in holes vacated by handle screws. For vault doors S ⁄ N DDD0001 through DDD0371,
four holes farthest from center of vault door are to be used and are designated as holes A on drill template. For
vault doors with S ⁄ N DDD0372 and on, four holes closest to center are to be used and designated as holes B on
drill template.
c. Ensure hole marked C (FO-8) is centered over dial by placing a 1 ⁄ 2-inch drill bit in hole marked C. If not, ped-
estals must be moved and template reinstalled so that hole marked C is centered over dial.
d. Secure dial knob with vise grip pliers to prevent dial from rotating when drilled.
e. Place drill template (Figure 10-2, 4) on four pedestals with the end marked WEATHER COVER HINGE SIDE
towards hinge with fouling bar (1) up. Install four washers (3) and nuts (2).
f. Connect long extension cord to support building for power to operate electric drill.
g. Position magnetic drill press on drill template and locate at hole marked C (FO-8).
10-6
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
• Asbestos dust and fibers are toxic and hazardous. Wear approved respiratory, eye and
hand protection, and exposed skin covering, when required by Bioenvironmental
Engineering (BEE) requirements. Ventilation or containment shall be identified by base
plan or BEE. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
• Cutting oil is flammable and hazardous. Wear approved eye, hand and skin protection and
use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
Drill bit generates excessive heat. Ensure dial shaft is held firmly while drilling. Ample
cutting oil must be used when drilling. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.
NOTE
• The security pit vault door contains an asbestos insulator.
• In some cases, it is possible to drill down to shoulder on spindle shaft (1-1 ⁄ 2 to 1-3 ⁄ 4
inches of drilling) before dial flange comes loose. Omit step i in such cases.
h. Drill through template hole marked C with 1 ⁄ 2-inch drill bit until dial flange comes loose. This requires 1- to
1-1 ⁄ 4 inches of drilling.
i. Remove drill press and template from four pedestals.
j. Remove dial flange.
k. Secure dial spindle with vise grip pliers to prevent spindle from rotating when drilled.
l. Reinstall drill template on pedestals.
m. Continue drilling dial spindle (hole C) with 1 ⁄ 2-inch drill bit down to shoulder on shaft (approximately 1 ⁄ 2
inch).
NOTE
If vault door surface does not allow drill press to set properly, complete M holes using
template and long series 1 ⁄ 2-inch drill bits.
n. Drill a hole 4-1 ⁄ 4 inches deep at each of four template holes marked M using 1 ⁄ 2-inch drill bit. If 6-inch long
cobalt drill bits are used, drill each 1 ⁄ 2-inch hole as deep as possible using drill template, then remove template
and complete holes with magnetic drill press mounted directly on top of vault door.
o. Remove drill, drill template, and pedestals from top of vault door.
p. Turn bolt operating handle (Figure 10-2, 11) to retract vault door lock bolts.
q. If bolt operating handle cannot be turned in step p, perform the following steps as applicable.
(1) Insert long punch in each of four M holes and drive retaining bolts free.
(2) If one or more lock mounting bolts cannot be punched down, mount magnetic drill press directly on top of vault
door and drill out missing bolts using larger (1-inch maximum) drill bit.
(3) Insert punch in hole nearest bolt operating handle and push down on punch while turning handle.
(4) If bolt operating handle still cannot be turned, install punch in hole marked C and push down while turning handle.
(5) If bolt operating handle still cannot be turned and it is verified all four mounting bolts and the dial shaft have
dropped, apply increasing torque to handle in clockwise direction in an effort to break lock loose. If handle shaft
shears before lock bolts retract, refer to Paragraph 10.3.1.3.
r. Install both lifting handles on vault door and remove vault door from security pit.
10-7
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
10.3.1.3 Inoperative Bolt Operating Handle. Use this procedure when combination lock can be unlocked but bolt
operating handle will not retract lock bolts.
NOTE
The vault door drill template used in this procedure is to be manufactured locally using
details given in FO-8. The three lock bolt retractors used in this procedure are to be locally
manufactured using details given in Figure 10-3.
a. If bolt operating handle shaft is sheared off down in door, proceed with step d to manually retract lock bolts.
b. If bolt operating handle (Figure 10-2, 11) is intact but will not retract lock bolts with combination lock either
unlocked or unattached, apply increasing torque to handle in clockwise direction in an effort to break lock mecha-
nism free. Torque handle until bolts are withdrawn or until shaft shears. If shaft shears above door, proceed with
step c. If shaft shears down in door, proceed with step d to manually retract lock bolts.
c. If bolt operating handle is sheared off with shaft above vault door, apply as much torque to shaft as possible with
suitable hand tool in an effort to retract lock bolts. If unsuccessful, cut shaft flush with top of door and drill
through packing flange on upper end of shaft with a 1 ⁄ 2-inch drill bit to a depth of 1 ⁄ 2 inch. Continue with step
d to manually retract lock bolts.
d. Insert long punch in bolt operating handle hole and drive remainder of shaft down as far as it will go. If lock bolt
cam cannot be driven down far enough to release three lock bolts, perform Paragraph 10.3.1.2, steps a through o
to free combination lock assembly.
e. Remove both lifting handles (Figure 10-2, 9), if installed, and install four pedestals (6) in holes vacated by handle
screws. For vault doors S/N DDD0001 through DDD0371, four holes furthest from center of vault door are to be
used and are designated as holes A on drill template (FO-8). For vault doors with S/N DDD0372 and on, four
holes closet to center are to be used and are designed as holes B.
f. Place drill template (Figure 10-2, 4) on four pedestals with the end marked WEATHER COVER HINGE SIDE
towards hinge with fouling bar (1) up. Install four washers (3) and nuts (2).
g. Position magnetic drill press on drill template and locate at first of three template holes marked K (FO-8).
hand protection, and exposed skin covering, when required by base BEE requirements.
Ventilation or containment shall be identified by base plan or BEE. Failure to comply
• Cutting oil is flammable and hazardous. Wear approved eye, hand and skin protection and
use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel injury.
Drill bit generates excessive heat. Ample cutting oil shall be used when drilling. Failure to
NOTE
The security pit vault door contains an asbestos insulator.
h. With long shaft, 1-inch drill bit, make a hole 5-3 ⁄ 32 (±1 ⁄ 32) inches deep at each of three template holes marked
K.
i. Remove all equipment from vault door.
j. Install vault door lifting handles.
10-8
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
NOTE
Two different lock bolt retractors can be locally manufactured. The second style is optional.
If using the tool in Figure 10-3, proceed with steps k through m. If using the optional tool
in Figure 10-3, proceed to steps n and o.
k. Maneuver one of three lock bolt retractors (Figure 10-3) in 1-inch hole so hook on tool engages lug that protrudes
downward from inner end of lock bolt shaft. Apply an upward and outward force on retractor handle to extract
lock bolt from security pit wall. Hold tool in place after retraction.
l. Repeat step k for each of two remaining lock bolts, holding lock bolt back after retracting.
m. With lock bolts held in retracted position, lift vault door out of security pit.
n. Install lock bolt retractor (Figure 10-3) as follows:
(1) Loosen setscrew on lock bolt retractor so C-clamp is fully open with setscrew still installed.
(2) Separate allen wrench from C-clamp on lock bolt retractor.
NOTE
C-clamp can be swiveled to accommodate the best possible angle.
(3) Maneuver one of three lock bolt retractors in 1-inch hole so C-clamp is behind lug that protrudes downward from
inner end of lock bolt shaft and completely over lock bolt.
(4) Maneuver allen wrench so setscrew can be tightened completely on lock bolt.
(5) Remove allen wrench from setscrew on lock bolt retractor.
(6) Repeat steps (1) through (5) for the two remaining lock bolts.
o. Apply an outward force from center of vault door on all three lock bolt retractors to retract lock bolt from
security pit wall.
10.3.1.4 Torching Vault Doors. If a problem is encountered during drilling operations and the operating handle is intact
and functional, perform steps a through l. If the technician was unable to remove the vault door using the procedures for an
inoperative bolt operating handle, perform steps m through u.
a. Using a clean cloth, wipe off excess oil and filings. Record serial number.
• Compressed acetylene is flammable and hazardous. Ensure approved cylinder handling
and welding/brazing procedures are followed. Wear approved eye, hand and skin
protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury.
• Compressed oxygen vigorously accelerates combustion and is hazardous. Ensure
approved cylinder handling and welding ⁄ brazing procedures are followed. Wear
approved eye, hand and skin protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Do not use
compressed oxygen to dry or blow dust off of clothes or gloves. Failure to comply could
NOTE
• The security pit vault door contains an asbestos insulator. Ensure base BEE has been
notified.
• The No. 4 scarfing tip will be used for all cutting operations. Welder must be thoroughly
familiar with the use of a scarfing tip. On early model doors having the round housing
welded to the top of the lid, cut around the base of this housing and remove.
b. Use a Victor No. 4 scarfing tip or equivalent, with a highly oxidizing flame to burn off the remaining oil and
paint in the area to be cut (Figure 10-4).
10-9
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
c. Mark the areas to be cut with a soapstone. Mark a 4-inch-diameter circle (torch cut line) around the top of the lid
1-3 ⁄ 8 inches from the top outside edge. Draw two parallel lines approximately 1-1 ⁄ 2 inches apart from the
4-inch-diameter circle to the outside circle (torch cut line) on the opposite side of the lid from the dial shaft hole.
NOTE
The 4-inch-diameter circle and the area between the parallel lines will remain with the door
after the cut is finished and the lid removed. The object of this strip is to support the operating
handle, thus maintaining cam control over the side bolts. The removed lid will not be used
when the vault door is rebuilt.
d. With the cutting torch, begin to cut at the base of the parallel line (next to the 4-inch circle), up to and around the
outside of the 4-inch circle, down the other leg of the parallel line, back to the outside circle. Cut around the out-
side circle line leaving the line visible on the outer lip of the lid. Do not cut the 1-1 ⁄ 2 inches of outside circle
located between the parallel lines.
e. If not previously accomplished, remove dial shaft with torch then remove the lid.
NOTE
During the cutting operations avoid damage to the center pipe (operating handle pipe). This
operating handle must remain intact for the remainder of this procedure. Should damage to
operating handle occur that renders it inoperable, continue with step q.
f. Break up and remove the large carbon. Torch off half of the exposed dial shaft pipe.
g. Lift exposed copper plate up and over the stub of the dial shaft pipe, rotate slightly, and let it rest on the pipe.
Cut from the edge of the copper plate to the side of the center hole. Make two more similar cuts to form one-
third sections. Remove the three pieces.
h. Break up and remove small carbon to expose detector assembly.
i. Lift the detector up and over the stub of the dial shaft pipe, rotate slightly, then let it rest on the pipe. Now cut
away the four screws, rotating detector, as needed. This action will separate the parts to be cut away. Make cuts
from the side of the center hole to the outside edge, again cutting parts into thirds. The gasket sandwiched be-
tween the plates of the detector assembly can be torn and removed with pliers. Continue until all pieces of the
detector assembly have been removed.
j. The remaining insulator gasket is the final piece to be removed. It can be torn out with a combination of chisel
and pliers.
NOTE
The remaining insulator gasket is the final piece to be removed. It can be torn out with a
combination of chisel and pliers.
k. The bottom of the bolt(s) securing the lock assembly are now visible. Using the torch, cut around the thread line
of the bolts that are still functionally securing the lock assembly. The threaded areas are 1 ⁄ 2-inch thick. After all
the bolts have been cut away, the lock assembly should drop, freeing the cam. A punch may be required to drive
the lock down if the slag has caused it to hang up.
l. Turn the operating handle and remove the door.
m. Using a clean cloth, wipe off excess oil and filings. Record serial number.
10-10
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
• Compressed acetylene is flammable and hazardous. Ensure approved cylinder handling
and welding/brazing procedures are followed. Wear approved eye, hand and skin
protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Failure to comply could result in personnel
injury.
• Compressed oxygen vigorously accelerates combustion and is hazardous. Ensure
approved cylinder handling and welding ⁄ brazing procedures are followed. Wear
approved eye, hand and skin protection and use in a well-ventilated area. Do not use
compressed oxygen to dry or blow dust off of clothes or gloves. Failure to comply could
NOTE
• The security pit vault door contains an asbestos insulator.
• The No. 4 scarfing tip will be used for all the cutting operations. Welder must be
thoroughly familiar with the use of a scarfing tip. On early model doors having the round
housing welded to the top of the lid, cut around the base of this housing and remove.
n. Use a Victor No. 4 scarfing tip, or equivalent, with a highly oxidizing flame to burn off the remaining oil and
paint in the area to be cut. (See Figure 10-4.)
o. Using a soapstone, draw a circle (torch cut line) around the entire top of the lid 1-3 ⁄ 8 inches from the top out-
side edge to include the area between the 1-1 ⁄ 2-inch parallel lines. (See Figure 10-4.)
NOTE
The dial shaft will hold the lid in place and must be removed prior to lid removal. The
removed lid will not be used when the vault door is rebuilt.
p. If not previously accomplished, remove drill by drilling or cutting. Cut a circle, approximately 1-1 ⁄ 2 inches
around the operating handle to release lid from vault door. Cut around outside circle line leaving the line visible
on the outer lip of the lid. Remove the lid.
q. Torch off any or all exposed dial shaft or operating handle pipes, as necessary, to facilitate removal of vault door
contents.
r. Remove carbon disks, copper plate, detector plate, and insulator gasket from vault door. Break up items, as neces-
sary, to facilitate removal using a hammer, chisel, or other suitable tool.
s. If three 1-inch holes were drilled around operating handle, again attempt to retract lock bolts and remove vault
door. If required, enlarge these holes, as necessary, to gain access to retract lock bolts.
t. If three 1-inch holes have not been drilled in vault door, cut holes in the bottom of the vault door. Use drill tem-
plate as a guide and burn three holes in area of hole marked K on template to access lock bolts.
u. Retract and hold all lock bolts and remove vault door from security pit.
10-11
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 10-1. Temporary Dial Shaft Repair
10-12
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 10-2. Drill Template Installation
10-13
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 10-3. Lock Bolt Retractor (Sheet 1 of 2)
10-14
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 10-3. Lock Bolt Retractor (Sheet 2)
10-15
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
Figure 10-4. Template Pattern for Torching Vault Doors
10-16
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FO-1. [1] Secondary Access System Schematic

(Sheet 1 of 6)
FP-1/(FP-2 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 2)
Change 4 FP-3/(FP-4 blank)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 3)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 4)
FP-7/(FP-8 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 5)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 6)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 1 of 6)
FP-13/(FP-14 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 2)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 3)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 4)
FP-19/(FP-20 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 5)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 6)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 1 of 6)
FP-25/(FP-26 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 2)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 3)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 4)
FP-31/(FP-32 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 5)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 6)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FO-4. SDCA (URD 10494) Interconnectivity Diagram

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FO-5. SDCA Front Panel (URD 10494A1) Controls and Indicators Schematic
FP-39/(FP-40 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FO-6. MDC (URD 10496) Schematic

(Sheet 1 of 4)

T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 2)
FP-43/(FP-44 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 3)
FP-45/(FP-46 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19

(Sheet 4)
FP-47/(FP-48 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FO-7. Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Schematic

(Sheet 1 of 2)
FP-49/(FP-50 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FO-7. Secondary Door J-Box (URD 10499) Schematic

(Sheet 2)
FP-51/(FP-52 blank)
T.O. 21M-LGM30G-2-19
FO-8. Drill Template (25-43129)
FP-53/(FP-54 blank)

21M LGM30G 2 19 - Thru - C11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

21M LGM30G 2 19 - Thru - C11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

For Use in Red-lining

THIS MANUAL CONTAINS UNVERIFIED PROCEDURES. REFER TO

LAUNCH FACILITY PERSONNEL ACCESS SYSTEMS

WINGS 0, I, III AND V

Published under authority of the Secretary of the Air Force

2 FEBRUARY 2007 CHANGE 11 19 NOVEMBER 2008

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Original . . . . . . . . .0. . . . . .2 February 2007 Change . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . 23 April 2008

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 602 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page *Change Page *Change Page *Change

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-138 - 4-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

5-71 - 5-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5-167 - 5-168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FP-20 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

LIST OF DATA TO BE VERIFIED

Requirements Unverified for Requirements Unverified for

ALL OTHER APPROVED VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN

Change 5 VS - 1/(VS - 2 blank)

LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

2 TOOLS AND MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

4 CHECKOUT AND TROUBLE ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

5 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

5.2.2.6 Spindle Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

5.8.3.2 Motor Drive Cabinet Post-Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

7 ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

7.1.3 EMA Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Change 6 iv.1/(iv.2 blank)

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

7.1.4 Actuator Locking Bar Switch Adjustment (PN BA22888A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

8 CHANGING LOCK COMBINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

10 FORCED-ENTRY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Number Title Page

1-1 LF Personnel Access System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-2

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued

Number Title Page

5-27 MDC and ESS Belly Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126

Number Title Page

1-1 Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

[0] - Vandenberg Air Force Base

NUCLEAR SURETY PROCEDURES.

[NSL] - Nuclear Surety Limitation as identified by HQ AFSC ⁄ SEW

NUCLEAR SURETY CODING.

TECHNICAL ORDER CHANGES.

RFI GASKET INSPECTION.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR MATING.

ACCESS SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.

PRIMARY DOOR SAFETY BARRIER.

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY.

BONDING AND GROUNDING.

Abbreviations ⁄ Acronyms - Continued

ESS Energy Storage System (see FPS, VSS-120)

Abbreviations ⁄ Acronyms - Continued

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

Change 4 xiv.1/(xiv.2 blank)

Abbreviations ⁄ Acronyms - Continued

NSP Nuclear Surety Procedures

Abbreviations ⁄ Acronyms - Continued

Page Change Page Change Page *Change